Charles    Josselyn 


fijistorg  emir  flower  of  Jttino 


BY 
RICHARD  INGALESE 


Fourth  Edition 


THE  OCCULT  BOOK  CONCERN 

Publishers 

9  to  15  Murray  Street 
New  York  City 


COPYRIGHT,  1902 
BY  RICHARD  INGALESE 

COPYRIGHT,  1903 

BY  RICHARD  INGALESE 

COPYRIGHT,  1905 
BY  RICHARD  INGALESE 


JOHN  B.  WATKINS  COMPANY 

PRINTERS 
NEW  YORK  CITY 


DEDICATED  TO 
MY  WIFE 

WHO    WAS    MY    INSPIRATION    AND    CO-WORKER     IN    THE 

PREPARATION,   DELIVERY   AND  COMPILATION 

OF  THESE   LECTURES. 


615739 


"Unto  you  it  is  given  to  know  the  mysteries 
of  the  kingdom  of  God :  but  to  others  in  par- 
ables ;  that  seeing-  they  might  not  see,  and  hear- 
ing they  might  not  understand." 


PREFACE. 


rPHIS  BOOK  is  made  up  from  personal  notes  and 
JL  stenographic  reports  of  lectures  delivered  in  New 
York  City  during  the  seasons  of  1900-1901-1902,  with 
the  addition  of  some  new  matter  in  the  form  of  ampli- 
fications. The  compilation  is  made  at  the  request  of  my 
students  and  is  published  primarily  for  their  benefit. 
The  material  is  left  in  the  form  in  which  it  was  deliv- 
ered, and  the  photograph  of  the  author  is  inserted,  also 
at  their  request. 

The  book  may  not  appeal  to  the  orthodox  religionist 
nor  to  the  materialist ;  but  may  prove  interesting,  if  not 
enlightening,  to  the  agnostic  and  to  the  investigator  of 
either  psychic  phenomena,  or  the  phenomena  of  mental 
therapeutics. 

The  modern  teachings  of  the  Science  of  Mind  have 
not  appealed  to  many  thinkers  because  of  the  vagueness 
of  thought  and  expression  of  the  majority  of  those  who 
attempt  to  present  it ;  and  also  because  of  the  lack  of  a 
working  hypothesis  needed  to  explain  the  law  under 
which  both  psychic  and  mental  phenomena  occur.  This 
book  is  an  attempt  toward  supplying  the  latter  defi- 
ciency by  stating  laws  under  which  Mind  evolves  and 
operates. 

The  author  does  not  claim  any  original  research  or 
discoveries  along  these  lines,  having  had  the  matter 


herein  contained  given  to  him  in  the  course  of  his 
study,  under  trained  minds  who  had  verified  these  facts 
for  themselves  and  who  required  him  to  do  the  same. 

The  Occult  forces  of  nature  and  their  modes  of 
manifestation  have  been  known  for  ages  to  certain 
secret  orders  which  have  not  deemed  it  wise  heretofore 
to  give  their  knowledge  to  the  world.  This  age,  how- 
ever, seems,  in  their  judgment,  propitious  for  the 
wider  spread  of  such  knowledge  both  because  many  in- 
dependent investigators  are  discovering  for  themselves 
something  about  these  forces  and,  in  their  ignorance, 
are  perverting  the  use  of  them — as  witness  hypnotism 
— and  because  the  advanced  men  of  the  race  have 
reached  a  point  where  they  are  desirous  of  this  knowl- 
edge, and  every  mental  demand  brings  its  supply. 

"THE  HISTORY  AND  POWER  OF  MIND/'  was  selected 
for  a  title  because  the  history  of  mind  is  the  history  of 
man;  and  these  lectures  first  trace  mind,  or  psychic 
man's,  origin  and  development,  and  then  describe  the 
power  of  mind  and  its  modes  of  manifestation. 

It  may  not  be  amiss  to  state  in  conclusion  that  the 
book  is  not  written  for  the  purpose  of  propagandism. 
Something  of  the  operation  of  Nature's  Laws  is  de- 
scribed in  these  lectures,  and  the  acceptance  or  rejection 
of  the  statements  made  will  not  change  the  Laws  nor 
affect  the  author.  R.  I. 


New  York  City,  October  ist,  1902. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

Preface 

I — Occultism :  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future  1 1 

II — Divine  Mind  :  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation  31 

III— Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin           .            .  52 

IV— The  Art  of  Self-Control         .            .  .78 

V— The  Law  of  Re-embodiment        .            .  100 

VI— Colors  of  Thought  Vibration             .  .120 

VII — Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration  144 

VIII — Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their 

Dangers  .  .  .  .168 

IX — Hypnotism  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It  189 

X — Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their 

Uses  ....         219 

XI— The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease        .  .    239 

XII— The  Law  of  Opulence      .  .  .259 


THE  HISTORY  AND  POWER  OF  MIND. 


LECTURE  ONE. 


OCCULTISM,  ITS  PAST,  PRESENT  AND 
FUTURE. 

To  many  persons  the  subjects  discussed  in  these 
lectures  may  appear  preposterous,  and  therefore 
those  of  you  who  have  not  studied  along  metaphysi- 
cal lines  are  requested  to  hold  yourselves  agnosti- 
cally  until  this  entire  course  shall  be  finished.  You 
do  not  know  whether  Occultism  is  true  or  not ;  you 
are  now  ready  to  examine  the  subject  and,  after 
having  heard  the  entire  exposition,  you  will  be  in  a 
position  to  judge  whether  it  offers  a  logical,  working 
hypothesis,  and  whether  it  is  worthy  to  receive  more 
of  your  time  and  consideration.  If  it  is  true  it  can 
be  demonstrated,  for  truth  is  always  demonstrable. 
You  can  prove  by  demonstration  each  of  the  funda- 
mental statements  that  will  be  made,  as  you  can 
prove  a  proposition  in  mathematics.  When  I  say 
truth  is  demonstrable,  do  not  understand  me  to  mean 
that  it  is  capable  of  being  demonstrated  imme- 
diately upon  hearing  it.  Everything  must  unfold. 
You  cannot  raise  your  body  on  a  horizontal  bar  the 
first  time  you  try  because  your  muscles  are  not 
strong  enough ;  but  after  your  muscles  have  become 
strengthened  by  practice  you  may  be  capable  of 
raising  your  body  to  any  position  you  desire.  So  it 
is  with  a  person  who  has  never  used  his  mind  in 


12  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

scientific  reasoning  or  in  concentration.  He  should 
not  flatter  himself  that  he  can  immediately  accom- 
plish what  a  person  who  has  practiced  for  many 
years  can  do.  If  you  use  your  mind  along  the  lines 
indicated  in  these  lectures  you  will  find  that  there 
will  be  a  continuous  growth  for  you,  and  that  the 
time  will  come  when  you  can  do  anything  that  you 
desire.  A  very  large  promise,  you  may  say,  but  if  it 
is  true  I  assure  you  it  is  demonstrable. 

Our  first  subject  is  "Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present 
and  Future."  This  is  an  introductory  lecture,  giving 
something  of  the  history  of  Occultism  and  of  the 
Occultists  in  order  that  we  may  know  the  source 
from  which  our  information  is  derived. 

The  Century  Dictionary  gives  the  definition  of 
Occultism  as:  "The  doctrine,  practice  or  rites  of 
things  occult  or  mysterious ;  the  Occult  Sciences  or 
their  study ;  mysticism ;  esotericism."  In  the  middle 
ages  Occult  Science  or  Occultism  embraced  pri- 
marily what  is  now  known  as  the  physical  sciences. 
It  was  understood  to  mean  those  things  which  were 
unknown,  but  which  by  experimentation  might 
become  known.  Chemistry,  as  a  branch  of  Alchemy, 
was  regarded  as  one  of  the  Occult  Sciences  because 
it  was  largely  unknown,  but  through  investigation 
and  experimentation  it  constantly  became  better 
known.  But  Occultism  also  had  a  secondary  mean- 
ing which  was  coupled  with  the  first,  namely,  mysti- 
cism, esotericism.  In  ancient  days  people  thought 
it  not  unwise  to  attempt  the  discovery  of  the  un- 
known through  experimentation  with  the  subjec- 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       13 

tive  as  well  as  the  objective  side  of  nature,  and  the 
two  meanings,  that  which  pertained  to  the  objective, 
which  was  unknown  but  could  be  ascertained,  and 
that  which  pertained  to  the  subjective,  which  was 
unknown  but  could  be  ascertained,  were  both  in- 
cluded in  the  term  Occultism. 

Materialism  as  it  grew  in  strength  called  the 
unknown  (which  was  becoming  known  on  the 
objective  or  visible  side  of  life)  "Science,"  but 
stamped  the  belief  in  or  the  investigation  of  the 
subjective  side  of  life  as  "superstition."  And  most 
people  became  very  much  afraid  of  that  word,  and 
became  afraid  of  being  known  as  superstitious  even 
more  than  to  be  known  as  ignorant;  and  such  per- 
sons preferred  to  remain  ignorant  of  the  Occult.  In 
time  the  word  Occultism  grew  to  mean  that  which 
pertained  to  the  subjective — that  which  pertained  to 
esotericism,  and  at  present  it  is  defined  as  esoteric- 
ism. 

As  you  go  back  in  history  you  will  find  that 
esotericism  has  everywhere  played  a  large  part  in 
moulding  the  thoughts  of  men.  There  were  always 
the  esoteric  and  the  exoteric  religions  and  sciences. 
There  always  has  been  and  there  will  be  for  ages 
yet  to  come  one  religion  for  the  masses  and 
another  for  the  students.  There  have  been  for  a 
long  time,  and  for  some  time  yet  to  come  there  will 
be  two  sciences — one  for  the  materialist,  diluted  for 
the  masses,  and  another  for  the  students  of  Occult- 
ism. You  will  find  traces  of  this  duality  in  any 
religion  at  any  period  in  history.  The  Nazarene,  the 


14  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

inspired  leader  of  the  Christians,  after  having  taught 
the  multitude  in  parables  and  having  withdrawn  to 
one  side,  was  questioned  by  his  disciples:  "Why 
speakest  thou  to  them  in  parables?"  He  answered: 
"Because  it  is  given  unto  you  to  know  the  mysteries 
of  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  but  to  them  it  is  not 
given."  And  afterwards  he  unfolded  to  his  disciples 
the  esoteric  side  of  his  teachings,  thus  giving  them 
truths  that  were  not  for  the  masses.  And  in  all 
religions,  whether  it  be  the  Egyptian,  Buddhism,  or 
that  precursor  of  the  Christian  religion — Judaism, 
there  are  truths  which  are  revealed  only  to  the 
student.  In  Judaism  there  was  the  Jehovic  teach- 
ing for  the  masses,  the  Cabalistic  for  the  most 
secret  students,  and  between  these  two  was  a  third, 
the  Talmudic,  which  partook  of  the  nature  of  both. 
So  the  truth  reached  all  grades  of  society  according 
to  the  comprehension  of  each — a  plan  that  was 
adopted  later  by  the  Church  of  Rome  with  very 
great  success. 

Of  course  many  religionists,  especially  those  call- 
ing themselves  Christians,  will  deny  that  there  is 
any  esotericism  in  their  faith.  But  those  who  are 
acquainted  with  the  history  of  the  early  Christian 
Church  and  the  writings  of  the  Fathers,  and  those 
who  are  familiar  with  the  philosophy  of  The  Logos, 
and  the  mysticism  of  Paul  as  shown  in  his  Epistles, 
will  never  attempt  to  deny  it  to  the  educated. 

But  however  violent  the  denial  of  esotericism  may 
be  by  the  religionist,  it  will  not  exceed  in  violence 
the  denial  of  the  term  "science"  to  anything  per- 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       15 

taining  to  the  occult  by  the  majority  of  the  modern 
physicists;  yet  scorn,  laughter  or  denial  will  not 
blot  from  the  pages  of  either  sacred  or  profane  his- 
tory the  fact  that  Magic  was  and  is  practiced  among 
all  people.  The  existence  of  magic  necessitates  the 
knowledge  of  certain  laws  and  forces  which  are  as 
yet  unknown  to  the  materialist,  though  modern 
science,  having  gone  almost  to  the  limit  of  the 
visible,  is  now  beginning  to  knock  at  the  door  of  the 
Occult  Sciences  and  to  pry  into  the  invisible.  It  is 
already  studying  the  ether,  ions,  electrical  invisibles, 
atoms  and  radiant  matter.  It  is  only  a  few  weeks 
since  Flammarion,  in  one  of  his  articles,  said  that  he 
was  a  student  of  Occultism,  and  that  henceforth  all 
progressive  men  of  science  would  have  to  study 
along  that  line. 

According  to  the  teachings  of  esotericism  Occult- 
ism is  the  science  of  Divine  Unfoldment.  The 
student  of  Occultism  regards  Deity  as  the  All ;  and 
is  taught  that  there  is  not  nor  cannot  be  any  mani- 
festation outside  of  Deity.  Whether  we  look  at  a 
blade  of  grass,  or  a  drop  of  water,  or  upon  our 
planet  with  its  teeming  myriads  of  men  and  animals, 
or  look  away  into  space  at  system  after  system  of 
worlds,  all  is  Deity  in  various  states  of  manifesta- 
tion. The  Occultist  is  primarily  an  evolutionist  and 
says  that  all  evolution  is  carried  on  during  vast 
periods  of  time,  which  he  calls  Cosmic  Days;  that 
Deity  idealizes  a  picture  of  what  It  will  accomplish 
during  a  Cosmic  Day,  and  then  the  whole  impulse  of 
evolution — which  is  Divine  Energy  or  Impulse — is 


1 6  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

onward  and  upward,  striving  ever  to  reach  that 
idealization. 

Everything  in  the  universe  is  an  unfoldment  of 
Deity  Itself,  and  Occultism  is  the  science  of  that 
Unfoldment.  It  teaches  the  laws  under  which  that 
Unfoldment  takes  place,  not  only  upon  the  ob- 
jective plane  of  life  but  also  upon  the  subjective 
plane.  The  Occultist  finds  that  where  he  merely 
studies  the  modern  sciences  he  is  only  studying  the 
sciences  of  effects,  for  there  is  not  one  of  the  modern 
sciences  that  teaches  the  cause  of  phenomena. 
Take  the  subject  where  modern  science  has  perhaps 
made  as  much  progress  as  in  any  other  line — 
embryology.  We  find  there  is  a  germ ;  it  has  a  form 
of  life;  a  method  of  accretion;  it  reaches  a  certain 
point  of  development;  then  ask  a  scientific  man 
what  it  is  going  to  be,  a  fish,  a  bird,  a  reptile  or  a 
man,  and  he  cannot  answer.  Up  to  this  pc'nt  the 
formation  of  a  germ  of  each  kind  is  identical  w^ch  the 
others.  But  after  this  point  has  been  reached  there 
is  new  accretion,  a  new  form  is  assumed,  and  the 
germ  may  become  a  bird,  a  fish,  a  reptile  or  a  man ; 
but  the  form  that  it  takes  was  indelibly  stamped 
upon  it  from  the  beginning.  How  was  it  stamped? 
What  determines  the  diverging  point,  what  deter- 
mines the  form  of  consciousness,  the  form  of  ex- 
pression ?  In  the  science  of  embryology  there  is  no 
satisfactory  answer  to  be  had  because  here,  as  you 
see,  is  the  study  of  effects.  The  cause  is  not  looked 
for,  is  not  found. 

The  student  of  Occultism  says  I  want  to  know 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       17 

when  the  ideal  which  determined  all  its  future 
growth  was  stamped  upon  that  germ.  I  want  to 
know  why,  when  it  reached  that  point,  it  became  a 
man  instead  of  a  bird ;  why  it  drew  to  itself  certain 
elements  and  threw  off  others.  I  want  to  know  the 
laws  that  govern  the  subjective  side  of  life ;  I  want 
the  veil  to  be  torn  away,  that  I  may  see  the  cause 
of  form,  and  not  only  its  effects.  This  is  why  he 
attempts  to  study  first  upon  the  objective  side  of 
life  and  then  upon  the  subjective,  or  to  study  them 
contemporaneously. 

As  materialistic  as  was  the  Nineteenth  Century, 
we  find  that  a  few  men  once  more  began  to  turn 
their  thoughts  toward  the  realm  of  the  unknown 
and  unseen  in  order  to  discover,  if  possible,  the 
"why"  of  existence.  And  certain  scientific  men 
thought  it  not  unreasonable  nor  undignified  to  in- 
vestigate the  Occult  or  to  organize  The  Society  for 
Psychical  Research  for  the  purpose  of  investigating 
these  occult  subjects.  We  have  seen  the  great  cult  of 
Spiritualism  spreading  through  the  world  and  have 
witnessed  the  revival  of  Palmistry  and  of  Astrology 
and  other  quasi  Occult  Sciences.  Then  following 
these,  the  crowning  effort  of  all,  we  find  that  a  great 
psychic  wave  swept  over  the  world  and  man  began 
to  realize  that  he  was  Mind  and  as  such  was  neither 
bound  by  time  nor  by  space,  but  could  send  his 
thoughts  in  any  given  direction  and  could  communi- 
cate without  words  with  distant  minds;  and  that 
mind  could  compel  matter  to  obey  it.  With  the 
awakening  of  the  world  the  Occult  Sciences  have 


1 8  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

again  challenged  the  attention  of  the  most  progress- 
ive men  of  the  race. 

But  man  grows  tired  of  externals  and  life  after 
life  as  he  evolves  he  studies  deeper  and  deeper  into 
Nature's  laws.  We  do  not  always  accomplish  the 
same  amount  of  study  in  each  life  because  we  think 
we  have  not  the  time  for  study.  We  believe  we 
have  so  much  else  to  do  that  is  of  much  more  im- 
portance to  us.  Then  there  is  the  external  world 
with  its  duties  and  pleasures  and  our  attention  is  so 
deeply  engaged  with  these  things  that  we  have  no 
time  left  for  more  serious  subjects.  But  in  each  life 
we  take  up  as  much  of  the  study  of  these  sciences 
as  we  have  the  time  and  inclination  for,  and  gradu- 
ally after  many  ages  have  passed  we  become  earnest 
and  devoted  students. 

A  knowledge  of  Occult  Law  may  be  gained  in 
two  ways,  by  original  research  and  by  teachers. 
There  are  courageous  souls  who  choose  to  progress 
along  the  lines  of  personal  experimentation  instead 
of  taking  the  easier  and  perhaps  the  better  way  of 
gaining  a  knowledge  of  its  principles  through  the 
aid  of  teachers.  These  strong  souls  often  make  ter- 
rible mistakes  and  unnecessary  sacrifices,  for,  after 
leaving  the  objective  plane,  they  come  upon  the  hid- 
den or  subjective  side  where  there  are  forces  and 
agencies  that  turn  to  naught  man's  thought  and 
efforts  unless  both  be  properly  directed.  But  even 
when  knowledge  has  been  gained  through  teachers  it 
does  not  put  an  end  to  experimentation ;  because  the 
teacher  explains  the  law  and  leaves  the  pupil 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       19 

to  make  his  own  verification  after  having  been 
taught  how  it  should  be  done.  The  knowledge 
comes,  however,  as  all  real  knowledge  must,  by  ex- 
perimentation and  by  experience. 

Who  are  the  teachers?  They  may  be  grouped 
into  three  great  classes,  Masters,  Adepts  and  Stu- 
dents. The  Masters  of  Occultism  are  those  who,  in 
a  prior  period  of  Cosmic  evolution,  passed  upward 
through  the  human  stage  until  they  reached  the 
Divine,  and  became  Gods.  When  a  new  Cosmic 
Day  commences,  and  new  planets  are  formed,  and 
men  are  brought  into  existence  for  the  purpose  of 
unfolding  more  and  more  of  the  Deity  within  them- 
selves and  enlarging  their  consciousness  as  individ- 
ualized parts  of  nature,  the  Masters  are  they  who 
lead  and  teach  the  evolving  race.  The  Adepts  are 
those  advanced  men  of  our  race  who  are  students  of 
the  Masters,  while  at  the  same  time  they  are  teachers 
of  their  less  developed  brothers.  They  are  men  who 
have  perfected  themselves  along  certain  lines,  but 
have  not  reached  perfection  along  all  lines.  The 
Students  are  they  who  are  studying  under  these 
Adepts;  they  are  persons  who  desire  to  know  the 
truth,  and  have  devoted  themselves  to  the  study 
of  these  particular  sciences.  They  hold  the  same  re- 
lation to  the  Adepts  as  the  Adepts  hold  to  the  Mas- 
ters. 

There  are  different  grades  of  Masters  because 
they  who  finished  their  evolution  upon  their  system 
of  worlds  earlier  in  the  great  Cosmic  Day  are 
stronger  than  they  who  finished  later.  And  so  there 


20  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

are  grades  of  Adepts  and  of  Students.  We  find  that 
there  are  everywhere  grades  of  intelligence.  In 
other  words,  that  which  Huxley  speaks  of  as  a  scien- 
tific necessity  is  true,  and  there  are  intelligences 
in  this  Universe  as  superior  to  man  as  man  is  supe- 
rior to  a  black  beetle.  Take,  for  instance,  a  Patago- 
nian  or  an  Australian  bushman,  and  contrast  him 
with  an  Emerson.  What  a  vast  gulf  separates  these 
two  intelligences !  Yet  both  are  proceeding  upward 
in  their  evolutionary  career;  the  one,  of  course,  be- 
ing in  advance  of  the  other. 

And  it  does  not  require  much  scientific  imagina- 
tion to  conceive  that  there  is  an  infinite  gradation 
of  intelligence  because  we  see  such  a  diversity 
everywhere.  Then  it  is  only  logical  to  suppose  that 
what  is  true  upon  the  lower  plane  of  our  daily  expe- 
rience is  also  true  throughout  nature. 

The  Masters  and  Adepts  are  the  custodians  of  the 
Occult  Sciences,  which  are  perfected  sciences  it  is 
claimed,  because  they  cover  all  departments  of  na- 
ture, both  physical  and  metaphysical,  the  objective 
and  the  subjective. 

Now,  all  the  facts  and  principles  of  these  sciences 
must  be  verified  by  each  person  as  he  progresses 
along  his  evolutionary  path.  I  may  tell  you  some- 
thing that  may  seem  absurd  to  you ;  or  you  may  say 
"that  sounds  reasonable,"  and  therefore  you  believe 
it.  I  may  tell  you  something  else,  and  you  say  "I 
believe  that  is  true  because  both  the  intuitive  and 
rational  portions  of  my  nature  endorse  it."  But  you 
do  not  know  whether  it  is  true  or  not.  In  the  first 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       21 

case  you  have  a  disbelief,  in  the  next  two  cases  a 
belief;  but  before  you  have  a  knowledge,  you  must 
verify  the  truth  of  my  assertion.  And  so  it  is  that 
every  student  of  Occultism  must  verify  each  state- 
ment of  his  teacher  in  order  that  he  may  make  it  a 
part  of  his  own  being — that  he  may  know  that  it 
is  true;  otherwise  it  would  be  only  a  belief,  and 
beliefs  do  not  amount  to  much,  because  there  are 
almost  as  many  beliefs  and  theories  as  there  are 
individuals. 

In  this  Cosmic  Day  Occultism  commenced 
when  the  Masters  came  upon  this  planet  to  teach 
mankind.  The  evolution  on  this  planet  is  divided 
into  a  certain  number  of  periods,  and  we  are  at  the 
present  time  in  what  the  Occultists  know  as  the  fifth 
period.  In  the  first  and  second  periods  very  little 
was  accomplished  by  man.  He  was,  at  it  were,  in  a 
new  world  with  new  sensations  and  new  experiences, 
and  his  life  was  entirely  objective,  and  largely  ani- 
mal. His  theater  of  activity  was  that  continent 
known  to  tradition  as  "The  Land  of  the  Gods," 
"Mount  Muni,"  The  Imperishable  Isles,"  or  what 
we  would  prosaically  call  the  "Continent  of  the 
North  Pole." 

During  the  third  period  of  evolution,  man  lived 
upon  the  continent  known  as  Lemuria.  A  con- 
tinent lying  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  Arabian  Sea 
and  Indian  Ocean.  Its  Northern  portion  was  much 
in  the  present  location  of  Australia,  the  Philippines, 
and  the  Islands  of  the  Southern  Pacific ;  all  of  which 
constitute  the  remnants  of  that  continent  now 


22  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

sunken  beneath  the  Seas.  That  periods  occur  in 
which  there  is  a  sinking  of  certain  continents,  and 
a  rising  of  others,  is  as  well  known  to  Physicists 
as  to  Occultists.  In  Lemuria  man  passed  from  his 
lowest  state  of  animal  existence  into  what  we  may 
call  a  more  rational  or  human  state.  His  develop- 
ment during  this  time  is  substantially  shown  in  the 
history  of  primitive  man.  Some  of  the  egos,  out- 
stripping the  others,  succeeded  in  reaching  adept- 
ship  along  certain  lines,  but  the  great  mass  of  the 
people  lived  sensuous  and  sensual  lives.  There  was 
very  little  spirituality  manifested  by  the  race  dur- 
ing this  period,  and  the  perversion  of  natural  laws 
and  forces  became  marked  toward  its  close. 

The  most  notable  event  which  occurred  on  that 
continent,  immediately  prior  to  the  cataclysm  which 
swept  it  beneath  the  waters,  was  the  establishment 
of  colonies  in  India.  The  colonists  consisted  of  Mas- 
ters, the  Adepts  and  the  cream  of  the  race.  It  was 
these  colonists  who  built  the  rock  temples  of 
Elephanta  and  the  other  great  temples  of  India — 
those  temples  in  which  mysticism  seems  to  have 
had  its  earlier  home;  and  where,  upon  their  walls, 
are  painted  the  strange  old  symbols,  in  colors,  that 
indicate  the  history  and  the  growth  of  man. 

Those  were  the  souls  who  gave  to  India  its  riches 
in  literature  and  philosophy,  and  established  the 
mighty  empires  which  even  tradition  has  forgotten. 
But  it  was  the  degenerate  descendants  of  these  col- 
onists who  spread  Northward  and  Westward,  and 
populated  first  Asia,  and  later,  Europe. 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       23 

After  the  continent  of  Lemuria  had  passed  away, 
then  came  the  fourth  period,  with  man's  field  of  ac- 
tivity in  Atlantis.  Atlantis  extended  from  the  West 
Indies  to  the  coast  of  Central  and  Northern  Africa, 
as  we  know  from  the  investigations  of  the  British 
Government,  which  spent  many  years,  and  large 
sums  of  money,  in  determining  the  extent  of  the 
sunken  continent;  and  it  was  here  that  civilization 
proceeded  with  tremendous  strides.  All  the  ac- 
cumulated knowledge  of  the  other  periods  was 
stored  in  the  minds  of  those  who  had  been  the  Le- 
murians,  and  were  then  incarnating  as  Atlanteans. 
As  they  acquired  greater  and  greater  knowledge, 
they  not  only  reached  a  point  in  mechanical  devel- 
opment far  beyond  anything  that  we  have  reached 
at  the  present  day,  but  they  also  took  up  the  study 
of  Occultism,  which  became  common  among  the 
people. 

By  that  time  the  great  Masters  had  retired  from 
physical  contact  with  men,  and  the ,  Adepts  had 
taken  their  places  as  direct  teachers  of  the  people. 
They  moved  among  men,  and  were  the  kings  and 
rulers,  the  law-givers  and  inventors ;  in  fact,  they 
were  the  inspirers  of  the  race  up  to  the  time  it 
reached  its  highest  point  of  development  in  that 
period. 

Then  the  continent  became  divided  into  five  great 
kingdoms,  and  in  each  of  these  there  were  lodges 
of  Adepts.  At  the  height  of  Atlantis'  glory,  once 
more  the  people  turned  to  sensual  abandonment, 
and  the  Adepts  withdrew  into  Retreats  with  their 


24  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

pupils,  for  the  people  refused  to  listen  to  them,  or 
to  be  aided  by  them  any  longer.  In  the  course  of 
time,  materialism  swept  over  that  continent,  as  it 
has  swept  over  Europe  and  America;  and  Occult- 
ism was  forgotten  by  the  masses,  and  remembered 
only  by  the  few;  and  then,  gradually,  that  which 
was  pure  Occultism  became  perverted,  and  men  be- 
gan to  use  their  powers  criminally.  Those  who  re- 
membered or  practiced  Occultism,  put  into  opera- 
tion mental  and  certain  other  forces  which  enslaved 
all  those  who  had  forgotten  how  to  use  their  own 
forces,  or  who  were  not  developed  to  the  same  point 
as  themselves.  And  thus  Atlantis  became  a  conti- 
nent where  a  few  immensely  wealthy,  powerful  and 
strong  egos  ruled  the  majority  of  the  people,  and 
made  them  their  slaves. 

But  the  misuse  of  Occult  forces  brought  its 
re-action,  as  it  always  does,  and,  as  Plato  tells  us, 
Atlantis  suddenly  became  submerged.  You  remem- 
ber that  when  he  went  to  Egypt  he  was  informed 
that  the  last  remnants  of  Atlantis  had  disappeared 
about  five  thousand  years  prior  to  his  visit ;  and  also 
that  the  priests  had  records  of  the  old  continent, 
as  well  as  of  their  own  country,  which  extended 
back  thousands  of  years.  These  records  were  kept 
by  the  Occultists  who  were  priests  in  the  time  of 
Plato,  and  are  still  kept  in  triplicate ;  one  copy  has 
been  placed  in  each  of  the  three  great  repositories 
situated  on  separate  continents. 

Before  Atlantis  went  down  those  of  the  inhabi- 
tants who  had  preserved  their  purity  and  who  were 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       25 

trying  to  lead  upright  lives,  were  taken  by  the 
Adepts  out  of  the  country.  Those  living  in  the 
Western  Empires  were  colonized  in  Central  and 
South  America.  In  Central  America  that  rare  civ- 
ilization which  preceded  our  own  was  founded,  and 
was  the  duplicate  in  every  respect  of  the  one  for- 
merly established  in  India.  The  degenerate  de- 
scendants from  the  Central  American  civilization 
emigrated  to  North  and  South  America  and  popu- 
lated them.  The  degeneracy  of  these  aboriginal 
Americans  was  due  to  the  fact  that  at  this  time  in 
that  Fourth  Period  the  undeveloped  souls  of  the  At- 
lanteans  were  incarnating  in  those  bodies ;  for  it  was 
with  the  Atlanteans  as  it  had  been  with  the  Le- 
murians,  the  strongest  souls  came  first  and  became 
the  pioneers.  They  bore  the  heaviest  burdens  and 
thus  prepared  the  way  for  the  less  developed  souls 
who  had  not  the  strength  to  do  the  work  that  their 
elder  brothers  had  done.  And  it  should  not  be 
forgotten  that  the  history  of  the  Lemurians  and  the 
Atlanteans  is  but  the  history  of  ourselves.  Our 
strongest  and  bravest  souls  came  forward  to  start 
the  Fifth  Period  onward  in  its  evolution,  as  even  a 
cursory  reading  of  general  history  will  disclose,  and 
they  have  reappeared  from  time  to  time  to  manifest 
their  energies  in  the  several  lines  of  human  achieve- 
ment, in  order  to  teach,  help  and  direct  the  course  of 
events. 

From  the  Eastern  Empires  of  Atlantis  the  ad- 
vanced souls  went  into  Africa  and  laid  the  founda- 
tion of  what  is  known  now  as  the  Egyptian  Empire. 


26  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

And  this  brings  us  to  the  Fifth  Period,  in  which 
Occultism  was  again  taught  popularly  and  openly 
among  the  people.  A  study  of  Egyptian  history  re- 
veals that  during  its  entire  period  there  were  Occult- 
ists— Magicians  they  were  called — who  could  pro- 
duce great  phenomena.  They  were  teachers  of  the 
people  and  were  the  priests  and  law-givers;  they 
were  the  friends  of  kings  and  were  consulted  when- 
ever there  was  sickness  or  national  calamity.  These 
teachers  were  the  Adepts  who  came  in  contact  with 
the  people. 

In  the  Fifth  Period,  which  is  the  present  one,  the 
descendants  of  the  colony  which  remained  in  India, 
having  reached  the  height  of  its  prosperity  and  de- 
velopment, passed  Westward  and  founded  the  As- 
syrian and  Babylonian  Empires.  There  again  the 
Adepts  moved  among  men.  In  both  sacred  and  pro- 
fane history  of  those  times  we  find  that  the  Magi 
were  able  to  cure  all  manner  of  diseases  and  to 
manipulate  the  laws  of  nature.  Passing  upward 
from  Babylon  and  Syria  to  the  Mediterranean  on  the 
one  side  and  through  Egypt  to  the  Mediterranean 
on  the  other,  we  find  that  the  great  remnants  of  the 
Third  and  Fourth  Periods  were  merged  and  blended 
in  the  Fifth  Period  in  the  Phoenician,  the  Grecian, 
the  Carthaginian  and  the  Roman  peoples. 

This  is  not  a  statement  of  occult  history  in  full; 
but  is  merely  the  barest  outline  in  order  to  show 
you  how  Occultism  has  been  presented  in  the  past, 
and  how  it  has  been  preserved  for  us. 

At  the  beginning  of  this  Fifth  Period  we  had  a 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  and  Future.       27 

new  burst  of  occult  knowledge  and  force,  because 
all  the  knowledge  acquired  in  the  preceding  periods 
by  the  egos  had  been  brought  over  in  these  later  in- 
carnations, and  in  the  early  history  of  each  of  the 
Nations  mentioned  Occultism  was  taught  to  the  peo- 
ple once  more.  The  Adepts  were  friends  of  the  peo- 
ple and  were  freely  consulted  by  them.  But  gradu- 
ally as  materialism  advanced  and  sensuality  became 
the  dominant  trait  of  each  of  these  peoples,  the 
Adepts  withdrew  again  from  personal  contact  with 
the  world — as  the  great  Masters  had  withdrawn  in 
previous  periods  of  time. 

In  Greece  materialism  in  its  most  artistic  form 
began  to  stamp  itself  upon  the  minds  of  the  people, 
who  turned  from  spiritual  teachings  and  caused 
the  Adepts  to  withdraw  entirely  from  the 
world.  And  it  came  to  pass  that  all  magic  or 
Occultism,  for  they  were  identical  in  those  days, 
was  confined  to  what  is  known  now  as  temple  magic 
and  was  practiced  by  the  priests  who  were  students 
of  the  Adepts.  In  various  Grecian  temples  me- 
chanical or  ceremonial  magic  was  taught ;  that  is,  a 
knowledge  of  mental  forces  united  with  a  knowledge 
of  chemistry  and  alchemy,  by  the  blending  of  which 
great  phenomena  were  produced.  Some  record  of 
this  great  knowledge  is  preserved  even  in  the  his- 
tories which  you  have. 

Before  Occultism  in  Greece  passed  away  one  final 
attempt  was  made  to  counteract  materialism, 
and  the  Elusinian  Mysteries  were  founded.  In  these 
mysteries  the  development  and  evolution  of  the 


28  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

human  soul  were  taught  in  symbolic  form  and  the 
wisest  men  of  that  age  thought  it  a  privilege  to  be 
initiated  into  these  Mysteries.  But  even  this  proved 
unavailing  to  stem  the  tide  of  materialism  and  there- 
fore the  priests  ceased  to  publicly  proclaim  or  exert 
their  occult  powers.  Occasionally  some  enthusias- 
tic student  came  forward  and  exhibited  his  knowl- 
edge of  the  Occult  by  the  performance  of  a  few 
miracles  and  marvelous  phenomena ;  but  the  people 
as  a  class  were  too  materialistic  to  be  taught  any- 
thing better  or  higher  than  their  own  gross  beliefs 
and  soon  such  students  had  to  retire  from  public 
work. 

Then  Christianity  arose,  and  its  doctrines  were 
received  by  a  great  many  who,  after  a  brief  period 
of  genuine  revival  of  spirituality,  used  them  for  polit- 
ical purposes.  The  different  orders  of  the  priest- 
hood became  the  Occult  Bodies  within  the  Christian 
Church,  and  up  to  the  middle  ages  the  priests  in  the 
Church  possessed  all  the  knowledge  of  Occultism 
that  the  world  had.  And  the  Catholic  Church  is  now 
the  only  one  that  has  preserved  a  trace  of  this 
ancient  truth.  It  was  during  the  Middle  Ages  that 
the  Occultists  as  a  class  withdrew  from  the  Church 
of  Rome  and  formed  secret  bodies  or  societies  such 
as  the  Rosicrucians  in  various  parts  of  the  world. 

At  the  present  day  almost  all  occult  knowledge  is 
possessed  and  preserved  by  secret  societies;  and 
the  members  of  these  societies  or  bodies  only  teach 
such  individuals  as  have  reached  a  point  in  their 
evolution  which  has  made  them  capable  of  receiving 


Occultism,  Its  Past,  Present  cmd  Future.      29 

the  higher  truths.  In  this  way  portions  of  this 
secret  knowledge  are  given  to  the  world  from  time  to 
time  as  the  world  becomes  able  to  receive  them. 

The  culmination  of  what  is  known  as  the  Dark 
Age,  in  this  period  of  evolution,  came  in  the  nine- 
teenth century,  for  at  that  time  the  world  reached 
its  lowest  point  in  materialism,  and  from  now  the 
tendency  will  continue  to  be  upward  toward  Spiritu- 
ality. A  few  Occultists  believe  that  the  time  has 
passed  when  there  is  a  necessity  for  guarding  these 
secrets  with  such  jealous  care,  and  believe  that  the 
world  is  ready  to  receive  more  of  these  truths  than 
formerly.  Then,  too,  many  persons  are  making  dis- 
coveries along  these  lines  and  are  ignorantly  mis- 
using the  forces  they  are  learning  to  use.  So  it  has 
been  decided  to  teach  the  people  something  about 
these  forces  and  how  they  can  and  should  be  used, 
in  the  hope  of  averting,  if  possible,  the  fate  of  the 
Lemurians  and  Atlanteans. 

Almost  every  day  you  may  see  in  the  newspapers 
advertisements  in  which  the  offer  is  made  to  in- 
struct people  concerning  personal  magnetism  and 
how  to  use  it ;  how  to  be  successful,  how  to  become 
popular  and  how  to  dominate  other  minds  until 
they  become  enslaved.  The  people  are  awakening 
and  are  beginning  to  feel  a  great  desire  to  know 
about  these  Occult  forces;  and  if  they  do  not  use 
them  rightly  they  will  surely  use  them  wrongly. 

At  the  present  time  various  efforts  are  being 
made  to  give  the  occult  teachings  to  such  persons 
as  are  fitted  to  receive  them,  but  they  cannot 


30  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

yet  be  taught  in  full  to  the  great  mass  of  people; 
but  should  only  be  given  to  those  who  desire  to 
know  the  truth  and  who  wish  to  ally  their  forces 
with  that  of  Nature  for  the  good  of  others  and  for 
benefit  to  themselves. 

Now  you  are  not  going  to  be  taught  all  there  is 
about  Occultism  in  these  lectures,  but  only  that  par- 
ticular portion  which  teaches  what  the  great  Uni- 
versal Mind  is;  and  after  that  what  you  are,  what 
your  subjective  and  objective  minds  are  and  what 
occult  forces  each  of  these  minds  reaches  and  con- 
trols. Then  you  shall  be  taught  how  to  use  these 
forces  for  your  own  upbuilding  and  for  the  hasten- 
ing of  your  evolution.  We  shall  confine  ourselves 
to  mental  lines,  taking  fragments  of  occult  history 
and  bringing  them  together  into  a  small  mosaic 
which  will  show  you  your  relationship  to  the  Uni- 
versal Mind  and  how  all  humanity  is  but  a  mani- 
festation of  that  great  Mind.  We  shall  learn  how 
to  build  ourselves  up  along  spiritual,  mental  and 
material  lines,  because  this  knowledge  can  be  used 
successfully  along  all  three.  We  all  want  to  suc- 
ceed in  life  materially,  and  most  of  us  want  to 
grow  in  knowledge  and  power;  and  it  is  through 
the  use  of  these  forces  that  we  accomplish  our 
heart's  desire.  The  time  is  fast  approaching  when 
man  must  learn  to  use  his  mental  forces  or  fail  in 
the  great  evolutionary  struggle — fail  for  this  entire 
period — not  to  take  the  battle  up  again  until  some 
other  Cosmic  Day  shall  come.  In  the  course  of 
time  all  men  who  survive  will  become  Occultists. 


LECTURE  TWO. 


DIVINE   MIND,   ITS   NATURE   AND   MANI- 
FESTATION. 

The  God  idea  seems  to  be  universal,  although  we 
are  told  that  in  the  interior  of  Australia  a  tribe 
of  men  was  discovered  who  had  no  conception  of 
God.  In  all  my  investigations  that  is  the  only  men- 
tion I  have  ever  seen  of  a  body  of  people  who  were 
entirely  without  any  idea  of  God  or  of  what  is  gen- 
erally meant  by  the  word  God.  This  idea  concern- 
ing Deity  changes  as  man  developes.  It  was  the 
late  Colonel  Ingersoll  who  had  a  very  clever  and 
profound  way  of  stating  this  thought.  He  said, 
"An  honest  God  is  the  noblest  work  of  man." 

This  is  profound  because  man's  concept  of  Deity 
corresponds  with  his  power  of  idealization ;  he  can- 
not create  a  God  that  is  above  his  own  ideal.  And 
while  it  is  true  that  God  created  man  in  His  own 
image,  according  to  the  Scripture,  it  is  also  true  that 
undeveloped  man  is  forever  returning  the  compli- 
ment by  creating  God  in  his  own  image.  Therefore 
when  primitive  man  began  to  realize  the  "I  am  I," 
that  is  to  say,  that  he  was  something  distinct  and 
apart  from  everything  else,  he  came  to  the  point 
where  he  began  to  manifest  the  principle  of  self-con- 
sciousness ;  he  began  to  think,  to  analyze  and  to  wor- 
ship. The  first  thing  he  saw  which  awakened  a  feeling 

31 


32  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

of  fear  or  reverence  in  him  was  what  we  call  Nature 
and  natural  forces;  and  perceiving  that  they  were 
stronger  than  himself  he  commenced  to  worship 
them  as  his  Deity.  Next  he  passed  on  to  the  mak- 
ing of  an  image  of  the  thing  he  worshiped,  such  as 
the  totem ;  and  later  he  worshiped  the  sun  and  moon 
and  stars.  When  he  had  learned  by  experience  that 
fire  could  destroy  both  his  body  and  his  possessions 
he  began  to  worship  that  too,  and  thus  he  continued 
to  live  for  ages  alternately  worshiping  and  pro- 
pitiating everything  which  he  did  not  understand 
and  could  not  control. 

The  idea  of  Deity  is  first  found  in  individual  wor- 
ship. Each  man  has  his  own  particular  God  which 
is  a  true  one  for  him,  because  each  person  has  his 
own  conception  of  Deity.  But  as  he  becomes 
stronger  he  is  not  satisfied  to  worship  alone  and  then 
he  desires  to  impress  his  ideas  upon  those  with 
whom  he  comes  in  contact  and  we  find  him 
in  the  second  stage  of  his  worship,  which  is  tribal. 
When  a  certain  tribe  of  men  becomes  stronger  nu- 
merically than  another  and  begins  to  dominate  that 
other  it  immediately  enforces  its  own  God  idea  upon 
the  conquered  people  as  was  most  excellently  illus- 
trated in  the  primitive  Grecian  States.  There  every 
little  state  had  its  own  particular  God,  but  as  the 
states  became  merged  a  national  God  idea  gradually 
took  form,  by  the  weaker  states  accepting  the  God 
of  the  stronger.  But  sometimes  the  tribal  or  na- 
tional God  of  the  conquered  people  appealed  to  the 
wants  or  needs  of  the  conquerors  and  was  adopted 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      33 

by  them  as  when  Isis  became  Diana  of  Ephesus. 
Christianity  has  given  us  another  example  of  this 
adoption  of  another  nation's  God  by  accepting 
Judea's  God  Jah-hovah  and  renaming  him  Jehovah. 

Jah-hovah  was  nothing  more  than  the  Male-female 
creative  principle  united.  It  was  a  Planetary  Spirit 
or  one  of  the  Elohim.  Christianity  adopted  Him 
from  Judaism  and  improved  upon  the  conception  of 
its  votaries  by  making  of  Him  a  Universo-personal 
God.  Much  of  his  supposed  wrath  and  vengeance 
was  modified  or  ameliorated  by  attributing  to  Him 
enough  of  the  element  of  love  to  enable  Him  to 
show  a  leniency  toward  such  of  His  creatures  as  He 
had  elected  or  foreordained  to  be  saved. 

But  now  we  have  passed  into  a  transition  state 
and  man's  conception  of  Deity  is  broadening  from 
the  anthropomorphic  to  a  real  Universal  God  with- 
out modifications  or  limitations.  The  anthropomor- 
phic idea  means  God  made  in  the  image  of  man  or 
ascribing  human  attributes  to  God.  In  olden  times 
the  attributes  of  human  weaknesses  and  human 
traits  were  ascribed  to  the  Jehovic  God.  But  we  have 
now  arrived  at  the  point  where  anthropomorphism 
is  no  longer  characteristic  of  the  most  progressive 
thinkers.  We  are  now  able  to  conceive  of  a  Uni- 
versal Deity;  one  without  human  weakness,  one 
without  human  limitation ;  and  if  there  is  one  thing 
above  all  others  that  this  great  mental  and  meta- 
physical movement  stands  for  it  is  the  sweeping 
away  of  the  old  anthropomorphic  idea  and  the  giving 
in  its  place  a  Universal  Deity. 


34  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

"Divine  Mind"  has  been  selected  for  the  term 
to  be  applied  to  this  new  conception  of  God  in  order 
to  emphasize  this  idea  of  Universal  Deity;  in  order 
to  bring  out  clearly  first  the  Deific  idea  and  secondly 
the  fact  that  it  is  consciousness — for  mind  and  con- 
sciousness are  really  synonymous  terms.  I  prefer 
the  term  "Universal  Consciousness,"  but  since 
"Divine  Mind"  seems  to  be  a  favorite  term  with  the 
Christian  Scientists,  the  Mental  Scientists,  the  "New 
Thought  Movement"  and  others,  we  shall  use  that 
as  representing  the  universality  of  Divine  Con- 
sciousness. 

This  consciousness  being  universal  necessarily 
manifests  everywhere.  Looking  at  it  on  the  objec- 
tive side  and  in  the  mineral  kingdom  we  speak  of 
the  cohesion  of  minerals.  Now  minerals  cannot  be 
cohesive  unless  there  is  a  certain  amount  of  con- 
sciousness to  hold  them  together.  If  we  examine 
into  what  we  call  the  transition  states,  or  if  we  go 
back  of  the  mineral  kingdom  to  the  gases  which 
chemicalized  to  produce  the  minerals,  we  find  some- 
thing we  call  chemical  affinity,  which  is  a  certain 
form  of  consciousness.  Let  us  take  a  concrete  ex- 
ample. A  drop  of  water  is,  as  you  know,  formed 
by  the  combination  of  two  gases,  hydrogen  and 
oxygen  in  parts  of  two  to  one,  H2O.  Why  should 
those  atoms  form  in  this  combination  rather  than  in 
any  other?  The  amount  of  power  required  to  dis- 
rupt the  forces  locked  up  in  that  drop  of  water  is 
something  tremendous.  Yet  you  may  take  a  drop  of 
water  and  put  it  on  a  piece  of  iron  and  you  can  watch 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      35 

the  divorce  as  it  takes  place  between  the  two  ele- 
ments. If  there  was  no  consciousness  in  what  is 
called  chemical  affinity  this  could  not  occur.  The  tre- 
mendous force  locked  into  that  combination  of  gases 
becomes  dissipated  as  soon  as  the  atoms  are  brought 
into  new  conditions.  This  shows  that  there  is  con- 
sciousness there ;  were  it  otherwise  no  change  would 
have  taken  place.  In  the  case  of  boiling  water:  if 
fire  and  water  were  but  inert  matter  acting  upon 
inert  matter  and  no  consciousness  were  there  how 
could  those  vibrations  be  raised  and  the  water  be 
made  to  boil?  But  it  is  the  conscious  side  of  the 
atoms  composing  the  fire,  acting  upon  the  conscious 
side  of  the  atoms  composing  the  water,  which  raises 
those  slower  vibrations  of  the  water  and  makes  it 
boil. 

Passing  up  a  step  higher  we  come  to  examine  the 
vegetable  kingdom.  Why  do  pine,  hemlock  and 
spruce  trees  grow  side  by  side  taking  from  the  earth 
only  such  particles  as  each  needs  to  sustain  its  in- 
dividual life  ?  Is  there  not  here  a  conscious  selection 
of  elements  made  by  each  tree? 

In  the  animal  kingdom  this  consciousness  becomes 
so  distinctly  individualized  that  to  distinguish  its 
higher  form  from  the  lower  or  vegetable  kingdom 
we  call  it  something  more  than  consciousness — we 
call  it  intelligence.  In  man  we  find  a  still  higher 
form  of  consciousness  than  in  that  of  the  animal, 
which  we  designate  as  Mind ;  and  this  state  of  de- 
velopment is  the  highest  with  which  we  are  familiar. 
Therefore  when  we  use  the  term  Universal  Con- 


36  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

sciousness  or  Divine  Mind,  we  mean  that  which 
comprehends,  that  which  embodies  and  includes  all 
that  we  call  consciousness  individualized  or  other- 
wise. We  mean  all  that  is  visible  or  invisible  known 
or  unknown.  All  that  can  be  seen,  touched,  handled 
or  sensed ;  all  that  can  be  apprehended — all  is  God. 

The  Universal  Mind  consists  of  two  portions — 
the  manifested  and  the  unmanifested.  The  mani- 
fested portion  can  be  apprehended  by  the  human 
mind,  but  that  which  is  unmanifested  cannot  be  ap- 
prehended. There  is  a  plus  element  which  is  always 
above  and  beyond  that  which  is  manifested.  The 
manifestation  takes  place  within  the  unmanifested 
and  there  is  always  something  from  within  which 
brings  forth  the  manifested.  This  plus  element  we 
shall  not  attempt  to  explain ;  because  I  am  informed 
that  none  of  the  Occultists — not  even  the  greatest — 
has  ever  been  able  to  fathom  much  of  Its  nature. 

From  man's  point  of  view  the  manifested  portion 
of  the  Universal  Mind  consists  of  two  parts,  the 
visible  and  the  invisible;  and  yet  each  of  these  is 
but  a  condition,  a  part  or  a  diversity  of  the  complete 
unity  of  the  Universal  Consciousness.  Upon  the 
visible  plane  of  manifestation  Divine  Mind  or  Con- 
sciousness expresses  Itself  in  the  two  great  forms 
which  are  popularly  known  as  force  and  matter: 
looking  at  matter  from  the  standpoint  of  a  material- 
ist (because  matter  is  what  we  are  supposed  to  be 
most  familiar  with)  we  will  study  the  manifestation 
of  the  Universal  Consciousness  in  that  form. 

We  are  supposed  to  be  familiar  with  matter  and 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      37 

yet  Holman  J.  Clerk  Maxwell  and  almost  all  scien- 
tists are  willing  to  confess  that  their  conception  of 
it  is  but  a  hypothetical  idea.  Huxley,  in  his  "Sensa- 
tion and  Sensiferous  Organs,"  says:  "All  that  we 
know  about  matter  is  that  it  is  the  hypothetical 
substance  of  physical  phenomena."  Physically  we 
can  know  very  little  of  either  force  or  matter  be- 
cause this  objective  world  is  on  the  plane  of  effects. 
The  Occultists  divide  matter  into  two  great  por- 
tions, the  particled  and  the  unparticled.  The  par- 
ticled  portion  comes  forth  from  the  unparticled  as  a 
precipitation  of  it.  Let  me  try  to  make  this  clear  to 
you.  If  you  place  a  pan  of  water  outside  your  win- 
dow when  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere  is  be- 
low freezing  point,  you  will  find  that  gradually  there 
is  a  lowering  of  the  rate  of  vibration  of  the  atoms 
which  compose  the  water  until  there  comes  a  crystal- 
line formation  within  the  pan.  Most  of  the  water  in 
the  pan  is  still  fluidic  but  there  are  also  these  cryst- 
alline formations,  and  we  have  both  the  particled 
and  the  unparticled  portions  in  the  pan.  In  a 
like  manner  throughout  Nature  these  two  forms 
of  matter  are  forever  seen  during  a  period  of  mani- 
festation or  evolution,  and  it  is  the  particled  portion 
of  matter  that  science  has  agreed  to  call  atoms. 
Though  I  believe  that  recently  certain  scientists  are 
trying  to  sub-divide  even  the  atom  which  they  admit 
they  have  never  yet  seen.  There  are  several  scien- 
tific theories  concerning  the  nature  of  the  atom 
which  we  will  not  discuss  at  this  time.  It  is  suffi- 
cient to  know  that  the  physicists  agree  in  saying 


/ 


38  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

that  logically  and  necessarily  there  must  be  an  ulti- 
mate element,  and  this  produces  the  phenomena 
which  we  call  physical  life. 

It  has  often  seemed  to  me  that  if  all  Mental 
Scientists  had  the  faith  of  the  profane  scientists  they 
would  soon  become  Occultists  and  would  accom- 
plish anything  they  undertook,  for  the  profane  scien- 
tist— if  the  term  "profane"  will  be  excused — says: 
"Such  a  law  must  of  necessity  exist,"  and  often 
stakes  his  life  upon  his  faith.  Then,  too,  he  always 
lives  up  to  and  acts  upon  his  scientific  faith.  For 
instance,  before  Neptune  was  discovered  science 
said:  "At  such  a  point  in  space  there  should  be  a 
planet,"  and  thenceforth  all  astronomical  calcula- 
tions were  based  upon  this  logical  theory;  but  it 
was  not  until  a  long  time  after  the  scientists  had 
made  known  their  theory  that  the  planet  was  actu- 
ally discovered.  And  so  it  is  with  this  question  that 
we  are  considering — the  existence  of  the  unseen 
atom.  The  scientist  knows  that  there  is  a  unit  of 
substance;  he  knows  there  must  be  one  because 
visible  physical  forms  are  the  product  of  something 
and  he  says  they  must  have  an  individual  basis  and 
therefore  there  is  an  atom. 

The  Occultist  asserts  that  the  atom  which  the 
scientist  says  must  exist,  does  exist,  and  is  visible 
upon  the  subjective  side  of  life.  It  is  the  smallest 
portion  of  particled  substance,  and  atoms  are  the 
bricks  with  which  the  world  is  builded.  So  the 
atom  is  seen  and  known  by  the  Occultist  and  is 
recognized  as  a  logical  necessity  by  the  physicist. 
Then  comes  the  question,  how  is  it  created? 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      39 

The  Occultist  says  it  is  created  by  the  will  of 
Deity.  Deity  desires  to  manifest,  to  raise  Itself  to  a 
higher  form  of  existence,  and  this  desire  going  forth 
within  Itself  causes  the  Universe  to  grow  into  ob- 
jectivity. This  desire  manifests  first  in  the  unpar- 
ticled  portion  and  is  a  force  which  being  sent 
into  unparticled  matter  causes  a  precipitate  within 
itself  which  is  called  atoms.  And  all  worlds,  all 
bodies,  all  atoms  are  made  of  the  same  substance. 
Everywhere  throughout  space  there  is  but  one  basis 
for  the  physical  universe  and  this  basis  we  agree  to 
call  matter.  Most  people,  however,  give  to  matter 
qualities  that  it  does  not  possess  and  therefore  give 
it  a  power  over  themselves.  If  you  understand  the 
nature  of  matter  and  look  at  it  from  the  right  stand- 
point you  will  be  able  to  control  it;  but  if  you  give 
to  it  qualities  that  do  not  belong  to  it  then  it  will 
control  or  limit  you. 

The  other  great  power  which  is  recognized  as  a 
factor  in  building  the  physical  world  is  force  and 
we  find  a  limited  amount  of  knowledge  con- 
cerning it.  True  it  is  that  scientists  have  classi- 
fied forces  as  electric  force,  force  of  heat,  force  of 
steam,  etc.,  but  after  everything  has  been  stated  and 
analyzed  we  find  all  that  the  physicist  knows  of 
force  is  that  it  is  the  immediate  cause  of  a  change  in 
the  velocity  or  direction  of  the  motion  of  a  body. 
In  other  words,  it  is  the  proximate  cause  of  the 
phenomena  of  form.  When  we  view  the  material 
world  as  the  manifestation  of  Deity  we  know  that 
behind  this  motion  which  we  call  force,  and  behind 
.this  form  which  we  call  matter  there  is  a  cause 


40  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

which  produces  them ;  and  we  want  to  know  some- 
thing about  this  cause. 

The  Occultist  starts  with  the  premise,  as  we 
said  before,  that  all  is  Deity  or  Divine  Essence. 
This  Divine  Essence  manifesting  as  motion  is 
called  force  by  both  the  Occultist  and  the  physi- 
cist. The  Occultist  also  calls  it  thought  because 
all  force  in  its  ultimate  is  either  thought  or  the 
result  of  thought.  With  the  Occultist  force  and 
thought  are  identical  and  force  is  the  product  of 
mind.  The  Divine  Essence  manifesting  as  matter  is 
what  both  the  physicists  and  Occultists  call  sub- 
stance— substance  being  the  collective  name  for 
the  atoms;  and  we  call  it  substance  because  it  is 
that  which  stands  under,  that  which  lies  behind  the 
visible  Universe.  The  physical  Universe  is,  there- 
fore, but  atoms  in  motion  or  vibration  and  back  of 
matter  and  back  of  motion  is  Divine  Essence. 

The  mistake  that  the  physicists  of  the  ultra  school 
make  is  in  believing  that  matter  is  all;  that  every- 
thing is  a  by-product  of  matter  and  that  Mind  and 
Consciousness  are  but  this  thing  which  we  call  mat- 
ter in  motion.  And  the  great  mistake  of  the  ultra 
Mental  and  Christian  Scientists  is  in  believing  that 
all  is  mind  and  that  there  is  no  matter.  Each  view 
is  extreme,  and  fails  to  distinguish  both  manifesta- 
tions of  Divine  Essence.  The  Divine  Essence  does 
manifest  in  those  two  forms  and  we  should  study 
its  manifestations  in  both ;  therefore,  to  say  there  is 
no  matter  and  thus  sweep  away  in  thought  the 
physical  world,  is,  in  my  opinion,  not  altogether 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      41 

scientific.  But  the  true  scientific  attitude  is  to  say 
that  the  Supreme  Universal  Divine  Essence — Con- 
sciousness— God — does  manifest  in  the  dual  way  of 
motion  and  matter.  This  gives  us  the  trinity  of 
Consciousness,  Force  and  Substance. 

The  Occultist  does  not  forget  this  trinity  and  the 
part  each  portion  plays  in  life.  The  atom  as  viewed 
by  the  Occultist  is  dual,  and  has  its  consciousness 
aspect  and  its  substance  aspect.  Its  positive  aspect 
is  consciousness,  its  negative  aspect  is  substance 
and  these  two  are  inseparable. 

The  physicist  does  not  recognize  the  conscious 
side  of  the  atom  and  the  Christian  Scientist  does  not 
recognize  the  physical  side,  but  the  Occultist  main- 
tains that  the  physical  side  of  the  atom  is  the  ve- 
hicle for  consciousness ;  and  this  duality  of  the  atom 
is  the  keynote  to  Occultism.  The  knowledge  of  this 
is  essential  to  the  conscious  production  of  phenom- 
ena. Understanding  this,  you  may  realize  how 
the  visible  Universe  is  produced,  how  forces  are 
controlled,  how  cures  are  performed  by  mental 
therapeutics.  It  all  resolves  itself  into  the  action  of 
mind  upon  mind  or  upon  lesser  and  other  forms  of 
consciousness.  Matter  is  subject  to  mind  when 
mind  controls  form  through  the  consciousness  side 
of  substance,  by  making  and  modifying  vibrations 
the  cause  of  form. 

The  world  of  form  is  but  atoms  vibrating  at  cer- 
tain established  rates.  Vibrations  which  appeal  to 
us  as  sound  have  no  inherent  sound,  but  are  due  to 
rates  of  vibration  that  impinge  upon  the  nerves  of 


42  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

the  ear  and  are  transmitted  as  vibrations  to  the 
brain  and  thence  to  the  mind.  Those  vibrations 
which  appeal  to  the  eye  as  color  have  no  light  per  se, 
but  are  rates  of  vibration  that, impinge  upon  the 
optic  nerves  and  are  transmitted  to  the  brain  as 
vibrations.  All  is  vibration — vibration  modified  by 
Consciousness  behind  it  or  by  individual  conscious- 
ness within  it.  All  sensation  is  but  the  effect  of 
vibration  upon  the  mind. 

For  example:  I  am  looking  at  a  glass  bulb  that 
contains  an  electric  light.  It  gives  me  the  impres- 
sion of  something  we  call  light.  The  ether  is  made 
to  vibrate  at  a  certain  rate  and  these  vibrations  im- 
pinge upon  the  optic  nerves  and  reach  the  objective 
mind  within  the  brain,  and  I  have  the  sensation  of 
something  we  have  agreed  to  call  light.  Thus  we 
see  that  it  all  comes  back  to  a  mental  basis  for  a 
material  world;  since  all  kinds  of  physical  phenom- 
ena are  produced  by  the  same  substance  vibrating  at 
different  rates. 

For  example,  hold  a  poker  in  the  fire.  After  a 
while  it  becomes  so  brilliant  that  we  call  it  white. 
Then  take  it  out  of  the  fire  and  watch  it.  After  a 
little  time  it  will  change  from  white  to  yellow,  then 
to  red,  and  finally  back  to  black.  It  was  the  same 
group  of  atoms  vibrating  at  different  rates  which 
produced  the  separate  and  distinct  colors  of  the 
poker.  The  impinging  of  the  vibrations  upon  our 
minds  caused  our  conceptions  of  the  changing 
colors ;  and  the  same  law  which  produced  the  colors 
for  us  produces  the  physical  Universe  or  the  ex- 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      43 

ternal  manifested  world.  Therefore  it  is  the  rela- 
tionship of  our  individual  consciousness  to  the  ex- 
ternal world  of  vibrations  which  makes  the  world 
for  us. 

Now  let  us  consider  Divine  Mind  in  its  subjective 
manifestations.  The  lower  portion  of  the  unpar- 
ticled  part  of  that  Consciousness  is,  in  the  scientific 
phraseology  of  the  physicists,  the  ether.  The  two 
are  identical.  Ether,  like  the  atom,  is  something 
that  the  scientific  world  says  must  exist;  it  is  a 
logical  necessity,  but  no  scientist  has  ever  seen  the 
ether;  he  only  knows  that  it  produces  certain  phe- 
nomena. This  ether  is  a  subtle,  universal,  magnetic, 
fluidic  medium  in  which  all  manifested  things  are 
embedded :  this  is  about  the  consensus  of  the  opinion 
of  the  scientific  world. 

We  will  now  consider  these  qualities  of  the  ether 
from  a  mental  standpoint,  because  this  course  is 
particularly  designed  to  teach  you  the  nature  and 
powers  of  mind. 

First  of  all  the  ether  is  subtle.  It  interpenetrates 
all  other  forms  of  existence,  all  other  forms  of  phy- 
sical life.  Why  do  you  see  me?  Why  do  you  see 
the  light?  Because  of  this  subtle  essence  that  is 
between  us.  I  am  talking  about  an  aspect  of  the 
Universal  Mind  and  you  must  remember  that  this 
subtle  essence  is  Consciousness  or  Mind.  You  are 
permeated  with  it,  the  atoms  of  your  body  are  held 
together  in  groups  by  it ;  this  subtle  consciousness  is 
in  every  portion  of  your  being.  You  are  swimming, 
living,  existing  in  a  sea  of  it. 


44  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Secondly,  we  must  understand  that  the  ether  is 
universal ;  it  cannot  be  excluded  from  any  plane  or 
place.  This  Universal  Consciousness  is,  as  its  name 
implies,  everywhere.  It  is  important  to  remember 
this  universality  because  in  thought  transference  or 
in  treating  mentally  a  person  at  a  distance  you  must 
realize  that  there  is  no  separateness  in  mind.  Upon 
the  plane  of  mind  the  thought  passes  immediately 
from  one  to  another ;  so  you  do  not  have  to  make  a 
great  effort  to  reach  another  mind.  You  can  reach 
it  instantly  and  easily  through  the  medium  of  this 
Mind  because  it  is  universal. 

Thirdly,  the  ether  is  magnetic.  It  attracts  all  its 
parts,  and  every  part  and  particle  of  itself  being  in- 
terdependent none  are  independent.  Every  particled 
part  of  this  sea  of  magnetism,  every  individualized 
part,  whether  it  be  an  atom,  a  man  or  a  sun,  is  a 
magnetic  center ;  and  because  the  whole  is  magnetic 
each  part  must  be  magnetic.  Evolution  can  only 
be  carried  on  by  reason  of  these  centers  and  it  was 
for  this  purpose  that  they  were  brought  into  exist- 
ence. Every  center  in  the  Universal  Consciousness 
should  be  preserved.  Therefore  your  first  duty  to 
God  and  to  yourself  is  to  preserve  your  own  mag- 
netic center.  Occultism  teaches  no  sacrifice  of  self 
because  evolution  would  be  retarded  instead  of  aided 
by  such  teaching. 

By  this  I  do  not  wish  to  be  misunderstood  as  say- 
ing there  should  be  no  self-denial,  or  that  there 
should  be  no  giving  up  of  personal  or  selfish  com- 
forts or  superfluities ;  but  I  do  mean  that  the  indi- 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      45 

vidual  center  should  not  be  destroyed  or  depleted 
until  it  becomes  an  imperfect  medium  for  Deity  to 
work  through.  Occultism  says  no  one  should  sacri- 
fice his  life  for  another  because  every  life  is  im- 
portant to  Deity,  and  for  aught  we  know  the  life  to 
be  sacrificed  may  be  the  more  important  center  of 
the  two  at  that  juncture  of  history.  I  am  not 
speaking  of  sentimentality,  but  I  am  stating  a  law. 

Again,  no  one  should  give  and  continue  to  give 
of  his  own  spiritual,  mental  or  physical  force  until 
he  is  a  bankrupt.  A  depleted  center  is  of  no  use  to 
Deity  in  the  evolutionary  struggle.  Look  over  the 
list  of  those  persons  who  are  practicing  mental 
therapeutics,  or  think  of  your  altruistic  friends  who 
are  bearing  other  people's  burdens  and  see  how  the 
law  has  acted  in  their  cases.  Are  not  many  of  them 
mentally,  physically  or  financially  depleted  and  of 
comparative  little  utility  because  of  this  conscious 
or  unconscious  violation  of  the  law?  I  am  not 
eulogizing  heroics,  sounding  the  glory  of  martyr- 
dom nor  criticising  the  victims  of  vanity ;  but  I  am 
stating  an  immutable  law. 

I  know  that  altruism  is  said  to  have  been  taught 
by  the  Nazarene  Occultist,  and  admitting  that  after 
three  or  four  generations  had  passed  away,  he  was 
correctly  reported  in  this  respect — in  the  records 
which  you  now  have — then  his  teachings  could  only 
have  been  intended  to  neutralize  the  intense  and 
almost  universal  selfishness  which  prevailed  at  that 
time.  Both  altruism  and  selfishness  are  extreme 
views,  while  intelligent  individualism  is  the  mid- 


46  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

die  ground  and  is  in  accordance  with  the  law 
that  I  have  stated.  It  is  fortunate,  however,  that 
selfishness  is  so  earnestly  condemned  and  that  altru- 
ism is  more  preached  than  practiced  or  humanity 
would  not  be  able  to  press  on  in  compliance  with  the 
law  as  it  is  doing  at  present.  So  your  duty  to  your- 
self and  to  Deity  is  to  become  a  positive  center ;  and 
the  higher  your  rate  of  vibration  the  more  powerful 
do  you  become.  No  one  ever  succeeded  in  life  who 
was  continually  in  a  negative  condition.  To  be  suc- 
cessful you  must  be  positive.  "Unstable  as  water, 
thou  shalt  not  succeed,"  says  the  Scripture.  You 
must  be  strong  and  positive,  and  then  whatever  you 
undertake  will  end  successfully. 

Did  you  ever  stand  on  the  bank  of  a  river  and 
watch  the  water  as  it  whirled  round  a  center  or 
vortex  in  the  middle  of  the  stream?  Did  you  ob- 
serve how  that  vortex  drew  to  itself  everything  that 
came  floating  down  upon  the  current?  That  was  an 
active,  positive  center  distinct  from  any  other  center 
or  vortex  in  that  stream,  and  because  of  its  individu- 
alized strength  it  had  the  power  of  attraction  and 
everything  was  drawn  into  it. 

So  it  is  that  men  become  vortices  in  this  great 
magnetic  sea  of  consciousness  and  according  as 
they  became  positive  and  strong  do  they  draw  to 
themselves  whatsoever  they  desire.  But  we  cannot 
help  others  until  we  become  strong  ourselves.  We 
must  have  force  before  we  can  impart  it  to  others. 
We  must  know  before  we  can  teach. 

Fourth,  the  ether  is  fluidic.    This  unparticled  sea 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      47 

of  Divine  Consciousness  flows  according  to  the  im- 
petus given  to  it  both  by  Deity  Itself  and  by  man ; 
and  it  moves  in  the  direction  in  which  it  is  sent. 
This  is  another  important  fact  to  remember,  because 
you  will  learn  that  there  are  currents  within  this 
fluidic  sea  and  later  on  you  will  be  taught  how  to 
attach  yourself  to  those  currents  and  forces  and  to 
draw  such  as  you  desire  into  yourself.  There  are 
also  currents  of  love  and  you  shall  be  taught  how  to 
attach  yourself  to  draw  love  to  you.  There  are  de- 
structive currents  and  you  shall  be  taught  how  to 
avoid  attaching  yourself  to  them. 

Suppose  you  were  a  thousand  miles  from  home 
and  you  desired  to  help  some  member  of  your 
family.  With  your  power  of  thought  you  could 
make  this  fluidic  force,  this  Consciousness  and  life 
flow  into  the  person  that  you  desire  to  help.  So  it 
is  very  important  that  you  should  realize  something 
about  the  nature  of  this  fluidic  Universal  Conscious- 
ness. It  is  a  wonderful  storehouse  in  which  every- 
thing that  is  conceivable  to  the  mind  of  man  is 
stored;  and  his  thoughts  going  forth  into  it  can 
bring  back  to  him  just  what  he  desires. 

Fifth,  this  Consciousness — the  ether — is  the 
medium  in  which  all  things  are  embedded  and 
through  which  all  things  are  connected  with  each 
other.  Because  it  is  a  medium  there  is  no  friction 
between  any  parts  of  it  per  se;  it  yields  to  you  and 
yet  connects  you  with  any  or  all  of  its  parts.  It 
does  not  impair  or  retard  the  force  you  sent  out 
into  it,  and  it  brings  back  to  you  precisely  what  you 


48  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

send  forth.  If  you  think  love  to  a  friend,  your  love 
will  go  to  him  precisely  as  you  think  it,  and  with  no 
greater  nor  less  intensity  than  you  feel  it.  If  there 
were  any  friction  in  this  Universal  Ether  or  Divine 
Consciousness  we  should  not  be  able  to  receive  the 
light  from  the  stars.  The  worlds  would  some  time 
stop  in  their  orbits  because  no  world  would  be  able 
to  revolve  for  more  than  a  limited  time,  if  there  were 
the  least  resistance  to  its  progress  through  space. 

Consciously  direct  your  thought  into  the  Ether 
and  it  is  sure  to  reach  the  person,  place  or  thing  to 
which  you  send  it.  If  you  want  to  give  me  a  mental 
treatment,  you  think  kindly,  positively  of  me,  and 
this  thought  going  from  you  into  the  Ether  makes  a 
little  pathway  for  itself  until  it  reaches  me.  For  the 
time  being  there  is  a  magnetic  cord  established  be- 
tween us  and  over  that  magnetic  cord  you  send  your 
thoughts  of  health  and  strength.  No  wave  of 
thought  vibration  can  ever  be  impaired.  Modern 
scientists  agree  that  at  the  same  place  and  at  the 
same  time  there  may  be  an  infinite  variety  of  etheric 
waves  of  different  lengths,  with  none  of  them  inter- 
fering with  each  other.  We  can  see  waves,  which  we 
call  light,  as  they  are  sent  to  us  from  the  stars ;  and 
could  we  but  translate  the  messages  those  waves  of 
light  or  vibrations  are  bringing  to  us,  we  should  be 
wiser  and  better  than  we  are.  But  we  know  that 
the  color  of  a  star  indicates  its  state  of  development, 
and  in  this  way  we  are  able  to  determine  which  of 
the  heavenly  bodies  are  below  or  above  us  in  their 
evolution. 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      49 

Few  persons  know  scarcely  anything  about  the 
magnetic  power  which  is  daily  given  to  all  living 
creatures  by  our  sun.  We  know  that  the  sunshine 
often  dispels  the  fears  which  have  come  upon  us  at 
night.  We  know  that  difficulties  which  seem  insur- 
mountable as  viewed  by  moonlight,  melt  before  us 
like  mist  when  the  beautiful,  golden  rays  of  the  sun 
are  turned  upon  them.  We  may  be  courageous, 
positive  and  strong  while  the  sun  shines,  but  when 
it  has  disappeared  below  the  horizon  and  the 
shadows  of  night  have  settled  down  upon  us 
our  courage  dwindles,  and  we  often  become  weak 
and  negative.  More  souls  pass  out  of  their  bodies  at 
night  than  while  the  sun  is  shining;  and  peo- 
ple who  are  ill  grow  worse  as  the  sun  com- 
mences to  decline.  All  these  conditions  are  gov- 
erned by  the  law  of  vibration.  The  light  waves  or 
vibrations  from  the  sun  are  the  strongest,  the  most 
powerful  and  the  most  magnetic  that  come  to  us 
from  any  source.  They  vibrate  at  the  rate  of  a 
golden  yellow,  and  therefore  are  a  continuous  flow 
of  force  currents  to  this  world  and  to  all  other  planets 
near  enough  to  receive  their  vibrations.  When 
a  person  or  any  other  individualized  consciousness 
concentrates  its  thoughts  upon  the  sun  it  receives  a 
mental  and  a  magnetic  treatment  from  that  great  cen- 
ter, since  the  concentration  of  thought  opens  a  direct 
channel  for  the  great  force  to  flow  through  to  the 
one  concentrating  upon  it;  and  the  vibrations  both 
mental  and  physical  of  that  person  or  creature  are 


50  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

raised  in  proportion  to  the  intensity  of  its  powers  of 
concentration. 

Divine  Mind  is  precisely  analogous  to  a  sensitive 
plate  and  each  human  thought  makes  a  picture  on 
that  plate.  By  thought  you  make  the  exposure,  and 
the  thing  pictured  will  in  time  become  your  own,  for 
you  are  attached  to  your  creations  and  time  develops 
the  picture  for  you.  If  you  hold  the  image  you  have 
made  long  enough  you  will  get  a  perfect  picture ;  if 
you  think  idly,  then  you  have  made  what  the  photog- 
raphers would  call  an  under  exposure  and  the  pic- 
ture is  not  full,  clear  and  perfect,  and  many  of  the 
details  are  left  out ;  but  by  holding  the  picture  firmly 
and  strongly,  you  make  it  a  permanency  and  then 
it  is  yours,  for  thoughts  become  things. 

Mental  pictures  are  first  mental  things,  but  after 
a  time  they  become  physical  things  or  draw  physical 
things  to  them,  for  the  great  Consciousness  gives 
back  to  us  precisely  what  we  send  into  it.  It  gives 
to  us  whatever  we  ask  of  it,  and  our  ignorance  in 
making  demands  will  be  no  protection  to  us.  The 
only  way  that  evolution  can  go  on  is  by  Divine 
Mind  granting  every  request  that  we  persistently 
make ;  it  is  in  this  way  we  gain  wisdom  through  ex- 
perience. 

This  automatic  action,  as  it  were,  of  Divine  Con- 
sciousness was  fully  taught  by  Jesus,  but  is  as  lit- 
tle understood  or  believed  in  by  his  present  so-called 
followers  as  it  was  by  those  whom  he  originally  tried 
to  teach.  You  remember  he  said :  "Judge  not  that 
ye  be  not  judged ;  for  with  what  judgment  ye  judge 


Divine  Mind,  Its  Nature  and  Manifestation.      51 

ye  shall  be  judged ;  and  with  what  measure  ye  meet 
it  shall  be  measured  to  you  again."  And  again  he 
said:  "Ask,  and  it  shall  be  given  unto  you;  seek, 
and  ye  shall  find ;  knock,  and  it  shall  be  opened  unto 
you."  And  when  he  said  these  things  he  was  stat- 
ing what  he  knew  was  a  law  which  could  be  put 
into  operation  then  or  at  any  time  afterwards. 


LECTURE  THREE. 


DUAL  MIND  AND  ITS  ORIGIN. 

If  we  let  a  ray  of  light  pass  through  a  series  of 
colored  glasses  we  find  that  the  color  of  the  last 
glass  it  passes  through  is  the  tint  that  the  light  will 
take;  and  the  tint  of  the  light  will  be  accentuated 
because  the  colored  glass  modifies  certain  other 
colors  not  consonant  with  its  own  nature,  while 
it  permits  the  rays  of  a  similar  vibration  to  its 
own  to  pass  through.  The  same  conditions  hold 
good  with  consciousness.  Consciousness  is  limited 
in  its  manifestation  by  the  medium  or  media  through 
which  it  manifests.  For  an  illustration,  take  the 
consciousness  of  a  flower,  an  animal,  and  a  man. 
There  is  a  limitation  of  the  expression  in  each  of 
these,  by  reason  of  the  form  in  which  it  manifests. 
And  consciousness  also  accentuates  the  peculiar  na- 
ture through  which  it  manifests.  It  accentuates  that 
particular  portion  of  the  Universe,  or  planet,  or  man, 
in  which  it  manifests. 

Concentrate  your  consciousness — your  mind — on 
your  right  foot,  and  hold  it  there  for  awhile,  and  you 
will  draw  the  blood  from  other  parts  of  the  body  into 
the  foot,  until  it  will  become  swollen  and  red.  You 
are  thinking  of  the  foot  to  the  exclusion  of  all  the 
rest  of  the  body.  That  portion  of  your  conscious- 
ness which  is  functioning  in  the  foot  is  accentuated 
52 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  53 

above  the  consciousness  which  remains  in  the  rest 
of  the  body.  Carry  this  a  step  further,  and 
we  find  that  the  law  operates  precisely  in  the  same 
manner  with  the  entire  man.  Consciousness  accent- 
uates that  portion  of  the  man  in  which  its  greatest 
expression  is.  For  that  reason,  since  the  early  Chris- 
tian centuries  the  body  has  been  mistaken  for  the 
man,  because  it  was  the  last  medium  through  which 
his  consciousness  or  mind  expressed  itself — it  was 
that  portion  of  the  man  which  was  accentuated  by 
the  consciousness. 

Very  little  was  known  of  the  real  nature  of  man 
after  the  second  and  third  centuries  of  the  Christian 
era,  except  that  he  was  a  body  which  was  generally 
regarded  as  the  man.  The  theologians  knew  there 
was  a  body,  and,  consequently,  in  their  theology  the 
body  was  put  forth  primarily  as  man.  They  thought 
he  had  a  soul,  and  taught  certain  doctrines  concern- 
ing that  indefinite  something  which  they  designated 
as  his  soul.  This  term  "soul"  is  still  somewhat  in- 
definite at  the  present  day.  Any  of  the  leading  dic- 
tionaries will  give  you  a  large  variety  of  meanings 
attached  to  the  word.  The  theologians  could  not  de- 
fine or  picture  the  soul,  but  they  accepted  the  Jew- 
ish conception  of  the  Adamic  man,  and  believed  that 
Adam  was  created  out  of  the  dust  of  the  ground ;  and 
that  afterward  God  breathed  into  him  the  breath  of 
life ;  and  they  regarded  that  breath  as  his  soul. 

We  find  in  the  Hebrew  Scriptures— the  Old  Testa- 
ment— the  expression,  a  "nephesh  for  a  nephesh" 
(a  life  for  a  life),  and  "He  that  taketh  the  nephesh 


54  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

of  his  neighbor's  ox,"  etc.,  showing  that  the  exoteric 
Jews  had  no  conception  of  a  soul  as  distinct  from  the 
Universal  life  principle — and  they  have  very  little 
conception  of  it  to-day.  So  when  the  Christians  ren- 
dered in  theological  language  the  Jewish  thought, 
they  called  the  life  principle  of  man  his  soul.  Later 
in  the  centuries  the  "moral  philosophers"  appeared 
on  the  scene,  and  were  almost  as  indefinite  in  their 
teachings  concerning  his  true  nature  as  were  the 
theologians.  These  moral  philosophers — whom  we 
now  call  metaphysicians — also  taught  something 
about  a  soul  or  mind ;  but  there  was  a  confusion  of 
words,  due,  of  course,  to  a  confusion  of  thought,  and 
instead  of  teaching  what  soul  or  mind  was,  they  de- 
scribed the  phenomena  of  mind. 

For  instance,  in  the  writings  of  Sir  William  Ham- 
ilton, who  was  one  of  the  representative  thinkers  of 
his  time,  which  was  not  far  from  our  own  age,  we 
read  the  discussions  concerning  mind,  and  we  find 
the  question:  how  many  articles  or  subjects  can 
the  human  mind  be  conscious  of  at  one  time?  Also 
discussions  of  the  peculiar  phases  of  sleep-walking, 
unconscious  memory,  etc ;  in  other  words,  the  study 
of  the  phenomena  of  mind.  All  the  Occidental  an- 
cient moral  philosophy  concerning  the  inner  mind, 
soul  or  spirit,  as  they  were  indefinitely  designated, 
was  really  what  we  now  call  physiological  psychol- 
ogy, and  pertained  entirely  to  the  action  of  mind 
upon  or  through  the  body. 

Since  the  consciousness  manifested  chiefly  in  the 
external  man  in  those  days,  and  since  the  body,  plus 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  55 

a  little  indefinite  something  more,  was  regarded  as 
the  man,  it  was  only  natural  that  the  theologians 
should  have  taught  the  doctrine  of  a  physical  resur- 
rection. Many  of  them  did  not  know  how  to  ac- 
count for  immortality  unless  there  was  to  be  a  phys- 
ical resurrection — at  least  this  was  true  after  the 
Council  of  Nice.  We  find  at  that  time  that  the 
Christian  and  the  Jew  were  the  only  two  relig- 
ionists in  the  world  who  feared  a  dissolution  of 
the  physical  body;  and  naturally  there  arose  the 
barbaric  practice  of  burying  dead  bodies  for  the 
purpose  of  preserving  them.  The  Egyptians  pre- 
served their  dead  only  for  the  supposed  purpose  of 
having  their  old  atoms  to  use  again  on  their  return 
to  earth. 

The  majority  of  people  of  the  present  day  have 
not  progressed  much  further  than  the  theologians 
and  the  metaphysicians  of  the  early  centuries.  Ask 
ten  men  whom  you  may  meet  in  every-day  life,  what 
a  man  is,  and  nine  of  them  will  describe  the  physical 
body.  You  will  be  surprised  to  learn  how  little  is 
known  of  anything  besides  the  physiological  man. 
I  have  been  told  by  persons  who  were  considered  in- 
telligent, that  the  soul  is  a  body  something  like  the 
physical,  only  more  beautiful,  because  it  has  wings 
like  a  bird ;  and  I  believe  that  was  the  common  con- 
ception of  the  people  of  the  middle  ages.  Many  of 
the  old  paintings  represent  the  soul  as  a  body,  float- 
ing through  space  with  a  pair  of  wings.  The  body, 
plus  wings,  was  the  artistic  conception  of  the  psy- 
chic or  real  man  in  ancient  times. 


56  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

A  few  days  ago  I  asked  a  well  known  Church 
woman  in  the  city,  what  she  thought  a  soul  looked 
like.  After  considerable  thought  upon  the  subject 
she  replied  that  she  did  not  know,  but  supposed  it 
was  something  white  that  fluttered  like  a  sheet  in 
the  wind.  I  asked  another  the  same  question,  and 
she  said  she  was  not  certain,  but  thought  it  was 
something  like  an  alarm  clock  attached  to  the  body, 
which  kept  ringing  when  one  did  something  one 
ought  not  to  do.  With  nine-tenths  of  the  people 
there  is  no  distinction  between  themselves  and  their 
bodies,  for  man  knows  very  little  of  himself  at  the 
present  time ;  and  it  would  be  well  for  each  of  you 
to  stop  now  and  see  what  definition  you  can  formu- 
late concerning  yourself. 

In  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century,  the  more 
adventurous  minds  commenced  to  investigate 
the  nature  of  man  and  the  fact  of  whether  or  not 
immortality  was  demonstrable,  and  there  arose 
what  is  known  as  the  Spiritualistic  movement,  or 
Spiritualism.  In  this  country,  and  in  France,  the 
investigators  maintain  that  there  is  a  persistency  of 
consciousness  after  the  dissolution  of  the  physical 
body,  and  that  certain  phenomena  are  produced  by 
it.  This  was  the  first  general  deliberate  attempt  in 
Christian  times  to  discover  the  soul  of  man,  and 
the  first  effort  to  collect  a  sufficient  amount  of  sci- 
entific data  on  which  to  base  a  philosophy  concern- 
ing the  psychic  man.  They  have  given  us  no  phil- 
osophy yet,  although  their  investigations  com- 
menced sometime  in  the  middle  of  last  century. 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  57 

The  principal  tenet  of  their  belief  is  that  beyond  this 
earth  life  there  is  somewhere  an  eternal  progression 
for  the  human  soul,  which  certainly  is  an  improve- 
ment on  the  old  orthodox  Christian  belief  in  stag- 
nation by  reason  of  the  wearing  of  crowns,  waving 
of  palms,  and  singing  hallelujahs  forever  and  for- 
ever. 

The  next  movement  along  this  line  commenced 
in  1875,  and  was  known  as  the  Theosophical  move- 
in  ent.~  This  was  started  for  the  purpose  of  study- 
ing, among  other  things,  man,  and  particularly  his 
latent  psychic  faculties.  This  movement  gave  a 
more  exhaustive  and  complete  theory  concerning 
the  nature  of  man  than  was  then  to  be  had  in  the 
Occident.  Vague  it  was  at  times,  and  the  several 
sections  of  the  movement  differed  in  belief  among 
themselves.  Some  made  man  a  combination  of 
seven,  and  others  of  fourteen,  different  personalities 
or  principles ;  but,  nevertheless,  it  was  an  attempt  to 
reach  something  besides  the  physical. 

In  1886  there  was  another  movement  along  the 
line  of  investigation  of  psychic  phenomena.  This 
was  called  the  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  and 
worked  along  the  same  general  lines  that  the  Spirit- 
ualists were  investigating.  The  object  to  be  attained 
was  to  establish  scientific  demonstrations  of  the 
persistency  of  man's  consciousness  after  death,  and 
many  scholarly  men  and  women  became  investi- 
gators with  this  object  in  view.  If  anything  more 
than  what  the  Spiritualists  had  learned  before  them 
has  been  gained  along  this  line  it  has  not  been  re- 


58  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

ported  to  the  world,  though  I  have  no  doubt  that 
any  real  genuine  enlightenment  from  this  society 
would  be  thankfully  received  by  many. 

Finally  came  that  body  of  investigators  whose 
practice  is  called  Hypnotism,  and  which  is  mesmer- 
ism, revamped  and  renamed.  Hypnotism  has  done 
a  little  good  for  the  world,  and  it  will  do  consider- 
able harm  before  it  becomes  generally  condemned. 
We  want  to  see  the  good  in  everything,  so  I  shall 
call  your  attention  to  a  few  facts  that  Hypnotism 
has  brought  forth.  It  has  proved  to  the  minds  of 
many,  and  it  has  certainly  given  evidence  to  the 
minds  of  all  who  have  investigated  it,  that  the  body 
of  man  is  not  the  man.  For  when  a  person  is  put 
into  the  state  of  hypnosis,  the  body  is  unable  to 
think,  to  feel,  or  to  function  in  any  way.  If  the  body 
were  the  man,  sleep  could  not  extinguish  entirely  his 
consciousness ;  there  would  be  enough  left  to  regis- 
ter sensation.  If  you  stick  a  pin  into  the  flesh  of  a 
man  in  ordinary  sleep  you  will  get  a  quick  response, 
and  unless  you  are  very  active  you  may  regret  mak- 
ing the  investigation.  But  if  you  stick  a  pin  into 
the  flesh  of  a  man  who  is  in  a  state  of  complete  hyp- 
nosis, you  will  find  there  is  no  response  from  your 
victim.  This  shows  that  in  one  case  there  is  con- 
sciousness, and  in  the  other  there  is  none.  This  evi- 
dence is  sufficient  to  prove  to  the  unprejudiced  in- 
vestigator that  the  body  is  not  the  man,  but  there  is 
within  the  body  a  recording  something  that  is  capa- 
ble of  sensing  things  external  to  the  body.  The 
phenomena  of  Hypnotism  also  show  that  the  mind  is 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  59 

not  the  product  of  the  molecular  vibration  of  the 
brain,  because  during  hypnosis,  and  while  the  brain 
is  quiescent,  the  mind  continues  to  be  active. 

These  experiments  are  further  verified  by  the  use 
of  anaesthetics.  When  a  person  is  etherized,  the  ef- 
fect is  the  same  as  if  he  were  hypnotized;  because 
in  both  cases  the  mind,  or  the  real  man,  is  forced 
out  of  his  physical  body,  which  is  then  incapa- 
ble of  functioning,  and  remains  inert  until  the 
reasoning  principle  returns  to  its  habitation.  Many 
times,  a  subject  has  been  put  into  hypnosis  and  the 
consciousness  sent  out  of  the  body  to  a  distant  place, 
whence  it  has  brought  a  correct  report  of  things 
that  were  occurring  there  at  that  time.  Hypnotism, 
therefore,  has  done  two  very  good  things.  It  has 
scientifically  proved  that  man  is  mind,  the  thinker, 
and  that  mind  can  persist  separate  and  apart  from 
its  vehicle,  the  body ;  and  if  that  condition  can  exist 
for  one  moment,  then  there  is  no  logical  reason  why 
it  should  not  exist  throughout  eternity.  Hence  we 
have  here  some  scientific  data  for  immortality. 

Investigations  upon  these  subjects  were  first  made 
in  recent  times  in  Paris,  and  in  Nancy,  France; 
afterward  in  the  United  States  and  in  Sweden,  and 
finally  throughout  the  world.  Investigators  found 
that  there  was  a  mind  capable  of  experiencing  sen- 
sations which  ordinarily  functioned  in  the  human 
body,  but  which  could  be  separated  from  it  as  I  have 
just  described.  But  they  also  found  that  there  is  a 
secondary  mind  in  man,  and  that  after  the  first  mind 
is  well  under  the  control  of  the  hypnotist,  there  is 


60  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

still  a  secondary  mind  or  intelligence  which  may  act 
independently  of  the  first.  This  secondary  con- 
sciousness they  named  the  subliminal  self.  So  they 
have  found  that  man  is  not  only  a  mind,  but  he  is 
two  minds.  In  the  course  of  time  the  first  conscious- 
ness that  was  reached  became  known  as  the  object- 
ive mind,  and  the  second  consciousness  as  the  sub- 
jective mind. 

If  mind  is  something — and  Hypnotism  has  shown 
that  it  is — then  mind  must  have  a  form  and  a  color. 
We  cannot  conceive  of  anything  in  the  Universe 
that  is  without  form  and  color.  Individualization, 
separateness  requires  form  and  color,  or  those  con- 
ditions could  not  exist.  A  great  mass  of  evidence 
has  been  collected  from  various  sources  upon  this 
subject.  Spiritualistic  Societies,  the  Society  for  Psy- 
chical Research,  and  clairvoyants,  seers  and  sensi- 
tives all  over  the  world  agree  upon  the  one  point 
that  mind  has  form.  They  differ  somewhat  upon 
the  question  of  whether  or  not  it  has  color,  but  that 
is  a  logical  necessity.  They  say  that  mind  has  form, 
and  that  its  form  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  body 
which  it  inhabits,  and  that  the  real  man  is  an  ether- 
ialized  prototype  of  his  physical  self.  In  other 
words,  the  physical  self  is  but  a  materialized  picture 
of  the  inner  man  or  mind.  All  evidence  agrees  on 
that  point,  and  if  human  testimony  is  worth  any- 
thing, it  is  certainly  conclusive  in  this  case,  be- 
cause there  is  a  unanimity  of  evidence  from  four 
great  sources  which  do  not  harmonize  on  many 
other  points. 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  61 

About  color  there  is  a  great  difference  of  opinion, 
due  to  a  difference  in  the  respective  development  of 
the  observers.  Let  me  illustrate.  A  woman  is  walk- 
ing along  the  street,  and  observes  another  woman 
approaching.  She  says :  "What  a  beautiful  dress," 
and  is  asked  what  is  its  color,  and  answers  "blue." 
She  is  asked  how  it  is  made,  but  can  only  say  that 
its  general  effect  is  beautiful,  and  its  color  is  blue. 

Another  woman  who  saw  the  dress  would  tell 
you  its  color  and  how  it  was  made.  Still  another 
would  agree  with  both  the  others,  and  would  add, 
"And  the  woman  who  wore  the  dress  was  more 
beautiful  than  her  dress."  The  last  observer  was 
able  to  see  not  only  the  dress,  the  design,  and  the 
figure,  but  also  the  character  of  the  woman  within. 

It  is  the  same  with  the  four  classes  of  observers 
or  investigators  that  have  been  mentioned;  some 
are  persons  who  ordinarily  function  solely  upon  the 
objective  plane  of  life,  but  who,  under  exceptional 
conditions,  sometimes  see  the  outlines  or  figure  of 
the  psychic  or  real  man.  Other  more  careful  observ- 
ers having  advanced  to  the  point  where  they  can 
command  the  higher  natural  forces,  and  can  func- 
tion upon  the  subjective  side  of  life,  may  see  not 
only  the  outlines  of  these  mind  or  soul  forms,  but 
see  them  as  plainly  as  they  see  physical  forms 
around  them  in  the  ordinary  affairs  of  life.  Then 
there  are  others  who  have  advanced  so  far  in  their 
evolution  that  they  can  look  beneath  the  form  of 
the  man  and  see  the  character.  These  persons  are 
the  Seers,  or  higher  Clairvoyants.  The  last  two 


62  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

classes  agree  with  the  Occultist  in  making  the  as- 
sertion that  the  character  of  mind  is  always  known 
by  its  color ;  and  this  must  be  scientifically  true,  be- 
cause there  could  be  no  differentiation  of  form  ex- 
cept through  the  vibration  which  manifests  as  color. 
So  it  is  a  logical  necessity,  as  well  as  a  matter  of 
testimony,  that  every  human  mind  or  psychic  man 
has  form  and  color. 

There  is  one  thing  in  the  world  that  cannot  lie, 
and  that  thing  is  vibration.  The  vibrations  of  a  man 
determine  his  form  and  his  color.  And  his  thought 
or  character  is  the  cause  of  his  vibrations,  as  we  shall 
see  later,  in  another  lecture.  As  far  as  we  have  gone 
we  have  learned  that  man  is  identical  with  mind, 
and  that  this  mind  has  form  and  color ;  also  that  man 
has  two  consciousnesses  which  are  called  the 
objective  and  the  subjective  minds.  The  normal 
color  of  the  subjective  mind  of  man — known  in  the 
theological  parlance  as  spirit — is  blue.  It  is  of  the 
same  nature  as  the  Ether  or  Divine  Consciousness 
whence  it  came.  The  color  of  the  objective  mind 
of  man — called  by  the  theologians  the  soul — is 
green ;  and  man's  predominating  color  is  always  de- 
termined by  the  mind  which  dominates.  Having 
arrived  at  this  point,  we  will  now  examine  the  origin 
of  these  respective  aspects  of  man,  the  objective  and 
the  subjective. 

Evolution  is  not  carried  on  equally  throughout  all 
its  parts.  We  find  this  is  true  wherever  we  investi- 
gate the  operations  of  this  law.  But  Evolution  is 
carried  on  by  the  creation  of  centers  within  the 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  63 

Great  Consciousness,  and  by  enlarging  and  preserv- 
ing these  centers.  As  actual  reform  is  carried  on  in 
a  great  city  by  the  reformation  first  of  individuals, 
and  not  with  trying  to  reform  the  whole  public  at 
once,  so  it  is  with  the  great  law  which  works 
through  centers  or  individuals. 

The  Occultist  differs  from  the  physicist  in  his 
views  of  the  law  which  governs  natural  selection. 
The  physicist  illustrates  the  working  of  this  law  in 
a  manner  something  like  this:  A  little  Hottentot, 
who  represents  the  highest  degree  of  development 
in  his  particular  locality,  wanders  into  the  forest, 
and  meets  another  little  Hottentot  who  is  the  high- 
est exponent  of  the  development  of  another  tribe. 
These  two,  being  male  and  female,  meet  by  chance, 
and  by  natural  impulse  or  selection  marry,  and  raise 
a  family  of  little  Hottentots  to  a  higher  degree  of 
development  than  themselves.  This  is  the  law  of 
natural  selection,  and  chance  determines  the  entire 
evolutionary  career  of  the  race,  according  to  the 
physicist. 

But  the  Occultist  has  a  maxim  that  "nature,  un- 
aided, fails,"  and  believes  that  there  could  be  no  evo- 
lution except  by  working  through  conscious  centers. 
For  instance,  our  sun  is  a  center  purposely  formed, 
and  through  that  center  great  life  force  is  conscious- 
ly sent  out  to  smaller,  weaker  centers,  imbuing  them 
with  life,  and  promoting  other  forms  of  life  and 
growth  upon  them  as  it  does  upon  this  planet  of 
ours.  It  is  the  same  with  species  and  types;  it  is 
not  a  natural  selection,  in  the  sense  of  nature  work- 


64  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

ing  blindly,  that  causes  evolution,  but  it  is  rather  an 
artificial  selection,  or  the  raising  up  of  individual 
parts.  Take  man,  for  instance;  the  Adept  selects 
such  advanced  men  and  women  as  he  knows  are  ca- 
pable of  evolving  more  rapidly  than  others,  and  by 
putting  his  own  force  and  strength  upon  them  he 
aids  in  their  development,  and  in  this  way  these 
selected  individuals  are  assisted  upward  till  they  be- 
come the  highest  expressions  of  manhood  and  wom- 
anhood. 

In  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms  man  takes 
the  highest  expression  of  this  or  that  form  or  type, 
and  through  artificial,  conscious  selection,  unites 
them  with  other  forms,  and  thus  produces  a  higher 
type  of  expression,  as  in  the  breeding  of  animals  and 
the  grafting  of  trees  and  flowers.  The  Occultist  in- 
sists that  the  purposiveness  of  Deity,  as  Nature,  is 
present  in  all  Its  individual  parts,  but  becomes  fully 
manifested  only  through  the  conscious  co-operation 
of  the  more  evolved  centers  of  Itself. 

Understanding  this,  we  are  now  prepared  to  ex- 
amine the  origin  and  development  of  the  subjective 
and  objective  minds  of  man.  In  passing,  it  should 
be  stated  that  while  we  will  use  the  terms  objective 
and  subjective  mind  as  being  one  of  the  accepted  ex- 
pressions of  the  modern  psychologists,  we  do  not 
fully  endorse  their  views  as  to  the  nature  and  power 
of  those  respective  minds. 

First,  then,  as  to  the  origin  of  the  subjective  mind. 
The  Occultists  teach  that  the  subjective  mind  of 
man  came  direct  from  the  substance  of  Deity,  much 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  65 

as  Minerva  sprang  from  the  head  of  Zeus.  With 
the  co-operation  of  the  Elohim — those  great  Ones 
who  said  "Let  us  make  man  in  our  own  image,"  the 
Supreme  Consciousness  coalesced  within  Itself 
quantities  of  Its  particled  portion  until  mind  forms 
were  created.  The  atoms  were  drawn  together  by 
the  power  of  attraction,  and  it  was  thus  that  the  sub- 
jective minds  of  men  were  born.  Let  us  illustrate: 
Imagine  the  atmosphere  to  be  the  Supreme  Con- 
sciousness. Look  forth  into  it  on  a  cloudless  day. 
The  atmosphere  itself  is  heterogeneous  matter  and 
is  ordinarily  invisible.  After  a  while  you  may  see  a 
gradual  condensation  of  some  portion  of  the  atmos- 
phere, a  center  is  being  formed,  a  cloud  appears 
which  is  of  the  same  nature  as  a  part  of  the  atmos- 
phere, and  sufficiently  condensed  to  become  visible 
to  you.  It  is  in  this  manner  that  individual  minds 
are  born  out  of  the  Ether.  Take  again  as  an  illus- 
tration something  we  have  used  before — a  pan  of 
freezing  water.  At  first  the  water  is  homogeneous ; 
then  there  is  a  lowering  of  the  rates  of  vibration  of 
the  atoms  that  compose  it,  and  gradually  some  tiny 
crystalline  forms  appear.  These  crystalline  forms 
are  attracted,  and  small  pieces  of  ice  appear  in  the 
pan.  This  ice  is  of  the  same  nature  as  the  water, 
yet  it  is  separate  and  distinct  from  it.  It  is  in  the 
same  manner  that  the  substance  of  Deity  is  con- 
densed and  the  individual  subjective  minds  of  men 
are  born.  Those  of  you  who  have  read  my  wife's 
Occult  novel,  "Mata,  the  Magician,"  will  remember 


66  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

this  same  thought  is  there,  poetically  and  beautifully 
expressed,  as  follows: 

"It  thinks,  and  Suns  spring  into  shape ; 
It  wills,  and  Worlds  disintegrate; 
It  loves,  and  Souls  are  born." 

It  is  not  my  purpose  to  enter  into  the  details  of 
the  working  of  the  law  of  evolution,  but  to  help 
you  understand  your  own  nature  I  shall  give  briefly 
an  outline  of  the  evolutionary  steps  that  are  taken 
by  the  subjective  mind  in  its  process  of  individual- 
ization.  As  you  have  seen,  an  immediate  condensa- 
tion of  consciousness  within  the  Great  Conscious- 
ness is  caused  by  the  desire  of  Deity  to  manifest  or 
express  Itself  in  individualized  forms,  and  this  ex- 
pression is  brought  into  actuality  through  the  in- 
strumentality of  the  Planetary  Spirits,  or  Elohim. 
These  great  Beings  send  their  thoughts  to  a  desig- 
nated point  in  the  Ether,  form  a  center,  and  through 
the  vibrations  of  their  united  thought-forces  cause 
an  assembling  of  atoms  whose  conscious  sides  re- 
spond to  these  vibrations. 

The  physicists  tell  us  that  with  the  grouping  of 
atoms  into  molecular  life  a  new  individuality  is  al- 
ways created,  which  is  something  more  than  the  sum 
total  of  its  constituent  parts.  The  Occultist  says 
this  is  true  because  the  union  of  the  conscious 
side  of  the  atoms  causes  the  character  or  individu- 
ality to  appear  in  the  group.  So,  when  the  many 
atomic  consciousnesses  are  compressed  into  an  oval 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  67 

form  by  the  Elohim,  there  comes  into  being  an  or- 
ganized consciousness  or  mind,  which  controls  its 
atomic  parts.  These  Ether-born  minds  thenceforth 
take  up  their  evolution  and  gather  and  store  their 
experiences  as  they  progress,  and  by  such  methods 
become  more  and  more  individualized.  The  evo- 
lution of  these  subjective  minds  begins  upon  the 
subjective  side  of  life,  and  for  ages  they  continue 
to  progress  upon  planets  that  are  composed  of  such 
tenuous  matter  that  they  are  invisible  to  the  pres- 
ent sight  of  men.  After  these  subjective  minds 
have  become  thoroughly  individualized,  they — or 
rather  we,  for  these  subjective  minds  are  ourselves 
— become  ready  to  incarnate  in  animal  forms  on 
this  physical  world  of  ours. 

There  are  two  classes  of  subjective  minds  which 
always  incarnate  at  the  same  time  on  a  physical 
world.  Those  who  have  been  brought  into  exist- 
ence in  the  Cosmic  Day,  and  those  who  have  at- 
tempted their  evolutionary  career  one  or  more  times 
before  in  some  other  Cosmic  Day,  but  who  failed, 
and  are  now  making  another  attempt  to  go  on  in 
their  evolution.  For  a  center  of  consciousness  may 
not  be  successful  in  the  particular  period  of  evolu- 
tion in  which  it  is  first  brought  into  existence;  and 
salvation  is  not  a  mere  matter  of  faith  or  belief 
alone.  It  depends  entirely  upon  one's  self  whether 
one  reaches  Godhood  from  manhood  in  the  evo- 
lutionary period  in  which  one  sets  out. 

Until  the  half-way  point  was  reached  in  the  evo- 
lutionary career  of  man  and  this  planet,  the  Uni- 


68  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

versal  Consciousness  pushed  men  forward.  After 
the  half-way  point  was  passed,  and  men  had  reached 
their  mental  majority,  and  should  have  become  in- 
dividualized, the  old  order  of  things  was  changed. 
Men  must  use  their  own  minds  now,  and  must  make 
use  of  the  knowledge  they  have  of  Nature's  laws, 
if  they  expect  to  go  on  in  their  evolution.  It  is 
progress,  or  fail  and  return  into  space,  to  remain  un- 
til another  period  of  evolution  shall  commence,  when 
souls  shall  again  attempt  to  perpetuate  their  indi- 
viduality. Ultimately,  man's  destiny  is  to  evolve  to 
something  higher  than  manhood — he  is  to  some  time 
reach  Godhood. 

Your  attention  will  now  be  called  to  one  or  two 
characteristics  of  the  divine  portion  of  man.  The 
subjective  mind  is  the  divine  nature,  because  it 
comes  direct  from  the  Great  Universal  Conscious- 
ness; it  is  the  Logos,  or  the  Word  made  flesh.  It 
is  the  highest  because  it  is  the  first  expression  of 
the  Universal  Consciousness ;  it  is  close  to  the  heart 
of  God,  is  the  first  born,  and  carries  the  first  im- 
press of  Deity.  Because  its  evolution  was  entirely 
subjective  before  it  reached  this  planet,  and  because 
it  now  functions  normally  on  the  plane  of  causes — 
the  mental  plane — it  is  the  intuitive  portion  of  man. 
It  is  that  portion  which  knows  without  reasoning, 
which  apprehends  immediately  upon  the  presenta- 
tion of  a  subject;  that  which  sees  causes. 

The  objective  mind  evolves  entirely  upon  this 
planet.  It  is  an  offspring  of  this  particular  period 
of  evolution,  and  its  nature  is  the  result  of  its  ob- 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  69 

jective  growth  and  physical  experiences.  Briefly, 
its  evolution  is  as  follows :  Deity  settles  down  as  a 
great  mass  or  cloud  of  consciousness  upon  a  planet, 
and  vitalizes  it,  gives  life  and  form  to  it,  and  gives 
to  the  mineral  kingdom  its  form  of  consciousness  by 
ensouling  it.  I  do  not  mean  you  to  understand  that 
this  lower  kingdom  becomes  wholly  individualized. 
For  instance,  in  the  vast  fields  of  coal  and  iron  the 
Great  Consciousness  has  not  individualized  be- 
cause that  form  of  expression  restricts  individual- 
ization;  but  when  we  examine  the  higher  portion 
of  this  kingdom — the  precious  stones — we  find  that 
here,  in  a  measure,  individualization  has  begun.  A 
part  of  the  mass,  a  few  of  the  purest  and  best  atoms, 
those  which  are  capable  of  taking  a  more  rapid 
rate  of  vibration,  have  become  separated  from  the 
others,  and  have  made  an  attempt  at  individualiza- 
tion. Then  a  part  of  the  Great  Consciousness  passes 
on  to  the  vegetable  kingdom,  where  we  have  first 
the  lichens  and  grasses;  each  of  these  is  a  sepa- 
rate and  distinct  form,  and  consciousness  is  there 
individualized ;  but  the  individualization  is  not  per- 
petual because  of  the  frailty  and  lack  of  persist- 
ence of  the  forms.  Thence  the  consciousness  passes 
into  the  bush,  and  afterward  it  reaches  perfect  indi- 
vidualization in  the  tree,  the  highest  form  of  life  in 
the  vegetable  world. 

Then  a  portion  of  the  Great  Consciousness  sweeps 
on  into  the  animal  kingdom  and  ensouls  the  low- 
est animal  forms,  and  gradually,  as  evolution  pre- 
pares better  vehicles,  these  souls  of  animals,  or  indi- 


70  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

vidualized  intelligences,  re-embody  themselves  in 
higher  physical  forms  of  animals,  until  we  have  the 
elephant,  the  horse  and  the  dog.  Here  individuali- 
zation  becomes  not  only  consciousness,  but  it  be- 
comes mind,  and  persists  as  animal  mind.  It  re- 
embodies  itself  in  one  form  after  another,  and  the 
dog,  for  instance,  comes  back  many  times  to  this 
material  plane  a  dog,  and  gains  more  strength  and 
knowledge  by  its  experiences.  Finally  these  indi- 
vidualized animal  minds  pass  into  the  ape  forms,  and 
thence  into  physical  human  bodies,  and  though  these 
bodies  disintegrate  and  pass  away,  the  animal 
minds  persist  and  reincarnate  and  ultimately  become 
the  objective  minds  of  men. 

When  these  quasi-human  forms  have  reached  the 
point  of  development  where  they  are  capable  of 
becoming  vehicles  for  the  Divine  Subjective  minds, 
then  the  union  of  the  subjective  and  objective  minds 
takes  place.  The  subjective  minds  come  to  earth 
for  the  purpose  of  getting  experience  upon  this  ma- 
terial plane,  that  they  may  become  wiser,  and  more 
strongly  individualized;  also  that  they  may  raise 
the  animal  minds  or  objective  consciousnesses, 
which  they  ensoul,  to  a  higher  and  a  better  condi- 
tion of  development;  for  with  the  interblending  of 
the  Divine  Subjective  mind  with  the  objective  or 
animal  mind  comes  a  permanent  union,  and  those 
"whom  God  hath  joined  together"  cannot  be  sepa- 
rated without  a  tremendous  loss  to  each,  as  will  be 
shown  in  the  lecture  on  "Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic 
Forces  and  their  Dangers." 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  71 

After  the  union  of  the  subjective  and  objective 
minds  has  taken  place,  this  united  entity  continues 
to  incarnate  and  re-incarnate  as  its  physical  bodies 
wear  out.  Understanding  this,  you  will  be  better  able 
to  appreciate  the  meaning  of  Chapter  Six  of  Genesis, 
where  it  says:  "And  it  came  to  pass,  when  (ani- 
mal) men  began  to  multiply  on  the  face  of  the  earth, 
and  daughters  were  born  to  them  (that  is  when 
sufficient  forms  were  created),  that  the  sons  of  God 
(the  subjective  minds)  saw  the  daughters  of  men 
(the  objective  minds)  that  they  were  fair;  and  they 
took  them  wives  (blended  with  them)  of  all  which 
they  chose." 

Genesis  is  the  disarranged,  mutilated  remnant  of 
a  Chaldean  Occult  record,  and  even  in  its  present 
form,  with  the  interpolations  it  has  received,  it  con- 
tains great  truths.  Some  day  an  Occultist  may 
re-arrange  the  original  parts  of  the  Bible,  and  in- 
terpret it  for  the  enlightenment  of  the  world,  but  as 
it  is,  it  contains  much  for  those  who  are  able  to 
read  and  understand. 

The  objective  mind,  or  animal  intelligence,  is  the 
reasoning  or  intellectual  faculty  of  man;  it  is  that 
faculty  which  becomes  educated  through  external 
means,  and  learns  from  books;  it  is  that  faculty 
which  is  taught  to  reason ;  and  it  is  also  the  seat  of 
sensation.  If  it  were  not  for  the  objective  mind  we 
could  not  feel,  as  was  shown  heretofore  when  we 
cited  Hypnotism.  The  objective  mind  is  also  some- 
times designated  as  the  brain  intelligence.  Because 
it  gains  its  knowledge  entirely  from  externals,  it  is 


72  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

oftener  wrong  than  right  in  relation  to  true  causes. 
It  only  takes  into  account  effects  or  phenomena,  and 
then,  not  having  all  the  facts,  in  most  cases  it  is 
incapable  alone  of  deducing  a  right  conclusion. 

When  the  subjective  mind  has  incarnated  into 
the  objective  mind  we  have  the  real  psychic  man, 
the  dual  man.  This  interbl^nding  of  these  two 
consciousness  makes  one  form,  and  in  that  form 
it  perpetuates  itself.  Why  is  not  a  man  as  wide 
as  he  is  long?  It  is  because  of  the  form  of  the  inner 
man  which  is  the  model  for  the  physical  body.  The 
inner  man  is  the  magnetic  matrix  into  which  the 
physical  particles  are  built.  Thus  it  is  that  all  form 
has  its  mental  basis.  Before  a  form  can  exist  on 
the  physical  plane  it  must  be  created  on  the  mental 
plane. 

Since  both  these  minds  are  condensations  of 
the  Universal  Mind,  they  both  have  naturally  the 
characteristics  of  that  Mind.  The  Universal  Con- 
sciousness brought  them  into  existence  through  Its 
creative  capacity,  so  both  these  minds  have  the 
power  of  creating.  The  great  trouble,  however,  is 
this:  the  objective  mind,  through  its  animal  ex- 
perience, has  acquired  the  animal  fear.  This  is 
the  chief  characteristic  of  the  animal  mind  and  is 
its  mainspring  of  action;  hence  most  of  the  crea- 
tions of  the  objective  mind  are  the  product  of  fear 
or  are  colored  by  fear. 

For  example,  our  mothers  stamp  fear  upon  us 
before  we  are  born,  and  continue  to  do  it  after  we 
are  born,,  and  until  we  have  grown  old  enough  to 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  73 

fear  for  ourselves.  They  create  diseases  for  us 
through  their  fears  of  disease  until  we  get  old 
enough  to  create  our  own  diseases.  And  that 
wretched  fear  follows  us  from  the  cradle  to  the 
grave.  We  are  afraid  we  shall  not  succeed  in  busi- 
ness, and  we  create  our  own  failures.  We  fear  we 
shall  not  have  money  enough  to  pay  our  bills  for 
the  current  month,  and  we  generally  lack  something 
because  we  have  created  that  lack.  We  fear  bad 
luck,  disasters,  and  death,  and  it  is  indeed  a  wonder 
that  man  has  not  swept  himself  off  this  planet 
through  his  fearful  creations.  The  offsprings  of  fear 
are  the  creatures  and  creations  of  this  objective 
mind;  and  the  subjective  mind  which  is  within  the 
objective  mind  accepts  the  unfortunate  creations, 
believes  the  misrepresentations,  and  unites  its  own 
forces  with  those  of  the  objective  mind  in  bringing 
the  pictured  calamities  into  real  external  existence. 
For  example,  I  once  knew  a  little  girl  who  was 
named  after  her  aunt,  and  her  mother  often  said 
to  the  child:  "I  hope  you  will  not  have  a  cancer, 
and  die  with  it,  as  your  aunt  did."  After  a  time  a 
small  bunch  appeared  on  the  child's  cheek — follow- 
ing an  abrasure — and  her  mother  said :  "That  looks 
as  if  it  might  become  a  cancer."  After  awhile,  when 
the  child's  attention  was  called  to  the  tiny  bunch  on 
her  face,  she  would  gravely  declare  that  it  was  her 
cancer.  Her  mother  had  suggested  the  thought, 
and  the  little  one  had  accepted  it.  When  she  grew 
to  womanhood  the  cancer  developed,  as  the  mother 


74  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

and  child  had  feared  it  would,  and  it  had  to  be  re- 
moved. 

I  knew  a  man  who  was  very  fortunate  in  busi- 
ness and  was  successful  in  everything  he  undertook. 
One  day  a  friend  said  to  him:  "Your  luck  can't 
always  go  one  way."  Very  soon  he  began  to  think 
about  that  remark,  and  after  awhile  he  accepted  it 
as  a  prophecy,  and  then  began  looking  for  his  good 
luck  to  change  to  bad.  Soon  little  things  began  to 
go  wrong,  and  every  time  some  misfortune  came 
to  him  he  remembered  what  his  friend  had  said. 
Then  he  commenced  looking  for  mishaps  every- 
where, and  within  five  years  from  the  time  he  ac- 
cepted the  unfortunate  suggestion  he  was  ruined 
financially  and  physically. 

Here  are  three  rules  which  it  might  be  well  for 
you  to  remember  in  this  connection : 

First.  The  dominant  consciousness  always  con- 
trols the  creations. 

Second.  The  environment  shows  which  conscious- 
ness controls. 

Third.  Ignorance  of  the  laws  of  life  excuses  no 
one. 

If  you  continue  to  create  ignorantly  you  will  suf- 
fer the  same  as  though  you  knew  the  law,  because 
an  unwise  use  of  the  law  brings  unfortunate  results 
the  same  as  the  wise  use  of  the  law  brings  good  re- 
sults. God  always  gives  you  in  time  precisely  what 
you  create,  and  if  you  allow  your  objective  mind  to 
do  the  creating  you  must  accept  its  creations ;  your 
ignorance  will  not  excuse  you.  If  you  should  kill 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin.  75 

a  man  because  you  were  angry,  whether  you  knew 
it  was  against  the  law  of  the  State,  or  not,  you  would 
be  punished.  It  is  the  same  with  the  moral  law. 
Both  your  minds  can  create  good,  but  the  objective 
mind  usually  does  not  do  so  until  it  has  been  prop- 
erly trained.  The  subjective  mind  of  man  must  con- 
trol the  objective  mind  and  its  fears  before  he  can 
make  pictures  that  will  bring  him  pleasant  environ- 
ment. Every  time  an  unpleasant  thought  or  fear 
comes  to  your  mind,  banish  it.  Every  time  a  thought 
of  disease  comes,  blot  it  out.  You  can  do  it,  be- 
cause you  have  the  divine  power,  and  can  control 
your  objective  mind  which  is  your  instrument  and 
vehicle.  If  a  mental  picture  of  disease  comes  into 
your  mind  and  you  let  it  remain,  it  will  become  a 
physical  reality;  but  if  you  destroy  it  the  moment 
you  see  it,  nothing  can  come  from  it.  In  the  place 
of  a  picture  that  you  do  not  like,  make  one  that 
you  do  like.  Make  your  thought  picture,  and  God, 
in  time,  will  fulfill  your  desires  thus  expressed.  But 
you  never  will  be  successful,  you  never  will  reach 
the  highest  of  your  possibilities  until  you  control 
your  own  objective  mind  and  its  forces.  How  to 
do  that  we  will  take  up  in  the  next  lecture,  which 
we  will  call  "The  Art  of  Self-Control." 

One  more  word  in  regard  to  the  dual  man,  which 
is  mind.  This  dual  nature  of  mind  or  man  will  ex- 
plain many  of  the  contradictions  of  human  nature. 
It  will  give  a  full  explanation  of  original  sin,  which 
is  nothing  more  nor  less  than  the  uncontrolled  ani- 


76  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

mal  nature  of  the  objective  mind,  which  expresses 
itself  whenever  and  wherever  the  opportunity  is 
given,  until  it  has  been  disciplined.  If  you  want  a 
colt  to  become  a  racehorse  you  will  take  great  care 
to  have  it  thoroughly  broken  and  trained  before  you 
enter  it  for  a  race;  and  still  you  permit  the  animal 
objective  mind  of  your  own  nature  to  remain  un- 
trained, and  to  dominate  you  while  you  are  trying 
to  use  it  in  the  race  of  life. 

If  you  remember  the  distinction  of  this  dual  na- 
ture of  mind  you  will  understand  what  has  para- 
lyzed the  force  of  the  Christian  Scientists  and  has 
filled  them  with  great  terror.  They  describe  a  some- 
thing outside  of  Deity  that  is  not  divine,  but  which 
creates,  but  can  only  create  evil.  They  do  not  know 
where  it  comes  from ;  they  merely  know  it  is  in  man. 
That  cult  calls  it  malicious  animal  magnetism,  and 
makes  of  it  a  personal  devil;  but  it  is  nothing  but 
the  objective  mind  of  man,  uncontrolled.  It  is  a 
part  of  the  Universal  Consciousness,  and  therefore 
not  devoid  of  good.  It  is  more  ignorant  than  bad, 
and  makes  mistaken  creations  in  its  undeveloped 
state. 

Understanding  the  lower  nature  of  man,  you  un- 
derstand the  nature  of  evil.  Evil  is  but  the  crea- 
tions through  ignorance  of  this  objective  mind.  It 
is  a  misdirection  of  the  creative  forces;  it  is  the 
permitting  of  the  unenlightened  animal  mind  to 
make  creations.  Many  of  the  old  theological  ques- 
tions and  the  Christian  and  Mental  Science  ques- 


Dual  Mind  and  Its  Origin. 


77 


tions  of  modern  times  are  understood,  and  are  ex- 
plainable, when  one  understands  the  dual  mind  of 
man. 


LECTURE  FOUR. 
THE  ART  OF  SELF-CONTROL. 

One  of  the  reputed  wisest  men  that  ever  lived  said : 
"He  that  is  slow  to  anger  is  better  than  the  mighty ; 
and  he  that  ruleth  his  spirit  than  he  that  taketh  a 
city."  Of  course  I  refer  to  Solomon. 

This  lecture  on  "The  Art  of  Self-Control"  might 
be  said  to  be  an  amplification  of  that  utterance  of 
Solomon.  I  am  free  to  admit  that  it  is  much  easier 
to  talk  about  self-control  than  it  is  to  practice  it, 
but,  nevertheless,  there  are  certain  ways  whereby 
we  can,  in  a  measure,  exercise  self-control.  The  fact 
that  Solomon  made  the  remark  quoted  does  not  ap- 
peal to  one  particularly,  unless  one  can  see  the  rea- 
son for  so  acting.  There  are  persons  who,  if  they 
read  in  the  Scriptures  that  certain  things  should  be 
done,  will  do  them  because  the  Scriptures  com- 
mand them  to  be  done.  And  there  are  persons 
who  will  do  things  because  their  parents  or  someone 
whom  they  love  or  honor  says  such  a  thing  should 
be  done.  In  such  cases  the  effort  is  but  a  perfunc- 
tory one,  unless  a  reason  for  so  acting  be  given,  and 
very  little  good  comes  of  the  obedience  to  the  com- 
mand under  either  of  those  circumstances.  Let  us 
see  if  there  is  a  reason  for  Solomon's  aphorism. 

It  goes  without  saying  that  no  one  can  be  truly 
great  who  has  not  the  power  of  self-control.  It  does 
78 


The  Art  of  Self-Control.  79 

not  matter  how  many  virtues  a  man  may  have,  if 
he  allows  himself  to  give  way  to  paroxysms  of  an- 
ger and  loses  his  self-control  at  critical  moments, 
his  greatness  becomes  largely  diminished;  neither 
can  he  become  really  successful  in  any  chosen  field 
or  line  of  work  unless  he  has  first  developed  self- 
control.  Napoleon  said  if  he  could  keep  his  anger 
below  his  chin  he  could  control  men.  In  other 
words,  when  his  emotions  became  dominant  then 
self-control  was  lost  and  when  he  lost  control  of 
himself  he  had  no  power  to  control  others.  Grant's 
great  strength  lay  in  his  power  of  self-control  at 
critical  moments.  George  Dewey  destroyed  the 
Spanish  Fleet  quickly  and  completely  because  he 
controlled  himself  first  and  afterward  his  men.  His 
command  to  his  Captain  was :  "When  you  are  ready, 
Gridley,  you  may  fire."  Imagine,  if  you  can,  a 
statesman  who  has  not  developed  this  art  of  self- 
control  and  you  will  find  that  at  the  moment  he 
needs  self-mastery  most  it  utterly  deserts  him.  Im- 
agine one  of  the  great  financiers  of  this  country  not 
having  sufficient  control  over  his  tongue  to  keep 
his  plans  secret,  and  how  long  would  he  be  a  factor 
in  the  world  of  finance? 

In  the  case  of  physical  health,  unless  there  is  an 
approximate  control  of  the  emotions,  there  will 
never  be  permanent  good  health,  because  there  can- 
not be  perfect  health  without  perfect  self-control. 
The  reactions  which  naturally  follow  outbursts  of 
emotions  bring  about  physical  disorder;  if  not  im- 
mediately, then  in  the  course  of  time.  And  above 


8o  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

all,  there  can  be  no  progress  made  in  Occultism  un- 
less there  be  self-control ;  and  that  which  really  de- 
termines the  growth  of  a  student  is  his  power  to 
control  himself.  Without  this  power,  intuition  can- 
not be  fully  awakened,  clairvoyance  and  clairaudi- 
ence  cannot  manifest  and  his  development  is  other- 
wise greatly  retarded.  A  student  cannot  make  use 
of  the  higher  forces  of  nature  unless  he  becomes 
self-controlled  first.  '  A  mental  healer  cannot  assist 
or  relieve  a  patient  so  long  as  he  is  in  a  perturbed 
condition  of  mind  himself.  A  student  cannot  dom- 
inate his  own  body  unless  his  mind  is  poised  and 
undisturbed.  He  cannot  concentrate  on  a  person 
at  a  distance  and  get  his  thoughts,  unless  he  has  the 
power  to  make  his  own  objective  mind  quiescent 
while  the  power  of  concentration  is  put  into  action. 
Some  of  the  reasons  I  have  given  why  we  should 
master  the  art  of  self-control  may  not  interest  or 
appeal  to  many  of  you  from  an  intellectual  stand- 
point, but  here  is  one  that  may.  Every  time  you 
lose  your  self-control,  your  aura  or  photosphere  be- 
comes so  actively  inharmonious  that  all  the  crea- 
tions you  wish  to  draw  to  you  are  repelled.  You 
cannot  be  a  successful  creator  upon  the  spiritual, 
mental  or  physical  planes  unless  you  are  able  to 
control  your  emotions  sufficiently  to  enable  that 
which  you  have  created  to  come  to  you.  Another 
reason  for  exercising  self-control  is  this:  One  can 
never  escape  from  pain  until  self-control  is  acquired. 
One  can  never  reach  the  place  of  peace  until  the 
conquest  of  self  is  made. 


The  Art  of  Self-Contral  81 

As  understood  by  the  Occultist,  self-control  is  the 
control  of  the  objective  mind  by  the  subjective 
mind.  Another  way  of  expressing  the  same  thing 
is  to  say  that  self-control  is  the  control  of  the  emo- 
tions by  the  higher  mind.  This  latter  statement  may 
seem  more  tangible  to  you.  Sensations  and  emo- 
tions are  the  manifestations  of  the  objective  mind 
of  man  as  we  have  heretofore  seen. 

One  complete  conquest  of  the  objective  mind  by 
the  subjective  mind  is  sufficient  to  establish 
self-mastery.  In  other  words,  we  do  not  have  a 
new  objective  mind  to  conquer  in  each  natural  in- 
carnation. To  illustrate  this  let  us  take  hydrogen 
to  represent  the  objective  mind  and  oxygen  to  rep- 
resent the  subjective  mind.  Now  the  time  for  the 
union  of  the  two  minds  has  come  and  the  oxygen 
blends  with  the  hydrogen  making  a  drop  of  water. 
The  union  of  the  two  in  the  drop  of  water  corre- 
sponds to  the  union  which  makes  the  real  inner 
man.  This  drop  of  water  may  be  at  one  time  in 
a  clay  jar,  at  another  time  in  an  iron  vessel,  and 
another  day  in  a  crockery  bowl,  and  then  in  a  Dres- 
den cup;  it  is  the  same  drop  of  water  no  matter 
what  its  environment  may  be.  And  so  it  is  during 
all  your  different  incarnations;  there  is  but  one 
entity,  the  psychic  man,  who  is  composed  of  these 
two  minds  incarnating  together  in  different  physi- 
cal bodies ;  and  if  you  once  conquer  your  objective 
mind  you  will  be  its  ruler  throughout  eternity. 
Looked  at  in  this  light,  it  does  not  seem  such  a 
hard  thing  to  do  when  you  consider  that  you  have 


82  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

only  one  conquest  to  make.  But  while  there  may 
be  but  one  conquest  there  will  be  many  battles  to 
fight  and  it  is  during  these  battles  that  victory  is 
constantly  shifting,  sometimes  being  on  one  side 
and  sometimes  on  the  other;  but  finally  the  con- 
quest must  be  made  by  the  subjective  mind. 

In  the  early  part  of  our  evolution  the  pleasures 
of  physical  and  animal  life  seem  to  be  greater  than 
the  pain  and  consequently  the  subjective  mind,  in 
order  that  it  might  receive  the  pleasures  of  sensa- 
tion, permits  the  objective  mind  to  have  absolute 
dominion.  But  any  force  grows  with  use  and  the 
objective  mind,  as  it  manifests  itself  more  and  more, 
becomes  so  strong  that  finally  the  reactions  that 
follow  pleasure  bring  more  pain  than  pleasure,  and 
the  subjective  mind  awakens  to  the  situation  and 
begins  to  demand  a  way  out  of  pain.  We  have  been 
indulging  in  these  sensual  pleasures  during  all  the 
ages  past;  life  after  life  we  have  given  way  to 
the  objective  mind,  and  have  allowed  it  absolute 
sway  and  dominion,  because  we  thought  there  was 
more  pleasure  to  be  had  out  of  life  in  that  way. 
But  reactions  came  and  pain  taught  us  that  there 
is  a  better  way  to  live.  Pain  is  the  evidence  that 
the  objective  mind  has  not  been  fully  conquered. 

In  the  last  lecture  you  were  shown  some  of  the 
characteristics  of  both  minds,  but  there  are  a  few 
other  facts  which  I  will  mention  which  may  possi- 
bly help  you  to  identify  yourselves  with  the  sub- 
jective mind,  or  your  real  self.  The  subjective 
mind  is  the  "I  am  I"  of  man ;  it  is  the  self-conscious- 


The  Art  of  Self-Control.  83 

ness,  or  that  part  of  him  which  studies  the  states  of 
his  consciousness  and  modes  of  mind.  It  is  the 
center  of  consciousness  in  him  and  until  it  has  been 
awakened  there  can  be  no  self-control.  Emotions 
will  not  control  themselves,  and,  as  the  term  implies, 
there  must  be  a  Self  which  can  control  them.  There 
are  two  aspects  of  both  these  minds,  the  positive 
and  the  negative.  In  the  subjective  mind  the  nega- 
tive side  is  the  intellectual  and  the  positive  side  is 
the  will.  But  at  this  period  in  our  history  the  in- 
tellectual side  of  our  natures  is  awakened  and  the 
will  is  not.  The  objective  mind  also  has  two  as- 
pects, the  negative  or  reasoning  side,  and  the  posi- 
tive side  or  desire.  These  two  aspects  in  the  ob- 
jective mind  are  blended  to  a  large  extent  and  be- 
cause they  are  thus  united  that  mind  is  strong. 

Our  first  great  object  should  be  to  awaken  the 
will  portion  or  force  aspect  of  the  subjective  mind, 
in  order  that  the  will  and  the  intellect,  united,  may 
control  the  objective  mind.  There  is  force  enough 
in  the  positive  side  of  this  subjective  mind  to  ac- 
complish anything  it  desires  and  therefore  it  is  to 
our  interest  to  awaken  this  latent  but  tremendous 
force  in  ourselves.  Let  us  see  how  it  works.  I  say 
I  wish  to  do  something.  That  is  the  desire  or  the 
positive  side  of  my  objective  mind  expressing  itself. 
But  another  aspect  of  my  mind  replies:  "No,  you 
must  not  do  that  because  it  is  not  right."  Here  are 
certain  aspects  of  my  two  minds  in  activity,  the 
desire  or  positive  portion  of  my  objective  mind  and 
the  intellectual  or  negative  portion  of  my  subjective 


84  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

mind ;  and  if  my  will  or  positive  portion  of  my  sub- 
jective mind  is  not  awakened,  it  will  be  more  than 
likely  that  the  positive  side  of  my  objective  mind 
will  win  the  battle.  But  if  the  positive  side  of  my 
objective  mind  says  I  want  to  do  something,  and 
my  will  or  the  positive  side  of  my  subjective  says : 
"You  do  not  want  to  do  anything  of  the  kind  and 
you  shall  not''  then  there  is  put  into  action  a  greater 
force  than  desire  and  the  desire  is  overcome  by  the 
higher  or  positive  side  of  my  subjective  mind — the 
will. 

The  emotions  are  natural  forces  on  their  proper 
plane;  and  because  they  are  natural  many  persons 
think  it  unnecessary  to  control  them ;  and  many  who 
would  like  to  control  them  do  not  know  how  be- 
cause they  do  not  understand  their  own  natures. 
Because  a  thing  is  natural  is  no  reason  why  it  should 
not  be  controlled.  Electricity  is  a  natural  force. 
Used  properly  for  illuminating  purposes,  it  is  a  very 
good  thing.  But  it  is  a  natural  force  and  can  be 
used  to  destroy  human  bodies  and  valuable  prop- 
erty also,  so  there  may  be  a  perversion  of  natural 
forces  through  the  misuse  of  them,  or  by  not  con- 
trolling them.  To  understand  our  emotions  we  must 
analyze  them,  since  they  seem  to  make  up  the  great- 
er portion  of  ourselves,  and  their  name  is  legion.  In 
appearance  they  are  many,  and  yet,  on  close  analy- 
sis, we  find  only  four  basic  ones  and  the  battle  will 
not  seem  so  hard  if  we  can  realize  this. 

The  first  great  emotion,  the  one  that  causes  us 
the  most  needless  suffering,  is  Fear.  The  second 


The  Art  of  Self -Control.  85 

cardinal  emotion  is  Sensuousness.  The  third  basic 
emotion  is  Sex  Desire;  and  the  fourth,  and  most 
subtle  of  all,  is  Vanity.  These  are  the  basic  ele- 
ments of  the  emotional  nature.  You  cannot  con- 
ceive of  any  emotion  that  has  not  its  origin  in  one 
or  more  of  these  four.  Let  us  briefly  examine  the 
nature  of  each  of  these  emotions,  since  the  larger 
part  of  the  actions  of  mankind  are  directly  attribu- 
table to  one  or  more  of  them. 

Fear  is  the  cause  of  most  anger,  most  jealousy, 
most  murder,  failure,  theft,  doubt,  discouragement, 
despondency  and  many  other  lesser  inharmonious 
conditions.  Analyze  any  one  of  these  states  of 
mind,  and  you  will  find  that  fear  is  the  father  of  it. 
Eliminate  fear  and  you  have  destroyed  the  root  or 
basis  for  many  of  the  emotions  which  lead  men 
astray.  Begin  your  fight  directly  upon  fear — not 
the  many  phases  of  it — and  a  tremendous  amount  of 
force  will  be  saved;  for  it  must  be  conquered  be- 
fore very  much  will  be  accomplished  in  life.  You  re- 
member you  were  taught  in  another  lecture  that 
the  mind  is  magnetic,  and  draws  to  itself  whatever 
it  frequently  thinks  about.  When  you  are  constantly 
fearing  something,  you  are  drawing  toward  you  the 
thing  you  fear,  and  the  reason  humanity  has  not 
been  swept  from  this  planet  long  ago  is  because 
it  has  shifted  its  fears  from  one  object  to  another 
so  often  that  it  has  never  held  to  one  thing  long 
enough  to  destroy  itself. 

To  accomplish  rapidly  the  destruction  of  this 
great  enemy  it  is  well  to  begin  by  controlling  some 


86   '          The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

of  its  grosser  forms,  such  as  physical  cowardice. 
Great  numbers  of  men  and  women  are  inwardly 
the  most  wretched  cowards  and  yet  suppress  the 
external  expression  of  their  fears  because  ashamed 
of  them.  Here  is  where  the  fear  of  public  opinion  is 
greater  than  the  fear  of  something  else,  and  the 
emotion  is  not  conquered  but  shifted.  Try  to  con- 
quer your  cowardice,  because  it  is  an  enemy  to  you 
and  is  retarding  your  development. 

Then  there  are  very  few  persons  who  do  not  fear 
someone.  You  may  not  be  conscious  of  the  fact, 
but  if  you  stop  to  think,  you  will  see  that  it  is  true. 
You  dread  to  meet  Mr.  Blank  because  you  do  not 
know  what  he  will  think  of  you,  or  because  he  is 
wealthy  and  you  are  not,  and  you  are  afraid  you 
cannot  make  so  great  a  display  as  he  can.  Or  per- 
haps you  have  heard  that  Mr.  Blank  is  a  great  states- 
man, and  you  are  in  awe  of  statesmen ;  so  you  stam- 
mer and  grow  red  and  wish  you  were  a  thousand 
miles  away  when  you  are  introduced  to  him.  The 
first  thing  to  do  toward  overcoming  this  fear  of 
persons  is  to  declare,  "I  am  not  afraid  of  Mr. 
Blank,  nor  of  anyone  else."  Then  calling  to 
mind  the  image  of  Mr.  Blank,  say  to  it  as  if  he 
were  there  in  person,  "Mr.  Blank,  you  have  not  the 
power  to  make  me  uncomfortable,  and  I  am  not 
afraid  of  you,"  and  continue  to  repeat  this  asser- 
tion till  your  perturbation  has  subsided  and  you  feel 
that  you  could  face  him  without  a  tremor  of  fear  or 
embarrassment. 

Many  women  are  afraid  of  mice.     I  have  seen  a 


The  Art  of  Self -Control.  87 

room  full  of  women  put  to  the  most  ignominious 
flight,  screaming  like  lunatics  because  a  tiny  mouse 
ran  across  the  floor.  To  cowards  of  that  class  I 
would  suggest  that  you  put  a  mouse  into  a  cage 
and  keep  it  where  you  can  look  at  it.  Examine  its 
little  body  through  a  magnifying  glass  and  make 
friends  with  it,  declaring  constantly  while  you  are 
looking  at  it  that  you  are  not  afraid  of  mice;  that 
there  is  nothing  about  them  for  you  to  fear;  that 
they  are  small  centers  in  consciousness  and  you  are 
a  larger  center  in  the  same  consciousness ;  that  the 
same  life  principle  that  sustains  them  sustains  you ; 
and  after  you  have  come  to  a  realizing  sense  of  your 
relative  positions  your  fears  will  fade  away,  never 
to  return. 

When  you  have  eliminated  the  grosser  forms  of 
fear,  then  attack  the  finer  forms,  such  as  fear  of 
the  unseen  or  the  unknown.  Many  persons'  lives 
are  made  utterly  wretched  because  of  their  fear  of 
the  future.  They  are  continually  expecting  things 
that  never  happen.  Others  are  afraid  of  the  criti- 
cism of  the  world,  and  a  common  question  on  their 
lips  is:  "What  will  people  think?"  You  should  re- 
member that  the  world  always  criticises  and  con- 
demns everything  and  everybody  that  it  does  not 
understand.  You  must  declare,  therefore,  that  you 
are  not  afraid  of  the  criticism  of  any  individual  nor 
of  the  public  at  large;  that  you  are  not  dependent 
upon  anyone  for  your  health,  wealth  or  happiness; 
and  that  the  approval  and  disapproval  of  other  per- 
sons, whether  collective  or  individual,  are  alike  to 


88  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

you.    If  you  declare  this  earnestly  and  often,  you 
will  overcome  all  fear  of  criticism. 

Fear  being  eliminated,  we  next  turn  our  attention 
to  Sensuousness,  which  is  the  result  of  a  perversion 
of  natural  forces.  The  animal  indulges  his  senses 
in  order  that  he  may  live;  but  man  indulges  his 
senses  not  only  that  he  may  live,  but  also  to  get 
pleasure  from  his  indulgences;  and  it  is  the  over- 
indulgence that  constitutes  the  perversion  of  this 
natural  force.  Reaction  seldom  follows  the  natural 
indulgence  of  the  senses  for  the  purpose  of  living. 
If  a  creature  eats  because  he  is  hungry  and  stops 
when  the  hunger  is  appeased,  there  will  be  no  re- 
action; but  when  the  senses  are  indulged  more  for 
pleasure  than  from  necessity,  and  there  has  been  an 
over-stimulation,  a  reaction  always  follows  the  in- 
dulgence. Asceticism  is  one  of  the  moral  reactions 
from  sensuousness.  In  many  places  in  the  Orient, 
especially  in  India,  asceticism  is  taught  as  the  proper 
method  of  living.  Many  schools  of  philosophy  in 
America  have  adopted  this  Eastern  teaching.  This 
is  the  other  extreme,  and,  like  most  extreme  views, 
is  not  productive  of  the  best  results;  hence  the 
Western  school  of  Occultists  does  not  agree  with 
the  Eastern  school  on  this  point,  which,  after  all,  is 
but  a  question  of  the  method  of  development.  Sup- 
pression of  the  senses  is  not  the  best  plan,  and  West- 
ern Occultists  have  found  that  better  results  are 
gained  from  regulation  of  the  senses.  By  regulation 
is  meant  a  moderate  indulgence  in  all  that  pertains 
to  the  normal  use  of  the  senses ;  but  never  yield  to 


The  Art  of  Self-Control.  89 

over-indulgence.  In  this  manner  you  may  have  all 
the  pleasures  of  life  without  the  reactions.  Sack- 
cloth and  ashes  do  not  indicate  that  the  wearer  of 
them  has  become  spiritual.  To  deny  the  body  its 
natural  functions,  or  to  whip  or  torture  it,  does  not 
make  a  person  wise  nor  good ;  and  there  is  no  more 
reason  in  trying  to  gain  spirituality  through  asceti- 
cism than  there  is  through  over-indulgence.  Use 
your  senses  properly  and  enjoy  all  the  harmless 
things  of  life,  and  let  the  mind — not  the  desire — 
determine  the  extent  of  the  use  of  the  senses.  This 
is  regulation,  the  teaching  of  Western  Occultism. 

The  third  great  basic  emotion  that  mankind  has 
to  learn  to  control  is  sex  desire.  This,  too,  is  a  natu- 
ral force,  and  is  a  part  of  the  force  of  life  and  love ; 
it  is  a  part  of  the  force  of  magnetic  attraction,  mani- 
fested in  the  Absolute,  and  manifestating  in  every 
part  of  It  according  to  the  nature  of  its  vehicle.  In 
the  minerals  it  is  chemical  affinity ;  in  the  animals  it 
manifests  as  the  desire  for  procreation.  In  man  this 
force,  like  sensuousness,  should  be  regulated.  Here 
again  Western  Occultism  differs  from  the  Eastern 
schools,  where  asceticism  is  taught.  In  man  this 
emotion  should  be  so  well  regulated  that  it  should 
become  a  creative  force  instead  of  an  animal  desire 
for  procreation.  I  do  not  mean  that  this  force  should 
only  be  transmuted  into  mental  power,  but  that  it 
should  be  used  to  consciously  create  bodies,  un- 
marred  by  passion,  for  the  use  of  egos  who  desire 
to  reincarnate.  Use  this  natural  force,  but  do  not 
abuse  it;  regulate  it,  but  do  not  eradicate  it.  The 


90  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

normal  condition  of  man  requires  that  no  part  of 
his  body  should  become  atrophied  or  useless,  but 
that  every  part  of  him,  whether  spiritual,  mental,  or 
physical,  shall  be  in  a  perfect  condition. 

The  fourth  great  emotion  that  must  be  conquered 
before  perfect  self-control  is  acquired,  is  vanity.  This 
emotion  is  so  subtle  that  at  times  it  almost  baffles 
us.  The  peculiarity  of  this  fault  is  that  the  victim 
does  not  recognize  his  defect  of  character.  You  can 
seldom  convince  a  vain  person  that  he  is  vain ;  and 
because  of  its  subtlety,  it  is  the  hardest  and  the  very 
last  emotion  we  have  to  conquer.  The  first  aspect 
of  this  fault  is  the  grosser  or  physical  vanity  which 
pertains  to  admiration  for  its  own  particular  attract- 
iveness of  feature,  form  or  face.  It  is  the  feeling 
which  prompts  you  to  wear  a  particular  style  of 
dress,  not  because  the  dress  is  beautiful,  and  be- 
cause you  love  the  beautiful,  but  because  you  believe 
others  will  admire  you  in  it.  It  is  the  same  feeling 
which  would  cause  a  person  to  mutilate  his  horse's 
tail  in  order  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  public 
to  his  horse  and  then  to  himself  as  the  owner  of 
the  horse.  This  grosser  form  of  vanity  we  can 
conquer  if  we  wish  to,  because  occasionally  it  is 
revealed  to  us  by  our  friends  or  enemies,  and  when 
it  is  discovered  it  can  be  eradicated.  But  this  is  only 
the  beginning  of  the  battle,  because  next  beyond 
and  still  more  subtle,  is  another  phase  of  vanity 
which  is  mental,  and  this  is  still  harder  to  recognize 
in  ourselves. 

Mental  vanity  expresses  itself  in  all  mental  forms. 


The  Art  of  Self-Control.  91 

If  a  man  discovers  that  he  is  in  a  small  degree  su- 
perior to  his  fellow  men  he  feels  it  and  often  looks 
with  contempt  upon  his  weaker  brothers.  He  tries 
to  dominate  those  whom  he  believes  are  his  inferiors 
in  intellect,  forgetting  the  fact  that  he  himself  is 
but  a  Cosmic  infant  as  compared  with  the  souls  who 
have  passed  in  evolution  beyond  him.  And  it  some- 
times requires  many  incarnations  and  many  sad  ex- 
periences to  eradicate  this  defect  of  character,  which 
really  limits  his  evolution. 

Then  comes  spiritual  vanity,  and  this  is  the  force 
which  actuates  all  reformers.  It  is  this  vanity  which 
makes  men  say:  "All  is  wrong  with  the  world." 
It  is  another  way  of  saying  the  Supreme  Conscious- 
ness is  wrong  in  Its  management  of  terrestrial 
things  and  /  must  go  forth  into  the  world  and  right 
it.  God  has  made  mistakes,  and  /  shall  correct 
them.  /  shall  lift  all  humanity  up  to  my  plane  and 
help  all  mankind  to  my  level.  /  will  convert  the 
world  to  my  views,  and  the  people  shall  accept 
my  conception  of  God,  my  politics,  or  my  religion 
and  men  shall  be  proselyted  to  my  truth.  Spiritual 
vanity  comes  in  such  a  subtle  guise  that  one  does 
not  recognize  the  motive  that  lies  behind  one's  ef- 
forts; and  yet  the  time  comes  in  the  evolution  of 
that  particular  individual  when  his  spiritual  vanity 
must  pass  away,  as  it  usually  does,  in  martyrdom. 
There  comes  a  time  in  that  soul's  career  when  this 
spiritual  vanity  is  burned  out  of  his  nature,  and  he 
becomes  a  perfected,  self-conscious  center  in  the 
Universal  Consciousness,  impersonally  working  for 


92  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

the  raising  up  of  the  whole  of  mankind  according 
to  the  Divine  plan.  Here  is  the  true  At-One-Ment, 
where  your  saviours  pass  away  from  the  adulation 
and  worship  of  men  and  become  the  unseen  and 
generally  unknown  workers  for  humanity — the  Si- 
lent Brotherhood  who  teach,  inspire,  and  raise  hu- 
manity as  fast  as  it  can  receive,  with  never  a  word 
of  praise,  never  a  word  of  recognition,  never  a  word 
of  thanks  or  of  appreciation  from  the  world  for 
their  sacrifices  and  their  efforts.  Spiritual  Vanity 
must  pass  away  before  perfection  is  reached. 

At  present  we  may  battle  with  the  first  two  forms 
of  vanity  and  leave  this  last  aspect  to  be  conquered 
in  some  other  incarnation. 

Thus  we  have  these  four  great  basic  emotions 
which  must  be  controlled.  To  do  this  we  must  learn 
to  exercise  our  wills.  There  are  two  very  good 
rules  by  which,  if  persistently  followed,  self-control 
can  be  attained.  The  first  is,  never  speak  until  you 
have  thought  with  your  subjective  mind.  It  will 
be  impossible  for  you  to  speak  before  you  have 
thought  at  all,  because  you  cannot  have  a  material 
manifestation  of  speech  until  there  has  been  some 
mental  action.  But  do  not  let  the  emotions  of  the 
objective  mind  become  expressed  in  words  before 
you  have  thought  with  the  subjective  mind.  In 
other  words,  let  your  thought  be  divorced  from  emo- 
tion before  you  attempt  to  express  your  thoughts  in 
speech.  For  example:  You  walk  out  of  a  warm 
room,  suddenly  the  cold  air  strikes  you,  and 
immediately  you  exclaim,  "I  am  catching  cold!" 


The  Art  of  Self-Control.  93 

This  remark  is  the  offspring  of  the  emotion  fear  and 
is  not  the  result  of  your  becoming  conscious  of  a 
little  fresh  air.  The  objective  mind  commences  to 
manifest  fear  and  it  speaks  into  existence  a  crea- 
tion of  sickness.  Now  if  you  will  stop  and  think 
with  your  subjective  mind  before  you  exclaim  into 
existence  that  cold,  and  claim  it  for  your  own,  you 
will  destroy  the  fear  which  would  be  the  father  of 
it,  and  no  cold  could  be  created  for  you. 

The  second  rule  is,  never  act  until  after  you  have 
thought  with  your  subjective  mind.  Acting  upon 
emotion  usually  leads  to  regret  and  is  always  fol- 
lowed by  a  reaction.  A  thousand  cases  could  be 
cited  to  prove  the  truth  of  this  statement  and  I  have 
no  doubt  that  you  have  thought  of  many  examples. 
These  two  rules,  if  put  into  practice  even  occasion- 
ally, will  help  you ;  but  if  you  practice  them  con- 
stantly you  will  be  surprised  to  see  how  soon  you 
will  begin  to  dominate  the  four  cardinal  emotions; 
and  after  they  are  destroyed,  all  the  others  must 
disappear,  because  they  are  but  branches  from  these 
four  principal  emotions. 

There  are  certain  aids  which  will  assist  you  to 
carry  out  these  rules.  First,  you  should  realize  that 
all  uncontrolled  emotions  are  the  result  of  ignorance 
or  undevelopment ;  and  this  knowledge  will  rob 
them  of  their  power  over  you.  You  will  know  that 
you  are  at  the  emotional  point  in  your  evolution, 
which  is  an  indication  of  ignorance  of  your  own 
power  of  self-control.  Then  you  will  soon  begin 


94  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

to  see  the  need  of  development  and  set  about  cor- 
recting the  fault. 

A  child  fears  the  dark  because  he  does  not  know 
its  nature  or  its  cause.  If  he  is  carried  into  a  dark 
room,  and  the  light  is  turned  on,  when  he  sees  noth- 
ing there  to  injure  him,  his  fear  is  immediately  dis- 
sipated. His  fear  was  banished  when  his  ignorance 
was  destroyed.  If  you  can  show  a  person  that  there 
is  no  "bad  luck"  except  that  which  he  has  created, 
and  that  the  "evil"  he  fears  he  builds  for  himself, 
immediately  you  destroy  the  power  he  has  given 
to  these  conceptions.  If  a  man  is  vain  of  his  knowl- 
edge and  he  can  be  made  to  see  that  the  field  of 
knowledge  is  unlimited,  and  that  his  vanity  over  the 
small  amount  that  he  possesses  is  but  an  indication 
of  his  great  ignorance,  immediately  his  vanity  dis- 
appears. So  it  is  by  enlightenment  that  any  or  all 
our  emotions  are  controlled  or  eliminated  from  us. 

The  second  great  aid  is  this:  If  we  understand 
what  habit  is  and  know  the  law  which  underlies  it, 
and  if  we  know  that  much  of  our  yielding  to  our 
lower  natures  and  our  lack  of  self-control  is  a 
matter  of  habit,  we  shall  be  able  to  destroy  habits 
much  sooner  than  if  we  do  not  understand  them. 
I  cannot  enter  very  fully  into  this  subject  at  this 
time,  but  will  give  you  a  good  working  basis  to  be- 
gin with.  There  are  two  elements  that  enter  into 
the  formation  of  a  habit.  The  first  is  what  we  may 
call  the  law  of  periodicity,  or  periodical  return,  and 
the  second  is  the  initial  impulse.  The  law  of  period- 
icity causes  a  thought  or  an  act  to  be  repeated  within 


The  Art  of  Self -Control.  95 

a  determinate  time.  The  intensity  with  which  the 
thought  was  projected,  or  the  act  performed,  deter- 
mines the  time  in  which  the  tendency  to  repeat  itself 
will  manifest. 

Let  me  try  to  make  this  plain  to  you.  Look  at  an 
electric  light  for  a  moment  then  shut  your  eyes 
and  note  the  effects.  Immediately  there  is  a  mental 
vibration  or  picture  of  a  bright  light  that  passes 
away  after  a  short  time;  now  it  reappears,  to 
pass  away  again.  Again  it  appears  and  disap- 
pears, growing  dimmer  with  each  appearance,  until 
finally  it  fades  out  altogether.  This  is  an  example 
of  the  action  of  the  law  of  periodicity,  and  every 
thought,  every  feeling  and  every  tendency  will  re- 
peat itself  at  given  periods  of  time  according  to  the 
intensity  of  the  initial  impulse  that  gave  it  birth. 
Recognizing  this  law,  if  you  will  remember  the  ex- 
act time  your  habits  repeat  themselves,  you  will  be 
prepared  to  overcome  them  with  greater  success. 
What  is  called  the  association  of  ideas  is  another 
illustration  of  the  working  of  the  law  of  periodicity. 
For  example,  if  we  go  to  our  room,  or  to  any  place 
where  we  can  be  alone,  and  send  out  an  intense 
thought  at  nine  o'clock  in  the  morning,  or  at  any 
special  hour,  we  will  find  on  the  following  day  at 
the  same  hour  that  we  will  be  inclined  to  repeat 
the  thought.  If  we  yield  to  our  inclination  each  day, 
at  the  end  of  a  week  the  habit  will  be  formed  and  it 
will  require  some  effort  to  resist  the  temptation  to 
repeat  the  practice  we  have  begun.  This  is  the  way 
habits  are  formed  through  the  cyclic  law  bringing 


96  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

back  to  us  the  thoughts  and  things  we  ourselves 
have  created.  Someone  may  say  to  me,  "You  are 
going  to  lose  something,"  and  my  heart  will  almost 
stop  beating  as  the  picture  is  presented  to  my  mind. 
The  next  time  I  see  the  person  who  made  the  sug- 
gestion of  loss  that  same  picture  will  rise  up  in  my 
mind  because  I  associate  that  person  with  the  sug- 
gestion made  to  me.  When  I  pass  the  place  where 
we  were  when  the  suggestion  was  made  I  will  re- 
member it  and  tremble  with  fear,  and  after  awhile 
the  habit  of  thought  will  become  so  firmly  estab- 
lished with  me  that  I  will  think  of  the  loss  predicted 
until  the  picture  materializes,  and  becomes  a  reality 
on  the  objective  plane. 

But  the  same  law  which  helped  you  form  the 
habit  will  help  you  overcome  it  if  you  but  reverse 
the  rule  in  this  way :  When  the  mental  picture  re- 
curs, destroy  it  by  denying  that  it  can  materialize. 
For  example :  If  you  have  been  holding  a  picture  of 
loss,  declare  that  you  cannot  lose  anything  that  be- 
longs to  you ;  and  when  your  picture  of  loss  comes 
up,  refuse  to  look  at  it  and  put  into  its  place  a  pic- 
ture of  something  that  you  want.  If  you  have  a 
habit  of  thinking  of  yourself  as  an  invalid,  destroy 
that  habit  of  thought  by  picturing  yourself  in  the 
possession  of  perfect  health.  If  you  have  created 
the  habit  of  picturing  death  for  yourself,  or  for  a 
friend,  reverse  the  picture  and  see  him  and  yourself 
well  and  happy;  and  the  law  of  periodicity  will 
bring  your  new  pictures  along  with  the  old  ones, 
since  they  are  associated  together.  Each  time  both 


The  Art  of  Self -Control.  97 

pictures  appear,  look  at  the  new  and  refuse  to  see 
the  old  and  soon  the  old  picture  will  fade  out  and 
disappear  and  a  new  order  of  things  will  be  estab- 
lished. 

The  third  great  aid  in  conquering  the  emotions  is 
through  the  power  of  suggestion.  Heretofore  the 
objective  mind  has  been  making  most  of  the  sug- 
gestions which  the  subjective  mind  has  passively 
received.  For  example:  You  feel  a  draft  of  cold 
air,  and  immediately  your  objective  mind  suggests 
to  your  subjective  mind,  which  is  really  you,  that 
you  are  taking  cold ;  you  accept  the  suggestion,  and 
reply,  "Yes,  that  is  true ;  I  shall  take  cold  if  I  sit  in 
this  draft;"  and  immediately  you  commence  to  see 
the  picture  of  yourself  with  a  cold.  You  have  ac- 
cepted the  suggestion  and  claimed  the  creation  of 
the  objective  mind  for  your  own,  and  there  is  noth- 
ing that  will  prevent  the  picture  from  materializing 
for  you.  But  if  you  will  use  the  same  amount  of 
force  in  refusing  to  accept  the  suggestion  of  your  ob- 
jective mind  that  you  do  fighting  the  cold  after  it 
has  materialized  you  will  not  let  it  materialize  at  all. 

If  you  desire  to  conquer  the  emotion  sensuous- 
ness,  and  your  objective  mind  insists  upon  gratify- 
ing its  appetite  for  the  pleasure  of  eating,  you  should 
take  the  position  that  you  do  not  want  any  more 
food  and  should  suggest  to  your  objective  mind  that 
it  does  not  want  any  more.  Speak  to  it  as  if  it  were 
another  person  or  a  child.  If  you  have  the  habit 
of  drinking,  or  smoking,  and  you  wish  to  overcome 
these  habits,  suggest  to  your  objective  mind  that 


98  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

it  does  not  want  to  drink  or  smoke;  that  there  is 
no  real  pleasure  to  be  derived  from  the  gratifica- 
tion of  these  tastes  or  appetites,  and  you  will  soon 
see,  if  you  persist  in  this  use  of  suggestion,  that 
your  desires  will  change,  and  you  will  conquer 
sensuousness  without  a  great  deal  of  inconvenience 
or  annoyance. 

There  are  certain  declarations  and  suggestions 
that  most  persons  who  work  along  this  line  find 
extremely  beneficial  and  I  will  give  you  a  few  of  them. 
Suggest  to  your  objective  mind :  "I  am  your  mas- 
ter, and  you  are  my  servant,  my  instrument,  and 
you  must  obey  me."  If  you  persist  in  making  this 
declaration  you  will  soon  begin  to  feel  that  you  are 
master,  and  your  objective  mind  must  accept  it  as 
the  truth;  and  as  soon  as  both  minds  recognize  the 
truth  of  that  declaration  from  that  moment  self- 
control  and  self-mastery  is  assured. 

Another  way  to  take  from  the  objective  mind  its 
power  over  the  subjective  mind  is  to  declare  "You 
cannot  control  me,"  or  "You  cannot  disturb  or 
make  me  uncomfortable."  The  word  "cannot"  ex- 
presses limitation  always ;  used  in  the  proper  place, 
it  destroys  wrong  creations ;  used  improperly,  it  lim- 
its one's  power  to  progress.  It  is  useless  to  argue 
with  the  objective  mind,  because  it  is  a  waste  of 
force;  one  might  as  well  argue  with  an  animal  and 
expect  to  convince  it  of  the  error  of  its  ways.  The 
only  way  to  be  successful  in  conquering  it  is  to 
command  and  compel  it  to  obey,  and  when  it  at- 
tempts to  argue  with  you  command  it  to  be  silent. 


The  Art  of  Self-Control.  99 

Say  "Peace,  be  still,"  and  let  that  be  your  answer  to 
all  its  protests  and  arguments ;  and  the  greater  the 
vehemence  with  which  you  speak  these  words,  the 
sooner  will  the  objective  mind  obey  you. 

Separate  yourself  from  your  objective  mind  in 
thought,  and  for  convenience  while  learning  to  mas- 
ter it,  identify  it  with  your  body.  Realize  that  you 
are  separate  from,  and  superior  to,  it ;  treat  it  as  if  it 
were  a  child  entrusted  to  your  care  by  Deity  to 
educate  and  enlighten.  While  you  are  putting  into 
practice  these  suggestions,  demand  daily  from  the 
Supreme  Power  the  highest  wisdom  that  you  are 
capable  of  receiving,  and  "all  things  whatsoever 
ye  shall  ask  in  prayer,  believing,  ye  shall  receive." 


LECTURE  FIVE. 


THE  LAW  OF  RE-EMBODIMENT. 

Herbert  Spencer,  in  his  "First  Principles,"  dis- 
cusses force  and  matter,  and  after  a  long  disserta- 
tion he  accepts  as  a  fact  the  indestructibility  of 
matter  and  the  persistency  of  force.  The  idea  that 
he  develops  is  that  it  makes  no  difference  how  often 
matter  and  force  may  change  form,  nevertheless 
they  are  persistent;  therefore  he  argues  that  there 
is  only  a  certain  amount  of  force  and  matter  in  the 
Universe.  He  concludes  his  discussion  with  the 
opinion  that  in  his  judgment  the  whole  Universe 
is  an  unfoldment  from  the  homogeneous  to  the 
heterogeneous  and  back  to  the  homogeneous  again ; 
and  these  respective  periods  he  designates  as  "alter- 
nate eras  of  evolution  and  dissolution." 

In  his  statement  that  the  whole  Universe  is  a 
manifestation  of  alternate  eras  of  evolution  and  dis- 
solution, Mr.  Spencer  has  touched  upon  an  Occult 
truth,  a  fragment  of  Occult  knowledge.  For  the 
Occultist  teaches  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
eternity,  as  understood  by  the  Western  mind;  that 
nothing  can  go  on  working  forever  and  forever  with- 
out rest.  His  idea  being  that  everything  moves  ac- 
cording to  given  law,  within  certain  periods,  and 
that  there  are  actions  and  reactions  throughout  all 
nature.  Those  of  you  who  are  familiar  with  the 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  IQI 

Eastern  philosophy,  will  remember  that  this  same 
thought  is  brought  out  there,  and  is  described  as 
"the  days  and  nights  of  Brahma."  Occultism  says 
that  the  Great  Consciousness  manifests  Itself  peri- 
odically as  the  Universe,  and  after  each  manifesta- 
tion there  comes  a  period  of  rest,  a  period  of  night ; 
for  even  Divine  Consciousness  Itself  must  rest. 

When  the  Night  of  Brahma  is  coming  on,  gradu- 
ally the  living  Universe  finds  its  life  pulsations 
growing  slower  and  slower,  and  fainter  and  fainter ; 
and  one  by  one  the  planets  fade  from  sight;  one 
by  one  the  stars  cease  to  give  forth  their  light,  and 
the  suns  themselves  grow  dim.  The  Earth  is  rolled 
up  as  a  parchment,  and  men  and  gods  and  worlds 
and  suns  all  sink  into  sleep — there  are  no  thoughts 
in  the  Great  Mind.  All  is  silence,  rest,  darkness. 
Reaction  has  followed  action ;  the  day's  work  has 
been  done  throughout  all  parts  of  the  Supreme,  and 
the  Cosmic  night  has  come. 

This  night  of  rest  lasts  Eons  embracing  thou- 
sands and  untold  thousands  of  years;  then  comes 
creation's  dawn.  There  is  a  slight  pulsation  within 
the  Great  Consciousness  and  there  begins  to  be 
the  rudiments  of  the  Universe.  It  is  as  though  one 
were  standing  in  a  great  dark  auditorium  in  the 
center  of  which  burns  a  flickering  flame  of  light.  It 
is  the  only  point  of  light  to  be  seen  in  all  that  great 
place;  then  away  in  the  distance  another  flame  ap- 
pears, then  another  and  another,  till  the  heavy  at- 
mosphere begins  to  pulsate  and  soon  every  portion 
of  the  room  is  illuminated,  and  that  which  was  dark- 


102  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

ness  becomes  light,  and  the  non-existent  exists  and 
becomes  motion.  You  who  have  stood  upon  an 
eminence  and  watched  a  city  as  darkness  was  set- 
tling upon  it  saw,  as  the  night  advanced,  one  tiny 
point  of  light  after  another  appear,  now  here,  now 
there,  until  there  was  a  great  blaze  of  light  through- 
out the  whole  city,  and  where  it  had  been  obscura- 
tion and  gloom  it  became  a  brilliant  illumination. 

So  it  is  with  the  Great  Consciousness.  From  Its 
innermost  heart  goes  forth  the  pulsating  life,  and  the 
Solar  Deities,  in  whom  are  embodied  the  greatest 
power  and  wisdom  that  man  can  conceive,  are  awak- 
ened to  take  up  their  part  of  the  work  in  the  new 
day,  and  there  a  sun  springs  into  existence,  then 
another,  and  another,  until  the  whole  Universe  is 
again  brought  into  activity.  These  Deities  radiate 
the  life  force  which  thrills  into  activity  the  Planetary 
Spirits,  who  also  take  up  their  work,  and  worlds 
come  forth  into  space  again.  These  Spirits  radiate 
the  life  force  that  awakens  the  minds  of  men  who 
have  slept  through  the  long  night  of  Brahma,  and 
they  resume  again  their  evolutionary  journey.  And 
so  the  morning  of  a  Cosmic  Day  has  come.  Deity 
has  awakened,  and  has  planned  the  day. 

The  Cosmic  Days  are  more  or  less  alike,  as  are  all 
the  days  of  men's  years  alike,  except  that  each  Cos- 
mic Day  is  better  than  the  one  preceding  it,  since 
each  new  period  of  evolution  is  an  advance  beyond 
the  one  that  passed  before.  Divine  Mind  images 
within  Itself,  or  pictures  the  new  day,  and  thus  cre- 
ates the  outline  of  the  plan  by  which  all  things  shall 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  103 

evolve  during  that  period.  Then  the  greatest  cen- 
ters of  consciousness  take  the  plan  as  imaged  by 
Deity  and  carry  into  execution  the  idea  of  the  Great 
Architect.  God  thinks  and  the  creative  agencies 
bring  into  existence  the  physical  worlds  according 
to  God's  idea  which  they  see.  God  wills  and  di- 
vides into  two  parts  which  we  have  described  in  a 
previous  lecture  as  the  particled  and  the  unparticled 
portions,  and  there  is  the  force  and  matter  ensouled 
by  consciousness.  Then  by  their  will  power  the 
great  centers  of  consciousness  direct  this  force  and 
this  matter  into  the  different  matrices  that  Deity  has 
planned,  and  the  suns  are  formed  to  give  forth  light, 
and  the  worlds  are  made  for  men  and  animals  to 
evolve  upon. 

The  plans  made  by  Deity  in  the  dawn  of  each 
Cosmic  Day  are  what  men  call  "Natural  Laws/' 
They  are  the  ways  in  which  Deity  selects  to  mani- 
fest during  that  particular  Cosmic  Day.  These 
plans  emanating  from  the  center  of  the  Supreme 
radiate  throughout  every  part  and  portion  of  It; 
and  the  law  which  governs  the  visible  side  of  life 
is  the  same  law  that  governs  the  invisible  side ;  and 
if  you  find  a  law  operating  in  the  realm  of  physics, 
you  may  know  that  it  also  operates  in  the  realm  of 
metaphysics. 

And  now  we  have  seen  how  Divine  Thought  has 
manifested  Itself  in  physical  re-embodiment  and 
how  the  law  of  periodicity  has  once  again  caused 
thought  to  be  embodied  in  form,  and  how  thereafter 
the  law  of  periodicity  makes  itself  felt  everywhere 


104  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

throughout  the  Cosmic  Day.  Take,  for  example, 
the  greatest  conception  of  time  that  the  human  mind 
is  capable  of  actually  grasping,  the  cyclic  motion 
of  our  sun.  We  find  that  it  travels  from  a  given 
point  in  space  through  its  orbit,  and  returns  again 
in  about  twenty-five  thousand  and  nine  hundred 
years.  The  law  of  periodicity  has  caused  that  great 
orb  to  go  forth  and  return  and  a  cycle  has  been 
made.  The  moon  also  has  its  particular  orbit  as  has 
our  Earth  and  all  the  planets  that  swing  in  space; 
all  are  governed  by  the  law  of  periodicity.  Then 
again  there  is  history  repeating  itself,  and  man 
forming  his  habits  by  a  repetition  of  thought.  And 
as  it  is  with  the  law  of  periodicity,  so  it  is  with  all 
the  other  impulses  which  are  sent  into  the  Uni- 
verse by  Deity;  they  continue  to  manifest  over  and 
over  again  from  the  moment  they  are  sent  forth 
until  the  last  throb  of  the  great  Deific  heart  shall 
be  given  and  the  Cosmic  night  shall  come.  The 
impulses  which  form  a  Universe,  persist  throughout 
the  Universe,  and  manifest  as  the  Laws  of  the  Uni- 
verse. 

When  we  find  that  the  Supreme  Consciousness 
re-embodies  Itself  for  a  new  Cosmic  Day  we  know 
that  the  law  of  re-embodiment  must  apply  to  every 
part  and  portion  of  the  Universe;  that  re- 
embodiment  is  a  Cosmic  Law,  a  law  of  nature.  For 
evidence  of  this  truth  let  us  study  the  planets. 
Worlds  are  brought  into  existence  by  Planetary 
Spirits  or  Elohim  who  see  the  Divine  thought  or 
picture  of  worlds  and  use  the  images  for  matrices. 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  105 

They  then  project  their  thoughts  into  these  cen- 
ters, thereby  creating  vortices,  which,  through  the 
intensity  of  their  vibrations  and  the  tremendous  ve- 
locity with  which  they  revolve,  draw  from  bound- 
less space  the  tiny  particles  we  call  atoms,  and  these 
seething  masses  of  matter  become  huge  balls  of 
flaming  gases.  After  ages  and  ages  have  passed 
these  burning  balls  cool  sufficiently  to  sustain  vege- 
table and  animal  life  upon  their  surfaces.  And 
worlds,  like  the  bodies  of  men,  have  their  birth,  their 
childhood,  maturity  and  finally  death  and  disinte- 
gration. When  death  comes  to  a  world  the  life 
principle  commences  to  flow  out  of  it  through  vari- 
ous channels  into  space.  It  is  seeking  new  centers 
in  which  to  re-embody  itself;  and  with  the  passing 
of  the  life  force  from  a  world  we  find  disintegration 
taking  place.  The  atoms  which  composed  the  com- 
pact mass  of  the  external  world  become  demagnet- 
ized and  fall  away  from  each  other,  and  finally  drift 
away  into  space  to  be  attracted  by  other  newer  and 
stronger  magnetic  centers,  where  they  become  re- 
embodied  in  other  worlds  in  which  consciousness 
may  manifest. 

Re-embodiment  is  a  fact  in  nature,  whether  you 
look  at  it  from  an  Occult  standpoint,  or  from  that 
of  Herbert  Spencer,  with  his  indestructibility  of 
matter  and  force  re-embodying  themselves  for  the 
purpose  of  evolution.  This  law  of  re-embodiment 
manifests  in  all  planes,  upon  all  worlds  or  planets. 
That  we  may  comprehend  it  better,  let  us  look  at 
the  action  of  this  law  in  the  several  kingdoms  on 


io6  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

this  world  of  ours.  Starting  with  the  mineral  king- 
dom, we  find  there  the  lowest  expression  of  em- 
bodied consciousness  on  this  planet,  and  as  typical 
of  that  kingdom  we  will  consider  the  action  of  this 
law  in  coal.  Take  some  of  this  coal  and  burn  it. 
What  is  the  result?  The  hard  black  mass  becomes 
changed  into  ash  and  gas.  The  ash  returns  to  the 
earth  whence  it  came  and  again  forms  earth;  and 
the  gas  which  was  liberated  by  the  burning  comes 
into  contact  with  the  atmosphere  under  its  new  con- 
dition and  becomes  separated  into  its  four  compo- 
nent parts  which  we  call  oxygen,  hydrogen,  nitro- 
gen and  carbon.  The  oxygen  and  hydrogen  unite 
and  descend  again  to  earth  as  water.  The  nitrogen 
and  carbon  unite  and  form  the  tissues  of  a  plant 
and  again  you  find  the  original  elements  united,  with 
consciousness  embodied  in  the  new  form,  which  is 
now  a  plant. 

Passing  on  to  the  vegetable  kingdom  we  see  here 
the  same  law  manifesting,  but  in  a  more  pronounced 
manner;  for  as  consciousness  becomes  more  indi- 
vidualized more  of  God's  plans  must  be  mani- 
fested through  it.  As  Winter  approaches,  the  life 
force,  which  is  the  animating  principle  of  vegeta- 
tion, passes  down  into  the  roots.  The  leaves  fall 
to  the  ground  and  the  consciousness  which  mani- 
fested throughout  the  plant  withdraws  itself  from 
the  external  to  the  internal  and  lies  dormant  and 
resting,  waiting  for  the  impulse  which  comes  with 
Spring  to  awaken  and  arouse  it  again  into  action — 
to  bring  it  into  the  external — that  man's  heart  may 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  107 

be  gladdened  by  the  beauty  of  its  expression.  As 
the  life  force  rises  slowly  from  root  to  branch  in  the 
bush  or  tree,  we  see  the  law  at  work  bringing  forth 
new  forms  of  life  in  the  shape  of  leaf  and  bud  and 
we  know  that  re-embodiment  is  taking  place  among 
the  shrubs  and  grasses  and  trees. 

In  the  bulb  family  this  same  law  works.  The  life 
force  sinks  into  the  tiny  bulb  at  the  beginning  of 
Autumn  and  there  it  lies  in  silence  and  in  darkness, 
within  that  tiny  sphere,  till  the  soft  breath  of  Spring 
warms  and  raises  its  vibrations  and  arouses  within 
its  center  a  desire  to  again  express  itself,  to  appear 
once  more  in  a  newer  and  a  more  beautiful  form 
than  that  of  the  bulb.  And  so  it  begins  to  re-clothe 
itself;  it  draws  from  earth  and  air  such  chemicals 
as  it  needs  to  give  material  expression  to  its  beauti- 
ful soul  or  self,  and  "behold  the  lilies  of  the  field; 
they  toil  not,  neither  do  they  spin,  yet  Solomon  in 
all  his  glory  was  not  arrayed  like  one  of  these,"  in 
its  re-embodiment. 

Passing  on  to  the  animal  kingdom  we  find  the 
tadpole  and  caterpillar.  Both  of  these  little  crea- 
tures are  good  examples  of  the  working  of  this  law. 
They  are  individual  consciousnesses;  and  before 
your  eyes  the  tadpole  gradually  changes  its  form 
until  it  has  a  distinctly  different  body  from  the  one 
it  had  at  first.  Yet  the  new  frog  body  that  can 
leap  and  swim  and  croak  is  animated  by  the  same 
consciousness  that  animated  the  wriggling  little 
form  of  the  tadpole.  The  caterpillar,  having  a  lim- 
ited and  loathsome  form,  desires  a  fuller  and  a  bet- 


io8  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

ter  expression  of  itself  and  passes  into  a  stupor  or 
sleep.  Then  slowly  its  old  atoms  give  place  to  new, 
which  build  a  better  form,  until  at  last  the  same 
consciousness  which  crawled  and  crept  upon  the 
earth  has  re-clothed  or  re-embodied  itself  and  with 
wings  of  a  golden  hue  it  soars  from  earth  to  air. 
And  the  re-embodiment  of  the  butterfly  from  the 
caterpillar  is  not  only  an  illustration  of  the  working 
of  the  law  of  re-embodiment,  but  it  is  typical  of  the 
evolution  of  the  soul  or  mind  of  man  which  rises 
from  the  lowest  depths  of  ignorance  or  so-called  sin, 
to  manhood  and  to  godhood. 

This  same  law  is  operative  in  the  higher  forms  of 
animal  life  and  in  the  life  of  man ;  for  a  law  that  is 
a  law  of  nature  must  persist  throughout  the  Uni- 
verse. The  fact  that  we  do  not  see  the  operation  of 
a  law  is  no  proof  that  the  law  has  ceased  to  act. 
Nor  is  the  fact  that  this  law  manifests  differently  in 
different  kingdoms  and  forms  evidence  of  the  limita- 
tion or  non-existence  of  the  law.  Every  law  mani- 
fests in  each  class  or  forms  alike,  but  differs  in  its 
manifestation  in  different  classes  of  forms  because 
the  consciousness  within  the  form  restricts  but  does 
not  prevent  the  manifestation.  For  example,  the 
law  of  gravity  manifests  the  same  in  all  iron,  but 
manifests  differently  in  different  kingdoms  and  sub- 
stances. 

Individualized  consciousness  not  only  re-embodies 
itself  constantly  during  earth  life,  but  it  re-embodies 
itself  after  it  drops  its  entire  body.  In  other  words, 
it  reincarnates.  During  the  space  of  every  seven 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  109 

years,  according  to  some  schools  of  medicine,  man 
undergoes  a  complete  change  of  body.  Is  he  not 
therefore  in  the  process  of  re-embodying  himself  by 
this  constant  renewal  of  his  atoms?  According  to 
his  rates  of  vibration  or  as  his  thoughts  are  elevated 
or  debased  does  he  draw  new  atoms  into  himself. 
And  after  he  has  dropped  one  physical  body  that  he 
has  drawn  to  himself  is  it  surprising  that  he  should 
have  the  power  to  draw  to  himself  another?  Is  the 
fact  that  most  men  do  not  remember  their  past  lives 
a  proof  that  they  did  not  formerly  exist?  If  so  the 
majority  of  men  did  not  exist  between  the  first  and 
third  years  of  their  present  lives  nor  in  a  pre-natal 
condition.  The  Occultists  say  that  man  does  re- 
member his  past  lives  when  his  subjective  mind  con- 
trols his  objective  mind — and  can  function  through 
it — for  in  the  subjective  is  stored  the  memories  of 
past  experiences.  What  we  call  "Conscience"  is 
but  this  memory  of  past  experiences  warning  us  not 
to  repeat  former  follies  and  mistakes. 

Since  we  have  spoken  of  the  re-embodiment  of 
man  by  the  term  popularly  known  as  reincarnation, 
it  may  be  well  before  we  take  up  other  aspects  of 
it  to  answer  a  question  which  is  now  in  the  minds 
of  a  number  of  you,  and  that  is:  what  becomes  of 
man  between  the  times  of  his  embodiments  or  incar- 
nations? 

As  there  are  different  states  of  matter  in  this  ob- 
jective physical  world  of  ours,  such  as  gases,  liquids 
and  solids,  so  there  are  different  states  of  matter 
in  the  subjective  world ;  and  these  different  grades 


no  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

do  not  lie  separate  and  distinct  from  each  other. 
For  example,  on  the  physical  plane  there  are  condi- 
tions where  substances  interblend,  as  it  were,  as  they 
do  in  a  syphon  bottle  of  aerated  water,  or  in  a  water- 
soaked  sponge,  where  each  substance  occupies  the 
same  space  while  lying  within  the  other.  Again, 
we  have  the  solid  earth  with  certain  waters  within 
and  on  the  earth.  Outside  the  earth  we  have  water 
or  vapor  in  clouds  and  yet  within  both  the  earth  and 
the  clouds  is  air  or  gases  which  extend  still  further 
out  into  space. 

On  the  subjective  side  of  life  there  are  finer  forms 
of  matter  which  interpenetrate  our  earth,  water  and 
gas.  Around  our  earth  there  are  belts  or  zones  com- 
posed of  finer  matter  very  much  like  the  rings 
around  Saturn,  and  the  densest  of  these  rings  inter- 
penetrates our  earth,  while  each  of  the  other  rings 
extend  further  and  further  into  space — according  to 
its  rarity  and  size.  These  rings  are  material,  but 
each  is  of  a  different  tenuity  of  matter  caused  by 
its  different  rates  of  vibration.  We  might  crudely 
picture  our  world  as  a  porous  wooden  ball  floating 
in  a  tub  of  water.  The  water  would  correspond  to 
the  first  subjective  plane  and  would  not  only  sur- 
round the  ball,  but  it  would  be  through  the  ball  as 
well.  Outside  the  water  and  surrounding  it  would 
be  a  belt  of  atmosphere  representing  the  second 
subjective  plane  and  outside  of  that  would  be  a  belt 
of  ether  representing  the  third  subjective  plane. 

It  is  to  these  several  belts  that  man  goes  between 
his  incarnations ;  and  it  is  to  the  first  belt,  that  one 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  in 

which  interpenetrates  the  earth,  that  the  souls  or 
minds  of  the  animals  go.  According  to  a  man's 
rate  of  vibration  or  specific  gravity  is  he  drawn  into 
one  or  another  of  those  inner  belts  or  spheres  which 
corresponds  to,  or  is  harmonious  with,  his  own  vi- 
brations. The  subjective  belts  or  spheres  are  not,  as 
many  think,  for  the  growth  and  development  of 
man,  but  are  places  of  rest  where  he  reviews  the 
experiences  and  assimilates  the  knowledge  gained 
on  earth.  For  it  is  impossible  for  man  to  pass  be- 
yond the  photosphere  of  this  earth  and  incarnate 
upon  other  planets — as  some  modern  metaphysicians 
claim  he  does — until  his  vibrations,  which  control 
his  specific  gravity,  have  become  so  high,  so  god- 
like, that  the  law  of  gravity  operating  here  can  no 
longer  confine  him  to  the  earth  or  to  the  subjective 
planes  surrounding  it. 

A  man's  thoughts  are  the  cause  of  his  vibrations, 
hence  a  man  who  is  material,  sensuous  and  sensual, 
is  by  harmonious  vibration  drawn  to  the  first  sub- 
jective plane  and  becomes  earthbound.  He  can- 
not rise  higher  than  any  other  animal,  and  so  he 
remains  in  the  first  belt  which  surrounds  and  in- 
terpenetrates the  material  world  until  he  is  ready 
to  reincarnate.  But  as  a  man's  mentality  over- 
comes his  emotions,  in  his  course  of  evolution,  and 
as  his  subjective  mind  learns  to  control  his  object- 
ive mind,  he  becomes  more  spiritual;  his  rates  of 
vibration  become  higher,  and  then  when  the  time 
comes  to  rest  between  incarnations  he  is  drawn  to 
the  belt  which  is  of  a  higher  rate  of  vibration,  and 


U2  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

goes  further  away  from  this  earth.  So,  according 
to  the  theologians,  there  is  a  Heaven  and  according 
to  Occultism  there  are  several  Heavens. 

And  now  comes  a  very  important  point  in  the 
mental  aspect  of  this  law  of  re-embodiment,  which 
is  the  practical  side  of  it.  Man  is  not  only  a  center 
of  consciousness,  but  he  is  a  center  of  self-conscious- 
ness. He  has  free  will  within  certain  great  lati- 
tudes, and  he  has  freedom  of  choice,  and  that  fact 
holds  him  to  a  great  responsibility.  Man,  by  his 
choice,  or  thinking,  determines  not  only  his  Heaven, 
but  also  his  earth  life.  He  directs  both  the  time  of 
his  incarnation  or  re-embodiment  and  the  environ- 
ment of  his  re-embodiment.  The  less  developed 
an  ego,  the  more  rest  does  it  require  between  earth 
lives.  This  is  a  general  truth  and  applies  to  every 
living  thing.  For  example,  you  would  not  expect 
a  child  to  work  as  hard  or  as  continuously  as  a  man ; 
you  would  not  expect  so  much  of  an  undeveloped 
man  along  any  line  as  you  would  of  a  developed 
man ;  and  so  it  is  that  the  thought  or  development  of 
a  man  determines  the  length  of  time  which  must 
elapse  between  re-embodiments  for  him.  Weak, 
tired,  disappointed  souls,  they  who  are  ignorant  of 
the  laws  of  life,  require  a  long  time  between  incar- 
nations. It  is  said  by  those  who  know,  that  the 
average  period  between  incarnations  at  this  time 
in  our  evolution  is  five  hundred  years  for  the  great 
mass  of  men  who  are  not  developed.  According  to 
the  strength  of  an  ego  and  its  desire  to  evolve,  and 
therefore  its  desire  to  have  a  vehicle  through  which 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  113 

to  evolve,  does  the  period  of  time  between  incarna- 
tions lessen  or  lengthen;  and  I  am  informed  that 
among  progressive  egos  the  time  between  incar- 
nations averages  now  about  one  hundred  years.  You 
can  readily  see  that  the  shorter  the  time  between 
re-embodiments,  the  more  experience  must  be 
gained ;  and  the  more  knowledge  carried  over  from 
one  embodiment  to  another,  the  more  rapid  is  our 
progress  on  our  evolutionary  journey.  Occultists 
believe  it  to  be  advantageous  for  a  soul  to  keep  his 
body  for  a  very  long  time;  or,  in  other  words,  to 
prolong  each  of  his  incarnations  to  as  great  a  length 
as  it  is  possible  to  do.  It  is  a  great  mistake  to  cast 
aside  a  body  before  it  has  become  so  old  and  worn 
that  it  is  no  longer  of  any  use  as  a  vehicle. 

Every  moment  of  our  lives  we  are  changing  our 
bodies  and  are  making  them  better  or  worse  by  our 
thoughts.  We  are  also  creating  our  environment, 
liberating  or  enslaving  ourselves,  according  to  the 
quality  of  our  thoughts  and  emotions.  We  create 
ties  between  ourselves  and  other  souls  through  hat- 
ing as  much  as  through  loving  because  whatever  our 
minds  dwell  upon,  that  we  draw  to  us.  For  ex- 
ample: If  I  think  of  you,  immediately  there  is  a 
vibration  in  the  ether  between  you  and  me.  If  I 
continue  to  think  of  you,  this  vibration  becomes 
intensified  until  a  blue  magnetic  cord  becomes  es- 
tablished between  us — a  mental  telegraph  wire,  if 
you  choose — over  which  my  thoughts  pass  to  you, 
and  by  which  yours  come  to  me.  This  connec- 
tion is  visible  to  the  clairvoyant,  but  not  to  the 


I 


H4  The  History  <md  Power  of  Mind. 

physical  eye,  and  can  only  be  destroyed  by  disuse 
for  a  greater  or  shorter  lapse  of  time  according  to 
its  size  and  strength.  As  a  spider  spins  his  web 
from  one  point  to  another,  so  do  men  constantly 
spin  thought  webs  connecting  themselves  for  good 
or  ill  with  persons  or  things.  If  you  hate  a  person, 
you  are  continually  sending  hateful  thoughts  to 
that  person  and  by  so  doing  you  keep  a  constant 
vibration  of  the  ether  between  you.  After  a  time 
this  vibration  becomes  a  real  pathway  for  your 
thoughts  to  travel  upon  and  it  binds  you  to  the  ob- 
ject of  your  hatred  with  a  bond  invisible  yet  strong- 
er, and  harder  to  break,  than  a  bond  of  steel.  This 
is  the  reason  groups  of  egos  come  back  to  earth 
and  incarnate  in  families  and  communities.  Those 
who  love  each  other  are  drawn  again  and  again  into 
the  closer  relationships  of  life,  not  because  "blood 
is  thicker  than  water,"  but  because  of  the  ties  formed 
in  past  lives. 

Then  there  is  the  great  law  of  equilibrium,  the 
law  of  Justice  that  we  are  constantly  putting  into 
action  by  our  thoughts.  This  law  modifies  our 
evolution,  and  limits  our  scope  of  free  will  under 
certain  conditions.  There  is  a  law  of  absolute  jus- 
tice and  it  is  man's  unjust  thoughts  which  lead  him 
to  believe  otherwise.  Perfect  love  is  synonymous 
with  absolute  justice  and  God  is  love.  If  equilib- 
rium were  not  maintained  on  all  planes,  then  chaos 
would  reign  supreme;  it  could  not  be  otherwise. 
On  the  physical  plane  we  see  the  manifestation  of 
equilibrium  if  we  look  for  it.  For  example,  throw 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  115 

a  stone  into  a  pool  of  water,  and  watch  how  the 
disturbance  caused  by  displacing  the  water  at  a 
certain  point  is  adjusted  by  the  movement  on  the 
surface  of  the  water  from  that  point  to  the  extreme 
edge  of  the  pool,  and  back  again  to  the  point  of 
disturbance  below  the  surface.  We  saw  the  tiny 
waves  that  were  created  by  throwing  the  stone  into 
the  water,  but  we  did  not  understand  that  it  was 
the  great  law  of  equilibrium  working  to  adjust  the 
water  of  the  pool  to  the  new  condition  we  had  cre- 
ated in  it.  It  is  through  equilibrium  that  the  great 
law  of  justice  brings  back  to  man  precisely  what  he 
has  sent  forth,  and  this  is  why  he  often  finds  in  his 
every-day  life  that  he  must  re-adjust  himself.  "Be 
not  deceived;  God  (the  law)  is  not  mocked;  for 
whatsoever  a  man  soweth  that  shall  he  also  reap." 
In  the  city  of  Chicago  there  is  a  unique  court, 
called  the  Infants'  Court.  It  is  the  only  court  of 
the  kind  in  the  world  and  is  where  infants  or  minors 
are  tried.  Sometimes  there  are  fifty  cases  tried 
there  in  one  day,  and  never  less  than  one  hundred 
in  each  week.  There  are  cases  where  parents  have 
abandoned  children,  or  where  children  have  left 
their  parents.  Investigation  is  made  into  the  char- 
acter and  condition  of  all  the  children  who  are 
brought  under  its  jurisdiction,  and  an  effort  is  made 
to  place  them  in  the  particular  walk  of  life  where 
they  may  become  the  best  citizens.  To  a  careless 
observer  it  would  seem  that  when  the  Infants'  Court 
had  disposed  of  the  child  deserted  by  its  parents 
that  would  end  the  matter,  but  it  does  not.  The 


n6  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Divine  Law  of  Equilibrium  caused  the  child  to  in- 
carnate through  those  parents  because  of  associa- 
tions in  a  past  life.  Those  parents  owed  to  that 
child  the  care  and  attention  it  should  receive  until 
it  should  reach  an  age  when  it  could  care  for  itself; 
and  in  order  that  a  perfect  equilibrium  should  be 
established  between  those  three  individuals  this 
child  was  brought  to  them  to  receive  that  which 
belonged  to  it  by  right.  Perhaps  the  parents  did 
not  wish  to  pay  their  debt  to  the  child  and  aban- 
doned it,  thinking  they  were  rid  of  the  responsi- 
bility; but  they  were  mistaken.  Equilibrium,  jus- 
tice must  and  will  prevail,  and  if  it  be  not  estab- 
lished in  this  life  then  it  must  be  in  another.  That 
invisible  cord  created  by  their  thinking  in  a  past 
life  has  not  been  broken  by  this  attempt  to  shift 
their  paternal  responsibilities.  Again  it  will  bring 
these  three  souls  or  minds  together,  perhaps  in  the 
relationship  of  master  and  slaves,  or  of  mistress  and 
maids,  "For  verily  I  say  unto  you,  till  heaven  and 
earth  pass,  one  jot  or  one  tittle  shall  in  no  wise  pass 
from  the  law  till  all  be  fulfilled." 

The  same  law  holds  good  in  the  betrayal  of  trust, 
whether  of  affections,  or  of  a  fiduciary  nature.  If 
a  person  wrongs  another,  the  thought  of  the 
wronged  one  goes  forth  to  that  other  and  binds  the 
two  souls  or  minds  together  with  a  bond  that  can- 
not be  broken  until  full  justice  has  been  done  be- 
tween them. 

The  general  character  of  a  man's  thoughts  de- 
termine his  general  environment,  such  as  the  class 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  117 

into  which  he  will  be  born ;  and  his  special  thoughts 
determine  the  family  in  that  class  which  will  give 
him  his  body.  For  example,  here  is  a  man  who 
cultivates  only  that  which  pertains  to  the  so-called 
evil  side  of  life;  this  is  the  side  of  life  that  he  pre- 
fers. He  will  reincarnate  into  an  environment  suit- 
able to  the  character  he  has  made  for  himself.  He 
will  be  born  into  criminal  circles.  There  is  no  use 
wasting  tears  about  him  or  his  depravity;  God  is 
just,  and  this  universe  is  governed  by  law.  When 
a  man  comes  back  into  slum  life  he  has  put  him- 
self into  that  condition ;  his  own  thoughts  have  car- 
ried him  just  where  he  belongs.  It  is  quite  com- 
mon for  a  soul  or  mind  to  incarnate  in  a  respect- 
able circle  of  society  in  one  life,  yet  by  dissipation, 
neglect  of  opportunities,  and  cultivating  the  animal 
side  of  its  nature,  to  become  a  social  outcast  in 
its  next  earth  life  where  it  will  be  able  to  indulge 
its  unfortunate  propensities  unrestrained  by  respect- 
able friends  or  relations. 

If  a  person  is  born  and  reared  under  favorable 
circumstances,  it  is  because  the  character  of  his 
thoughts  brought  him  into  that  environment.  He 
was  attached  by  the  Great  Law  to  the  parents  who 
were  able  and  willing  to  give  him  the  advantages  he 
received.  We  could  save  ourselves  much  misdi- 
rected or  wasted  force  and  sympathy  if  we  would 
recognize  the  fact  that  nothing  ever  happens  in  this 
world,  but  that  everything  is  governed  by  law.  I 
do  not  say  leave  unfortunate  souls  where  you 
find  them,  but  I  say  do  not  attempt  to  quarrel 


n8  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

with  the  law  which  is  giving  to  them  precisely  what 
they  have  desired  some  time  in  their  career.  If  you 
see  a  soul  who  wants  help,  then  help  it ;  but  do  not 
weep  over  those  who  are  enjoying  the  fruits  of 
their  own  thought  labors,  and  do  not  be  dissatis- 
fied, or  criticise  God  because  some  souls  have  placed 
themselves  in  certain  unpleasant  walks  of  life,  or 
have  brought  upon  themselves  unhappy  conditions. 

Man  not  only  determines  his  birth  and  the  qual- 
ity of  his  body  at  birth,  but  he  modifies  his  body 
every  moment  of  his  life.  Take  the  dissipated,  sen- 
suous and  sensual  criminal,  thinking  only  of  that 
which  pertains  to  the  external  side  of  life;  he  ex- 
carnates,  and  after  a  time  is  brought  back  to  earth 
into  an  environment  where  he  is  pre-natally  marked 
with  the  very  characteristics  that  his  own  mind 
indicates.  He  takes  that  kind  of  a  body  which  is 
the  best  expression  for  him.  It  is  quite  unusual 
for  such  a  soul  to  succeed  in  getting  out  of  that  en- 
vironment in  one  life,  because  its  body  and  brain 
express  so  strongly  those  particular  characteristics. 
It  is  possible,  however,  for  it  to  do  one  of  two  things ; 
indulge  in  the  vicious  propensities  till  the  depths 
of  degradation  have  been  reached,  and  it  learns  that 
the  price  is  entirely  too  great  to  pay  for  such  pleas- 
ures and  decides  to  reform;  or  it  may  commence 
to  fight  for  self-control  from  the  beginning  and 
gradually  change  its  body  and  invironment  by 
changing  its  thought. 

In  the  sense  of  making  his  own  character,  man 
is  his  own  maker.  He  has  the  free  will  to  think, 


The  Law  of  Re-embodiment.  119 

and  his  every  thought  is  a  tendency  in  a  given  di- 
rection. One  thought  does  not  make  a  character, 
but  one  thought  is  a  tendency  toward  a  character, 
since  once  the  initial  impulse  is  given,  it  has  a  ten- 
dency to  repeat  itself  until  a  habit  is  formed,  and 
habits  make  character.  Therefore  every  thought  a 
man  thinks  has  its  effect  upon  his  destiny,  not  only 
in  shaping  his  present  life,  but  also  his  future  in- 
carnation. Perhaps  you  were  never  made  aware 
of  how  intense  a  man's  thought  may  be  and  how 
immediate  is  its  action  upon  his  physical  body.  If 
you  are  suddenly  startled,  the  effect  is  instantaneous 
upon  your  body,  and  the  entire  system  may  be  de- 
ranged by  the  fright. 

The  majority  of  men  make  their  physical  bodies 
and  their  environment  unconsciously,  but  I  have 
known  men  who  have  consciously  made  their  bod- 
ies over  so  completely  and  entirely  that  their  friends 
did  not  recognize  them  afterward.  I  have  seen 
women  change  their  figures  through  the  power  of 
their  thoughts  and  make  them  precisely  what  they 
desired  them  to  be.  Persons  who  showed  the  marks 
of  age  have  brought  back  the  flush  of  youth,  and 
I  have  known  men  and  women  to  prolong  their  lives 
far  beyond  the  three  score  years  and  ten  that  the 
individuals  of  our  race  are  supposed  to  have  allotted 
to  them. 


LECTURE  SIX. 
COLORS  OF  THOUGHT  VIBRATION. 

In  lecture  one  we  saw  that  in  some  of  the  tem- 
ples of  India  there  are  colored  figures  and  sym- 
bols. These  played  an  important  part  in  the  occult 
history  of  that  nation,  and  depict  the  forces  of 
man  and  of  nature ;  but  the  world  has  no  record  left 
concerning  these  teachings,  and  it  is  only  students 
of  mysticism  who  can  read  in  those  colors  occult 
truths.  In  those  Indian  temples  man  is  depicted 
as  radiating  from  himself  various  colors;  but  what 
does  that  mean  to  the  average  mind? 

Among  the  ancient  Europeans  little  was  known 
concerning  color.  Coming  down  to  more  modern 
history,  we  find  that  among  the  Greeks  there  were 
no  teachings  regarding  colors.  Greek  development 
ran  more  particularly  to  sculpture,  arts,  archi- 
tecture and  to  the  use  of  pigments,  rather  than  to 
what  we  call  science,  and  hence  they  had  no  knowl- 
edge of  the  nature  of  vibrations.  Passing  on  to  the 
Romans,  we  find  that  they,  too,  lacked  in  a  large 
measure  any  knowledge  concerning  the  nature  of 
color.  Seneca  seems  to  be  about  the  only  Roman  who 
wrote  anything  along  this  line,  and  he  only  went 
so  far  as  to  show  that  the  primary  colors  of  the 
rainbow  were  the  same  as  the  refraction  of  sunlight 
through  broken  glass,  but  he  was  not  able  to  explain 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  121 

the  cause  of  the  identity  of  the  phenomena.  Then 
passing  on  to  the  Middle  Ages,  we  find  that  those 
who  had  commenced  to  investigate  this  subject 
of  color  from  a  scientific  standpoint,  i.  e.,  from  the 
standpoint  of  light,  accepted  the  theory  that  all  light 
is  the  result  of  certain  colors  emitted  from  objects. 
But  about  1665  Robert  Hook,  for  the  first  time  cer- 
tainly in  historic  ages,  formulated  a  theory  of  wave 
motions  which  Christian  Huygens,  in  1690,  ac- 
cepted and  elaborated  and  made  the  basis  of  the 
vibratory  or  wave  theory  of  light  and  color.  But 
the  great  Newton  threw  his  weight  of  opinion  with 
the  old  emission  theory;  consequently  the  wave 
theory  became  heterodox  and  unpopular,  and  it  was 
not  heard  of  again  for  almost  a  century.  Then 
once  more  the  scientists  began  to  talk  about  the 
wave  theory  of  light  and  of  color,  and  we  find 
the  old  emission  theory  disappearing  and  the  wave 
theory  meeting  with  the  acceptance  of  the  scientific 
world.  This  is  the  predominating  theory  of  our 
scientists  at  present;  but  it  seems  not  to  have  oc- 
curred to  many  of  them  that  there  is  an  element  of 
truth  in  both  theories  and  that  by  blending  parts 
of  the  cardinal  ideas  of  both,  an  hypothesis  might 
be  formulated  which  would  cover  all  facts  and  phe- 
nomena. 

We  find  a  diversity  of  opinion  concerning  color 
among  those  who  study  from  the  standpoint  of  pig- 
ments and  those  who  study  from  the  standpoint 
of  light,  as  well  as  some  difference  of  opinion  on 
this  subject  in  each  of  these  several  schools.  The 


122  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

modern  scientist  bases  his  hypothesis  upon  the 
wave  theory  using  for  his  basis  the  solar  radiation, 
or  the  visible  so-called  white  light.  And  yet  he  tells 
you  that  in  point  of  fact  there  is  no  white  light, 
meaning  the  sum  total  of  all  the  solar  radiation.  He 
tells  you  that  the  great  emission  of  light  or  elec- 
trical vibration,  whichever  it  may  be,  that  comes 
from  the  sun  as  a  greenish-blue  color,  is  refracted 
by  our  atmosphere  and  manifests  itself  to  our  eyes 
as  prismatic  colors.  But  he  also  says  that  as  the 
sunlight  comes  into  the  world's  atmosphere,  large 
proportions  of  the  blue  and  green  rays  are  withheld 
by  the  atmosphere,  which  has  a  selective  absorption 
for  those  colors. 

Starting  with  what  must  admittedly  be  largely 
a  hypothetical  premise,  modern  science  advances 
a  theory  concerning  colors  based  entirely  upon  such 
of  the  solar  radiations  as  reach  this  earth  and  are 
not  absorbed  by  atmospherical  conditions,  for  it 
does  not  seem  to  have  occurred  to  the  modern  sci- 
entist that  there  is  a  vibratory  force  in  the  earth 
itself  which  modifies  the  solar  radiation. 

The  Occultist  has  great  respect  for  the  indefa- 
tigable energy  of  the  modern  scientist,  and  appre- 
ciates the  painstaking  care  with  which  he  collects 
his  facts;  but  he  recognizes  that  the  physicist  is 
only  working  on  the  plane  of  effects  and  hence 
causes  are  but  guesses  with  him.  These  guesses 
change  from  decade  to  decade  as  new  facts  are 
discovered  by  further  research,  and  hence  the  Oc- 
cultist does  not  feel  bound  to  follow  the  orthodox 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  123 

theories  of  any  particular  decade  relative  to  any 
branch  of  knowledge;  because  he  has  his  own  sci- 
ences, which  have  existed  for  ages,  and  have  been 
verified  by  all  who  have  studied  along  these  lines. 
For  this  reason  we  shall  not  enter  too  far  into  the 
discussion  of  how  near  right  the  modern  scientist 
may  be.  But  the  Occultist  says  this:  he  does  not 
accept  wholly  the  views  of  the  modern  scientist 
as  to  primary  colors  based  upon  visible  solar  light 
The  accepted  prism,  you  know,  consists  of  the 
colors  red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue,  indigo  and 
violet;  and  these  are  considered  to  be  the  primary 
colors.  The  Occultist  says  the  color  you  call  yellow 
in  point  of  fact  is  not  yellow,  but  is  the  higher  rays 
of  the  orange,  and  that  the  human  eye  does  not 
record  the  true  primary  yellow,  because  it  is  be- 
yond the  vision  of  the  ordinary  eye,  even  when  as- 
sisted by  mechanical  devices.  The  physicist  tells 
you  that  your  eye  cannot  detect  the  ultra  violet 
rays,  and  that  on  the  other  end  of  the  spectrum 
it  cannot  follow  the  lowest  vibrations  of  the  red. 
The  Occultist  accepts  that  statement,  but  adds  that 
you  do  not  detect  all  the  rays  or  shades  of  any  one 
of  the  colors  contained  even  in  your  spectrum. 
Again,  he  differs  from  the  modern  physicist  in  re- 
gard to  the  question  of  indigo  and  violet.  The  Oc- 
cultist says  that  indigo  and  violet  are  not  primary 
colors,  but  are  only  some  of  the  higher  and  lower 
rays  of  the  blue,  which,  in  registering  themselves 
upon  the  human  vision,  appear  as  separate  colors. 
Nor  does  the  Occultist  agree  with  those  who  make  a 


124  The  History  cmd  Power  of  Mind. 

study  of  pigments — artists  and  chemists — who  con- 
sider blue,  yellow  and  red  as  the  primary  colors, 
and  that  all  the  other  colors  are  but  modifications 
or  blendings  of  these  primary  ones.  The  Occultist 
says  that  here  also  the  yellow  pigment  is  not  the 
yellow  of  the  basic  vibration,  but  is  merely  a  modi- 
fication of  the  vibration  of  the  orange,  and,  more- 
over, that  in  limiting  the  primary  colors  to  blue, 
yellow  and  red,  you  leave  out  entirely  the  orange 
and  green  which  are  both  primary  colors.  So  much, 
therefore,  to  show  you  the  lines  of  divergence  be- 
tween Occultism  and  the  present  scientific  concep- 
tion relative  to  color. 

By  primary  colors,  from  the  standpoint  of  Oc- 
cultism, is  meant  those  basic  vibrations  that  appear 
at  the  beginning  of  time,  and  manifest  throughout 
all  planes  of  nature.  Before  discussing  these,  it 
may  be  well  to  enlarge  upon  some  of  the  points 
of  agreement  between  modern  science  and  Occult- 
ism, which  we  touched  upon  in  lecture  three.  First, 
you  will  remember  that  whatever  is  manifested 
must  have  form  and  color;  nothing  could  manifest 
if  there  were  a  lack  of  these  two  qualities,  because 
manifestation  means  a  rate  of  vibration  which  par- 
cels or  separates  a  portion  of  atoms  from  the  mass 
of  matter.  Therefore,  vibration  is  the  parent  of 
form  and  color,  and  manifestation  means  that  there 
must  always  exist  these  two  qualities.  Take,  for 
example,  the  flowers ;  why  do  they  have  their  vari- 
ous forms?  Why  do  they  have  their  peculiar  pig- 
ments? Is  it  not  the  rate  of  vibration  which  de- 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  125 

termines  the  size,  color  and  form  of  the  flowers? 
You  remember  that  when  you  went  to  school  you 
were  taught  that  form  is  the  result  of  vibration, 
and  the  fact  was  illustrated  by  placing  a  quantity 
of  fine  feathery  seed  upon  a  drum  head,  and 
then  prolonging  the  notes  of  a  violin  over  it.  The 
seed  gathered  into  various  forms,  according  to  the 
vibration  or  sound  which  was  given,  and  this  illus- 
tration proved  the  truth  of  the  teaching.  Then  you 
remember  the  illustration  given  of  the  hot  poker 
which  changed  its  color  according  to  its  change  in 
vibration.  These  illustrations  were  given  to  show 
that  the  so-called  inanimate  things  vibrate,  and  that 
their  vibrations  can  be  changed  according  to  the 
will  or  desire  of  man.  And  now  we  will  go  a  step 
further,  and  learn  something  about  the  vibrations 
which  determine  the  form  and  color  of  man  him- 
self. 

Man  being  an  individualized  manifestation  of  na- 
ture, must  naturally  have  his  form  and  color.  When 
I  speak  of  man,  I  refer  to  both  the  physical  and 
mental  man.  Place  the  human  body  in  an  easy 
position,  with  feet  together,  and  with  arms  at  the 
sides;  then  draw  a  line  around  it,  touching  each 
extreme  outer  point  of  the  body,  and  you  will  find 
that  the  line  forms  an  ovoid.  You  remember 
when  we  discussed  the  subjective  and  the  objective 
minds  we  found  that  the  two  interblended  and  en- 
souled the  physical  man.  These  two  united  minds 
not  only  fill  the  interstices  of  the  physical  body,  and 
hold  together  all  the  physical  molecules,  and  keep 


126  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

them  in  place,  but  it  also  extends  beyond  and  around 
the  body  to  the  distance  of  several  inches.  If  you 
should  draw  a  line  around  this  inner  or  mental  man 
you  would  find  that  it,  too,  is  oval,  or  egg-shaped, 
which  seems  to  be  the  best  form  for  the  highest 
and  largest  expression  of  individualized  conscious- 
ness— as,  witness  man,  world,  or  sun. 

Into  each  center  of  consciousness  flows  the  mag- 
netic force  called  the  life  principle,  and  by  reason 
of  that  inflow  into  all  forms  there  is  a  constant 
pushing  out  of  old  atoms  and  a  replacement  of  them 
with  new  elements.  And  this  is  true  whether  the 
form  be  on  the  subjective  or  objective  side  of  na- 
ture. This  passing  in  and  out  of  the  atomic  life 
force,  makes  a  fluidic  sphere  around  each  man  and 
around  everything.  In  electricity  we  call  this  fluidic 
sphere  the  electric  field;  in  the  sun  we  call  it  the 
photosphere;  around  a  magnet  we  call  it  the  mag- 
netic field  or  field  of  attraction.  Baron  Karl  Von 
Reichenbach,  through  sensitives,  rediscovered  in 
modern  times  this  magnetic  field  around  men  and 
animals,  and  even  around  minerals.  This  magnetic 
field  he  called  "od,"  or  "odic"  force.  His  discovery 
is  confirmed  now  by  clairvoyants,  by  seers,  and  in 
France  by  sensitives  under  hypnotic  influence.  Per- 
sons from  each  of  these  classes  of  investigators 
have  seen  around  each  person,  tree  and  mineral 
this  field  of  light  or  color.  This  is  one  reason  for 
that  law  of  physics  which  says  that  no  two  masses 
can  approach  each  other  without  being  mutually  af- 
fected, because,  being  brought  into  juxtaposition, 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  127 

there  is  an  attraction  and  repulsion  due  to  the  flow 
of  the  life  forces,  and  the  exchange  of  atoms  which 
is  constantly  taking  place  between  them.  There 
is  essentially  nothing  in  inert  matter  to  attract; 
but  the  inflowing  of  the  life  force  and  the  throw- 
ing off  of  old  particles  make  a  change  of  atoms  be- 
tween masses  that  are  near  each  other,  and  they 
attract  or  repel  according  to  their  similarity  or 
dissimilarity  of  vibration. 

It  is  the  existence  of  the  magnetic  field  of  an 
animal  or  a  man  which  enables  a  dog  to  follow  the 
scent  of  either.  As  a  physical,  animal  body  passes 
over  the  ground  it  throws  off  from  itself  particles 
or  atoms  with  each  effort  or  emotion.  A  certain 
quantity  of  these  particles  is  left  imprinted  upon 
the  earth ;  and  since  every  individualized  conscious- 
ness possesses  its  own  distinct  odor  or  perfume — 
due  to  its  condition  of  development  or  rate  of  vibra- 
tion— it  is  not  at  all  difficult  for  the  dog  to  keep 
the  scent  of  the  creature  he  is  following.  The  atoms 
left  upon  the  earth  are  impregnated  with  the  odor 
of  that  person  or  thing  which  the  dog  is  able  to 
distinguish  from  any  other. 

When  we  come  to  the  higher  centers  of  conscious- 
ness, as  in  man,  we  not  only  have  the  life  force  as 
an  element  which  builds,  but  we  also  have  a  thought 
force  which  is  constantly  manifesting,  and  by  its 
vibratory  flow  is  modifying,  the  life  force.  Each 
person  radiates  from  himself  not  only  the  physical 
atoms  which  he  has  used,  and  which  have  lost  his 
vibration,  but  also  the  finer  forms  of  matter  which 


128  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

go  out  with  his  thought  force;  and  therefore  there 
is  a  continuous  stream  flowing  out  from  each  indi- 
vidual to  other  centers,  and  these  streams  leave  their 
impress  upon  everything  the  person  thinks  about 
or  touches.  A  sensitive  coming  in  contact  with  a 
part  of  the  outflow  from  a  man,  can  read  his  char- 
acter as  well  as  a  scientist  ,  by  taking  up  a  piece  of 
coal,  can  tell  you  its  chemical  constituency,  or  its 
probable  age  and  formation;  and  this  faculty  is 
now  called  psychometry. 

In  ancient  times,  the  sphere  surrounding  man 
was  called  the  aureola  when  it  encircled  his  whole 
body;  when  it  only  radiated  from  his  head  and 
shoulders  it  was  called  the  nimbus.  Later,  this 
magnetic  field  in  either  aspect  was  called  the  aura 
by  Western  Occultists,  while  in  the  East  it  was 
called  the  sacred  Auric  Egg.  The  ancient  masters 
of  art  always  represented  their  saints  with  a  nim- 
bus about  their  heads  and  were  accustomed  to 
paint  their  most  divine  characters  as  surrounded 
by  an  aureola.  In  the  pictures  of  Christ  there  is  a 
radiation  from  the  entire  body,  while  in  those  of 
his  disciples  there  is  usually  but  the  nimbus  to  be 
seen.  And  these  old  painters  were  right  in  their 
conceptions;  they  were  sensitives  and  either  had 
the  intuitive  knowledge  of  an  occult  fact,  or  they 
were  clairvoyants  and  saw  that  according  to  the 
development  of  the  ego  was  the  extent  of  its  emana- 
tions. The  Occultist  says  that  in  the  ordinary 
man  this  radiation  extends  from  two  to  six  inches 
from  the  body;  but  as  man  develops  in  thought, 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  129 

power  and  capacity  to  draw  into  himself  cosmic 
forces,  his  radiations  expand  until  they  may  ex- 
tend from  six  inches  to  several  feet  outward. 

This  aura  is  one  of  the  chief  causes  for  the  un- 
accountable likes  and  dislikes  that  we  have  for  per- 
sons whom  we  meet;  for,  if  one  is  at  all  sensitive, 
one  can  feel  very  distinctly  the  auras  one  comes  in 
contact  with.  If  we  meet  with  a  person  whose  vi- 
brations are  very  much  higher  than  our  own,  we 
will  be  likely  to  either  almost  worship  that  person 
or  dislike  him  for  being  so  far  in  advance  of  us. 
We  will  be  greatly  disturbed  by  the  higher  vibra- 
tions proceeding  from  him,  which  will  very  likely 
call  forth  all  the  good  in  us,  or  bring  all  the  sedi- 
ment in  our  nature  to  the  surface.  Knowing  this, 
and  being  sensitive  to  these  sudden  likes  and  dis- 
likes for  persons,  you  may  save  yourself  much  dis- 
comfort by  keeping  a  good  distance  between  your- 
selves and  those  who  disturb  you.  A  distance  of 
three  or  four  feet  will  be  sufficient  to  prevent  you 
from  feeling  so  plainly  the  vibratory  force  of 
another. 

This  aura  will  also  account  for  the  great  deple- 
tion that  many  persons  feel  when  they  come  in 
contact  with  other  persons ;  for  it  is  very  true  that 
there  are  human  sponges  who,  unconsciously  per- 
haps, maintain  their  own  lives  by  drawing  all  the 
magnetic  force  or  life  they  can  get  from  others. 
This  is  what  the  Occultist  calls  vampirization.  You 
may  have  observed  that  invalids  are  most  anxious 
to  have  young,  strong  people  about  them.  They 


130  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

will  often  take  the  hand  of  a  healthy  person  and 
hold  it  for  hours,  if  they  are  permitted  to.  It  is 
pleasant  for  the  invalid,  but  quite  trying  sometimes 
for  the  visitor,  because  with  the  blending  of  the 
auras  the  magnetic  force  flows  from  the  stronger 
to  the  weaker.  Old  people  are  very  fond  of  chil- 
dren, and  often  insist  upon  sleeping  with  them.  This 
is  very  dangerous  for  the  child,  because  of  the  de- 
magnetization which  must  always  follow  so  doing. 

There  are  several  ways  by  which  you  may  save 
yourselves  from  being  demagnetized  by  others.  The 
first  is  to  spend  much  of  your  time  alone.  Another 
is  by  declaring  positiveness  for  yourself  and  by 
keeping  your  mind  on  your  own  magnetism,  and 
thus  retain  it  within  your  own  body.  Again,  you 
may  save  yourself  considerably  by  letting  your  feet 
touch  each  other  lightly,  and  by  clasping  your 
hands  together  when  you  are  sitting  near  other  per- 
sons; this  is  a  means  of  closing  your  circuit  and 
preventing  your  magnetism  from  flowing  out.  In 
the  last-mentioned  practice  it  is  not  alone  the  physi- 
cal act  of  closing  your  circuit,  but  the  mental  atti- 
tude you  take  at  that  time  which  protects  you  from 
vampirization. 

The  size  and  color  of  the  human  aura  changes 
according  to  the  intensity  and  quality  of  the 
thought.  We  have  seen  that  all  vibration  is  either 
the  direct  or  indirect  result  of  thought;  and  this 
is  true  from  the  first  Divine  impulse  down  to  every 
thought  of  man.  It  can  be  demonstrated  in  a  num- 
ber of  ways.  Telepathy,  which  I  believe  scientists 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  131 

now  accept  as  a  fact,  is  the  transmission  of  thought 
or  vibratory  force  from  the  mind  of  one  person  to 
that  of  another  without  the  use  of  material  signs, 
using  as  the  medium  of  communication  the  ether 
or  Universal  Consciousness.  If  there  is  a  vibration 
or  emanation  that  goes  forth  from  you  every  time 
you  think,  and  it  passes  to  the  point  it  is  sent,  then 
it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  according  to  the 
intensity  of  the  thought  is  the  emanation  projected. 
If  you  sit  quietly  day  dreaming,  or  thinking  in  an 
indefinite,  incoherent  manner,  the  emanation  does 
not  proceed  far  from  you;  but  if  your  thought  is 
definite  and  intense,  then  its  vibration  must  proceed 
according  to  its  own  intensity.  By  intense  thinking 
I  do  not  mean  that  you  should  clench  your  fist,  nor 
corrugate  your  brow  while  doing  it;  but  I  mean 
that  your  thought  must  be  clearly  held  in  mind  and 
distinctly  sent  forth. 

I  understand  that  Dr.  Baraduct,  a  French  physi- 
cian, has  invented  a  disk  so  delicately  sensitized  that 
it  registers  the  vibrations  of  a  human  being  brought 
in  contact  with  it.  If  an  angry  man  puts  forth  his 
hand  toward  the  dial,  the  needle  on  it  immediately 
registers  the  intensity  of  his  vibrations.  If  the 
opposite  hand  of  the  same  man  is  extended,  the  dial 
immediately  shows  the  difference  in  vibrations  be- 
tween the  positive  and  negative  sides  of  his  body. 
When  a  clear,  distinct  thinker  tests  the  machine, 
there  is  a  greater  number  registered  upon  the  dial 
than  when  a  negative  person  tests  it,  and  thus  we 
are  fortunate  in  having  a  recently  invented  median- 


132  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

ical  instrument  which  proves  the  claims  of  Occult- 
ism concerning  the  vibratory  emanations  from  the 
human  body. 

The  intensity  of  the  thought  determines  the  size 
of  the  aura,  and  the  quality  of  the  thought  deter- 
mines its  color.  For  example,  you  may  have  an  in- 
tense vibration  of  a  low  color,  which  would  cause 
your  emanation  to  project  for  three  or  more  feet 
from  you,  or  you  might  have  an  intense  thought  of  a 
higher  nature  which  would  reach  the  same  distance. 
Its  size  would  depend  upon  its  intensity,  but  its 
color  would  be  determined  by  its  quality  or  rate  of 
vibration,  or  its  moral  and  intelligent  degree  of 
excellence. 

According  to  the  Occult  system  in  reference  to 
mind  or  man,  the  spectrum,  as  applied  to  this  par- 
ticular planet,  would  include  what  is  generally 
known  as  the  absence  of  color  at  one  end  and  the 
synthesis  of  color  at  the  other,  or  black  and  white. 
But  because  neither  of  these  has  a  practical  bear- 
ing upon  this  course  of  lectures — nor  will  it  have 
in  your  lives  at  this  point  in  your  evolution — I  shall 
omit  them  from  this  course.  Both  colors  indicate 
abnormal  conditions  of  mind,  and  we  do  not  desire 
to  waste  our  time  studying  the  abnormal.  The  Oc- 
cultist says  that  red,  orange,  green,  blue  and  yellow 
are  the  normal  primary  colors,  and  can  be  seen  and 
known  upon  each  inner  plane  of  being  according 
to  the  development  of  the  investigator.  The  or- 
dinarily developed  person  cannot  see  the  pure  yel- 
low ray  with  his  physical  eyes  any  more  than  the 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  133 

ordinary  American  can  see  the  many  delicate  col- 
ors in  an  Indian  shawl  that  the  specialized  vision 
of  an  expert  can  distinguish. 

The  inner  man,  usually  called  the  soul  or  ego, 
the  real  man,  always  has  a  color  as  distinctly  his 
own  as  has  the  outside  man.  Each  individual  has 
his  particular  color  according  to  his  quality  of 
thought,  character  and  development.  During  his 
first  incarnation  on  the  earth  the  normal  color  of 
the  subjective  mind  was  blue,  and  the  natural  color 
of  the  objective  mind  was  green;  therefore,  when 
these  two  first  came  together,  and  united  as  one 
mind,  and  incarnated  in  a  human  body,  the  com- 
bined colors  became  a  green-blue.  This  very  quick- 
ly changed  to  lower  rates  of  vibration,  because  sen- 
sation immediately  commenced  to  manifest  in  the 
place  of  reason,  in  the  newly  incarnated  man.  The 
green  predominated  over  the  blue  because  the  blue 
was  the  product  of  the  subjective  side  of  life,  and  the 
green  was  the  product  of  the  objective  side  which 
was  stronger  upon  its  own  plane  of  development. 
But  even  these  green-blue  color  vibrations  were  lost 
through  the  excitation  of  the  emotional  nature, 
which  came  quickly  into  the  ascendency  in  man's 
nature.  This  was  due  to  the  great  desire  for  the 
physical  enjoyments  of  life,  for  in  those  days  man 
was  in  his  absolutely  normal,  animal  condition.  He 
had  a  new  body,  had  not  put  into  action  causes 
which  reacted  upon  it,  and  his  power  of  thinking 
was  limited,  and  therefore  not  likely  to  have  much 
influence  on  his  body  during  those  first  incarna- 


134  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

tions.    So  there  was  nothing  for  man  at  that  time 
but  the  mere  physical  enjoyment  of  existence. 

Before  we  take  up  the  study  of  the  emotional  na- 
ture and  its  colors,  it  may  be  well  to  examine  that 
force  which  built  man's  physical  form,  and  which 
builds  all  physical  forms — the  force  we  call  "life." 
This  force  manifests  as  orange  vibration.  If  life  is 
a  force,  if  it  is  something,  then  it  must  have  a  rate 
of  vibration  of  its  own  to  distinguish  it  from  every- 
thing else  in  the  universe.  We  speak  of  the  Gulf 
Stream.  It  is  a  current  of  water  which  vibrates  at 
a  higher  rate  than  the  body  of  water  through  which 
it  flows,  and  we  call  this  current  of  water  the  Gulf 
Stream  to  distinguish  it  from  the  rest  of  the  ocean. 
So  in  this  great  sea  of  consciousness  there  are  cer 
tain  definite  and  distinct  currents  of  force  which 
play  very  important  parts  in  man's  evolution,  and 
that  which  we  call  "life"  is  one  of  them.  I  cannot 
prove  this  statement  to  you  because  of  the  limita- 
tion of  your  vision,  but  you  can  prove  it  for  your- 
self— as  you  can  prove  every  other  statement  I  shall 
make  in  these  lectures — if  you  develop  to  that  point 
where  your  inner  senses  permit  you  to  function  upon 
that  plane  of  existence  where  forces  are  visible  as 
forces,  as  causes,  and  not  as  effects  or  phenomena. 

On  this  physical  plane  you  see  life  as  form ;  on  the 
subjective  or  mental  side  you  see  life  manifesting  as 
a  separate  and  distinct  thing  which  is  building  the 
form  you  see  with  your  physical  eyes.  Seeing  life 
on  the  subjective  side,  it  is  an  orange  color,  or  a 
force  which  vibrates  as  orange,  sweeping  into  every- 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  135 

thing  and  giving  vitality  to  all  forms.  All  physical 
bodies  have  this  vital  force  manifesting  in  them 
according  to  the  capacity  of  each  to  express  it.  You 
do  not  see  the  orange  force  permeating  the  invalid 
to  the  same  extent  that  it  does  an  athlete,  because 
the  invalid  cannot  express  it  so  well.  And  now 
that  you  understand  something  about  the  force 
which  fashions  and  preserves  the  physical  body,  let 
us  turn  to  man  himself  and  study  the  other  forces 
expressed  in  him. 

The  lowest  force  in  psychic  man  is  that  which 
we  designate  as  his  distinct  animal  propensities,  and 
these  are  red  in  their  manifestation  or  vibration. 
You  remember  we  found  the  four  cardinal  emo- 
tions upon  which  all  the  other  human  emotions  were 
based,  and  the  first  three  of  these  were  red;  there- 
fore, when  the  animal  nature  is  in  the  ascendency 
in  man,  when  it  dominates  the  intellectual  side  of 
his  nature,  the  red  vibrations  become  the  domin- 
ating ones  and  permeate  the  entire  man  and  his 
aura.  If  you  strike  a  tuning  fork  upon  the  table, 
the  sound  produced  is  the  vibration  which  emanates 
from  that  tuning  fork.  If  you  put  a  weight  upon  the 
fork  the  sound  ceases,  because  the  low  rate  of  vibra- 
tion which  you  bring  in  contact  with  the  tuning 
fork  causes  its  vibrations  to  be  lowered,  and  finally 
to  cease ;  thus  the  vibrations  of  the  weight  overcome 
those  of  the  tuning  fork.  It  is  the  same  with 
thought;  when  the  animal  nature  becomes  intense 
it  gives  its  lowering  vibrations  to  every  part  of  the 
man,  and  consequently  the  intellectual  nature  ceases 


136  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

its  activity  for  the  time  being,  and  takes  the  color 
of  the  dominating  emotion.  When  the  emotional 
nature  is  in  the  ascendency,  man's  color  is  red,  and 
according  to  the  intensity  of  his  emotions  is  the 
color  intensified;  but  if  he  struggles  to  control  his 
emotions  there  will  be  a  change  of  colors  in  his  aura. 

In  the  course  of  time  man's  lower  intellectual 
nature  began  to  be  more  prominent,  and  when  his 
emotions  were  not  over-stimulated  it  began  to  be 
something  of  a  factor  in  his  life ;  and  as  time  went 
on  what  was  originally  the  red  in  the  psychic  man, 
and  the  orange  of  his  body,  became  tinged  with 
the  green  of  his  objective  mentality,  and  then  he 
had  the  three  colors  blended,  which  gave  him  a 
brown  vibration.  This  color,  unfortunately,  indi- 
cates the  condition  of  the  mass  of  men  at  the  pres- 
ent day,  because  they  have  not  developed  beyond 
that  point.  The  intellectual  side  of  man  is  very 
weak  as  yet;  even  the  objective  mind  is  not  well 
individualized,  and  as  for  the  subjective  mind,  it 
is  not  active  in  one  person  in  a  thousand. 

After  many  centuries  some  men,  for  one  reason 
or  another,  began  to  control  their  emotions  some- 
what. This  may  have  been  brought  about  by  laws 
being  enacted  which  said:  If  a  person  gives  sway 
to  his  emotions,  and  kills  another,  or  becomes  too 
avaricious,  and  robs  his  fellow  man,  he  shall  be 
punished.  Or  it  may  have  been  because  social  life 
required  the  suppression  of  the  emotions  at  times. 
As  man  began  to  control  more  and  more  his  emo- 
tional nature,  the  green  vibrations  became  more 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  137 

prominent.  First  in  its  deeper  shades — which  indi- 
cate intense  selfishness — and  subsequently  in  its 
lighter  shades,  indicating  individualization. 

Green  is  the  color  of  the  objective  mind  of  man 
when  he  first  begins  to  individualize  as  a  perma- 
nent center  of  consciousness  in  Deity.  It  is  the 
color  of  the  manifested,  lower,  intellectual  nature 
which  is  sometimes  called  the  brain  consciousness. 
Self-consciousness  in  the  growing  man  was  neces- 
sarily an  evolutionary  step ;  and  when  man,  for  his 
own  purposes  and  his  own  interests,  began  to  use 
his  intellect  even  on  a  low  plane,  he  began  to  con- 
trol his  emotional  nature.  This  in  itself  helped  to 
strengthen  his  intellectual  nature  and  made  his 
emotions  more  or  less  subservient  to  it.  Green 
vibrations  are  desirable  because  no  soul  can  mount 
very  high  in  its  evolution  unless  it  becomes  properly 
individualized.  Then  will  come  the  time  when  our 
subjective  minds,  or  the  diviner  portion  of  our  na- 
tures will  fight  for  the  ascendency  as  the  lower 
intellectual  is  now  fighting  the  emotional  nature. 
At  that  time  the  original  color  of  the  subjective 
mind  will  begin  to  manifest  itself  and  the  blue 
vibrations  will  commence  to  tinge  the  inner  man. 
At  first  there  will  be  but  occasional  flashes  of  the 
blue  in  his  aura ;  later,  it  will  become  suffused  with 
the  blue  vibration. 

Raising  the  vibrations  of  the  developing  man  is  a 
slow  process.  Where  his  higher  intellect  and  in- 
tuition begin  to  manifest,  and  where  reason  com- 
mences to  overpower  desire,  there  is  the  battle 


138  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

ground  for  the  objective  and  subjective  minds.  This 
is  where  most  of  the  progressive  men  and  women 
are  to-day;  and  if  you  were  clairvoyant,  you  could 
see  the  auras  changing  from  green  to  blue,  with 
often  a  flash  of  red,  and  then  back  again  to  green, 
or  perhaps  to  purple,  a  combination  of  the  blue 
and  red.  I  know  of  no  better  comparison  than  to 
liken  the  progressive  inner  man,  in  his  appearance, 
to  an  electric  fountain.  One  moment  you  may  see 
the  fountain  all  blue,  at  another  green  and  blue 
mingling;  then  perhaps  it  will  change  to  purple, 
with  now  and  again  a  flash  of  red,  or  with  red  suf- 
fusing the  whole.  So  man,  according  to  his  thought, 
is  always  radiating  these  beautiful  colors  which  are 
in  each  human  soul  or  mind. 

In  the  course  of  time,  when  his  spiritual  nature 
becomes  awakened  and  his  intuition  becomes  act- 
ive, the  yellow  vibrations  begin  to  interblend  with 
the  blue.  You  will  see  the  well-developed  man  pos- 
sessed of  all  the  colors  properly  regulated  and  con- 
trolled. The  lower  vibrations,  the  red,  will  then 
appear  as  a  beautiful  rose  pink,  and  will  be  seen 
more  particularly  about  that  portion  of  the  body 
where  the  generative  organs  are  located.  The  or- 
ange vibration  will  suffuse  the  entire  body.  The 
green  will  be  the  individualizing  band  outlining  the 
body,  and  the  blue  and  yellow  will  blend  and  extend 
beyond  the  green  forming  the  outer  border  of  the 
aura. 

There  are  two  classes  of  these  colors  which  may 
be  designated  as  positive  and  negative.  There  is 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  139 

the  positive  yellow  and  the  negative  yellow,  the 
positive  green  and  the  negative  green.  And  when 
you  see  man's  aura  composed  of  negative  colors  you 
may  know  that  the  negative  side  of  his  nature  is 
dominant.  A  man  may  be  negatively  good,  and  be 
neither  wise  nor  strong.  He  may  seem  to  control 
his  objective  mind  and  you  may  believe  him  to  be 
a  well-developed  man,  when  really  his  objective 
mind  is  but  a  poor  vehicle  for  his  subjective  mind. 
Or  you  may  find  persons  with  the  negative  blue 
and  yellow  vibrations,  those  whose  intuitional  na- 
tures are  only  partially  awakened,  but  who  have  not 
the  force  aspect;  neither  has  the  higher  intelligence 
become  active  in  them.  A  person  may  be  nega- 
tively good  because  he  has  not  been  tempted  in 
this  life  to  be  otherwise ;  his  environment  may  have 
been  such  as  to  guard  him  against  temptation,  and 
his  nature  being  negative,  he  had  not  the  desire  to 
overcome.  Some  time  in  some  life  he  must  be  tempt- 
ed and  learn  to  be  positively  good  before  he  be- 
comes a  perfected  ego. 

There  is  a  practical  side  to  this  lecture,  as  there 
has  been  to  all  the  other  lectures  of  this  course.  Ac- 
cording to  your  knowledge  of  these  forces  or  vibra- 
tions, and  according  to  the  intensity  of  your 
thought,  will  you  have  the  power  to  use  the  Occult 
forces  of  nature,  and  become  conscious  upon  other 
than  the  material  plane,  and  to  put  yourself  in  touch 
with  certain  cosmic  currents  or  forces.  For  illus- 
tration: A  man  with  an  emotional  nature  goes  to 
the  theater.  There  is  a  cry  of  "Fire!"  and  a  wave 


140  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

of  fear  sweeps  over  the  audience.  Every  mind  in 
the  house  has  become  attached  to  the  red  cosmic 
current  of  fear.  Having  tapped  this  great  current, 
waves  of  fear  come  into  every  center  of  conscious- 
ness in  that  house,  and  the  emotional  man  loses 
his  reason  and  rushes  like  a  maddened  brute  to  save 
himself,  regardless  of  everyone  else.  He  tramples 
upon  women  and  children,  and  fights  like  a  wild 
animal  to  liberate  his  body  from  the  struggling  mass 
of  human  beings  around  him.  There  may  or  may 
not  be  a  fire,  but  this  man  has  connected  his  ob- 
jective mind,  through  thought,  with  this  current  of 
fear,  does  not  control  the  emotion  as  it  sweeps  over 
him,  and  you  see  the  result. 

These  cosmic  currents  which  surround  our  earth 
correspond  in  color  and  rate  of  vibration  to  each  of 
the  colors  in  the  aura  of  men  and  animals ;  and  all 
living  creatures  use  these  currents,  either  conscious- 
ly or  unconsciously.  When  man  learns  to  vibrate 
harmoniously  with  the  color  or  cosmic  current  he 
desires  to  use,  then  his  development  will  be  much 
more  rapid  than  when  he  uses  the  currents,  as  the 
animals  do,  unconsciously  and  without  a  knowledge 
of  what  he  is  doing.  It  is  according  to  the  color 
of  a  man's  vibrations  that  he  connects  himself  with 
these  cosmic  forces;  and  some  of  the  lower  forces 
bring  disaster  to  him  when  he  uses  them.  Take 
the  current  of  fear  for  example.  If  a  man  is  con- 
stantly fearing  something,  or  someone,  he  thus  con- 
nects himself  with  the  current  of  fear,  and  it  con- 
stantly plays  upon  him.  He  never  can  gain  success 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  141 

in  anything  he  undertakes  until  he  raises  his  vibra- 
tions above  this  current,  and  in  this  way  discon- 
nects himself  from  it.  It  is  indeed  of  the  most  im- 
portance that  man  should  learn  to  control  his 
thoughts  and  his  vibrations. 

There  are  also  different  planes  of  consciousness, 
and  it  is  according  to  the  rate  of  man's  vibration 
that  he  can  function  upon  them.  As  a  man  may 
be  able  to  see  no  color  but  red,  because  his  optic 
nerves  are  at  so  low  a  rate  of  vibration  that  they 
cannot  record  any  color  of  a  higher  rate,  so  some 
men  have  a  much  broader  apprehension  of  the  laws 
of  life  than  other  men,  because  their  vibrations  are 
high  enough  to  permit  vibrations  coming  from  other 
and  higher  planes  to  impinge  upon  their  conscious- 
ness. A  genius  is  a  man  whose  consciousness  has 
become  expanded  through  his  evolution  until  he 
can  contact  more  planes  of  cosmic  consciousness 
than  other  men.  You  remember  the  lines, 

"A  primrose  by  a  river's  brim 
A  yellow  primrose  was  to  him, 
And  it  was  nothing  more." 

One  man  sees  in  a  primrose  nothing  more  nor  less 
than  a  vegetable  growth ;  another  thinks  what  a 
pretty  yellow  flower ;  still  another  sees  in  that  same 
primrose  the  secrets  of  the  Universe ;  he  sees  in  that 
flower  the  vibratory  effect  of  the  Divine  Idea — that 
God  has  geometrized,  as  the  scholars  of  Pythagoras 
were  accustomed  to  say. 


142  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

There  are  forty-nine  states  of  consciousness,  but 
the  minds  of  average  men  only  function  upon  ten 
or  twelve.  There  are  a  great  many  doors  to  knowl- 
edge, which  we  may  open  if  we  will ;  but  if  we  con- 
tinue to  think  in  the  lower  states  of  consciousness, 
and  never  rise  above  them  in  aspiration,  these  other 
doors  will  remain  forever  shut  to  us.  If  we  always 
live  in  the  cellar  of  our  house  we  will  never  see  God's 
sunlight  streaming  into  our  upper  rooms.  The  sun 
shines,  but  not  for  us  because  we  will  not  go  where 
it  can  reach  us. 

All  the  world's  great  teachers  have  substantially 
taught  the  same  rules  for  conduct  and  morality. 
Ethics  is  not  founded  on  police  regulations  nor 
sentiments  of  moralists,  but  is  established  on  the 
immutable  laws  of  nature.  "Love  your  enemies" 
was  one  of  the  precepts  taught  by  Jesus,  and  it  has 
puzzled  many  of  his  followers  to  find  the  reason  for 
the  teaching.  Many  persons  think,  if  they  do  not 
say:  What  sense  is  there  in  loving  one's  enemies? 
This  precept  has  a  purely  scientific  basis.  Love  is 
not  an  indefinite  sentiment,  it  is  something  real;  it 
is  the  highest  and  greatest  dynamic  force  on  this 
planet,  and  is  one  that  manifests  on  all  planes.  Since 
it  is  a  force,  it  is  something  we  can  feel  on  this  plane 
of  effects  and  see  on  the  mental  plane,  if  we  are  able 
to  function  on  that  plane.  When  pure  love  is  sent 
forth  from  the  subjective  mind,  it  manifests  as  a 
constructive  force,  having  its  own  particular  high 
yellow  rate  of  vibration.  Anger  being  an  emotion, 
and  proceeding  from  the  objective  mind  of  man,  vi- 


Colors  of  Thought  Vibration.  143 

brates  at  a  lower  rate,  which  is  red.  A  person  who 
hates  you — an  enemy — sends  a  red  current  of 
thought  toward  you ;  but  if  you  send  loving  thoughts 
in  return,  you  are  projecting  a  yellow  rate  of  vibra- 
tion which  is  infinitely  higher  and  more  forceful 
than  the  red,  and  the  yellow  vibration  deflects  the 
lower  vibration  so  that  it  never  reaches  you. 

The  higher  rates  of  vibration  will  protect  you 
from  harm,  and  if  you  live  according  to  ethical  prin- 
ciples, a  high  quality  of  thought  or  vibration  is  at- 
tained. When  we  come  to  consider  Spiritual  Forces, 
we  shall  see  how,  by  the  control  of  our  thoughts, 
we  can  use  the  cosmic  forces. 


LECTURE  SEVEN. 

MEDITATION,  CREATION  AND  CONCEN- 
TRATION. 

All  religions  invent  modes  whereby  the  mind  of 
man  is  directed  to  Deity.  In  the  Eastern  philoso- 
phy these  modes  are  called  Yoga,  and  are  supposed 
to  be  methods  of  yoking  the  individual  mind  to  the 
Universal  Consciousness.  There  are  two  principal 
kinds  of  yoga,  which  may  be  described  as  mental 
and  as  physical.  The  first  is  a  process  of  meditation, 
by  which  the  individual  mind  is  brought  into  closer 
relationship  with  the  Universal  Consciousness ;  the 
second  or  physical  yoga,  is  of  various  kinds,  and 
includes  methods  of  artificial  breathings  and  un- 
usual and  unnatural  postures  of  the  body.  These 
postures  and  breathings  are  for  the  purpose  of 
drawing  into  the  physical  body  certain  forces  which 
develop  psychic  powers.  It  is  believed  by  those 
who  practice  them  that  a  step  nearer  Deity  is  gained 
by  so  doing ;  but  in  point  of  fact  only  certain  psychic 
centers  in  the  physical  body  are  awakened,  which 
enable  these  persons  to  function  upon  the  first  plane 
beyond  the  material.  The  ecstatic  conditions  into 
which  the  Yogi  are  often  thrown  by  indulging  in 
these  practices  are  not  spiritual  states  of  conscious- 
ness, as  many  persons  believe,  but  are  entirely  due 
to  paroxysms  of  emotion  to  which  they  yield,  and 
144 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.       145 

which  are  disastrous  to  those  who  indulge  in  them. 

Another  system  devised  for  the  purpose  of  relat- 
ing the  individual  consciousness  to  the  Universal 
Consciousness  is  ritualism,  and  we  find  this  method 
almost,  if  not  quite,  perfected  in  the  East.  In  the 
elaborate  ceremonials  of  Brahminism  and  Buddhism 
there  is  as  complete  a  ritual  as  exists.  In  Buddhis- 
tic ritualism  there  are  various  steps,  from  the  wor- 
ship of  the  Supreme  in  meditation,  to  the  attempt 
to  reach  and  propitiate  the  intermediate  forces,  gods 
or  devas. 

In  Judaism  we  find  again  a  great  system  of  rit- 
ualism, which  is  second  only  to  that  of  Buddhism ; 
but  the  ritualism  of  Judaism  was  established  for  a 
material  people,  it  used  material  processes  for  car- 
rying out  its  ritual  and  never  reached  the  point 
where  it  operated  upon  mental  lines.  For  example, 
in  Judaism  we  find  the  cutting  of  the  throats  of  ani- 
mals and  the  flowing  of  blood.  This  was  a  sacri- 
ficial rite  and  was  supposed  to  attract  the  attention 
of  the  Deity,  through  His  love  for  the  shedding  of 
blood,  to  propitiate  Him,  and  induce  Him  to  give 
to  whoever  made  this  sacrifice  something  of  much 
more  value  than  were  the  animals  slaughtered.  It 
was  not  for  the  sake  of  spirituality  that  these  rites 
were  performed,  but  for  material  gain  only. 

And  then  came  Christianity,  represented  in  the 
West  by  the  two  great  sects  of  Catholicism,  on  the 
one  hand,  and  Protestantism  on  the  other.  These 
also  use  a  process  to  relate  the  individual  conscious- 
ness to  the  Universal,  which  is  called  prayer  or  peti- 


146  '         The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

**' 

tion.  The  ritual  in  Catholicism  is  on  the  same  gen- 
eral lines  as  in  Buddhism,  because  many  of  its  rites 
were  obtained  from  Buddhism.  For  example,  there 
are  three  forms  of  prayer  in  Catholicism  :  the  Latria, 
or  prayer  direct  to  Deity ;  Hyperdulia,  or  prayer  to 
Deity  through  the  intercession  of  the  saints  or  the 
Virgin  Mary,  and  the  Doulia,  or  prayer  to  a  special 
patron  saint;  in  Protestantism  the  prayer  is  made 
directly  to  Jehovah.  Whether  we  consider  the  old 
religions  of  the  world,  or  the  most  modern,  each 
has  invented  a  process  for  relating  the  mind  back 
to  the  Universal  Consciousness,  and  all  these  rites 
are  for  one  purpose — personal  gain. 

Some  of  you  may  be  shocked  by  this  declaration, 
but  upon  close  analysis  you  will  find  it  true.  In 
Buddhism  the  object  of  relating  the  individual  mind 
to  the  Universal  Consciousness  is  the  hope  for  lib- 
eration from  rebirth ;  it  is  purely  a  question  of  bene- 
fit to  the  individual.  In  Judaism  a  bargain  between 
the  individual  and  the  Universal  was  made.  In  re- 
turn for  prayers  and  praise  and  sacrifices,  God  was 
supposed  to  give  men  things  which  they  wanted.  In 
Catholicism,  in  exchange  for  prayers  and  chanting, 
God  gave  men  mental  or  spiritual  qualities  and  per- 
sonal salvation;  but  they,  too,  can  obtain  material 
things  by  doing  a  Novena.  This  last  process  of 
prayer  is  not  made  to  God  direct,  but  to  Saint  An- 
thony, and  if  the  conditions  required  by  this  Saint 
are  all  fulfilled,  the  prayer  is  answered.  In  Protest- 
antism the  prayer  may  be  for  personal  health,  for 
a  person  going  to  sea,  or  for  the  kingdom  of  heaven, 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        147 

or  for  something  else — all  comes  back  to  a  matter 
of  personal  benefit. 

The  Christian  and  Mental  Scientists  have  adopted  V 
from  the  Orient  a  process  of  meditation  called  "go- 
ing into  the  silence."  This  attitude  of  mind  is  for 
the  purpose  of  harmonizing  the  individual  mind 
with  the  Universal,  in  order  that  the  individual  may 
receive  thoughts  and  things  that  it  desires,  and  is 
a  form  of  prayer  along  more  rational  and  scientific 
lines.  Occultism,  too,  has  its  processes  for  the  pur- 
pose of  relating  the  individual  mind  to  the  Universal 
Consciousness,  in  order  that  it  may  draw  such  spir- 
itual, mental  and  material  things  as  the  individual 
needs  or  wants. 

The  question  arises,  how  can  this  relation    be 
brought  about,  because  we  all  need  something  spir- 
itual, mental  or  material,  and  in  our  hearts  we  wish 
to  know  how  to  use  our  minds  in  order  to  obtain 
the  qualities  or  things  desired.    The  three  working 
tools  or  methods  of  mind  that  the  Occultist  takes 
for  the  purpose  of  connecting  his  consciousness  with     ^  j  a !. 
the  Universal,  are  the  processes  known  as  Medita-  / 
tion,  Creation  and  Concentration. 

We  have  spoken  repeatedly  of  mind,  and  now 
we  will  say  something  about  thought.  Thought  is 
the  product  of  mind;  it  is  a  rate  of  vibration  sent 
forth  from  mind,  and  therefore  is  force.  This  thought 
force  is  continually  being  used  or  misused,  because 
to  live  is  to  think,  either  rightly  or  wrongly,  with 
the  objective  or  subjective  mind.  Thought,  per  se, 
is  neither  good  nor  bad,  but,  like  any  other  force, 


148  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

the  use  of  it  determines  its  character.  Electricity  is 
a  force,  and  can  be  used  constructively  to  dissipate 
disease  and  to  prolong  life,  or  it  can  be  used  to  de- 
stroy life,  as  the  State  of  New  York  destroys  the 
lives  of  criminals  at  Sing  Sing. 

Thought  has  one  chief  characteristic,  I  might  al- 
most say  but  one  characteristic,  and  that  is  vibra- 
tion. From  this  standpoint  we  may  divide  thought 
into  two  general  classes,  that  of  the  positive  and 
negative.  Positive  thought  is  a  high  rate  of  vibra- 
tion sent  forth  from  the  mind,  and  negative  thought 
is  a  low  rate  of  vibration. 

You  remember  that  ttie  will  is  the  positive  side 
of  the  subjective  mind,  and  corresponds  to  the  de- 
sire or  the  positive  side  of  the  objective  mind.  The 
will  plays  a  very  important  part  in  human  affairs, 
whether  it  becomes  active  in  the  subjective  mind  as 
will  power,  or  whether  it  operates  in  the  objective 
mind  as  desire.  In  connection  with  thought  the  will, 
has  three  functions: 

First.  It  determines  the  nature  of  the  thought  sent 
forth  from  the  mind,  whether  it  be  constructive  or 
destructive. 

Second.  Will  determines  the  intensity  of  the 
thought,  whether  it  shall  vibrate  at  a  high  rate  and 
travel  with  great  rapidity,  or  whether  it  shall  pro- 
ceed at  a  low  rate,  and  reach  but  a  short  distance. 
In  other  words,  the  will  determines  whether  the 
thought  shall  be  positive  or  negative. 

Third.  Will  determines  the  direction  of  thought ; 
that  is,  the  person,  place  or  thing  to  which  it  shall 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration        149 

be  sent  and  how  long  it  shall  remain  in  each  place. 

Knowing  the  functions  of  this  tremendous  force, 
which  in  its  higher  aspects  is  latent  in  most  per- 
sons, you  can  see  how  essential  it  is  that  it  should 
be  awakened ;  for,  like  the  muscles  of  the  body,  will 
grows  stronger  with  use.  It  is  left  with  each  of  us 
to  determine  whether  we  shall  remain  infirm  of  pur- 
pose and  weak  in  will,  or  awaken,  and  arouse  this 
force  and  use  it  for  our  upbuilding.  Without  the 
activity  of  will  no  one  can  hope  to  become  an 
Occultist,  because  his  mental  force  is  to  him  what 
the  engine  is  to  the  engineer. 

The  first  mental  mode  to  cultivate  in  order  that 
the  mind  may  draw  to  itself  whatever  it  desires  is 
Philosophical  Meditation.  (I  use  the  word  philo- 
sophical as  qualifying  this  state  of  mind,  because 
there  are  various  other  modes  of  so-called  medita- 
tion.) 

Philosophical  meditation  is  a  receptive  condition 
of  mind,  assumed  for  the  purpose  of  receiving  from 
Deity  knowledge  concerning  a  selected  subject. 

In  order  to  understand  more  fully  the  elements 
which  compose  this  kind  of  meditation,  we  will 
analyze  them.  The  first  condition  of  mind  is  a  re- 
ceptive one.  In  using  the  word  "receptive"  I  do 
not  mean  negative.  Never,  under  any  circum- 
stances, permit  yourself  to  be  in  a  negative  condi- 
tion, because  the  moment  you  become  negative  you 
become  subject  to  malevolent  subjective  entities  and 
influences  which  may  control  or  obsess  you  and 
perhaps  dominate  your  mind  throughout  this  life. 


150  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

The  Occultist  insists  most  vehemently  that  the 
passive  negative  meditation  taught  by  many  schools 
in  the  Orient  as  well  as  in  the  Occident  is  most 
harmful  to  the  ego.  Since  immortality  means  the 
preservation  of  the  individual  consciousness,  a  per- 
fect individualization  can  come  only  through  the 
continued  effort  to  remain  in  a  positive  condition  of 
mind.  It  therefore  follows  that  to  remain  negative 
is  detrimental  to  one's  evolution.  Negativeness 
also  has  its  effects  upon  the  physical  body  by  its  re- 
flex action  producing  sickness  and  often  dissolution. 
If  there  is  one  idea  that  will  be  emphasized  more 
than  another  during  this  course  of  lectures  it  will 
be  the  necessity  of  being  mentally  positive.  Sta- 
bility is  the  result  of  positiveness  and  the  Biblical 
assertion  is  true  in  Occultism  as  in  everything  else 
that :  "unstable  as  water  thou  shalt  not  succeed." 

A  receptive  condition  of  mind  is  the  same  mental 
condition  that  you  are  now  in.  A  quiet,  listening, 
expectant  attitude;  not  intense  but  waiting,  giving 
positive  attention  to  what  I  am  saying  while  your 
bodies  are  in  a  relaxed  but  comfortable  position.  No 
one  could  control  any  mind  in  this  room  at  this 
moment  because  each  one  is  positive  and  is  in  an 
active  instead  of  a  passive  condition. 

Having  placed  yourself  in  this  receptive  condition 
you  desire  to  receive  knowledge.  Knowledge  is  the 
second  element  in  our  definition  and  is  all  that  you 
can  receive  through  meditation ;  since  qualities  or 
things  are  brought  through  other  modes  of  mind. 

Now  direct  your  demand  or  prayer  to  the  Uni- 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        151 

versal  Consciousness — not  to  an  individual,  for  there 
must  be  no  intermediary ;  prayer  must  be  directed  to 
Deity  as  in  the  highest  form  of  Christianity.  You 
go  into  meditation  for  the  purpose  of  receiving 
knowledge  from  the  highest  source  of  knowledge, 
and  this  is  the  third  element  in  our  definition. 

To  demand  scientifically  and  well  from  Deity  is 
a  very  hard  thing  to  do  unless  you  have  entirely 
outgrown  the  idea  of  an  anthropomorphic  God,  be- 
cause at  first  it  seems  difficult  to  address  Universal 
Consciousness.  It  may  seem  that  your  demand  or 
prayer  has  gone  into  space  somewhere  to  diffuse 
itself  throughout  the  great  Consciousness.  It  may 
be  of  help  to  you  to  consider  the  Universal  Con- 
sciousness as  another  individual  mind  near  you  that 
you  may  speak  to  as  you  would  to  another  person. 
Or  better  still,  you  may  picture  it  as  a  golden  sun  or 
center  of  vibrating  light  within  your  own  heart — 
for  the  heart  center  is  one  of  the  chief  points  of  con- 
tact between  the  individual  and  the  Universal  mind. 

I  wish  to  impress  upon  your  mind  the  thought  of 
your  nearness  to  this  Universal  Consciousness. 
Many  persons  feel  so  far  away  from  God  and  when 
they  think  of  Deity  at  all  they  think  of  It  as  a  being 
somewhere  far  away  in  space.  God  is  difficult  to 
reach  only  because  you  make  it  so  with  your  wrong 
conceptions  of  your  separateness  from  Him.  You 
should  take  the  great  Consciousness  into  every 
thought  and  act  of  life;  whisper  to  It  in  the  dark- 
ness of  the  night  and  It  will  hear  and  answer  you. 
See  It  in  a  mental  picture  of  golden  yellow  light 


152  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

and  It  will  fill  your  body  with  Its  uplifting  vibra- 
tions. Depend  upon  It,  instead  of  persons  and 
things,  to  bring  you  what  you  need  and  your  de- 
mands will  never  fail  to  be  met. 

There  are  two  reasons  why  your  demands  should 
be  made  of  the  Universal  Consciousness.  First  be- 
cause if  you  do  not  address  your  demands  to  the 
Highest  your  objective  mind  will  immediately  as- 
sert itself  and  assume  the  responsibility  of  answer- 
ing you.  It  will  pretend  to  be  God  and  give  you 
back  something  purporting  to  be  the  particular 
knowledge  you  demanded.  By  making  your  de- 
mand direct  to  Deity  it  has  a  tendency  to  prevent 
the  action  of  the  lower  objective  mind.  It  is  only 
a  tendency,  however,  and  nothing  but  perfect  self- 
control  will  ever  fully  prevent  the  attempted  inter- 
vention by  the  objective  mind. 

The  second  reason  for  addressing  your  demand 
to  the  Supreme  Consciousness,  as  if  it  were  an- 
other mind,  is  that  you  thereby  have  a  tendency  to 
cut  off  communication  with  all  other  individual 
minds  who  are  thinking  along  the  same  general 
line  with  yourself;  otherwise  you  may  get  into  a 
current  of  thought  and  be  as  likely  to  get  wrong 
thoughts  as  right  ones. 

Many  persons  "go  into  the  silence,"  or  try  to 
meditate  by  sitting  and  waiting  for  any  thought  to 
come  to  them.  In  this  way  they  receive  any  im- 
pressions that  may  sweep  into  their  minds,  believ- 
ing such  impressions  are  Divine  Inspiration.  But 
all  this  is  not  Philosophical  Meditation  and  cannot 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        153 

possibly  bring  the  good  you  desire.  The 'proper 
way  to  meditate  is  to  get  your  subject  before  going 
into  meditation  and  then  ask  for  knowledge  con- 
cerning it  and  wait  patiently  for  your  impression. 
It  is  absolutely  necessary  that  you  should  have  a 
concrete  subject  because  concreteness  is  the  secret 
of  success  along  mental  as  well  as  along  all  other 
lines.  The  subject  for  meditation  may  be  anything 
concerning  which  you  desire  knowledge.  It  may  be 
knowledge  pertaining  to  any  plane  of  being,  the 
Spiritual,  Mental,  or  Physical;  but  it  must  be  con- 
crete. 

The  majority  of  persons  do  not  think,  they  merely 
dream.  You  often  hear  the  remark,  "A  penny  for 
your  thoughts,"  and  the  reply  usually  comes,  "Why, 
really  I  don't  know  what  I  was  thinking  about." 
People  think  they  think,  but  in  point  of  fact  they 
jump  from  subject  to  subject  as  a  bird  flits  from 
one  limb  of  a  tree  to  another.  There  is  no  logical 
sequence  to  their  thought,  there  is  no  continuity. 
Many  persons  think  of  words,  not  of  concepts  or  of 
concrete  mental  things ;  and  this  is  sometimes  true 
even  with  persons  who  are  called  scientific.  What 
concept  do  most  persons  have  of  Love,  Force, 
Mind,  Thought?  If  these  words  mean  anything 
then  these  are  things.  It  is  possible  to  have  thoughts 
without  words  and  this  kind  of  thinking  is  mental 
picture  making,  or  concrete  thought  which  is  the 
real,  creative  thought.  Your  careless  thinking  has 
very  little  or  no  results,  while  your  concrete 
thoughts  have  absolute  mathematical  results. 


154  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Returning  to  the  subject  of  meditation  we  should 
first  consider  the  best  time  for  this  practice,  for  in 
the  beginning  it  is  better  to  have  a  definite  time  set 
apart  for  it — after  awhile  you  will  be  able  to  medi- 
tate at  any  time  or  place.  The  early  morning  hours 
are  the  best  for  meditation  because  at  that  time 
great  forces  of  nature  are  sweeping  through  you 
and  through  that  part  of  the  world  where  the  sun 
is  beginning  to  shine.  At  that  time  all  your  own 
magnetic  forces  have  been  drawn  back  to  you  dur- 
ing the  previous  sleep  and  you  have  not  as  yet  been 
drawn  into  the  world's  thought.  If  you  can  de- 
vote some  time  to  meditation  before  you  rise  you 
will  get  the  best  results;  besides  you  will  con- 
sciously bring  yourself  into  a  closer  relationship 
with  Deity  and  thus  establish  harmony  for  yourself, 
which  will  better  enable  you  to  undertake  the  duties 
of  the  day. 

When  you  demand  knowledge  from  the  Universal 
Consciousness  there  goes  forth  from  you,  according 
to  the  intensity  of  your  thought,  many  little  mag- 
netic lines  into  the  ether.  These  lines  look  like  blue 
rays  of  light  and  connect  you  with  the  person  or 
thing  which  will  be  the  best  instrument  to  answer 
your  demand.  Sometimes  this  instrument  is  another 
ego  who  consciously  through  telepathy  sends  you  an 
answer  to  your  question.  Or  perhaps  Deity  may 
use  a  material  agency  and  connect  you  with  a  treat- 
ise on  the  subject  you  desire  information;  or  you 
may  have  an  invitation  to  attend  a  lecture  which 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        155 

would  give  you  the  knowledge  you  have  de- 
manded. 

There  are  various  ways  through  which  your  de- 
mand may  be  met  and  Deity  provides  the  best  way 
for  you  according  to  your  development  and  ability 
to  receive  at  that  time.  It  is  true  the  answer  does 
not  always  come  immediately  after  the  demand  is 
made,  and  you  may  continue  to  demand  for  a  day, 
a  week  or  a  month  before  it  comes.  The 
concreteness  and  intensity  of  your  thought  deter- 
mine the  promptness  of  the  response.  And  if  there 
should  be  a  delay  it  will  be  through  no  fault  of  the 
Universal  Consciousness  or  of  the  law  of  supply 
and  demand,  any  more  than  an  error  in  your  cal- 
culations would  prove  wrong  a  rule  in  mathematics. 
The  fault  will  be  in  yourself;  because  you  do  not 
think  clearly  enough  or  hold  your  thought  picture 
sufficiently  long.  If  you  will  persistently  follow  the 
rules  given  in  this  lecture,  your  impressions  will 
always  come  in  time  for  you  to  use  them. 

Most  beginners  make  their  demand  of  Deity  and 
then  go  and  ask  some  person  for  advice  and  opin- 
ions along  that  particular  line.  As  a  consequence 
several  answers  are  received  and  none  may  be  right 
because  Deity  did  not  make  the  connections.  The 
impatient  beginner  did  not  wait  for  Deity  to  make 
his  connections,  but  ran  around  and  made  them 
himself,  and  perhaps  long  after  he  has  acted  upon 
his  erroneous  information  the  correct  answer  will 
come  from  Deity. 


156  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Here  are  some  rules  which  may  help  you  in  your 
work: 

First.  Mistrust  all  immediate  answers;  because 
the  chances  are  that  when  your  reply  comes  at 
once,  your  objective  mind  is  speaking  to  you.  In 
the  beginning  of  your  Philosophical  Meditations 
you  have  not  had  sufficient  practice  to  enable  you 
always  to  determine  the  difference  between  the  im- 
pressions from  your  own  objective  mind  and  those 
from  Deity,  and  so  it  is  well  to  repeat  the  question 
at  each  period  of  meditation  for  several  days  in 
succession. 

Second.  Examine  the  answer  closely  when  it 
comes  in  the  form  of  words,  and  consider  it  well  be- 
cause the  objective  mind  invariably  expresses  itself 
in  words  and  sometimes  in  a  long  dissertation.  The 
Universal  Consciousness  usually  conveys  the  answer 
to  your  mind  in  an  impression  or  conviction. 

Third.  Test  the  answer  by  your  reason  until  your 
intuition  has  become  fully  awakened  and  can  tell 
you  where  the  answer  came  from.  For  example, 
suppose  you  ask  if  it  is  best  for  you  to  do  a  certain 
thing  and  the  answer  comes  back  "yes,"  and  shocks 
your  sense  of  justice  or  of  truth,  of  expediency  or  of 
probability.  Sit  in  judgment  upon  it  with  your  rea- 
son until  your  intuition  is  awakened  and  do  not  act 
hastily. 

Fourth.  You  will  find  that  Deity  will  usually  an- 
swer your  question  at  an  unexpected  moment,  when 
your  objective  mind  is  off  guard.  By  receiving  an 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        157 

answer  at  such  a  time  you  get  it  uncolored  by  your 
objective  mind  or  desire. 

If  you  will  remember  these  four  suggestions  or 
tests  and  apply  them  to  your  work  in  Philosophical 
Meditation  you  will  receive  the  knowledge  you 
desire;  and  if  mistakes  should  be  made  in  the  be- 
ginning, your  implicit  trust  in  Deity  will  render 
such  mistakes  harmless  and  ultimately  turn  them  to 
good. 

The  second  mode  of  mind  is  Creation.  Thought 
creation  is  the  imaging  or  putting  into  concrete 
form  a  selected  subject.  By  concrete  form  is  meant 
a  mental  picture  of  the  selected  subject  invested 
with  all  the  qualities  of  that  subject  in  its  natural 
state.  Mental  creation  will  bring  you  any  quality 
or  any  thing  you  want,  except  knowledge,  which 
comes  through  meditation.  Imagination  is  not 
fancy;  it  is  the  image-making  faculty  which  is  used 
for  the  purpose  of  making  a  concrete  picture  of  the 
thing  we  desire.  Do  you  want  love?  What  is  love? 
If  you  are  going  to  create  a  thing  you  must  have  a 
concrete  picture  of  it.  Love  is  a  force.  Being  a 
force  it  must  have  a.  rate  of  vibration,  and  having 
a  rate  of  vibration  it  must  have  a  color.  Therefore 
when  you  picture  love  you  must  picture  it  accord- 
ing to  your  highest  conception  of  what  that  force 
would  be,  and  the  color  of  the  highest  force  upon 
this  planet  is  yellow. 

If  it  is  Divine  love  you  want,  see  yourself  stand- 
ing in  a  flood  of  this  golden  vibrating  force;  see  It 
bathing  you  in  Its  rays,  penetrating  every  part  and 


158  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

particle  of  your  being  till  your  body  and  you  vibrate 
in  response  to  It,  and  until  the  atmosphere  around 
you  pulsates  and  throbs  with  Its  golden  glow.  If 
you  desire  to  send  love  to  another,  picture  the  Uni- 
versal Love  flowing  into  yourself  and  then  see  it 
passing  from  your  heart's  center  as  a  golden  stream 
flowing  outward  till  it  reaches  the  heart  to  which  it 
is  sent.  Some  of  your  own  being  will  enter  and 
warm  the  heart  of  the  one  to  whom  you  send  that 
love  force,  and  you  will  have  the  joy  that  comes 
through  loving  and  being  loved.  If  you  wish  to 
demonstrate  love  from  another,  see  that  golden 
current  of  force  flowing  from  that  other  person  to 
you. 

If  you  wish  to  work  upon  the  mental  plane,  if  you 
wish  to  demand  a  greater  mentality,  picture  the 
blue  Cosmic  Force  flowing  into  you.  Picture  yourself 
as  suffused  with  this  blue  force  until  your  whole 
being  vibrates  with  it.  Let  it  magnetize  your  brain 
and  thrill  you  through  and  through  with  its  uplift- 
ing force.  After  a  demonstration  of  this  kind  you 
will  feel  capable  of  accomplishing  any  mental  under- 
taking. Do  not  deceive  yourself  into  the  belief 
that  one  treatment  with  this  blue  Cosmic  Force  will 
make  of  you  a  genius,  because  it  will  not.  But  con- 
stant treatments  of  this  kind  will  gradually  increase 
your  mental  power,  which  you  can  direct  into  any 
channel  you  desire,  and  the  picture  you  make 
creates  the  center  or  matrix  into  which  the  Universal 
Consciousness  can  bring  that  which  you  demand. 

On  the  material  plane  the  same  picture-making 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        159 

faculty  is  used.  Do  you  want  to  build  up  a  fine  law 
practice  ?  Then  picture  your  clients  coming  in  large 
numbers  to  your  office,  engaging  your  services  and 
paying  you  liberally — this  last  part  of  the  picture  is 
an  essential  portion  of  the  whole.  Do  you  wish  to 
develop  a  business?  Then  see  crowds  of  people 
coming  and  waiting  for  you  to  serve  them.  But 
good,  bad  and  indifferent  business  will  come  unless 
you  limit  your  creation  to  a  certain  class ;  then  that 
kind  or  class  of  business  which  you  have  created 
will  come.  But  while  you  are  waiting  for  your 
creations  to  materialize,  for  your  demands  to  be  met, 
you  should  do  cheerfully  and  faithfully  such  duties 
as  are  presented  to  you  to  do.  In  this  way  you  will 
co-operate  with  the  Supreme  because  you  will  never 
know  till  a  duty  is  done  what  good  may  come  to  you 
from  doing  that  duty  well. 

Do  you  want  money?  Then  make  a  concrete  pic- 
ture of  the  amount  you  want — say  a  one-hundred- 
dollar  bill ;  or  if  you  do  not  want  your  money  all  of 
one  denomination  picture  a  sufficient  number  of 
bills,  of  the  denomination  you  want,  to  make  the 
amount  you  desire.  But  in  any  event  make  a  pic- 
ture of  a  definite  amount  and  after  making  it,  hold 
to  it  till  it  stands  out  as  distinct  as  though  it  had 
materialized  and  you  could  see  it  before  you.  Then 
say  to  the  Universal  Consciousness,  "Give  me  this 
creation,"  and  repeat  this  demand  day  after  day  and 
many  times  a  day  if  you  want  to.  You  can  do  this 
instead  of  dreaming  or  reading  the  signs  in  the 
street  cars,  etc.  The  concreteness  of  your  picture 


i6o  The  History  and  Pozver  of  Mind. 

makes  your  creation  a  mental  reality  and  the  more 
tenaciously  you  hold  to  the  mental  creation  the 
sooner  will  the  material  reality  come.  Creative 
thought  is  always  in  pictures.  This  is  true  from 
a  higher  or  a  lower  standpoint.  For  example:  the 
Universe  is  the  materialization  of  the  Divine  Idea; 
the  Spiritual  plane  received  the  impress  of  the 
Divine  Mind  when  creation  commenced  and  the 
Planetary  Spirits  seeing  the  picture,  poured  into  it 
their  own  vibratory  force  and  so  worlds  were 
brought  into  existence.  Everything  that  is,  existed 
first  on  the  mental  plane,  even  to  the  clothes  you 
wear  and  the  chair  you  sit  on. 

Let  us  further  examine  the  working  of  the  law, 
and  will  take  for  example  the  concrete  picture  of  a 
bundle  of  money — one  hundred  dollars.  You  have 
made  a  mental  picture  or  image  of  this  creation  and 
now  you  are  sending  your  force,  which  is  simply 
thought  vibrations,  into  that  picture  until  it  becomes 
clearly  defined  in  the  ether  which  surrounds  your 
own  aura.  The  clearness  of  your  thought  and  the 
intensity  of  your  picture  make  a  photograph,  as  it 
were,  in  the  Universal  Mind,  and  this  is  your  matrix 
or  plan.  If  the  matrix  of  your  thumb  nail  should 
be  destroyed  you  could  never  have  another  thumb 
nail  in  this  life,  but  so  long  as  the  matrix  is  there, 
although  the  nail  may  be  for  the  time  being  de- 
stroyed, another  will  grow.  And  so  it  is  with  your 
mental  matrix,  so  long  as  it  is  not  destroyed  it  will 
sometime  draw  to  you  the  material  thing  pictured. 
The  constant  or  frequent  vibration  which  your 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        161 

thought  causes,  sets  the  Universal  Consciousness 
surrounding  you  and  your  picture  into  action.  Then 
out  from  you  goes  the  small  magnetic  cord  which 
the  Universal  Consciousness  directs  to  the  sum  of 
money  you  have  demanded.  This  money  is  some- 
where upon  the  material  plane  when  you  make  your 
demand  for  it,  and  the  Universal  Consciousness  di- 
rects your  demand,  with  its  tiny  magnetic  cord  at- 
tached, to  this  amount  of  money.  It  is  no  affair  of 
yours  where  this  one  hundred  dollars  shall  come 
from.  The  avenue  through  which  it  may  come  is 
for  the  Universal  Consciousness  to  select,  and,  be- 
ing Justice,  It  will  bring  it  from  the  source  whence 
it  should  come,  and  no  one  will  be  unjustly  treated 
by  the  transference  of  it  to  your  possession. 

That  the  matrix  is  a  reality  and  is  the  image  of 
a  mental  thing,  is  testified  to  by  all  Occultists,  seers 
and  good  psychics.  This  testimony  was  corrobo- 
rated last  week  by  the  press  dispatches,  which  stat- 
ed that  Doctor  Baraduct,  of  Paris,  has  now  per- 
fected a  photographic  plate  so  sensitive  as  to  catch 
the  image  of  thought  pictures.  The  report  of  his 
invention  went  on  to  state  that  a  noted  French  nat- 
uralist was  requested  to  think  of,  or  image  some- 
thing of  his  own  selection  while  the  plate  was  ex- 
posed. After  the  negative  was  developed,  there 
was  the  picture  of  a  rare  specimen  of  eagle  which 
the  naturalist  declared  was  the  image  he  had  held 
in  his  mind.  He  had  been  studying  this  unusual 
bird  for  some  time  previous,  and  was  able  to 
make  his  mental  picture  very  clear  in  consequence. 


1 62  The  History  and  Pozver  of  Mind. 

The  report  also  stated  that  many  imperfect  pictures 
were  taken  from  the  thoughts  of  other  persons. 
From  the  general  public  Dr.  Baraduct  got  the  best 
results  from  women  who  were  in  love.  He  said  they 
seemed  to  be  able  to  hold  in  mind  a  very  clear  pic- 
ture of  those  they  loved.  Whether  these  reports 
are  true  or  not,  I  am  not  prepared  to  say ;  but  sooner 
or  later  physical  science  will  establish  this  claim 
of  the  Occultists. 

In  making  your  demands,  you  must  make  them 
of  Deity  and  not  of  any  person.  You  have  no  right 
to  use  coercive  force  upon  another  individual  mind; 
but  since  everything  that  exists  belongs  to  Deity — 
and  Deity  is  the  source  of  your  supply — you  have 
a  perfect  right  to  demand  of  It.  At  this  point  of 
our  evolution  we  create  mental  pictures  of  things 
already  in  existence  and  draw  them  to  us  accord- 
ing to  the  operation  of  the  law  I  have  just  explained. 
But  the  time  will  come  in  our  development  when  we 
can  image  a  thing  and  have  the  power  to  draw  to- 
gether the  particles  necessary  to  its  composition, 
and  create  the  thing  itself.  This  power  is  called 
precipitation,  and  is  really  the  highest  form  of  crea- 
tion. 

Mental  Concentration  is  the  third  mode  of  mind. 
It  is  not  in  its  nature  creative,  but  it  is  the  direction 
of  force  which  hastens  the  materialization  of  crea- 
tions. Concentration  is  holding  the  mind  on  one 
subject  to  the  exclusion  of  every  other  subject. 
Here,  again,  you  must  have  a  specific  subject  to 
concentrate  upon,  and  it  may  be  any  quality,  thought 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.       163 

or  thing.  This  mode  of  mind  is  perhaps  the  most 
forceful  of  the  three  modes  mentioned  in  this  lec- 
ture. It  is  therefore  always  an  active,  positive  con- 
dition of  mind.  The  habit  of  concentration  is  not 
acquired  in  a  short  time,  but  is  a  matter  of  growth, 
a  matter  of  practice.  You  will  be  surprised  to  know 
that  the  average  person  cannot — or  does  not,  per- 
haps I  should  say — hold  his  mind  for  ten  consecu- 
tive seconds  on  one  subject. 

For  example,  take  this  creation  we  last  selected, 
the  bundle  of  money.  Try  to  hold  your  mind  on 
that  one-hundred-dollar  creation  for  a  moment.  Af- 
ter a  few  seconds  you  begin  to  wonder  whether  that 
creation  is  really  coming,  and  then  you  bring  your 
mind  back  to  your  subject,  and  look  at  that  mental 
picture  for  another  couple  of  seconds.  Then  you 
suddenly  remember  that  there  is  a  magnetic  cord 
attached  to  each  demand  that  goes  forth  from  you, 
and  you  wonder  if  that  magnetic  cord  is  all  right; 
then  you  try  to  see  the  cord  and  the  first  thing  you 
know  you  have  lost  sight  of  the  money,  and  are 
creating  a  magnetic  cord  attachment  to  your  de- 
mand. Suddenly  you  become  conscious  that  your 
mind  is  wandering  and  you  wonder  if  you  are  con- 
centrating right;  and  thus  your  thoughts  skip  from 
one  thing  to  another  and  you  learn  by  experience 
that  concentration  is  gained  only  by  patient  and 
constant  practice. 

Knowing  something  about  the  law  of  periodicity, 
which  makes  and  unmakes  habits,  you  may  take 
advantage  of  it  in  learning  how  to  concentrate. 


164  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Some  suggestions  may  be  helpful  to  you  in  acquir- 
ing this  art  of  concentration  and  making  it  a  habit 
of  thought.  Select  an  hour  in  the  morning,  or  take 
a  part  of  the  same  hour  that  you  give  to  meditation ; 
give  the  first  ten  or  twenty  minutes  to  meditation 
and  the  remainder  of  the  time  to  concentration.  If 
this  practice  is  persisted  in  for  several  days  in  suc- 
cession you  will  find  your  concentration  becoming 
easier,  because  the  law  of  periodicity  will  be  oper- 
ating with  you ;  and  the  impetus  thus  given  to  con- 
centration soon  makes  the  practice  a  habit  of  mind. 

Look  at  your  mental  creation  quietly,  but  in- 
tensely. Think  of  the  picture — say  the  money — 
for  about  twenty  minutes.  Concentration  means 
looking  at  your  picture.  It  is  not  very  hard  work 
to  sit  and  look  at  one  hundred  dollars;  indeed,  it 
can  be  made  a  very  pleasant  thing  to  do,  if  you 
realize  that  it  is  yours.  Concentration  should  al- 
ways be  a  pleasant  exercise  of  will,  a  quiet  but  posi- 
tive condition  of  mind.  Let  the  mind  rest  entirely 
upon  your  mental  picture  and  claim  it  by  saying  or 
thinking  "that  is  mine,  because  I  have  created  it." 

Many  persons  make  hard  work  of  trying  to  con- 
centrate. This  is  a  mistaken  waste  of  physical  force. 
When  you  see  a  pretty  flower  and  look  at  it  admir- 
ingly, you  are  thinking  of  that  flower  and  are  con- 
centrating upon  it,  because  for  the  moment  you 
are  thinking  of  it  to  the  exclusion  of  everything 
else.  When  you  go  to  the  theater,  and  become  ab- 
sorbed by  the  acting,  you  are  concentrating  upon 
the  acting.  With  most  persons,  in  trying  to  con- 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        165 

centrate,  the  tendency  is  to  imagine  that  they  are 
placing  themselves  in  a  false  or  unnatural  condition 
of  mind;  they  feel  that  they  are  going  to  do  some- 
thing they  have  never  done  before,  or  something 
they  are  not  accustomed  to  do.  Perhaps  they  will 
shut  their  teeth  together,  and  whisper  tragically, 
"Now  I  am  going  to  concentrate,"  and  then,  with 
clenched  fists  and  corrugated  brows,  they  knot  their 
muscles  till  the  perspiration  starts,  and  the  breath 
comes  hard  and  fast.  Dismiss  the  mistaken  idea, 
for  that  is  an  artificial  condition  of  mind.  Concen- 
tration is  not  a  fiery  ordeal;  it  is  a  natural  and  a 
pleasant  recreation,  or  should  be. 

Put  your  body  in  an  easy  position,  and  whenever 
your  attention  is  attracted  to  your  body  you  may 
know  it  is  getting  tense;  then  relax  and  forget 
about  it,  because  all  your  force  is  needed  in  looking 
at  your  picture.  But  after  awhile  your  mind  may 
grow  tired  of  looking  at  any  particular  form.  For 
instance,  in  concentrating  on  that  bundle  of  money, 
you  may  not  be  tired  of  the  money,  or  of  the  con- 
centration, but  you  may  become  tired  of  that  par- 
ticular form  of  picture.  If  you  have  been  looking 
at  greenbacks,  change  your  picture  to  gold  or  silver 
for  awhile.  It  does  not  matter  what  kind  of  money 
you  have,  so  long  as  you  get  the  amount  you  de- 
sire. In  this  way  you  see  your  matrix  is  not  de- 
stroyed, but  only  the  form  of  your  picture  is 
changed.  Another  very  good  aid  to  concentration 
is  to  form  the  habit  of  concentrating  your  thoughts 
upon  everything  you  do  in  your  daily  life.  If  you 


1 66  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

are  tying  your  shoe,  think  of  tying  that  shoe  until 
it  is  tied;  do  not  be  tying  your  shoe  and  trying 
to  read  a  newspaper  at  the  same  time.  If  it  is  dress- 
ing for  dinner,  think  of  your  dressing;  do  not  be 
dressing  and  practicing  a  solo  at  the  same  time. 
This  regular  practice  of  concentration  will  greatly 
quicken  your  power,  and  enable  you  to  do  thorough- 
ly and  speedily  every  thing  you  undertake.  The 
successful  men  of  the  world  are  those  who  have 
practiced,  and  have  acquired,  the  art  of  concentrat- 
ing upon  special  lines. 

Hundreds  of  Mental  Scientists  and  Christian  Sci- 
entists of  our  time,  and  the  Occultists  throughout 
the  Ages,  have  demonstrated  the  truths  given  in 
this  lecture.  You  may  believe  these  principles,  but 
you  will  never  know  them  until  you  demonstrate 
them  for  yourself.  If  you  persist  in  practicing  the 
rules  given,  you  can  draw  to  yourselves  anything 
you  care  to  picture.  If  you  desire  success,  social 
position,  any  spiritual,  mental  or  physical  thing, 
it  can  be  gained  by  simply  creating  and  holding  the 
picture  in  your  mind.  It  makes  no  difference 
whether  the  thing  you  create  is  good  for  you  to  have, 
or  whether  you  use  or  misuse  it  after  you  get  it,  you 
will  get  whatever  you  clearly  picture.  If  you  want 
a  thousand  dollars  for  the  purpose  of  helping  a 
poor  family,  or  to  hire  a  man  to  murder  another,  it 
makes  no  difference  with  the  operation  of  the  law. 
Your  demand  will  be  met  if  you  make  your  picture 
of  the  thousand  dollars.  But  if  you  misuse  your 
powers  or  direct  your  forces  to  the  detriment  of 


Meditation,  Creation  and  Concentration.        167 

another,  you  must  take  the  consequences  and  these 
are  very  direful,  because  the  law  of  Justice  acts 
much  more  quickly  upon  persons  who  consciously 
misuse  mental  forces  than  upon  those  who  do  wrong 
in  a  half  conscious  manner. 

It  is  always  well  to  meditate  before  you  create 
a  thing.  So  many  persons  are  continually  creating 
and  demanding  things  they  do  not  really  want.  .  Ask 
the  Supreme  Consciousness,  God,  Father,  whatever 
you  choose  to  call  the  Great  Source,  if  there  is  any 
reason  why  you  should  not  have  the  thing  you  de- 
sire; and  when  the  impression  comes,  "there  is  no 
reason  why  you  should  not  have  it,"  then  make 
your  picture,  claim  it  for  your  own,  and  then  con- 
centrate upon  it  until  it  comes.  But  suppose  you 
think  you  would  like  to  go  to  Europe,  and,  without 
meditating  upon  it,  or  asking  if  it  is  best  for  you 
to  go,  you  make  a  picture  of  yourself  on  the  steamer 
with  your  ticket  for  Europe.  You  will  go  to  Eu- 
rope, but  you  may  be  very  ill  after  you  get  there, 
or  you  may  be  shipwrecked  going  or  coming,  or 
many  things  may  happen  to  make  you  miserable  on 
your  trip.  If  you  had  meditated  upon  the  matter, 
and  asked  for  the  knowledge  of  what  it  was  best 
to  do,  you  would  have  received  the  impression  that 
it  was  not  best  to  go  at  that  time.  Then  had  you 
acted  upon  that  impression,  and  stayed  at  home,  all 
these  calamities  would  have  been  avoided. 


LECTURE  EIGHT. 

LESSER  OCCULT  OR  PSYCHIC  FORCES  AND 
THEIR  DANGERS. 

At  this  period  of  our  history  most  people  make 
the  word  Occultism  synonymous  with  psychism.  In 
reality  there  is  a  vast  difference  between  the  two. 
The  meaning  of  the  former  word  you  have  hereto- 
fore seen,  and  now  it  remains  for  us  to  examine  one 
of  its  sub-divisions,  which  is  psychism.  It  is  very 
essential  that  we  should  know  something  about  the 
psychic  realm,  if  for  no  other  reason  than  that  we 
may  be  able  to  avoid  it.  It  is  rather  a  dark  side 
of  nature;  nevertheless,  it  seems  desirable  that  you 
should  know  the  truth,  though  it  may  offend 
and  even  frighten  some  of  you.  The  necessity  for 
this  lecture  is  due,  first,  to  the  fact  that  people  who 
take  up  this  line  of  study  are,  for  this  very  reason, 
in  a  position  where  they  must  contact  very  closely 
the  psychic  realm;  and  second,  that  humanity  as  a 
whole,  in  its  evolutionary  career,  is  now  beginning 
to  approach  the  psychic  plane.  The  psychically  ad- 
vanced members  of  the  human  race  have  contacted 
it  already,  much  to  the  detriment  of  some  of  them, 
and  for  these  reasons  it  is  the  imperative  duty  of 
someone  who  knows  the  facts  of  nature  to  reveal 
them,  even  though  the  revelation  should  excite  the 
incredulity  and  scorn  of  the  ignorant,  and  possibly 

168 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  \  69 

the  enmity  of  those  who,  in  their  researches,  have 
contacted  the  psychic  side,  and  have  fallen  under 
its  deceptive  influence. 

Those  of  you  who  are  familiar  with  Bulwer's 
writings  know  that  there  is  a  vein  of  mysticism  run- 
ning through  them.  "The  Coming  Race,"  for  ex- 
ample, depicts  the  sixth  race  that  is  now  being  born 
in  America ;  and  his  other  mystic  novels,  such  as  "The 
Strange  Story/'  "Haunted  House,"  and  that  great 
Occult  novel,  "Zanoni,"  all  reveal  much  to  those 
who  are  interested  in  Occultism.  The  novel,  "Za- 
noni," is  really  the  story  of  one-half  of  a  soul  trying 
to  find  its  other  half,  and  it  portrays  the  dangers  of 
different  kinds  that  beset  the  student  on  his  evo- 
lutionary journey.  Zanoni  finds  the  woman — the 
other  half  of  his  soul — but  she  is  engaged  to  marry 
a  person  who  is  anxious  to  study  Occultism.  Za- 
noni seeks  an  old  Occultist,  who  agrees  to  accept 
the  young  man  as  a  student,  providing  he  gives  up 
his  lady  love  to  Zanoni.  The  youth  has  pursued 
his  studies  but  a  short  time  when  he  comes  in  con- 
tact with  the  "dwellers  upon  the  threshold,"  which 
in  the  novel  are  depicted  as  being  tremendous  forces 
and  entities  that  were  turned  loose  upon  the  defence- 
less boy.  We  read  how  all  the  sediment  of  his  na- 
ture was  brought  out,  how  he  was  tempted,  and 
how  he  yielded  to  temptation,  and  at  last  went  to 
moral  destruction. 

These  "dwellers  on  the  threshold"  are  what  we 
all  have  to  face  when  we  contact  the  psychic  realm, 
and  not  only  do  the  students  of  Occultism  have  to 


i  70  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

meet  them,  but  the  whole  human  race,  as  it  de- 
velops, must  come  in  contact  with  this  realm.  So 
let  us  see  who  and  what  these  "dwellers  on  the 
threshold"  are.  Many  of  them  are  detached  object- 
ive minds.  We  have  seen  in  another  lecture  how 
the  objective  and  subjective  minds  were  united  and 
became  men.  We  also  saw  that  a  battle  has  to  be 
waged  between  these  two  minds  when  the  subject- 
ive awakens,  and  undertakes  the  control  of  its  af- 
fairs. In  the  course  of  time  the  fight  between  these 
two  minds  of  man  becomes  so  tremendous  that  there 
sometimes  comes  a  cleavage  between  the  two,  and 
the  subjective  conquers  its  lower  mind,  making  of 
it  a  tractable  vehicle.  But  sometimes  the  object- 
ive mind  is  stronger  than  the  subjective,  and  re- 
fuses to  be  governed.  Then  it  is  that  a  separation 
comes,  and  the  objective  mind,  strong  in  its  vic- 
tory, becomes  detached  from  its  subjective.  The 
subjective,  being  unwilling  to  remain  under  the 
dominion  of  its  objective  mind,  leaves  it  to  its  ulti- 
mate destruction,  and  goes  back  into  the  Infinite, 
to  rest  until  another  Cosmic  Day  shall  come,  when 
it  can  start  forth  with  a  new  objective  mind. 

This  rebellious  objective  mind  is  so  strong  that 
it  may  continue  to  occupy  its  physical  body  for 
several  years  after  the  separation,  and  goes  through 
the  remainder  of  that  life  the  semblance  of  a  hu- 
man being,  but  devoid  of  moral  character.  When 
it  excarnates  and  its  body  is  destroyed,  it  may  or 
may  not  be  strong  enough  to  reincarnate.  If  it 
does,  then  it  will  be  of  an  intellectual  animal  nature, 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  171 

with  no  conception  of  morality  or  spirituality.  In 
case  it  is  not  strong  enough  to  reincarnate,  it  be- 
comes a  "dweller  upon  the  threshold/'  an  individ- 
ualized consciousness  upon  the  subjective  side  of 
life,  invisible  to  the  physical  eyes  of  men,  but  active 
in  its  destructive  desires  and  purposes.  It  becomes 
one  of  the  many  unpleasant  forces  or  entities  which 
we  have  to  come  in  contact  with  when  we  reach 
the  psychic  realm. 

In  your  study  of  mankind  you  will  find  many  of 
these  objective  minds  without  their  subjective  or 
higher  principle,  and  this  is  especially  true  among 
the  older  races  and  sub-races.  We  find  them  here 
in  our  own  country,  but  not  in  such  large  numbers 
as  in  China,  Japan,  and  in  Egypt.  These  are  the 
persons  whom  we  are  pleased  to  designate  as  de- 
generates and  perverts,  also  many  of  our  most 
hardened  criminals.  Such  entities  seem  to  be  ma- 
liciously wicked,  and  persistently  destroy  and  pull 
down  everyone  with  whom  they  associate.  These 
are  they  who  excarnate  and  go  to  the  first  plane 
of  the  subjective  world  and  become  the  dwellers 
upon  the  threshold. 

But  there  are  other  denizens  of  that  plane.  Every 
soul  that  excarnates,  if  it  is  not  able  to  pass  into 
the  planes  beyond,  by  reason  of  its  undevelopment 
and  strong  animal  nature,  must  remain  there,  and 
become  a  dweller  on  the  threshold  also.  Then  there 
is  the  third  class  of  dwellers  called  elementals. 
These  centers  of  consciousness  and  force  have  not 
developed  to  the  point  where  incarnation  is  possible 


172  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

for  them.  They  are  the  fairies,  goblins,  brownies 
and  undines.  These  entities  are  not  fanciful  crea- 
tions of  the  imagination,  as  many  persons  suppose, 
for  they  do  exist  in  elemental  forms;  and  when 
they  have  been  seen  and  described  by  persons 
whose  psychic  sense  made  them  conscious  of  them, 
they  were  realities.  Man  cannot  imagine  that  which 
does  not  exist,  for  no  one  can  make  a  picture  of  the 
non-existant. 

Elementals  are  created  by  the  thoughts  of  men. 
As  man  develops  he  thinks  more  and  more  force- 
fully; and  as  he  thinks,  he  creates  little  centers  of 
consciousness  within  Divine  Mind.  These  centers 
of  consciousness  assume  different  forms  according 
to  the  quality  of  the  thoughts  which  created  them. 
The  elemental  grows  very  much  in  the  same  manner 
that  the  embryo  grows  while  living  off  its  mother. 
These  centers  which  man  creates  draw  strength 
and  vitality  from  him,  and  remain  within  the  pho- 
tosphere of  their  creator.  But  since  whatever  is 
created  upon  the  mental  plane  must,  in  course  of 
time,  objectivize,  or  embody  itself  in  a  physical 
form,  some  time  these  elementals  must  take  on  ma- 
terial bodies  of  some  kind.  There  are  the  so-called 
good  and  bad  elementals  and  when  they  become 
embodied  in  animal  or  insect  form,  that  form  will 
be  assumed  which  corresponds  to  the  nature  of  the 
consciousness  seeking  embodiment.  If  the  elemen- 
tal be  of  a  mischievous,  destructive  nature,  then  it 
was  the  result  of  mischievous,  destructive  thoughts 
of  man,  and  will  take  upon  itself  the  form  of  an 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  173 

animal  or  insect  that  will  annoy  man  and  destroy 
his  property.  Because  it  is  a  law  that  whatsoever 
man  sends  forth  mentally  must  and  will  return  to 
him. 

Then  there  is  still  another  kind  of  thought  crea- 
tions of  men  which  become  embodied  soon  after 
they  are  born.  These  are  the  licentious,  obscene 
thoughts  of  both  sexes,  that  become  the  creeping, 
crawling  bugs  and  vermin  which  infest  untidy 
homes,  second  and  third-class  hotels  and  public 
houses.  Then  there  are  the  biting,  stinging  thoughts 
which  embody  themselves  as  flies,  wasps,  bees  and 
mosquitoes;  and  the  poisonous  thoughts  which  be- 
come spiders  -and  reptiles.  These  miserable  crea- 
tures born  of  man's  lower  mind,  cannot  use  the 
atoms  of  a  higher  rate  of  vibration  for  their  bod- 
ies, but  must  use  those  atoms  which  they  vibrate 
harmoniously  with.  They  gather  up  the  diseased 
atoms,  the  dirty  atoms,  those  atoms  which  can  no 
longer  be  used  by  men  or  beasts,  and  through  forms 
composed  of  these,  express  themselves  upon  the  ma- 
terial plane.  And  thus  man  himself  creates  the  de- 
structive things  of  earth  which  turn  and  wage  war 
against  him ;  for  "God  saw  everything  that  He  had 
made,  and  behold  it  was  very  good." 

When  an  entity  has  attained  a  sufficient  density 
within  the  subjective  realm  to  be  ready  for  embodi- 
ment, it  has  come  to  a  point  where  it  can  have  a 
direct  influence  upon  human  life,  and  it  then  reacts 
upon  its  creator  according  to  the  nature  that  was 
given  it.  When  these  elementals  separate  from  the 


174  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

photosphere  in  which  they  were  created,  they  often 
leave  their  creator,  and  impinge  upon  the  auras 
of  other  persons.  Sometimes  they  are  utilized  in 
magic,  particularly  in  that  form  known  as  ceremo- 
nial magic,  and  students  of  Occultism  sometimes  use 
them  for  the  purpose  of  producing  psychic  phe- 
nomena. The  transference  of  material  substances 
from  one  room  to  another  through  closed  doors  and 
solid  walls,  or  the  disintegration  and  reintegration 
of  so-called  solid  things  are  performed  through 
utilizing  these  elemental  forces  of  nature. 

Then  there  are  the  minds  of  animals,  or  animal 
souls,  if  you  choose  to  so  designate  those  centers 
of  consciousness,  which  have  been  embodied,  have 
excarnated  and  have  passed  on  to  the  subjective 
side  of  nature  to  await  another  opportunity  to  be- 
come re-embodied.  These  subjective  entities  still 
possess  all  their  animal  propensities,  but  have  no 
physical  means  of  expressing  them  and  they  belong 
to  the  vast  multitude  of  dwellers  upon  the  thresh- 
old. 

Where  is  this  threshold?  In  Catholicism  it  is 
known  as  Purgatory;  in  Protestantism  it  is  Hades. 
You  remember  the  words  of  the  Creed:  "He  de- 
scended into  Hades."  Hades  is  the  place  for  de- 
parted spirits.  It  is  the  sidereal  realm  of  the  me- 
dieval mystic ;  it  is  the  astral  or  psychic  plane  of  the 
modern  mystic  and  theosophist;  it  is  the  first  plane 
of  the  spiritualist,  the  plane  for  earth-bound  souls. 
It  is  here  interpenetrating  this  physical  world  of 
ours.  We  have  seen  in  another  lecture  that  this 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  175 

earth  is  surrounded  by  five  belts  or  zones  which 
extend  out  into  space,  according  to  their  color  and 
vibration.  This  threshold  is  the  first  of  the  sub- 
jective planes,  and  is  called  the  threshold  because 
it  is  the  crossing  over  point  from  objective  life  into 
subjective  life,  and  is  the  doorway  through  which 
egos  re-enter  earth  life.  All  souls  must  pass  through 
it,  but  the  higher  developed  ones  stay  there  but  a 
very  short  time  and  never  a  moment  after  they 
are  liberated  from  their  physical  bodies.  This  is 
one  of  the  reasons  why  Occultists  advocate  crema- 
tion of  the  physical  body,  because  by  this  process 
the  man  in  a  few  moments  is  free  to  go  to  the  plane 
where  he  belongs  instead  of  being  chained  to  his 
body  on  the  threshold  for  weeks,  months,  or  years, 
as  the  case  may  be.  Souls  are  magnetically  bound 
to  their  bodies,  and  until  "the  silver  cord  is  loos- 
ened" they  cannot  be  free.  Catholics  say  masses 
for  the  souls  of  the  dead  that  these  souls  may  be 
released  from  the  threshold,  or  purgatory.  Years 
ago,  when  many  of  the  priests  were  Occultists,  a 
mass  was  written  or  chanted  in  the  musical  key 
which  corresponded  to  the  color  of  the  deceased. 
The  sound  of  the  chanted  mass  disrupted  the  "sil- 
ver cord,"  as  a  prolonged  sound  upon  the  physical 
plane  will  disrupt  a  material  mass,  if  its  keynote  be 
sounded  long  enough. 

As  man's  vibrations  are  raised  he  necessarily  con- 
tacts with  this  first  subjective  realm ;  and  the  influ- 
ence of  the  four  classes  of  entities,  previously  men- 
tioned and  popularly  known  as  the  psychic  forces 


176  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

of  nature,  are  exerted  upon  him.  The  unconscious 
sensitive  is  always  susceptible  to  influences  which 
produce  moods  that  other  persons  do  not  have.  At 
times  he  feels  great  depression,  fears  impending 
calamities  and  is  influenced  in  various  ways  by  the 
denizens  of  the  next  plane.  And  when  an  excar- 
nated  objective  mind  who  has  lost  its  higher  mind 
finds  a  sensitive  person  whom  it  can  control  in  mind 
and  body,  it  immediately  commences  to  manage  his 
affairs.  It  enjoys  by  proxy,  as  it  were,  the  intoxi- 
cating liquors  that  it  forces  its  victim  to  drink.  It 
gratifies  its  lusts  by  controlling  its  victim,  and  com- 
pelling him  to  sin.  It  revenges  itself,  through  its 
ignorant  victim,  upon  persons  whom  it  hates.  Fear- 
ful crimes  are  many  times  committed  by  persons 
who  are  almost  or  quite  unconscious  of  what  they 
are  doing,  and  who  waken  to  consciousness  inside 
prison  walls  to  be  told  of  their  terrible  deeds.  In 
cases  of  emotional  insanity,  where  a  man  tempo- 
rarily loses  self-control  and  murders  another,  could 
the  matter  be  investigated  from  the  psychic  side 
of  life,  it  would  be  seen  that  the  murderer  was  often 
but  an  unconscious  victim  of  a  disembodied  fiend, 
who  desired  to  commit  the  murder,  and  used  the 
unfortunate  sensitive  as  an  instrument. 

The  denizens  of  the  next  plane,  and  especially 
the  excarnated  minds  of  depraved  men  and  women 
and  the  detached  objective  minds,  utilize  mankind 
for  the  purpose  of  vicarious  enjoyment.  A  drunk- 
ard does  not  lose  his  love  for  liquor  when  he  leaves 
his  physical  body.  There  is  nothing  in  the  process 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  177 

of  the  change  called  death  which  changes  character. 
"In  the  place  the  tree  falleth,  there  it  shall  be."  It 
is  natural  that  a  drunkard  should  wish  to  enjoy 
what  he  considers  the  pleasure  of  drinking,  and  so  he 
selects  a  subject  that  he  can  influence.  This  sensitive, 
whose  will  is  not  strong  enough  to  resist  this 
strange  influence  which  is  thrown  upon  him,  yields 
to  the  temptation,  and  is  overpowered.  He  indulges 
what  he  believes  to  be  his  own  appetite  for  rum 
and  the  more  he  drinks  the  more  he  wants.  When 
he  is  overcome  with  the  fumes  of  liquor  he  is  crowd- 
ed out  of  his  body  by  the  controlling  entity,  who 
takes  possession  of  it,  and  enjoys  a  vicarious  drunk 
at  the  expense  of  his  sensitive  victim.  A  love  for 
gambling,  intense  sex  desire,  civic  wrongs  and  all 
kinds  of  crime  are  often  traceable  for  their  cause 
to  what  many  persons  call  at  this  time  "spirit  con- 
trol." When  we  read  of  a  horrible  murder  or  crime 
being  committed  by  some  man  who  declares  "God 
spoke"  and  told  him  to  do  it,  you  may  know  the 
cause  was  just  behind  the  scenes,  and  the  crime  was 
instigated  by  a  dweller  on  the  threshold. 

There  are  semi-conscious  sensitives  who  are  in- 
fluenced by  the  denizens  of  the  next  plane.  By 
semi-conscious  sensitives  I  mean  persons  who  have 
reached  a  point  in  their  development  where  they 
are  conscious  of  the  existence  of  a  psychic  plane, 
but  do  not  know  the  nature  of  it.  They  are  con- 
scious of  psychic  forces,  but  do  not  know  the  nature 
of  those  forces.  Most  persons,  when  they  reach 
this  point  in  their  development,  begin  to  investigate 


178  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

psychic  phenomena  immediately.  A  student  of  Oc- 
cultism who  is  a  conscious  sensitive,  is  required  to 
develop  upon  the  mental  plane  before  he  is  per- 
mitted to  study  the  psychic  realm.  He  must  first 
attain  the  proper  poise  and  development  by  learn- 
ing to  think  clearly.  Then  he  is  taught  how  to  use 
Cosmic  Forces,  and  to  surround  himself  with  pro- 
tecting currents,  before  he  is  taught  how  to  func- 
tion upon  the  psychic  plane.  After  this  has  been 
accomplished  he  can  look  down  upon  the  psychic 
realm  and  can  penetrate  into  it  without  fear  of  at- 
tracting to  himself  unpleasant  companions,  or  get- 
ting into  unfortunate  or  compromising  situations. 
It  is  impossible  for  ignorant  or  semi-ignorant 
persons  to  investigate  the  psychic  realm  without 
being  more  or  less  influenced  by  it,  and  perhaps  it 
will  be  well  for  us  to  examine  the  various  classes 
of  investigators,  and  see  something  of  the  dangers 
to  which  they  are  subjected.  I  think  we  may  safely 
group  the  investigators  of  spiritualistic  phenomena 
or  spiritualism  in  the  first  class,  and  this  class  should 
also  include  the  members  of  the  Society  for  Psychi- 
cal Research,  and  kindred  organizations,  because 
these  are  nothing  more  nor  less  than  investigators 
of  Spiritualism  under  the  guise  of  science.  Spirit- 
ualism is  necromancy  revamped,  and  is  a  practice 
that  has  been  inveighed  against  by  those  who  knew 
the  dangers  attending  it,  and  by  those  who  wrote 
the  sacred  books,  since  mankind  came  upon  this 
earth.  Its  six  chief  aspects  are  automatic  writing, 
inspirational  writing,  inspirational  speaking,  trance 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  179 

mediumship,  independent  slate  writing,  and  mate- 
rializing mediumship.  In  all  of  these,  passivity  is 
the  sine  qua  non  of  success,  because  mediumship 
is  the  end  in  view,  and  passivity  is  the  means  by 
which  it  is  to  be  attained. 

And  after  mediumship  is  attained,  what  does  it 
mean?  Simply  that  this  person  has  become  an 
instrument  through  whom  these  excarnated,  unat- 
tached objective  minds  and  other  denizens  of  the 
psychic  plane,  may  speak  or  write,  or  perform  like 
clowns  in  a  circus.  And  what  good  comes  from  it? 
These  entities,  many  of  them,  have  become  detached 
from  their  own  higher  principle,  and  must  live  on 
someone  in  order  that  their  existence  may  be  pro- 
longed. Because  without  its  subjective,  the  object- 
ive mind  slowly  deteriorates,  and  after  a  time  fades 
out.  These  ignorant  or  malicious  lower  minds  per- 
sonate our  departed  friends,  and  glibly  give  us  in- 
structions about  our  domestic  and  business  mat- 
ters. They  advise  us  when  and  where  to  buy  and 
sell  stocks;  they  give  us  long  lectures  on  religion, 
and  advise  us  about  the  training  of  our  children. 
Think  of  such  a  creature  as  Jack  the  Ripper  giving 
us  a  lecture  on  morality!  Sometimes  these  "angel 
guides" — for  so  they  insist  upon  being  called — as- 
pire to  fame,  and  pose  as  Lincoln,  Shakespeare,  or 
Napoleon,  forgetting  that  at  that  moment,  at  a 
dozen  places  in  different  cities  of  the  world,  alleged 
Lincolns,  Shakespeares  and  Napoleons  are  doing 
the  same  thing.  They  urge  us  to  become  mediums 
and  organize  developing  circles  in  order  that  they 


180  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

may  teach  us  political  reforms  or  all  about  the  eter- 
nal progression  of  the  soul.  And  all  the  time  we 
are  studying  under  them  and  are  worshiping  at 
their  seances,  they  are  absorbing  our  magnetism 
and  are  ruining,  mentally,  morally,  physically,  and 
often  financially,  those  persons  who  become  their 
mediums.  For  mediumship  soon  becomes  either 
possession  or  obsession,  and  both  these  conditions 
lead  to  insanity.  In  discussing  this  question  here- 
after, the  term  obsession  will  be  used  to  designate 
all  classes  of  cases  where  a  human  body  is  wholly 
or  in  part  controlled  by  a  disembodied  entity. 

Most  of  the  insanity  of  the  present  day  is  due  to 
obsession;  and  insanity  increases  as  humanity  be- 
comes more  sensitive  to  the  influence  of  these  dwell- 
ers upon  the  threshold.  There  are  cases  of  hallu- 
cination when  an  insane  person  believes  he  has  ex- 
changed his  personality  for  that  of  another ;  or  who 
fancies  he  is  a  distinguished  personage,  and  insists 
upon  being  treated  with  great  homage.  Epilepsy 
is  nearly  always  attributable  to  obsession,  and  the 
best  treatment  for  all  these  cases  is  mental  treat- 
ment. Making  the  patient  positive  will  restore  self- 
control  and  health  where  medicine  and  confinement 
will  utterly  fail. 

An  investigator  of  the  psychic  plane,  of  the  first 
class,  must  either  become  a  medium  himself,  or  use 
a  medium  for  the  purpose  of  studying  that  plane.  In 
either  case  he  is  subjected  to  imposition  relative  to 
the  cause  of  the  phenomena  obtained.  It  is  a  well- 
known  fact  that  a  large  percentage  of  the  communi- 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  181 

cations  received  from  so-called  spirits  are  untrue,  or 
are  of  a  nature  one  would  not  expect  from  the  inhab- 
itants of  that  plane.  Mediumship  usually  leads  event- 
ually to  insanity  or  to  the  premature  death  of  the 
medium.  Even  when  there  seems  to  be  a  controlling 
entity  of  a  comparatively  higher  order  than  is  usu- 
ally found  on  that  plane,  there  is  necessarily  a  con 
stant  diminution  of  the  medium's  forces.  And  as 
the  vital  forces  of  the  medium  diminishes,  he  becomes 
unreliable,  and  frequently  has  to  resort  to  fraud 
and  pretence  in  order  to  continue  his  exhibitions. 
Everyone  who  knows  anything  about  this  subject 
cannot  deny  that  there  are  sometimes  genuine  phe- 
nomena, but  more  often  they  are  simulated.  But 
one  result  can  come  from  such  fraudulent  practices, 
and  that  is  degeneracy  of  the  moral  character  of  the 
medium  and  of  all  who  associate  with  him  in  his 
dishonorable  business.  Many  mediums  become  hab- 
itual drunkards  as  a  consequence  of  having  to  take 
intoxicating  liquor  to  stimulate  their  failing  strength 
after  being  vampirized  into  a  weakened  condition  by 
the  entities  that  control  them  and  absorb  their  mag- 
netism. 

It  is  admitted  by  unprejudiced  investigators  of 
psychism  that  the  majority  of  "Spirit  Controls"  are 
of  a  "low  order."  But  this  is  explained  by  their 
statement  that  "like  attracts  like,"  and  that  medi- 
ums and  investigators  attract  "spirits"  of  a  nature 
kindred  to  themselves.  It  is  also  admitted  by  all 
investigators  that  a  positive,  strong  character  is 
incapable  of  becoming  a  medium,  and  frequently 


1 82  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

prevents  phenomena  from  taking  place  at  a  seance 
when  he  is  present.  Taking  these  two  statements 
into  consideration,  it  is  logical  to  conclude  that  there 
are  no  positive,  strong  characters  who  attempt  to 
control  men,  as  the  Occultists  who  have  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  subjective  planes  of  being  have  always 
maintained. 

And  after  all,  what  has  been  gained  from  all  the 
phenomena  from  any  one  of  the  five  sources  men- 
tioned? Has  any  new  philosophy  been  presented, 
or  any  great  discovery  been  made,  through  these 
"spirit  guides?"  "By  their  fruits  ye  shall  know 
them,"  and  the  result  of  the  investigations  of  the 
Society  for  Psychical  Research  along  these  lines 
have  merely  verified  the  phenomena  given  by  the 
Spiritualists  since  1849,  and  not  one  of  the  investi- 
gators has  as  yet  discovered  the  true  cause  of  the 
phenomena,  or  formulated  the  law  under  which  they 
occur.  One  of  the  greatest  tests  given  by  these 
mediums  is  this.  Some  entity  speaks  or  writes 
through  them  to  someone  concerning  matters  that 
were  known  only  to  the  departed  and  to  the  inves- 
tigator. But.  this  is  no  proof  that  the  controlling 
entity  is  the  soul  of  the  dear  departed,  because  any 
disembodied  entity  can  read  the  mind  of  the  inves- 
tigator, and  can  see  the  thought  pictures  that  are 
in  his  aura.  In  this  manner  the  past  of  any  person 
may  be  read,  because  it  is  written  around  him  in 
his  photosphere,  and  goes  with  him  wherever  he 
goes. 

A  local  preacher  says  he  receives   communica- 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  183 

tions  from  his  dead  son  and  cites  facts  only 
known  to  himself  and  that  son.  These  communi- 
cations he  declares  are  proofs  of  the  identity  of  his 
deceased  son.  He  says  his  son  revealed  to  him 
where  certain  articles  and  papers  were  after  he, 
the  son,  had  passed  from  this  life,  and  that  he  him- 
self did  not  even  know  of  the  existence  of  them. 
This  is  no  proof  that  the  information  came  from  the 
man's  son,  because  any  disembodied  entity  could 
have  done  the  same ;  and  it  is  just  as  likely  that  the 
information  was  given  by  the  objective  mind  of 
Captain  Kidd  as  it  is  that  it  came  from  the  preach- 
er's, son. 

The  second  class  of  investigators  may  be  known 
as  passive  clairvoyants,  or  those  persons  who  cul- 
tivate passive  mediumship  for  the  purpose  of  func- 
tioning upon  the  subjective  plane.  Such  a  clair- 
voyant permits  an  entity  to  enfold  or  envelop  his 
body  while  it  impresses  a  mental  picture  upon  his 
mind  and  then  the  medium  describes  the  picture 
he  sees.  This  is  not  true  clairvoyance,  because  the 
entity  that  impresses  the  medium  is  responsible  for 
the  picture,  and  it  may  be  nothing  but  a  fanciful 
creation  of  its  own.  The  medium  has  not  seen  a 
reality,  but  has  looked  at  the  mental  creations  of 
another;  and  when  we  consider  the  character  of 
most  controlling  entities,  we  feel  safe  in  saying  that 
possibly  their  pictures  may  not  be  altogether  re- 
liable. 

The  third  class  of  investigators  may  be  called 
artificial  clairvoyants  and  is  composed  largely  of 


184  The  History  <md  Power  of  Mind. 

crystal  gazers,  magic-mirror  gazers,  etc.,  who,  by 
these  practices,  throw  themselves  into  a  self-induced 
semi-hypnosis.  In  this  state  or  condition  they  be- 
come susceptible  to  psychical  influences,  and  men- 
tally impressed  pictures  are  the  result.  Vanity,  or 
the  desire  for  money-making,  is  usually  the  cause 
for  this  kind  of  practice,  rather  than  a  desire  for 
growth  or  development,  and  the  dangers  from  psy- 
chic influences  are  fully  as  great  as  in  the  classes 
before  mentioned. 

But  there  is  a  true  clairvoyance  or  seership  which 
depends  upon  two  things — a  well-developed  subjec- 
tive mind  that  rules  its  objective  mind,  and  a  pecu- 
liar physiological  condition.  Nearly  in  the  center  of 
the  brain  of  every  human  being  is  situated  a  tiny  or- 
gan called  the  pineal  gland,  and  this  is  the  chief  cen- 
ter through  which  the  mind  must  function,  in  order 
that  man  may  possess  the  X-ray  vision  that  enables 
him  to  look  beyond  the  material  plane,  upon  the  in- 
ner or  subjective  planes  of  consciousness.  This  gland 
can  be  attuned  to  finer  vibrations  than  register  in 
any  of  our  other  senses,  and  these  vibrations  relate  us 
to  the  inner  worlds  or  planes.  The  student  of  Occult- 
ism, at  a  certain  point  in  his  progress,  is  taught 
how  to  direct  special  cosmic  currents  of  force  into 
this  gland  to  enlarge  and  raise  its  vibrations.  When 
this  has  been  accomplished,  the  student  can  func- 
tion upon  the  subjective  plane  by  an  effort  of  his  will 
as  easily  and  well  as  he  can  see  on  the  objective  plane 
by  opening  his  physical  eyes.  With  this  class  of 
clairvoyants  there  is  no  passivity  or  trance  condi- 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  185 

tion,  but  there  is  a  conscious  shifting  of  the  con- 
sciousness from  one  plane  to  another;  and  it  is  ac- 
cording to  the  development  of  the  man  whether  or 
not  he  is  able  to  function  upon  many  or  few  of  the 
subjective  planes  of  being. 

The  unattached  student  of  Occultism  is  one  with- 
out a  Master  or  Teacher.  He  is  one  who  knows 
of  Occult  powers  and  forces,  and  longs  to  possess 
them,  and  he  courageously  faces  the  dangers  with- 
out assistance.  This  great  desire  for  growth  leads 
him  to  seek  quick  development,  which  is  natural. 
The  great  majority  of  people,  when  they  first  hear 
of  Occultism,  and  Occult  teachers,  immediately  want 
a  teacher,  and  their  cry  goes  up :  "Give  us  a  teach- 
er." Then  they  begin  to  think  they  are  developing 
rapidly  in  Occultism  and  when  certain  subjective 
influences  come  about  and  they  feel  their  peculiar 
vibrations,  they  immediately  conclude  that  a  Master 
has  come  to  teach  and  help  them.  These  subjective 
entities,  wishing  to  gain  control  of  ambitious 
students,  impress  them  with  the  thought  they  love 
to  entertain,  and  soon  these  students  of  Occultism 
are  under  the  influence,  and  perhaps  under  the  ab- 
solute control  of  the  dwellers  upon  the  threshold. 

Let  me  tell  you  now  and  let  it  always  remain 
with  you,  that  no  teacher  of  Occultism  will  ever 
try  to  control  you  in  mind  or  body.  You  are  divine 
because  you  are  a  part  of  Deity  and  therefore  your 
body  and  your  life  is  yours.  A  teacher  has  no  more 
right  to  control  your  mind  than  he  has  to  violate 
your  body  and  no  student,  teacher,  or  Master  of 


1 86  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Occultism  will  ever  attempt  it.  So  when  you  feel 
peculiar  influences  around  you,  or  if  you  hear  voices 
saying,  "  We  have  come  to  help  you,  you  are  pro- 
gressing rapidly,"  you  may  know  it  is  the  dwellers 
of  the  threshold  who  are  talking  to  you.  All  stu- 
dents of  Occultism,  whether  attached  or  unattached, 
are  helped  by  the  Great  Ones,  but  only  when  they 
are  earnestly  trying  to  help  themselves.  They  are 
never  touched  or  coerced,  or  worked  upon  subject- 
ively. 

If  you  are  trying  to  work  out  a  problem,  you  may 
suddenly  receive  an  idea  which  will  make  everything 
plain  to  you.  If  you  are  ill,  you  may  suddenly  re- 
ceive a  suggestion  to  go  somewhere,  or  do  some- 
thing which  will  help  you  to  recover  your  health. 
If  you  are  out  of  a  position  and  need  money,  some- 
thing or  someone  may  be  brought  forward  to  help 
you.  The  student  who  is  studying  along  these  deep- 
er lines  is  always  watched  and  will  be  helped  when 
he  deserves  help.  The  student  who  declares  that 
he  is  going  to  work  out  his  own  salvation,  that  he 
is  going  to  develop,  and  uses  the  knowledge  he  has 
gained  to  live  according  to  his  ideal,  is  a  probationer, 
and  if  he  persists  in  this  course  for  a  period  of  seven 
years  he  will  draw  to  himself  a  teacher  in  physical 
form.  That  teacher  may  be  a  Master,  an  Adept, 
or  an  advanced  student,  but  a  teacher  who  is  best 
suited  to  him  in  his  development  at  that  time.  And 
during  the  seven  years  of  probation,  help  will  be 
given  to  him  in  various  ways. 

It  does  not  follow  that  everyone  who  thinks  he 


Lesser  Occult  or  Psychic  Forces  and  their  Dangers.  187 

is  ready  for  the  higher  Occult  teachings  is  really 
prepared  for  them.  For  example,  during  the  last 
century  a  number  of  persons  heard  of  the  Masters 
and  Adepts,  and  seventy-two  curious  individuals 
started  out  to  become  students.  An  Adept  whom  I 
know  promised  to  give  them  one  year  of  proba- 
tion on  the  condition  that  those  who  successfully 
stood  all  the  tests  given  during  that  year  should 
be  accepted  students.  The  first  thing  he  did  was  to 
tell  each  aspirant  after  Occult  teachings  what  kind 
of  life  he  had  lived,  and  was  living  at  that  time.  He 
told  them  about  their  faults,  and  how  those  faults 
should  be  corrected.  He  took  away  their  wines 
and  all  kinds  of  intoxicating  liquors  and  also  their 
pipes  and  tobacco;  he  forbade  gambling  and  im- 
moral associates  and  ordered  certain  hours  set  apart 
for  meditation  and  concentration.  In  less  than  one 
week  one-half  the  number  of  aspirants  for  Occult 
knowledge  turned  their  backs  on  Occultism  in  in- 
dignation. The  others  struggled  on  for  awhile,  but 
were  so  badly  beset  by  their  old  habits  and  by  the 
subjective  entities  that  were  aroused  by  the  new 
order  of  things  and  who  immediately  set  about 
trying  to  drag  these  students  back  into  their  old 
habits  of  living,  that  one  after  another  fell  out  of 
line,  till  at  the  end  of  the  year  only  one  person  out 
of  the  seventy-two  had  succeeded  in  living  up  to 
his  promises.  This  man  was  given  permission  to 
withdraw  from  the  world  and  go  into  a  lodge,  where 
he  was  taught  Occultism. 

Let  those  who  desire  to  push  on  in  their  evolu- 


188  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

tion  take  the  attitude  that  they  will  not  study  psy- 
chic forces  at  all ;  that  they  will  not  look  for  a  Mas- 
ter in  that  realm  of  being;  that  they  will  begin 
work  by  building  up  character  and  by  practicing 
what  has  been  taught ;  for  I  tell  you  truly,  the  psy- 
chic realm  can  offer  you  absolutely  nothing  of  value 
at  this  time.  It  is  the  higher  and  better  knowledge 
that  you  can  utilize,  that  you  should  desire;  the 
true  Occultism  which  teaches  the  laws  of  being. 


LECTURE  NINE. 

HYPNOTISM,  AND  HOW  TO  GUARD 
AGAINST  IT. 

In  1734  an  old  student  of  Occultism  re-incarnated. 
His  life  was  not  dissimilar  from  the  life  of  his  as- 
sociates except  that  he  had  the  benefit  of  a  better 
early  education,  and  an  opportunity  to  study  medi- 
cine later  on  in  his  life.  He  attended  a  medical 
college  in  Vienna  and  graduated  in  1766,  and  soon 
after  that  time  resumed  his  study  of  Occultism  un- 
der the  same  Master  who  had  taught  him  in  the 
previous  life.  It  required  but  a  very  short  time, 
after  he  began  the  practice  of  medicine,  for  him  to 
learn  something  about  the  deficiencies  in  the  sys- 
tem of  therapeutics,  as  it  was  then  understood. 
In  1778  he  moved  to  Paris,  which  was  then  the  sci- 
entific world,  and  began  the  practice  of  a  system  of 
magnetic  treatments  of  the  sick  which  startled  the 
scientists  and  brought  down  upon  him  the  con- 
demnation of  many  of  the  medical  men  of  that 
time.  He  cured  many  cases  that  the  physicians 
had  pronounced  incurable  and,  of  course,  aroused 
the  jealousy  and  hatred  of  many  of  the  medical 
profession.  I  am  speaking  of  Frederick  Anton 
Mesmer. 

The  cures  this  man  performed  were  so  very  re- 
markable that  all  the  wealth  and  intelligence  of  the 

189 


190  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

world  went  to  Paris  to  be  treated  by  this  new  sys- 
tem, and  as  a  result,  the  medical  profession  began 
to  wage  war  against  him  as  they  did  during  this 
last  century  against  the  Christian  and  Mental  Sci- 
entists and  the  Osteopaths.  For  human  nature  was 
then  no  better  than  now,  and  the  green-eyed  mon- 
ster of  jealousy  cut  a  very  conspicuous  figure  with 
the  treatment  of  Mesmer,  as  it  does  with  all  other 
persons  who  innovate  old  methods.  After  Mes- 
mer's  fame  became  unbearable  to  the  scientists,  an 
investigating  committee  was  appointed  to  look  into 
the  new  system.  It  reported  adversely  to  Mesmer, 
of  course,  and  soon  his  clientele  began  falling  away 
from  him. 

In  1783  he  founded  the  Order  of  Universal  Har- 
mony, a  secret  order  built  upon  the  lines  of  Occult- 
ism, under  the  direction  of  his  teacher,  who  was 
also  in  Paris,  giving  many  great  demonstrations  of 
his  Occult  powers.  I  refer  to  Count  Saint-Germain. 
This  Order  of  Universal  Harmony  was  the  gateway 
through  which  all  persons  could  enter  who  were 
prepared  at  that  time  to  take  up  Occult  studies. 
But  as  time  passed,  many  of  the  members  dropped 
out  and  the  Order  gradually  grew  smaller  and 
smaller  until  but  a  very  few  were  left.  To  these 
faithful  ones  Mesmer  taught  the  Occult  system  of 
therapeutics,  Occultism,  and  the  manipulation  of 
that  force  which  he  designated  as  Mesmerism — 
naming  it  modestly  after  himself.  After  the  public 
had  deserted  him,  and  most  of  his  students  had 
turned  their  attention  to  other  things  than  Occult- 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.   igi 

ism,  he  removed  to  England  where  he  met  with 
very  little  success,  and  finally  went  back  to  the 
Fatherland,  where  he  died  in  1815. 

After  Mesmer's  demise,  for  many  years  nothing 
was  heard  from  his  students  or  from  his  system; 
but  in  1841  Doctor  Braid,  of  Manchester,  England, 
commenced  to  investigate  along  Mesmer's  lines  of 
thought,  and  inaugurated  a  system  somewhat  simi- 
lar in  principle,  which  he  called  Braidism,  but  which 
subsequently  became  known  as  hypnotism.  Later, 
some  scientific  students  in  Paris  and  elsewhere  be- 
gan investigating  along  the  lines  laid  down  by  Dr. 
Braid,  and  just  about  a  century  after  Mesmer  had 
been  condemned  and  called  an  imposter  by  the 
French  scientists,  his  teachings  began  to  receive 
the  attention  they  deserved,  although  many  persons, 
while  accepting  the  teachings,  discredited  the 
teacher. 

There  was  a  difference,  however,  between  Mes- 
mer's and  Braid's  systems.  Mesmer  taught  that 
mesmerism  is  an  emanation  of  certain  particles 
called  animal  magnetism,  from  one  person  which 
affects  the  will  and  nervous  system  of  another. 
Braid  taught  that  there  is  no  emanation  from  the 
operator,  but  either  through  the  will  of  the  operator, 
or  through  mechanical  processes,  an  artificial  men- 
tal condition  is  awakened  in  the  subject,  and  that 
during  this  condition  the  volition  of  the  subject  is 
under  the  control  of  the  operator.  In  other  words, 
it  is  the  influence  of  one  mind  over  another.  How 
one  mind  can  affect  another  without  an  emanation 


192  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

is  beyond  the  comprehension  of  the  lecturer,  but 
perhaps  hypnotists  can  explain  that  condition  satis- 
factorily, at  least  to  themselves.  These  are  the  sup- 
posed lines  of  division  between  the  two  systems, 
but  Mesmer  really  taught  two  systems  in  one.  First, 
that  there  is  a  flow  of  magnetic  force,  which  he  des- 
ignated as  animal  magnetism,  and  that  this  emanat- 
ing force  is  curative  in  its  nature ;  second,  that  there 
can  be  coercion  of  mind  by  mind.  He  practiced  the 
first  and  warned  his  students  against  practicing 
the  other.  The  world,  of  course,  confused  his  teach- 
ings, as  it  usually  confuses  anything  of  an  Occult 
nature,  and  remembered  the  second  system  without 
his  caution. 

At  the  present  time  animal  magnetism  is  known 
as  Mesmerism,  and  Hypnotism  is  known  as  sleep, 
artificially  produced.  So  we  shall  try  to  follow  out 
the  modern  conception  of  it  rather  than  the  presen- 
tation of  Mesmer,  although  reference  may  be  had 
from  time  to  time  to  Mesmer's  teachings.  He  taught 
that  Mesmerism  is  a  Cosmic  Force  which  is  a  part 
of  the  law  of  love  or  the  law  of  attraction,  and  that 
it  flows  through  man  and  may  be  directed  by  his 
will,  as  an  emanation  from  him  to  another.  For 
example,  he  showed  that  the  force  flowing  from  his 
hands  was  a  force  that  he  could  draw  into  himself 
and  then  give  it  to  another.  He  also  showed  that 
he  could  get  approximately  the  same  effect  by  using 
large  magnets,  thus  proving  that  this  is  a  general 
and  not  a  personal  force  which  he  used. 

The  law  of  gravitation  is  a  part  of  this  magnetic 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    193 

force,  and  so  is  love  in  all  its  gradations,  whether 
it  be  human  love,  animal  love,  or  passion.  The  law 
of  attraction  manifesting  through  an  animal  body 
we  now  designate  as  animal  magnetism.  This  Cos- 
mic Force,  passing  through  an  animal,  is  nothing 
more  nor  less  than  the  Universal  Life  Principle, 
the  orange  vibration,  which  you  will  be  taught  in 
the  next  lecture  how  to  use.  Passing  through  man 
as  human-animal  magnetism,  it  manifests  itself  as 
that  peculiar  vibration  or  force  which  his  devel- 
opment permits. 

There  is,  however,  a  physiological  condition  nec- 
essary to  a  body  in  order  to  make  it  magnetic,  just 
as  there  is  a  physical  condition  necessary  to  make 
any  mass  magnetic.  For  example:  Glass  is  not 
magnetic  as  compared  with  iron  or  steel.  The  rate 
of  vibration  of  glass  is  so  different  from  that  of 
magnetism  that  it  does  not  make  a  good  conductor 
for  that  force  as  it  flows  over  it.  The  condition 
necessary  to  make  a  proper  basis  for  the  animal 
or  human  magnetism  to  manifest  is  the  excess, 
above  the  normal,  of  the  number  of  red  blood  cor- 
puscles in  the  body;  and  these  red  corpuscles  must 
vibrate  at  a  high  rate.  With  these  two  conditions 
there  is  established  the  physiological  basis  which 
enables  the  Cosmic  Force  to  manifest;  and  having 
the  proper  physiological  basis,  a  person,  either  con- 
sciously or  unconsciously,  draws  within  himself  this 
Cosmic  Force  through  the  left  side  of  his  body,  and 
passes  it  out  through  his  right  side.  The  left  being 


194  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

the  negative,  and  the  right  the  positive  side  of  the 
body. 

Animal  magnetism  can  be  utilized  by  man 
through  the  blending  of  his  aura  with  that  of  an- 
other, or  through  transmission  by  physical  con- 
tact, laying  on  of  the  hands,  etc.  Most  persons, 
such  as  faith  curers,  or  magnetic  healers,  use  this 
magnetic  force  without  an  understanding  of  the  law 
which  underlies  it.  If  an  Occultist  desires  to  trans- 
mit this  force  to  another  person,  he  places  his  right 
hand  on  that  other  person ;  then,  after  drawing  into 
himself  the  force,  he  permits  it  to  flow  through  him 
into  the  other.  This  force  can  be  used  advantage- 
ously in  all  nervous  troubles,  because  it  is  the  nerve 
fluid,  or  life  force,  which  restores  depletion;  it  is 
also  helpful  in  cases  of  consumption  of  any  of  the 
physical  organs  of  the  body,  and  if  properly  di- 
rected, will  build  up  diseased  cells  and  restore  wast- 
ed tissues.  Many  persons  possess  this  magnetic 
force  to  a  great  degree,  but  do  not  know  how  to 
use  it,  while  others  perform  cures  unconscious  of 
the  power  they  possess,  and  without  the  action  of 
their  own  will. 

A  person  who  makes  a  practice  of  using  his  ani- 
mal magnetism  or  life  force  for  the  treating  of  dis- 
ease must  become  greatly  depleted  at  times,  since 
the  natural  inflow  of  life  force  is  never  so  great  as 
the  outflow.  If  the  natural  inflow  of  the  life  force 
were  as  great  as  the  outflow,  our  bodies  would  last 
forever,  because  this  would  make  an  even  exchange 
of  atoms,  and  no  robbery  could  be  perpetrated. 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    195 

There  is  an  actual  emanation  from  one  person  to 
another,  and  this  emanation  causes  an  exchange 
of  physical  atoms.  Remember,  please,  that  I  am 
not  speaking  of  the  higher  Cosmic  forces  which  can 
be  used  for  healing  purposes  without  depleting  the 
healer,  and  which  I  shall  teach  you  how  to  use  in 
a  subsequent  lecture ;  but  I  am  speaking  of  the  natu- 
ral life  force  within  the  physical  body,  that  can  be 
used  as  a  curative  agency,  as  Mesmer  used  it. 

It  is  because  of  the  outflow  exceeding  the  inflow 
of  magnetism  that  many  Osteopaths  suffer  so  much 
from  depletion  after  their  professional  manipula- 
tions— which  are  very  good  for  the  patients,  but 
hard  for  the  Osteopaths.  Sometimes  the  Osteopath 
absorbs  the  old  diseased  atoms  from  his  patients, 
through  manipulating  with  both  hands  at  the  same 
time,  thus  forming  a  complete  circuit  for  the  mag- 
netic force,  which  carries  from  him  his  best  atoms 
and  returns  the  cast-off  ones  from  his  patients.  It 
is  not  conducive  to  the  good  health  of  the  Osteo- 
path, or  magnetic  healer,  to  use  both  hands  while 
treating  the  sick ;  but  in  severe  cases,  where  it  seems 
that  a  life  should  be  kept  from  going  out,  it  may  be 
done.  But  immediately  afterward  both  hands  and 
arms  should  be  bathed  in  hot  water,  rubbing  the 
arms  and  hands  from  the  elbow  downward  to  the 
tips  of  the  fingers.  In  this  way  it  is  possible  to  re- 
move, by  aid  of  the  hot  water,  many  of  the  low 
vibrating  atoms  which  have  been  taken  into  the 
system. 

When  a  Mental  Healer  begins  to  lose  his  force, 


196  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

or  power  to  heal,  as  many  do,  the  world  says :  "If 
Mind  is  infinite,  why  has  this  healer  failed?"  The 
reason  is  this:  First,  his  brain  has  become  tired 
by  continuous  concentration,  and  its  material  at- 
oms have  taken  a  slower  rate  of  vibration  because 
the  outflow  of  magnetic  force  has  been  much  greater 
than  the  inflow.  Through  his  intense  interest  in 
his  cases  perhaps  his  sympathies  have  gone  out 
to  his  patients  with  his  treatments,  and  here  was 
an  expenditure  of  emotional  force.  Without  un- 
derstanding the  reason  for  his  waning  power,  he 
tries  to  go  on  with  the  work  of  healing  when  he 
should  rest  and  sleep,  and  in  this  manner  draw  back 
to  himself  the  life  force  he  has  given  away.  After 
a  time  he  finds  himself  depleted  and  is  compelled 
to  retire  from  service  humiliated  and  chagrined, 
perhaps,  because  of  the  unkind  criticisms  he  has 
leceived  from  those  to  whom  he  has  given  his  life 
force. 

There  is  a  better  and  a  higher  way  to  treat  the 
sick  than  by  the  magnetic  force  which  made  Mes- 
mer  famous,  and  that  is  to  remain  in  a  positive 
condition  of  mind,  control  your  sympathies,  and 
thus  hold  your  own  magnetic  force  as  a  basis  over 
which  you  may  draw  the  higher  Cosmic  forces,  and 
pass  them  on  to  your  patients  without  depleting 
yourself.  If  you  can  control  your  sympathies,  and 
remain  positive,  you  can  treat  without  depletion  as 
many  patients  as  you  can  entertain  during  office 
hours.  But,  you  may  say,  this  is  not  the  aspect 
that  modern  science  is  investigating.  It  is  true  that 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    197 

it  is  not  practiced  along  the  lines  Mesmer  laid  down, 
except  by  the  physicians  who  are  beginning  to  use 
electricity  in  their  practice,  and  who  attempt  to  do 
with  their  batteries  precisely  what  Mesmer  attempt- 
ed to  do  with  his  magnets ;  and  I  am  not  sure  that 
they  are  any  more  successful,  because  Mesmer  also 
used  the  greater  force  of  mind  to  assist  these  cur- 
rents. 

And  now  we  come  to  that  particular  aspect  of 
the  subject  which  modern  science  is  beginning  to 
investigate,  which  is  known  as  hypnotism.  Hyp- 
notism is  artificial  sleep,  which  may  be  produced 
upon  one's  self  or  upon  another ;  and  it  may  be  pro- 
duced by  the  power  of  will,  by  mechanical  processes, 
or  by  the  will  supplemented  by  mechanical  proc- 
esses. The  mechanisms  that  are  used  to  produce 
hypnosis  are  revolving  mirrors,  bright  lights,  or 
anything  which  will  serve  to  excite  the  optic  nerves 
and  raise  them  to  a  rate  of  vibration  which  will 
enable  the  subject  to  pass  into  hypnosis,  or  sleep. 
Unnatural  stimulation  of  the  nerves  of  the  eyes, 
or  of  the  nerves  at  the  base  of  the  brain,  or  by 
focusing  the  sight  at  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees, 
and  then  gradually  raising  it  until  the  pupils  are 
turned  upward  above  the  upper  lids,  will  produce 
an  abnormal  nervous  excitation ;  and  while  the  sub- 
ject is  in  this  condition  he  readily  accepts  the  men- 
tal suggestion  of  sleep,  and  passes  into  hypnosis. 
In  this  manner  he  is  forced  out  of  his  physical  body ; 
is  under  the  control  of  the  operator's  mind,  and  is 
also  exposed  to  any  or  all  influences  upon  the  sub- 


198  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

jective  plane  which  he  has  abnormally  invaded. 
If  the  hypnosis  is  complete,  then  both  minds  of 
the  subject  are  absolutely  under  the  control  of  the 
operator;  but  if  the  hypnosis  be  only  partial,  then 
nothing  but  the  objective,  or  lower  mind,  of  the 
subject  is  controlled.  But  while  in  this  condition, 
and  passive  to  the  will  of  another,  the  subject  must 
accept  as  true  everything  suggested  to  him  by  that 
controlling  mind;  and  whatever  command  is  given 
to  him  in  sleep  he  will  obey  when  he  wakes,  and 
without  knowing  why.  From  the  first  moment  the 
subject  yields  his  will  to  another  he  becomes  that 
others  slave,  if  that  one  desires  to  make  him  so. 
So  long  as  the  operator  lives  in  this  world,  so  long 
will  he  be  able  to  control  that  subject. 

It  is  contended  by  the  modern  hypnotist  in  France 
and  in  America  that  the  mind  of  the  subject  is  not 
dominated  to  the  extent  of  coercion,  or  beyond  the 
power  of  the  subject  to  act  independently.  In  other 
words,  that  he  cannot  be  compelled  to  do  a  wrong 
against  his  will.  Cases  are  cited  where  subjects  re- 
fused to  stab  a  man  when  the  operators  gave  them 
real  daggers  and  commanded  them  to  do  so. 
Other  cases  are  cited  where  the  same  subjects  were 
given  paper  daggers  and  were  told  to  strike  desig- 
nated persons.  This  command  they  obeyed  with 
alacrity;  and  because  they  obeyed  in  the  last  in- 
stances and  refused  in  the  first,  it  was  supposed 
that  they  could  not  be  coerced  to  commit  a  crime 
against  their  wills.  The  Occultists  say  these  cases 
do  not  prove  the  theory  advanced,  but  only  show 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.     199 

that  both  minds  of  the  subjects  were  not  under  the 
control  of  the  operator;  and  that  if  they  were,  the 
subjects  would  have  obeyed  in  the  first  instances  as 
quickly  as  in  the  last.  In  the  East,  where  men 
have  made  a  study  of  the  power  of  mind  for  hun- 
dreds of  years,  it  is  taught  that  nothing  will  pre- 
vent a  hypnotized  subject  from  obeying  the  com- 
mands of  the  operator,  or  controlling  mind,  when 
once  the  subject  is  fully  under  his  influence. 

Some  of  you  may  have  seen  the  account  in  one 
of  our  local  papers  where  a  man  was  hypnotized 
and  compelled  to  deed  everything  he  had  in  the 
world  to  another  man.  After  the  victim  became 
conscious  of  what  he  had  done,  he  appealed  to  his 
attorney  who  took  the  matter  into  court,  but  when 
the  victim  appeared  to  testify,  the  hypnotist  would 
not  permit  him  to  speak  and  the  man's  throat  was 
paralyzed  in  the  presence  of  the  room  full  of  peo- 
ple. The  hypnotist  was  incarcerated  in  jail  until 
the  paralysis  passed  away  from  the  throat  of  his 
victim  and  when  his  influence  was  removed  and 
the  true  testimony  was  given,  the  court  decided  that 
the  property  should  be  restored  to  the  original  own- 
er. And  only  a  few  months  ago  here  in  New  York 
City,  you  remember  how  Patrick  was  tried  and 
convicted  of  the  murder  of  the  millionaire  Rice.  It 
was  proved  that  it  was  the  old  man's  valet  who 
had  killed  him  while  under  the  hypnotic  influence 
of  Patrick ;  and  these  are  only  two  cases  that  have 
come  to  the  public's  notice.  It  is  gradually  being 


2OO  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

understood,  however,  that  morality  does  not  enter 
at  all  into  the  question  of  control,  but  that  it  de- 
pends wholly  upon  whether  or  not  both  minds  of 
the  subject  are  controlled.  Occultists  believe  that 
there  is  no  disease,  no  trouble,  or  anything  in  the 
world  that  can  justify  a  person  in  attempting  to 
hypnotize  another.  If  a  person  consents  to  be  hyp- 
notized, then  it  is  because  he  does  not  know  the 
dangers  he  incurs  by  consenting,  and  his  ignorance 
should  not  be  taken  advantage  of  by  one  who  knows 
better. 

There  is  another  phase  of  this  mind  controlling 
mind  which  is  more  subtle  and  dangerous  than  that 
of  mechanical  hypnotism,  because  it  can  be  used 
without  the  knowledge  of  the  subject,  and  without 
the  immediate  presence  of  the  operator.  This  branch 
is  called  by  the  Occultists  Mental  Dominion,  and 
is  just  beginning  to  be  understood  in  the  West.  Hyp- 
notism by  mental  dominion  is  produced  by  mental 
suggestion  alone,  without  physical  contact  or  me- 
chanical aids.  It  makes  no  difference  whether  the 
subject  be  present,  in  the  next  room,  or  in  the  same 
State  with  the  operator,  he  can  be  reached  equally 
as  well  at  any  time  or  place.  The  method  formerly 
adopted  was  to  suggest  sleep  to  the  subject,  or  vic- 
tim, and  when  he  had  received  and  obeyed  the  sug- 
gestion, then  the  operator  impressed  whatever  he 
desired  upon  the  mind  of  his  subject,  who  had  to 
obey  his  will  upon  waking.  But  after  a  time  the 
American  Hypnotists  discovered  that  putting  the 
subject  to  sleep  was  not  essential,  and  that  just  as 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    201 

effective  work  could  be  done  by  repeated  sugges- 
tion until  the  subject  should  accept  and  act  upon 
it,  believing  it  to  be  his  own  thought.  This  process 
of  mental  control  can  only  be  called  hypnotism  by 
courtesy,  since  hypnosis  is  now  omitted  as  a  neces- 
sary condition  in  its  accomplishment;  however,  it 
will  continue  to  be  called  by  that  name  until  a  more 
suitable  one  shall  be  adopted. 

Unless  you  have  made  a  study  of  this  practice 
of  mental  dominion,  you  have  no  idea  of  the  extent 
to  which  this  subtle  power  is  being  used  in  the 
United  States.  It  is  flagrantly  and  openly  taught 
by  "colleges,"  chartered  by  various  States  ;  all  news- 
papers, and  many  magazines,  contain  their  alluring 
advertisements  offering  to  teach  "Personal  Magnet- 
ism," "Hypnotism,"  "The  Secret  of  Power,"  etc., 
etc.  Under  various  names  each  of  these  teachers, 
colleges,  professors,  and  doctors  offers  for  a  mone- 
tary consideration  to  teach  you  how  to  dominate 
your  fellow  men,  how  to  enslave  another  Son  of  God, 
and  how  to  "positively  enable  any  intelligent  person 
to  exercise  a  marvelous  influence  over  anyone  whom 
he  may  wish  to  control"  I  quote  from  one  of  the 
largest  and  most  persistent  advertisers  of  this 
branch  of  education.  Traveling  salesmen,  doctors, 
lawyers,  brokers,  real  estate  men,  and,  in  fact,  per- 
sons in  every  branch  of  business  are  studying  and 
using  mental  coercion. 

In  my  own  personal  experience,  in  the  practice 
of  law,  I  have  had  a  dozen  or  more  cases  in  which 
the  malign  influence  of  persons  had  been  used  to  get 


202  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

money  and  property  away  from  others.  In  three 
of  these  cases  stock  brokers  had  used  mental  coer- 
cion compelling  my  clients  to  entrust  money  to 
their  keeping  with  the  permission  to  use  it  as  the 
broker  saw  fit.  The  money  had  been  appropriated 
by  the  hypnotist  stock  broker  for  his  own  purposes, 
and  my  demand  for  restitution  was  met  with  the 
assertion  that  it  had  been  lost  in  speculation  by 
my  client.  In  two  of  these  cases,  after  the  arrest 
of  the  respective  brokers,  the  proceedings  had  to 
be  stopped,  because  my  clients  had  again  yielded 
to  the  influence  of  the  men  who  had  coerced  them 
and  refused  to  prosecute  them  further. 

There  is  a  member  of  this  class  who  heard  these 
lectures  last  year  and  said  that  such  an  influence 
could  never  come  into  her  life;  yet  within  a  few 
months  afterward,  while  her  husband  was  away 
and  she  was  'alone,  a  stock  broker  called,  and  asked 
her  to  place  in  his  hands  a  large  block  of  valuable 
stock  with  full  permission  to  dispose  of  it  as  he 
thought  best.  After  urging  the  matter  for  an  un- 
reasonable length  of  time,  he  finally  left  her,  after 
gaining  her  promise  to  let  him  call  the  next  day 
for  the  stock.  After  he  had  gone  the  woman  began 
to  realize  that  the  man  had  influenced  her  against 
her  will  and  judgment  and  she  wrote  to  him  refus- 
ing to  see  him  or  to  let  him  have  the  stock.  Then 
for  three  days  she  had  to  fight  his  mental  sugges- 
tions to  change  her  mind  and  accept  his  offer,  but 
finally  succeeded  in  saving  her  property. 

Another  member  of  my  class,  who  heard  this  lee- 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    203 

ture  last  year,  thought  she  was  exempt  from  such 
influences  because  of  the  quiet,  retired  life  she  was 
living.  She  discovered  her  mistake  when  a  stranger 
called  one  day  and  persuaded  her  to  give  him  a  large 
contract  for  advertising  a  book  she  had  written. 
After  securing  this  he  called  again  in  a  few  days, 
and  tried  to  coerce  her  into  giving  to  him  her  rights 
and  copyright  to  the  book ;  and  had  it  not  been  for 
the  sudden  recollection  of  what  she  had  heard  about 
hypnotism  and  also  for  the  aid  of  another  member 
of  her  family,  who  was  a  student  along  this  line,  the 
hypnotist  would  have  succeeded  in  getting  what  he 
wanted.  As  it  was  he  very  nearly  put  her  to  sleep 
and  she  had  a  hard  battle  to  resist  complete  hyp- 
nosis. 

When  the  Countess  Wachmeister  was  in  this 
country,  several  years  ago,  she  told  of  the  following 
case:  There  were  three  men  in  this  city  who  had 
studied  hypnotism  and  decided  to  combine  their 
efforts  and  victimize  a  wealthy  man.  They  each 
took  a  turn  in  working  upon  him  mentally  during 
each  day,  sending  suggestion  after  suggestion  to 
him,  until  he  became  absolutely  under  the  influence 
of  the  trio.  After  a  time  he  became  so  sensitive  that 
the  picture  of  the  face  of  each  of  his  tormentors 
would  rise  before  his  mental  vision  while  he  was 
being  worked  upon.  Then  he  could  hear  them 
speak  to  each  other,  but  continued  to  resist  them 
until  he  went  to  sleep  from  weariness.  But  when 
he  awoke  he  was  impelled  to  write  a  check  and  send 
it  to  the  address  that  had  been  impressed  upon  his 


204  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

mind.  This  kind  of  robbery  continued  for  some 
time  and  finally  the  victim  went  to  the  Countess, 
and  asked  her  to  deliver  him  from  the  power  of 
his  tormentors. 

There  is  no  limit  to  the  power  of  mind,  nor  to 
its  field  of  operation  through  suggestion.  In  the 
beginning  of  the  use  of  Occult  forces,  suggestion  is 
one  of  the  most  powerful  of  the  mind's  instruments 
which  the  student  learns  to  use.  It  should  not  be 
identified  with  hypnotism  although  it  can  be  used 
to  produce  hypnosis.  Like  any  other  force,  it  can 
be  used  for  good  or  for  evil,  and  the  line  that  lies 
between  the  right  and  wrong  use  of  it  is  as  narrow 
as  the  edge  of  a  knife,  and  is  just  as  sharp.  In  the 
practice  of  magic  these  two  ways  diverge,  and  we 
find  what  is  called  White  and  Black  Magic.  The 
first  is  a  straight  and  narrow  path  which  leads  to 
the  mountain  top  of  power  and  wisdom,  and  to  reach 
it  is  salvation.  The  other  is  the  broad  road  which 
leads  to  pitfalls  and  destruction;  and  I  regret  to 
say  that  many  souls  are  enticed  to  travel  therein. 
It  was  the  wrong  use  of  this  power  of  suggestion 
which  destroyed  us  as  Atlanteans,  and  from  the 
present  indications  it  would  seem  that  we  did  not 
learn,  through  that  sad  experience,  that  we  have 
no  right  to  enslave  the  minds  of  others. 

Mind  must  be  reached  by  thought,  if  the  thought 
be  constantly  repeated,  and  nothing  can  prevent  a 
suggestion  from  reaching  its  destination,  because 
telepathy  is  based  upon  law.  But  whether  the  sug- 
gestion shall  be  accepted  and  acted  upon  depends 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    205 

upon  the  recipient  to  decide;  and  it  is  upon  the  ac- 
ceptance or  rejection  of  suggestion  that  the  free- 
dom or  enslavement  of  a  mind  is  determined.  There 
are  different  kinds  of  suggestion,  two  of  which  are 
known  as  audible  and  silent.  Audible  suggestion 
we  are  constantly  indulging  in,  and  is  something 
we  should  learn  to  control,  because  it  may  be  either 
constructive  or  destructive,  and  if  the  latter,  we 
may  do  much  harm  to  others.  For  example:  We 
meet  a  friend  who  looks  tired,  and  we  say:  "How 
bad  you  look;  are  you  ill?"  This  is  a  destructive 
suggestion,  and  may  have  the  effect  of  really  mak- 
ing our  friend  ill  if  he  accepts  it  as  a  truth.  Parents 
and  teachers  are  constantly  making  audible  sugges- 
tions to  children  which  have  a  great  effect  upon 
them.  If  a  teacher  calls  his  pupils  dunces  and  dolts, 
and  tells  them  how  stupid  they  are,  he  is  pretty  sure 
to  find  in  them  just  what  he  suggests.  If  a  parent 
tells  his  child  that  if  he  misses  his  lesson  he  will 
be  punished,  that  child  will  remember  the  suggestion 
of  punishment  and  probably  miss  his  lesson,  be- 
cause the  suggestion  of  punishment  brings  an  ele- 
ment of  fear  with  it  which  makes  an  indelible  im- 
pression upon  the  child's  mind.  It  is  a  destructive 
suggestion,  because  it  destroys  the  child's  ability 
to  learn  his  lesson.  But  if  the  parent  were  to  say 
"You  can  learn  your  lessons,  because  you  are  a 
bright,  intelligent  child,"  the  suggestion  would  be 
constructive,  and  the  child  would  respond  to  it  by 
having  a  desire  awakened  in  him  to  learn,  since  the 


2o6  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

mind  of  a  child  is  plastic,  and  is  easily  impressed  by 
audible  suggestion. 

The  objective  mind  is  always  ready  to  see  the 
dark  side  of  life,  and  will  readily  accept  any  audible 
suggestion  of  a  destructive  nature;  and  since  there 
are  constructive  suggestions  which  can  be  made  to 
help  others,  why  should  we  be  continually  hinder- 
ing instead  of  helping  our  friends?  Why  is  it  not 
better  to  bring  sunshine  rather  than  shadows  into 
their  lives?  Suppose  a  friend  of  yours  is  about  to 
make  a  business  connection  with  a  Mr.  Jones,  whom 
you  slightly  know,  and  you  say,  for  the  sake  of 
gossip,  "Mr.  Jones  is  a  dishonest  man."  This  sug- 
gestion, whether  true  or  untrue,  will  have  a  ten- 
dency to  make  Mr.  Jones  dishonest  if  he  hears  of 
what  you  have  said,  because  the  thought  dis- 
honesty has  been  impressed  upon  his  mind,  and  he 
will  think  he  may  as  well  be  what  people  think  he 
is.  Then  your  friend  to  whom  you  made  the  sug- 
gestion will  think  of  it  when  he  sees  Mr.  Jones, 
and  the  unfortunate  man  will  get  both  silent  and 
audible  suggestions. 

Silent  suggestion  is  of  two  kinds,  Hetro  and  Auto. 
The  former  meaning  suggestion  to  another,  and  the 
latter  meaning  suggestion  to  one's  self.  There  is 
greater  power  in  silent  suggestion,  whether  it  be 
used  for  right  or  wrong,  than  there  is  in  audible 
suggestion,  because  the  silent  thought  sent  to  an- 
other is  subtle,  and  the  recipient  knows  nothing  of 
its  source,  and  is  often  unable  to  combat  it,  think- 
ing it  originated  in  his  own  mind.  Silent  sugges- 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    207 

tion  can  be  used  for  the  benefit  of  another  so  long 
as  it  be  suggestion,  and  is  not  carried  to  the  extent 
of  coercion.  For  example :  You  may  have  a  friend 
who  is  likely  to  give  way  to  temptation  to  do  wrong. 
You  would  have  a  right  to  say  to  him :  "You  are 
good  and  true;  you  can  resist  that  temptation  be- 
cause your  own  divine  nature  has  asserted  itself." 
And  your  friend  will  come  through  his  struggle 
victorious. 

You  may  always  suggest  mentally  to  a  person 
what  you  have  a  right  to  say  to  him  audibly — and 
it  is  often  inexpedient  for  you  to  say  audibly  what 
you  have  a  moral  right  to  say.  For  example :  If  a 
person  calls  and  is  taking  up  more  of  your  time 
than  you  can  spare,  it  is  morally  right  for  you  to 
say  mentally,  "Why  don't  you  go?"  You  have  a 
right  to  protect  yourself  from  intrusion  upon  your 
work.  Or  perhaps  someone  has  borrowed  money 
from  you,  and  you  do  not  like  to  ask  him  to  return 
it  though  you  really  need  the  money.  It  would 
be  perfectly  legitimate  for  you  to  say  mentally: 
"Return  the  money  you  borrowed."  Again,  you 
may  be  seeking  a  position  and  perhaps  several  other 
persons  are  trying  to  secure  the  same  position. 
When  you  are  called  into  the  office  to  state  your 
qualifications,  say  mentally  to  the  person  who  is  ex- 
amining you,  "You  had  better  give  me  a  chance." 

You  have  a  right  to  help  yourself  through  life  by 
the  aid  of  suggestion,  when  it  is  not  at  the  expense 
of  another  person;  and  you  have  no  conception  of 
the  number  of  obstructions  this  silent  power  will 


208  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

remove  from  your  path,  or  how  much  good  you 
can  accomplish  with  it.  Like  all  other  forces,  this 
power  grows  with  use,  and  you  can  use  silent  sug- 
gestion legitimately  as  a  moral  stimulus.  Suppose 
a  person  makes  a  contract  with  you  agreeing  to 
give  you  certain  things  in  consideration  of  certain 
money.  After  a  time  you  perceive  that  the  contract 
is  not  going  to  be  kept  by  him.  You  have  a  right 
to  say  mentally  to  that  man,  "You  are  an  honorable 
man  and  you  want  to  keep  that  contract,"  and  in 
this  manner  you  will  create  within  him  a  desire  to 
keep  it. 

Silent  suggestion  can  be  used  as  a  defence.  For 
example:  When  you  are  conscious  that  a  person  is 
trying  to  influence  you,  refuse  to  accept  his  sugges- 
tions and  declare  that  he  cannot  accomplish  his  pur- 
pose. This  will  turn  his  force  back  upon  himself, 
and  render  him  impotent  to  affect  you.  If  you  know 
a  person  in  fiduciary  matters  is  trying  to  take  an 
advantage  of  you,  commence  to  work  upon  his  moral 
nature  until  you  quicken  into  activity  all  the  latent 
good  there  is  in  him.  In  this  manner  you  are  do- 
ing a  double  good;  you  are  working  for  yourself 
and  are  also  bringing  out  the  best  in  another.  But 
you  have  no  right  to  coerce  another  person  under 
any  circumstances.  You  may  suggest  strongly, 
forcefully,  but  not  to  the  extent  of  coercion,  not 
even  to  develop  the  moral  nature  of  another.  You 
may  suggest  to  a  friend,  "You  do  not  want  to  drink 
liquor ;  you  never  will  get  any  pleasure  from  drink- 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    209 

ing.  You  do  not  like  the  taste  of  it."  And  in  this 
manner  you  may  help  to  destroy  his  desire  and 
taste  for  drink;  but  you  have  no  right  to  say, 
"You  shall  not  drink  liquor ;  your  hand  will  be  para- 
lyzed when  you  try  to  raise  a  glass  of  it  to  your 
lips;  your  throat  shall  close  when  you  try  to  swal- 
low any  intoxicating  drink,"  because  such  declara- 
tions are  coercive.  Should  you  succeed  in  coercing 
him  to  stop  drinking,  you  would  but  hypnotize  him, 
and  it  would  be  your  will,  not  his,  which  would 
control  his  appetite  and  his  body;  and  as  soon  as 
your  will  is  removed  his  taste  will  reassert  itself, 
and  will  remain  with  him  till  he  overcomes  it  him- 
self. You  may  help  him  to  overcome  his  desires, 
if  he  wants  you  to,  but  you  have  no  right  to  dom- 
inate his  will. 

You  may  suggest  to  a  person  who  owes  you, 
"Give  me  that  money  you  owe  me,"  but  you  have 
no  right  to  say,  "You  shall  return  to  me  that  money ; 
you  shall  never  sleep  again  till  you  have  paid  me." 
You  have  no  right  to  coerce  another,  either  men- 
tally or  physically;  and  though  the  line  of  de- 
markation  is  very  fine,  yet  it  is  clear. 

It  will  be  well  to  remember  these  two  rules  which 
may  help  you  in  using  suggestion.  First,  when  you 
are  suggesting  to  another  to  do  something  for  you, 
speak  of  yourself  as  a  third  person.  For  example: 
Suppose  Mr.  Jones  had  given  you  his  note,  and  you 
wanted  him  to  pay  it.  He  may  have  given  his  note 
to  a  dozen  other  persons,  and  if  you  were  to  say 
mentally  to  him,  "You  want  to  pay  that  note,"  he 


2io  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

would  not  know  which  note  was  referred  to.  But 
if  you  were  to  say,  "Pay  Mr.  Blank  the  note  due 
at  such  a  time,"  your  suggestion  would  be  under- 
stood, and  very  likely  be  acted  upon. 

In  olden  times  it  was  often  the  custom  of  physi- 
cians to  meet  their  patients  with  a  frown  and  a  dis- 
couraging remark ;  but  the  modern  physician  is  be- 
ginning to  understand  the  value  of  suggestion,  and 
meets  his  patient  with  a  smile,  and  the  optimistic 
remark,  "You  are  looking  better  to-day,  and  are 
feeling  better/'  This  is  an  audible  suggestion. 
Suppose  a  friend  says  to  you,  "I  am  feeling  miser- 
ably," you  should  reply  mentally  to  him,  "There 
is  no  reason  why  you  should  not  feel  well."  If  you 
were  to  make  this  statement  audibly,  after  he  had 
declared  to  the  contrary,  he  might  be  offended,  be- 
cause some  persons  cherish  their  ills,  and  resent 
a  refusal  of  anyone  to  recognize  them.  But  the 
silent,  optimistic  remark  helps  to  make  positive 
those  who  have  favorite  ills,  and  they  become  hope- 
ful and  healthy. 

Second,  whenever  you  make  a  mental  sugges- 
tion, suggest  doubly.  Make  one  suggestion  for  the 
subjective  mind  and  one  suggestion  for  the  object- 
ive mind,  and  by  doing  this  your  object  may  be  ac- 
complished in  a  much  shorter  time.  In  suggesting 
to  the  subjective  mind,  tell  it  the  truth;  when  you 
suggest  to  the  objective  mind,  advise  it  along  the 
lines  of  personal  interest.  For  example:  A  man 
has  leased  an  apartment,  but  finds  the  owner  does 
not  intend  to  keep  his  agreement  to  renovate  that 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    211 

apartment.  Having  a  contract,  he  has  a  moral 
right  to  insist  upon  the  terms  being  fulfilled,  and 
he  says  mentally  to  the  subjective  mind  of  the  own- 
er of  the  apartment,  "You  are  an  honest  man  and 
you  will  be  glad  to  keep  your  promise  to  Mr.  Blank." 
Then  say  to  his  objective  mind,  "It  is  to  your  inter- 
est to  keep  your  promise  with  Mr.  Blank;  he  will 
be  a  good  tenant  and  it  will  be  a  great  loss  to  you  to 
lose  him."  The  man  has  been  told  two  aspects  of  the 
truth,  and  each  aspect  appealed  to  the  mind  which 
was  able  to  appreciate  and  understand  it  best. 

Auto-suggestion  is  suggesting  to  yourself,  and 
you  should  always  let  the  auto-suggestion  be  made 
by  your  higher  mind  to  your  lower  self.  Let  the 
subjective  mind  give,  and  the  objective  receive  the 
suggestion.  The  greatest  objection  an  Occultist  has 
to  hypnotism  is  that  it  emphasizes  the  objective 
mind,  and  teaches  it  to  make  its  dominion  stronger 
over  its  subjective  mind.  Suppose  you  wished  to 
break  a  habit;  you  should  say  to  your  objective 
mind,  "Now  you  cannot  do  that  thing  again."  Some- 
times the  objective  mind  will  answer,  "Why  can't 
I  do  that?"  You  should  reply,  "Because  it  is  not 
to  your  interest  to  do  it,  and  you  do  not  want  to; 
you  have  no  desire  to;  all  your  desire  is  gone  for- 
ever." And  the  objective  mind  will  begin  wondering 
where  the  desire  has  gone,  and  at  that  moment  ac- 
cepts the  suggestion  made ;  and  in  this  manner  you 
can  break  any  habit  if  you  will  but  persist  in  mak- 
ing suggestions. 

Deity  does  not  coerce  Its  children  and  no  child 


212  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

of  God  has  a  right  to  coerce  another,  because  it  is 
morally  wrong  to  do  it.  Whatever  exists  on  the 
mental  plane  must  become  embodied  upon  the  ma- 
terial plane  sooner  or  later,  and  a  man's  body  is  a 
limited  expression  of  his  mental  traits,  as  are  also 
the  tendencies  and  habits  of  his  body. 

Suppose  a  mother  comes  to  you,  crying,  "Save 
my  boy  from  becoming  a  gambler  1"  and  you  under- 
take the  task  of  stopping  the  boy  from  gaming.  You 
may  make  your  passes,  and  your  mental  sugges- 
tions, and  say:  "You  shall  not  gamble  any  more; 
you  shall  suffer  an  agony  of  fear  every  time  you  at- 
tempt to  make  a  wager  or  touch  a  card."  You  may 
prevent  the  boy  from  gambling,  but  you  have  not 
destroyed  his  love  for  it,  and  you  have  really  only 
delayed  his  evolution,  since  he  will  have  to  come 
back  to  face  the  same  conditions  at  another  time; 
if  not  in  the  same  body,  then  in  another  one,  in  a 
future  life,  or  whenever  your  will  has  ceased  to  con- 
trol him. 

Hypnotism  or  mental  dominion  never  cures  dis- 
ease; it  merely  prevents  the  temporary  manifesta- 
tion of  effects.  The  limitation  of  its  so-called  cura- 
tive power  depends  upon  the  will  of  the  hypnotist, 
and  the  extent  of  the  hypnosis  produced.  Henry 
Wood,  in  "Practical  Ideas."  for  December,  1900, 
points  out  the  fact  that  a  percentage  of  the  Chris- 
tian and  Mental  Science  patients  have  a  recurrence 
of  their  diseases  within  a  well-defined  period  after 
they  are  cured.  This  is  because  either  conscious  or 
unconscious  mental  dominion  was  employed  by  the 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    213 

mind  of  the  practitioner  in  holding  back  the  mani- 
festation of  the  trouble;  and  these  returns  occur  in 
periods  or  half  periods  of  seven-year  cycles,  accord- 
ing to  the  power  of  the  practitioner.  Even  though 
a  patient  be  actually  cured,  not  by  mental  dominion, 
but  by  bringing  new  elements  into  his  body,  unless 
he  puts  himself  into  a  new  condition  of  mind  and 
bodily  habits,  the  old  disease  in  course  of  time  is 
likely  to  return.  On  the  death  of  a  hypnotist  the 
disease  he  has  held  in  abeyance  usually  returns,  be- 
cause the  magnetic  cord  which  connects  him  with 
his  subject  is  then  broken,  and  the  stronger  influ- 
ence being  removed,  the  weaker  mind,  with  its  old 
line  of  thinking,  reasserts  itself. 

There  is  a  great  limitation  in  the  therapeutical 
use  of  hypnotism  since  its  best  effects  are  upon  ner- 
vous and  kindred  diseases.  In  chronic  cases,  blood 
diseases,  or  independent  growths  within  an  organ- 
ism, such  as  cancers  and  tumors,  it  is  not  successful. 
In  cases  of  insanity  it  is  more  successful,  but  even 
there  it  is  subject  to  limitation.  Continuous  hyp- 
notic influence  upon  a  patient  not  only  destroys  his 
mental  poise  and  makes  him  a  negative,  vacillating 
creature  of  impulse,  but  it  also  depletes  his  nerve 
fluid,  and  while  the  operator  may  seem  to  tempo- 
rarily neutralize  this  weakness,  there  comes  great 
reactions  in  course  of  time  and  the  nerves  control- 
ling the  circulation  of  the  capillary  blood  vessels 
become  weakened,  and  the  entire  circulation  be- 
comes irregular  and  imperfect.  Cold  hands  and 
feet,  with  sometimes  an  intense  rush  of  blood  to 


214  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

the  head,  are  the  physiological  evidences  of  this  con- 
dition. 

It  should  not  be  forgotten  that  hypnotic  influence 
has  a  reactionary  effect  upon  the  operator.  For  ex- 
ample, suppose  a  person  attempts  to  throw  his  hyp- 
notic influence  upon  you  and  you  are  so  positive  or 
your  vibrations  are  so  high  that  his  influence  fails 
to  affect  you,  then  as  a  natural  operation  of  law  that 
force  which  he  sent  out,  not  reaching  its  intended 
destination,  returns  to  the  sender.  If  it  be  a  malig- 
nant force  it  will  do  for  the  sender  what  it  was  in- 
tended to  do  for  his  victim.  The  greatest  crime 
known  to  the  Great  Law  is  the  coercion  of  an  in- 
dividual center  or  mind  to  do  evil.  No  one  ever 
coerced  another  or  used  suggestion  to  the  detri- 
ment of  another;  no  one  ever  brought  disease  or 
misfortune  upon  another,  that  he  did  not  have  to 
drink  to  the  dregs  the  cup  he  held  to  that  other's 
lips.  He  may  escape  punishment  from  the  human 
law,  but  it  will  be  impossible  for  him  to  escape  from 
the  Divine  Law.  In  order  to  send  malignant  influ- 
ences to  another  the  sender  must  hold  in  his  mind 
the  picture  of  the  disaster  he  wishes  to  create  for 
that  other.  It  is  impossible  to  do  this  without  creat- 
ing a  matrix  in  his  own  aura  and  this  matrix  will 
draw  back  to  the  sender  just  what  he  has  created, 
for  the  Great  Law  works  automatically  and  impar- 
tially and  irrespective  of  the  fact  whether  he  has 
succeeded  in  bringing  down  disaster  upon  his  vic- 
tim or  not.  Did  you  ever  see  a  person  supposed  to 


Hypnotism,  and  Hoiv  to  Guard  Against  It.    215 

be  a  witch  or  a  black  magician  who  was  handsome, 
graceful,  happy  or  wealthy? 

Hypnotic  influence  may  last  till  the  operator  de- 
sires it  to  be  broken  or  till  a  stronger  will  than  his, 
at  the  request  of  the  subject,  shall  break  it.  If  a 
person  submits  to  complete  hypnosis  but  once,  in 
the  course  of  time  the  influence  will  become  dissi- 
pated; but  an  intense  hatred  for  the  operator  will 
become  engendered  in  the  heart  of  the  subject  when 
that  influence  is  destroyed,  and  it  will  never  be 
eradicated  during  the  lifetime  of  either.  The  law 
works  in  the  same  manner  in  cases  of  coerced  love. 
If  a  person  succeeds  in  compelling  the  love  of  an- 
other through  hypnotic  influence,  that  love  will  turn 
to  the  bitterest  hatred  and  then  there  is  nothing  that 
the  victim  will  leave  undone  to  avenge  what  he  be- 
lieves to  be  his  wrongs.  It  is  right  to  ask  for  honest 
love  or  to  suggest  that  another  person  should  give 
you  his  love;  you  have  a  right  to  picture  another's 
love  flowing  from  him  to  you,  but  you  have  no 
right  to  coerce  another  into  loving  you.  Hypnotic 
influence  can  be  broken  by  a  person  who  is  stronger 
than  the  hypnotist.  For  example:  A  may  coerce 
B,  but  C  can  break  A's  influence  at  B's  request  even 
though  he  is  no  stronger  than  A,  because  C  is  work- 
ing for  the  right  and  has  the  Universal  Conscious- 
ness to  aid  him. 

There  are  certain  conditions  of  mind  which  if  you 
will  make  use  of  them  will  make  you  immune  from 
this  malignant  force :  First.  Be  mentally  positive ; 
then  you  are  not  what  the  hypnotist  calls  "suggest- 


216  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

able."  A  person  who  is  suggestable  is  in  a  passive 
condition  of  mind  and  receives  suggestion  easily.  If 
you  make  a  practice  of  concentrating  your  thoughts 
upon  whatever  you  are  doing,  your  mind  is  active 
and  positive  and  thoughts  foreign  to  you  cannot 
find  lodgment  with  you.  Few  operators  are  per- 
sistent enough  to  continue  with  their  suggestions 
when  they  fail  in  reaching  the  subject  after  a  con- 
siderable length  of  time. 

Second.  It  is  accepting  the  suggestion  which 
enslaves.  You  cannot  prevent  the  suggestion  from 
coming  to  you  if  the  operator  is  persistent,  but  you 
need  not  accept  it. 

Third.  Be  on  your  guard  against  all  suggestions. 
Examine  critically  all  thoughts  that  come  to  you, 
and  test  each  with  this  question :  "Is  it  true  ?"  There 
will  be  no  one  who  will  come  in  contact  with  you  for 
many  years  who  will  be  strong  enough  to  make  a 
suggestion  to  you  and  accomplish  his  purpose  im- 
mediately. The  effort  must  be  repeatedly  made 
before  he  can  succeed.  If  you  examine  the  thoughts 
which  come  to  you  and  find  them  undesirable,  repu- 
diate them  and  declare  you  cannot  be  influenced  by 
them.  For  example:  Suppose  you  were  to  sud- 
denly become  dissatisfied  with  your  present  home. 
You  have  always  been  pleased  with  it,  but  suddenly 
you  are  seized  with  a  desire  to  move  from  that 
neighborhood  and  buy  somewhere  else.  Examine 
those  thoughts  and  ask  yourself  why  you  should 
change  your  mind  without  any  apparent  cause.  And 
if  in  a  few  days  or  weeks  a  real  estate  broker  meets 


Hypnotism,  and  How  to  Guard  Against  It.    217 

you  and  offers  a  piece  of  property  in  the  neighbor- 
hood you  have  been  thinking  of  moving  into,  it  may 
be  well  for  3rou  to  consider  whether  it  was  his 
thoughts  that  have  caused  your  change  of  mind  or 
whether  they  were  your  own. 

Fourth.  Do  not  entertain  visiting  thoughts  until 
you  know  their  character  any  sooner  than  you 
would  entertain  persons  whose  character  you  know 
nothing  about. 

Fifth.  Select  only  such  thoughts  as  you  want, 
and  reject  such  suggestions  as  you  do  not  desire. 
So  few  people  are  able  to  do  this,  but  are  constantly 
being  swayed  by  the  influence  of  those  with  whom 
they  associate.  Other  people's  manners,  words  and 
thoughts  mold  our  lives  to  a  much  greater  extent 
than  we  imagine,  and  this  is  because  we  do  not 
think  for  ourselves;  we  do  not  generate  our  own 
thoughts,  but  accept  whatever  comes  floating  along 
to  us.  A  woman  goes  shopping.  She  knows  in  a 
general  way  what  she  wants,  but  with  her  mind 
full  of  indefinite  thoughts  she  comes  to  a  positive 
saleswoman  who  wants  to  sell  all  the  goods  on  her 
counter.  In  a  vague  way  the  shopper  tells  the 
woman  she  is  going  to  buy  a  dress  and  the  sales- 
woman sees  an  opportunity  to  dispose  of  something 
she  is  anxious  to  get  rid  of.  She  immediately  makes 
a  selection  for  her  customer  and  impresses  her  mind 
with  the  thought  that  this  is  just  what  she  wants. 
The  shopper  does  not  know  what  she  wants,  and 
although  this  does  not  seem  to  be  quite  the  shade 
or  kind  of  goods  she  had  thought  about  getting,  still 


2i8  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

she  is  not  sure  it  would  not  do.  She  wavers  and 
the  saleswoman  sells  her  the  dress,  and  when  it 
comes  home  and  the  positive-minded  saleswoman 
is  not  present,  the  woman  is  disappointed  and  dis- 
satisfied with  her  purchase. 

A  man  goes  into  a  restaurant  and  an  obsequious 
waiter  suggests  by  his  manner  that  a  liberal  tip  is 
expected.  He  gives  the  man  no  more  attention  than 
the  proprietor  pays  him  for  giving  to  any  other 
customer,  but  he  wants  a  tip  and  he  thinks,  looks 
and  acts  tip  till  the  man  cannot,  dare  not  refuse  to 
give  it.  He  is  for  the  moment  under  the  mental 
dominion  of  that  waiter  and  even  though  he  be  a 
Judge  of  the  Supreme  Court  he  must  yield  to  the 
will  of  a  man  who  perhaps  can  scarcely  write  his 
own  name. 

That  no  hypnotist  can  succeed  permanently  in 
life  is  true.  No  person  can  retain  possession  of  a 
thing  gained  through  black  art  or  by  dishonest 
methods.  A  thief  may  seem  to  prosper  for  a  sea- 
son, but  eventually  the  Great  Law  will  make  the 
proper  adjustment  and  his  illgotten  gains  will  be 
swept  from  him,  because  Divine  Justice  does  rule 
the  Universe. 


LECTURE  TEN. 


HIGHER  OCCULT  OR  SPIRITUAL  FORCES 
AND  THEIR  USES. 

There  is  an  old  saying  that  "Birds  of  a  feather 
flock  together,"  which  is  another  way  of  saying: 
"Tell  me  who  a  man's  friends  are  and  I  will  tell 
you  what  manner  of  man  he  is."  Through  both 
these  maxims  the  same  thought  runs — that  like 
mentalities  are  found  in  groups.  There  are  certain 
groupings  of  forces  and  of  truths ;  there  are  also  a 
grouping  of  minds.  Literary  people  are  likely  to 
be  drawn  together;  musicians  naturally  seek  musi- 
cians for  their  friends,  and  this  is  due  to  the  fact 
that  the  individuals  who  compose  these  groups  vi- 
brate in  the  same  common  key.  They  think  along 
the  same  general  lines;  they  have  what  is  some- 
times called  sympathetic  vibration,  that  is,  they 
vibrate  at  the  same  general  rate. 

In  physics  we  see  evidences  of  sympathetic  vibra- 
tions. If  you  strike  a  note  on  the  piano  you  will 
frequently  hear  a  part  of  a  chandelier,  or  a  wine 
glass  on  the  sideboard  vibrate  in  sympathy  with 
that  particular  note.  This  shows  that  the  mass 
tone  of  the  glass  is  identical  with  that  of  the  note 
upon  the  piano.  In  thought  there  is  sympathetic 
vibration  also,  and  for  this  reason  it  is  sometimes 
difficult  to  determine  who  is  the  real  inventor  of  a 

219 


22O  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

thing.  For  example :  Who  was  the  inventor  of  the 
telephone?  If  Bell,  then  why  was  it  necessary 
to  have  all  the  controversy  that  occurred  between 
him  and  those  claiming  it  under  Gray?  Why  was 
it  necessary  to  have  a  lawsuit  and  then  to  compro- 
mise their  claims?  Bell,  Gray  and  Edison  were 
thinking  along  the  same  line,  had  become  attached 
to  a  certain  thought  current  and  developed  the  same 
ideas  simultaneously. 

We  often  hear  the  expression :  "I  got  into  a  cer- 
tain current  of  thought."  To  the  careless  thinker 
this  expression  means  nothing  in  particular,  but  to 
the  student  of  Occultism  it  means  a  great  deal  more 
than  a  mere  form  of  expression;  for  there  are  cur- 
rents of  thought  in  the  great  magnetic  sea  of  con- 
sciousness in  which  we  live,  and  we  can  and  do  at- 
tach ourselves  either  consciously  or  unconsciously 
to  different  currents  with  definite  results. 

Picture  to  yourself  for  a  moment  this  magnetic 
consciousness  of  which  we  are  a  part.  It  is  pulsat- 
ing with  life  and  is  capable  of  receiving  and  trans- 
mitting thought.  In  this  great  magnetic  sea  there 
are  thought  currents  as  clearly  defined  as  there  are 
currents  in  the  air  or  in  the  ocean.  You  know 
there  is  a  current  in  the  ocean  which  is  called  the 
Antarctic  Drift  and  another  called  the  Gulf  Stream, 
etc.  In  Universal  Mind  there  are  currents  of 
thought  which  are  as  distinctly  separate  as  are  these 
two  currents  in  the  ocean;  and  it  is  as  necessary 
that  we  should  know  about  the  one  as  that  we 
should  know  about  the  other,  because  a  man  draws 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  221 

from  the  currents  in  Universal  Mind  such  thoughts 
or  ideas  as  he  is  sympathetically  vibrating  with. 
When  you  and  I  are  thinking  along  the  same  gen- 
eral line  we  are  in  a  current  of  thought,  which  is 
one  of  those  in  the  Universal  Consciousness;  and 
because  your  mind  and  mine  are  attached  to  this 
current,  we  are  for  the  time  being  receiving  in 
unison  the  same  general  ideas.  Plagiarism  may  be 
often  explained  in  this  manner.  Oliver  Wendell 
Holmes  wrote  the  poem,  "Man  Wants  but  Little 
Here  Below,"  and  after  it  was  published  a  friend 
called  his  attention  to  the  fact  that  Adams  had 
written  not  only  on  the  same  theme,  but  had  used 
the  same  similies  and  many  of  the  same  expres- 
sions, many  years  before;  yet  no  one  would  think 
of  calling  Doctor  Holmes  a  plagiarist.  By  thinking 
along  that  line  his  mind  had  become  attached  to 
the  same  current  of  thought  that  Adams  had  been 
in  when  he  expressed  himself  in  a  similar  manner. 

Inventors  often  get  into  the  same  current  of 
thought,  and  work  along  similar  lines,  and  then 
suddenly  startle  the  public  with  inventions  of  a  like 
nature,  each  inventor  declares  himself  the  sole  dis- 
coverer of  the  thing  invented.  During  the  last  two 
decades  or  more  there  has  been  no  great  discovery 
made  in  physics  that  can  be  attributed  to  the  mind 
of  any  one  man,  since  several  minds  have  con- 
tributed towards  each  and  all  the  discoveries  that 
have  been  made.  Man  draws  from  the  Universal  ac- 
cording to  his  mentality,  and  groups  of  men  may 


222  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

draw  simultaneously  the  same  ideas  from  the  same 
currents  of  thought. 

These  currents  of  thought  are  used  by  men  un- 
consciously, semi-consciously  and  consciously.  For 
example,  a  man  desires  to  possess  great  wealth,  and 
decides  he  will  have  it.  He  knows  nothing  about 
the  scientific  use  of  mind,  but  puts  certain  natural 
laws  into  operation  through  his  desire  and  decision 
to  gain  wealth.  If  he  persists,  wealth  must  come  to 
him  because  he  has  set  the  law  into  operation  which 
will  bring  it,  but  it  may  be  a  long  time  coming,  be- 
cause he  does  not  understand  how  to  use  his  mind 
scientifically  to  hasten  it.  Another  man  who  has 
studied  along  the  line  of  Mental  Science  and  who 
knows  there  is  power  in  the  individual  mind  to  de- 
mand from  the  Universal  Mind,  says,  "Give  me 
wealth."  He  persists  in  making  his  demands  fre- 
quently and  earnestly  and  in  time  the  wealth  will 
come  to  him.  He  has  used  the  law  semi-consciously 
and  will  obtain  what  he  demands  more  quickly 
than  the  first  man.  The  Occultist  knows  that  by 
making  a  mental  image  of  wealth  and  by  concen- 
trating his  thoughts  upon  it  he  has  put  into  opera- 
tion a  law,  and  that  through  the  magnetic  cord 
which  connects  him  with  his  creation  he  will  draw  to 
himself  the  wealth  he  has  created.  He  uses  the  law 
consciously  and  therefore  realizes  his  desires  much 
sooner  than  the  other  two.  To  live  is  to  use  these 
currents  of  force  either  consciously  or  uncon- 
sciously, but  men  always  attribute  their  successes 
to  external  causes  until  they  learn  something  about 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  223 

the  laws  which  governs  success.  At  this  time  many 
persons  are  using  these  Cosmic  currents  of  force 
for  therapeutical  purposes  and  are  performing  cures 
of  bodily  ills  through  mental  processes.  Each 
claims  to  cure  through  a  system  of  healing  different 
from  the  others;  as  witness  Christian  Scientist, 
Mental  Scientist,  New  Thought  Scientist,  Faith 
Curer,  Divine  Healer,  the  priests  of  the  Water  of 
the  Spring  of  Lourdes,  Magnetic  Healer,  Hyp- 
notists, etc.  It  makes  no  difference  what  the  claims 
of  these  respective  schools  may  be,  the  phenomena 
of  healing  must  be  based  on  the  same  law.  Jesus 
knew  the  nature  and  use  of  these  Cosmic  forces,  and 
taught  them  to  his  disciples,  who  produced  the 
phenomena  called  miracles  through  the  use  of  them. 
Apollonius  of  Tyana  and  his  disciples  performed 
miracles  and  cures  in  the  same  manner;  and  before 
these  the  Essenes,  Pythagoreans,  Buddhists  and 
Brahmins  used  these  currents  of  force  for  the  same 
purposes;  and  during  the  early  Christian  centuries 
and  Middle  Ages  the  Neo-Platonists,  Mystics  and 
Rosicrutians  used  them  in  their  work  with  mankind. 
These  currents  are  Spiritual  Forces  and  are  a 
part  of  the  Universal  Spirit  or  Mind.  Spiritual 
force  may  be  defined  as  motion  generated  by  Divine 
Mind  in  contradistinction  to  motion  generated  by 
individual  mind  or  by  mechanical  processes.  You 
remember  the  all  important  fact  so  often  reiterated 
in  this  course  of  lectures  that  the  sensitive  etheric 
mind  of  the  Universe  is  all  around  us,  as  air  sur- 
rounds man  or  as  the  ocean  surrounds  and  sustains 


224  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

the  fish  which  live  in  it.  Like  the  ocean,  Divine 
Mind  is  always  in  motion.  The  ocean  has  its  in- 
herent motion  due  to  the  tides,  and  also  its  super- 
ficial or  wave  motion  due  to  external  causes  such 
as  wind,  etc.  Divine  Mind  has  Its  motion,  per  se, 
which  are  the  currents  within  it,  and  these  currents 
are  superficially  modified  by  the  thoughts  of  men. 
An  individual  mind  cannot  permanently  work 
against  a  Universal  current  nor  misuse  it  any  more 
than  it  can  keep  the  tide  in  the  Bay  of  Fundy  from 
rising;  but  it  can  work  along  the  right  lines  and 
make  use  of  these  great  currents  to  its  own  ad- 
vantage, and  in  this  manner  work  with  nature  in- 
stead of  against  it. 

While  it  is  true  that  force  is  one,  yet  force  mani- 
fests on  this  planet  under  different  aspects,  and  we 
will  consider  five  of  these  as  five  forces  or  five  great 
currents.  Remember,  all  force  is  one  force,  but 
manifests  at  different  rates  of  vibration  according 
to  the  media  through  which  it  acts,  and  these  differ- 
ent rates  of  vibration  we  will  call,  for  convenience 
sake,  separate  currents.  Each  of  these  five  currents 
is  subdivided  into  other  currents,  and  each  of  these 
sub-divisions,  like  the  great  currents,  is  separated 
from  each  other  by  a  difference  in  their  rates  of 
vibration,  the  same  as  the  Gulf  Stream  is  separated 
from  the  main  body  of  water  through  which  it 
flows  by  a  difference  in  the  rate  of  its  vibrations. 

These  Cosmic  currents  vibrate  red,  orange,  green, 
blue  and  yellow,  and  may  be  pictured  as  vibratory 
currents  of  color.  To  illustrate  them  crudely  we 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  225 

may  compare  them  with  physical  things  with  which 
we  are  familiar.  The  rainbow,  for  example.  Imagine 
a  great  rainbow  encircling  the  earth,  and  suppose 
it  to  be  in  motion  and  you  will  have  an  idea  of 
how  these  currents  look  as  they  encircle  this  planet, 
with  each  force  representing  one  of  the  colors  of 
the  rainbow — only  instead  of  the  alleged  seven 
colors  of  the  rainbow  you  will  have  five  distinct 
colors.  It  is  true  that  the  real  currents  have  been 
partly  or  dimly  seen  by  men  and  are  called  the 
zodiacal  lights,  and  the  many  colored  Northern 
Lights  also  give  us  glimpses  of  portions  of  these 
currents,  which  sweep  round  and  permeate  the  earth 
in  every  part  of  it.  The  Cosmic  currents  sweep  not 
only  over  the  surface  of  the  ground,  but  through  it, 
passing  down  on  one  side  of  the  globe  and  up  on 
the  other  side.  They  also  sweep  down  and  through 
one  side  of  man  and  up  on  the  other  side,  for  man 
is  but  a  small  world,  and  so  he  and  every  portion 
of  the  world  is  touched  by  all  these  currents.  Look- 
ing at  them  from  the  subjective  side  of  life  they 
appear  as  if  a  great  number  of  ribbons  of  the  five 
different  colors  were  being  waved  up  and  down  and 
wound  around  and  around  the  earth  as  if  all  men 
and  living  creatures  were  being  entangled  in  them. 

Doubtless  you  have  looked  out  over  the  hot 
pavements  of  a  city  in  the  month  of  August  and 
have  seen  the  heat  vibrations  rising  from  them  in 
wavering  clouds.  Imagine  those  grayish  white  heat 
vibrations  to  be  of  five  different  colors  and  you  will 
have  a  very  good  picture  of  how  the  Cosmic  forces 


226  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

look.  Suppose  my  hand  were  full  of  ribbon  stream- 
ers of  these  different  colors  and  I  should  shake 
them  rapidly  before  your  eyes;  some  of  you  being 
partially  color  blind  would  see  only  the  red  and 
green  ribbons,  others  might  see  those  two  colors  and 
the  blue,  while  some  would  see  the  yellow  and 
orange  and  the  other  three.  Each  person  would  see 
according  to  his  capacity  for  seeing,  and  it  is  the 
same  with  your  ability  to  see  and  use  the  Cosmic 
forces.  You  see  and  function  in  the  color  with 
which  you  are  connected  by  reason  of  your  corre- 
sponding vibrations.  The  human  mind  is  related 
to  these  currents  very  much  as  a  telegraph  instru- 
ment is  related  to  the  telegraph  wires.  It  may  be 
attached  to  any  wire  and  repeat  all  messages  that 
pass  over  it.  The  human  mind  can  attach  itself  to 
the  blue,  the  red,  the  yellow  or  the  green  current, 
as  the  case  may  be,  and  receive  everything  in  that 
current,  and  it  is  through  its  power  to  tap  the  dif- 
ferent currents  that  it  is  able  to  draw  anything  that 
it  may  desire  from  those  currents. 

You  may  ask,  "How  can  there  be  a  Cosmic  cur- 
rent that  we  cannot  see  or  feel?"  I  must  call  your 
attention  to  the  fact  that  because  you  do  not  feel  or 
see  a  force  is  no  reason  that  it  does  not  exist.  You 
cannot  see  free  electricity  and  certain  conditions 
must  exist  before  you  can  see  or  feel  it,  yet  you  do 
not  deny  that  it  is  a  force  and  many  of  you  are 
learning  to  use  it.  You  do  not  feel  the  Cosmic 
currents  because  the  necessary  conditions  have  not 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  227 

been  made  to  make  you  feel  them.  If  you  were 
shut  in  a  room  where  you  could  not  feel  the  wind 
and  it  blew  very  hard  outside,  the  conditions  would 
not  be  right  for  you  to  feel  it,  and  since  it  is  a  force 
which  cannot  be  seen  you  would  not  know  that  it 
existed. 

The  first  thing  to  do  to  become  conscious  of  these 
color  currents  is  to  image  or  visualize  them,  and  re- 
member that  nothing  was  ever  imagined  by  mind 
that  does  not  exist  in  the  Universe.  If  you  are 
vibrating  green  and  the  blue  has  begun  to  tinge 
your  aura  then  visualize  the  blue  and  it  will  be 
drawn  into  you,  since  whatever  you  concentrate 
upon  or  image  you  must  draw  to  yourself.  If  you 
have  developed  to  the  point  of  the  blue  vibration 
tinged  with  the  yellow  then  you  can  draw  the  yellow 
Cosmic  current  into  yourself.  And  whenever  you 
are  able  to  draw  to  you  a  current  that  is  vibrating 
higher  than  your  predominating  color  you  raise  your 
own  vibrations  and  receive  all  the  good  that  you  are 
capable  of  assimilating  from  that  current.  These 
mental  pictures  and  concentration  are  the  two  in- 
struments we  utilize  for  the  purpose  of  connecting 
ourselves  with  Cosmic  currents  which  are  constantly 
flowing  around  the  earth. 

If  it  is  difficult  for  you  to  image  or  visualize  the 
color  you  desire  then  secure  a  bit  of  ribbon  of  the 
proper  shade,  or  a  drapery  of  the  color  you  want 
and  look  at  it  until  you  have  the  color  impressed 
upon  your  mind.  This  will  help  you  to  visualize  the 
Cosmic  currents,  and  when  you  are  concentrating 


228  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

you  should  realize  that  they  are  currents  of  force, 
though  you  speak  of  them  in  terms  of  color.  When 
the  blue  current  is  mentioned  that  force  is  meant 
which  vibrates  at  a  rate  that  makes  it  appear  as 
blue.  Electricity  is  a  part  of  this  current  and  when 
the  proper  mechanism  is  used  to  condense  and 
conduct  it,  it  manifests  as  blue  to  the  physical  eyes. 
Commencing  with  the  red  current  we  will  study 
that  first  because  it  is  lowest  in  the  scale.  Red 
vibrations  in  anything  mean  emotion  of  some  sort. 
In  man  it  indicates  that  his  animal  nature  is  in  the 
ascendency;  in  animals  it  is  a  perfectly  natural 
vibration  but  can  be  stimulated  by  external  sugges- 
tions to  an  ungovernable  or  furious  extent.  For  ex- 
ample; the  bull  or  turkey  gobbler  are  often  driven 
into  a  frenzy  of  rage  at  sight  of  a  red  rag.  This  is 
because  the  color  red  makes  a  picture  in  the  mind 
of  the  creature  and  by  looking  at  that  picture  its 
mind  becomes  connected  with  the  Universal  cur- 
rent of  red.  Having  "tapped"  that  force  it  draws 
into  itself  all  that  it  can  assimilate  of  that  rate  of 
vibration  and  is  angry.  Man,  like  the  animal,  some- 
times uses  the  red  current  unconsciously  and  when- 
ever he  gets  angry  he  connects  himself  with  it 
whether  conscious  of  it  or  not,  and  this  is  the  reason 
he  loses  his  self-control  so  quickly.  As  soon  as  he 
becomes  enraged  his  aura  changes  to  the  vibration 
red ;  then  his  aura  is  vibrating  sympathetically  with 
the  red  Cosmic  current  and  the  connection  between 
the  two  is  instantly  made.  The  red  current  has 
been  tapped,  the  man's  aura  is  the  conducting  in- 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  229 

strument  for  that  force  and  immediately  the  man 
becomes  filled  with  that  vibration.  Self-control  is 
swept  away  and  he  rages  like  a  mad  animal.  He 
has  connected  himself  with  everybody  in  the  world 
who  is  angry  at  that  moment  and  he  is  functioning 
in  these  vibrations.  He  is  receiving  telepathically 
all  the  ugly  things  that  other  angry  people  are 
thinking  about,  and  he  does  things  while  in  that 
condition  which  he  had  never  before  thought  of 
doing.  If  he  commits  murder  while  in  this  angry 
condition  the  legal  fraternity  call  him  emotionally 
insane  and  he  escapes  capital  punishment  by  being 
incarcerated  in  an  asylum  for  awhile.  Red  is  a  low, 
disruptive,  jagged  vibration,  and  when  it  is  drawn 
into  a  person  it  begins  its  disruptive  work  upon 
the  physical  body  of  that  person,  and  all  the  good 
creations  which  he  has  made  are  instantly  repelled 
from  his  aura.  And  not  only  are  good  things  and 
good  people  repelled  from  him,  but  he  attracts  all 
the  so-called  evil  manifestations  and  unless  he  re- 
covers his  mental  poise  and  gets  out  of  that  red 
current  nothing  but  misfortune  will  come  until  he  is 
swept  out  of  his  body. 

Anger  demagnetizes  the  atoms  which  compose 
the  physical  body.  There  is  a  positive  and  a  nega- 
tive side  to  every  atom  as  there  is  to  every  magnetic 
thing  in  the  world.  When  we  speak  of  a  body  hav- 
ing magnetic  polarity  we  mean  that  to  the  negative 
of  one  side  stands  the  positive  of  the  next  and  that 
to  the  negative  of  one  atom  stands  the  positive  side 


230  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

of  another  atom ;  and  when  the  body  is  demagne- 
tized this  relationship  is  destroyed. 

The  higher  forces  of  nature  flow  rhythmically  over 
these  atoms  when  they  are  magnetically  polarized; 
but  when  the  red  current,  which  is  repellant,  enters 
a  body  it  demagnetizes  the  atoms  and  prepares  a 
condition  for  bacteria  to  enter  and  disease  to  follow. 
Sometimes  the  body  becomes  instantly  disrupted 
by  this  demagnetizing  force  and  apoplexy  is  caused. 
Many  times  paralysis  is  produced  because  the  red 
force  is  so  great  that  the  atoms  which  compose  the 
nerves  of  the  body  become  demagnetized  and  never 
afterwards  regain  their  polarity.  Different  shades 
of  the  red  compose  the  sub-currents  of  the  great 
red  current.  The  light  shade,  called  scarlet,  indi- 
cates anger;  the  darker  shade,  called  crimson,  indi- 
cates sex  desire.  Fear  is  indicated  by  a  still  darker 
shade,  which  is  a  red-brown  and  which  sometimes 
deepens  to  almost  a  brown-black,  and  the  sense 
gratification  is  represented  by  a  shade  of  wine  color. 

The  Occultist  uses  this  red  current  solely  for  the 
purpose  of  restoring  the  sex  functions  in  a  person 
who  has  become  depleted  and  who  desires  to  use 
his  powers  solely  in  a  creative  manner.  The  black 
magicians  use  the  red  current  for  the  purpose  of 
destruction,  for  that  force  can  be  utilized  to  destroy 
and  it  can  also  be  used  to  precipitate  anything 
upon  the  material  plane  which  floats  or  lives  within 
it.  In  Black  Magic  it  is  used  for  producing  pests, 
plagues  and  all  kinds  of  diseases.  The  White 
Magician  can  use  it  when  the  law  requires  or  when 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  231 

mankind  may  be  helped  thereby,  as  Moses  the 
Occultist  and  the  Egyptian  magicians  used  it  when 
Egypt  was  made  to  suffer  for  her  sins. 

The  orange  current  or  force  is  used  by  everything 
that  lives  upon  this  earth.  It  is  the  life  current  and 
sustains  every  plant  and  animal  body  that  exists. 
Every  creature  that  breathes  inhales  it  with  the  at- 
mosphere, and  things  that  do  not  have  lung  capacity 
absorb  this  great  force  through  their  bodies  as 
sponges  absorb  water  or  moisture.  If  an  animal 
becomes  ill  it  immediately  goes  out  into  the  sun- 
light and  breathes  deeply  of  this  orange  force  and 
if  permitted  to  remain  in  the  sunshine  and  all  drugs, 
such  as  our  sometimes  unwise  veterinary  surgeons 
give  to  animals,  are  withheld  the  creature  will  get 
well. 

The  Occultist  uses  this  life  force  in  treating 
animals,  young  children  and  undeveloped  persons 
who  have  not  reached  the  point  in  their  evolution 
where  they  vibrate  green.  He  also  uses  it  in  stimu- 
lating the  growth  of  plants.  The  Indian  Yogi  puts 
a  seed  into  the  earth  and  then  condenses  this  orange 
force  into  it  with  such  intensity  that  while  you 
stand  looking  at  him  the  plant  is  forced  out  of  the 
soil,  comes  to  maturity  and  bears  fruit  before  your 
eyes.  This  wonderful  feat  is  imitated  by  sleight  of 
hand  performers  and  by  hypnotists  who  deceive 
people  into  believing  they  see  it  done.  But  there 
are  men  who  can  and  do  produce  this  phenomenon 
and  it  is  done  by  using  the  orange  current  in  the 
manner  I  have  described. 


232  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Green  is  the  current  of  individualization.  It  also 
represents  selfishness  both  in  its  higher  and  its  lower 
forms.  Manifesting  in  this  great  current  is  all  de- 
sire for  personal  possessions,  distinctions  and  indi- 
vidual aggrandizement.  It  is  the  current  of  intel- 
*lectualization  without  intuition.  There  are  many 
people  who  have  a  great  deal  of  book  learning, 
whose  objective  minds  are  trained  and  who  are  in- 
tellectual, and  their  memory  of  facts  and  alleged 
facts  is  wonderful;  but  their  subjective  minds  may 
be  altogether  undeveloped  and  yet  these  persons 
pass  for  very  wise  individuals.  They  vibrate  green 
and  have  but  little  or  no  real  knowledge.  For  ex- 
ample, a  lawyer  may  know  thoroughly  the  laws  of 
the  State  of  New  York  and  may  know  exactly  what 
decision  has  been  given  in  a  similar  case  to  any 
proposition  you  may  submit  to  him ;  but  to-morrow 
the  legislature  may  meet  and  do  away  with  all  the 
old  statutes  and  pass  a  new  set  of  laws  and  the 
lawyer's  knowledge  would  be  legislated  out  of  ex- 
istence. There  may  be  what  we  call  intellectualiza- 
tion  of  a  very  high  order  and  yet  it  does  not  rise 
above  the  green  current. 

Selfishness  in  its  lowest  aspect  is  in  a  sub- 
current  and  belongs  in  the  shade  called  bottle- 
green.  The  desire  for  personal  possessions,  for  dis- 
tinction and  for  aggrandizement  is  the  color  of  the 
grass  we  see  in  the  Autumn,  is  a  very  pronounced 
shade,  but  not  so  dark  as  the  bottle-green.  Intel- 
lectualization  without  intuition  is  a  still  lighter 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  233 

shade  and  a  wise  individualization  without  selfish- 
ness is  of  the  shade  called  pastel-green. 

Individualization  manifests  as  the  green  vibration 
everywhere  in  the  Universe  and  when  you  look  out 
into  the  heavens  at  night  and  see  a  star  sending  forth 
a  green  light  you  may  know  that  it,  like  our  earth, 
is  passing  through  the  period  of  individualization, 
and  like  our  own  world,  is  the  fourth  planet  in  a 
chain  of  seven.  The  planet  of  individualization  is 
where  Men  or  Minds  become  self-dependent,  inde- 
pendent, self-reliant.  The  grass  and  foliage  upon 
our  earth  is  green  because  in  the  vegetable  kingdom 
Universal  Consciousness  is  making  an  effort  to  in- 
dividualize. The  keynote  of  our  world  is  Fa,  which 
corresponds  to  the  green  color  and  which  produces 
it  by  its  vibration.  Animal  souls  are  of  this  color 
at  birth,  but  soon  take  the  deeper  color  red  when 
their  bodies  become  strong  enough  to  express  desire 
for  pro-creation.  As  man  develops  and  becomes 
more  and  more  individualized  he  vibrates  green  in 
proportion  to  his  development. 

The  Occultist  uses  this  color  to  create  for  himself 
and  for  others  wealth,  honor,  position  and  every 
material  thing  that  can  be  desired.  Suppose  he  de- 
sires to  make  a  material  creation,  he  would  concen- 
trate upon  the  green  current  until  every  part  of 
his  entire  being  was  vibrating  green  or  until  he  had 
connected  himself  with  this  current.  After  making 
his  connection  he  would  select  the  sub-current  he 
desired  and  in  that  make  the  mental  picture  of  the 
thing  to  be  created.  Suppose  he  wanted  some 


234  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

money,  he  would  know  that  the  financial  current, 
which  is  a  part  of  the  green  current,  was  the  one  to 
use.  After  making  his  connection  and  the  picture  of 
the  amount  he  wants  he  will  no  longer  think  of  the 
color  current,  but  will  put  all  his  force  in  con- 
centrating upon  his  creation,  and  the  Great  Con- 
sciousness will  bring  his  creation  to  him  out  of  this 
green  current.  The  Occultist  gets  quicker  results 
than  unconscious  users  of  this  law  because  he  does 
not  waste  his  force,  but  goes  directly  and  scientific- 
ally to  work.  He  knows  what  he  wants  and  how  to 
get  it  and  there  is  no  uncertainty  or  indecision  in 
his  efforts,  and  as  a  consequence  no  delay. 

In  cases  of  nervousness,  the  Occultist  uses  green 
to  individualize  and  strengthen  the  nerves,  and 
when  he  draws  this  vibration  into  the  body  of  a 
patient  he  brings  in  new  materials  and  new  atoms 
which  give  new  life.  For  failing  eyesight  and  most 
eye  troubles,  green  is  the  proper  current  to  use  since 
the  optic  nerves  are  revitalized  and  individualized 
by  its  strengthening  vibrations.  The  Occultist  also 
uses  this  current  as  an  antidote  for  altruism.  There 
comes  a  time  in  the  career  of  every  man  in  some  life 
when  he  feels  that  he  must  be  an  Atlas  and  go 
about  carrying  the  world  on  his  back.  He  wants 
to  bear  everybody's  sorrows  and  thinks  it  a  great 
privilege  to  give  away  everything  he  has  in  the 
world.  He  becomes  a  devout  believer  in  poverty 
and  piety  and  sometimes  goes  so  far  as  to  study  the 
pictures  of  Jesus  of  Nazareth  and  of  the  martyrs 
and  trims  his  beard  to  look  like  theirs,  that  he  may 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  235 

look  the  life  of  sacrifice  he  tries  to  live.  He  dissi- 
pates himself  mentally,  physically  and  financially 
and  sooner  or  later  nervous  prostration  if  not  star- 
vation claims  his  body,  and  he  goes  out  upon  the 
next  plane  of  consciousness.  For  such  a  person 
the  Occultist  uses  the  green  current  to  restore  him 
to  a  normal  condition  of  individualization. 

The  Occultist  is  taught  never  to  give  more  of 
anything  than  his  surplus,  and  never  to  assume  the 
burdens  of  another,  for  by  so  doing  he  would  be 
robbing  that  other  of  the  experience  he  came  into 
this  world  to  get.  In  every  walk  of  life  we  see 
people  who  have  assumed  burdens  that  do  not  be- 
long to  them  and  who  are  crying  aloud  to  Deity  for 
help  and  are  demanding  to  know  why  such  burdens 
should  be  laid  upon  their  shoulders.  God  never 
laid  upon  any  of  His  children  anything  that  was 
greater  than  they  could  bear;  and  when  we  find 
our  accumulations  of  sorrow  and  care  becoming 
too  great  to  endure,  it  is  time  to  examine  the  bundle 
and  see  if  we  have  not  taken  something  that  does 
not  belong  to  us,  for  a  mistaken  sense  of  duty  often 
leads  us  into  as  great  difficulties  as  a  real  duty  does. 

The  color  blue  represents  all  the  higher  mental 
qualities.  In  the  sub-currents  are  literature,  music, 
art,  the  higher  education,  organization,  order,  form, 
harmony,  etc.  This  force  can  never  be  used  by 
animals,  but  only  by  the  subjective  mind  of  man. 
All  inspiration  along  any  line  of  thought  is  due  to 
the  inflow  of  this  blue  current  of  which  men  are 
many  times  entirely  unconscious.  Artists  in  any 


236  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

line  express  greater  things  than  are  in  their  own 
minds  to  express.  We  often  hear  it  said  of  another, 
"He  taught  better  than  he  knew."  This  kind  of 
work  has  been  called  inspirational,  but  the  real 
source  of  inspiration  has  never  been  understood  or 
explained.  One  man  believes  the  soul  of  his  de- 
parted wife  inspired  him  to  write  the  burning  lines 
of  verse  that  made  him  famous.  Another  thinks  an 
old  Master  stood  behind  him  while  he  knelt  and 
in  the  deepest  reverence  painted  his  best  picture. 
The  musician's  soul  thrills  with  the  melody  that  he 
alone  can  hear  and  he  tells  you  in  a  whisper  that 
the  angels  came,  while  he  sat  alone,  and  played 
such  symphonies  as  were  never  heard  on  earth  be- 
fore and  that  in  his  poor,  stumbling  way  he  had 
tried  to  reproduce  them  on  his  instrument.  And 
none  of  these  knew  he  had  been  unconsciously  con- 
nected through  concentration  with  the  blue  Cosmic 
current  and  had  received  from  it  a  few  of  the  gems 
that  are  stored  therein. 

Suppose  you  desire  to  be  a  musician;  the  indigo 
blue  sub-current  is  the  one  you  should  connect 
yourself  with.  All  great  composers  have  taken  their 
inspiration  from  this  current  and  it  was  according 
to  each  one's  capacity  to  draw  into  himself  this 
force  and  listen  to  "the  music  of  the  spheres,"  that 
made  him  the  musician  that  he  was.  The  musical 
currents  run  from  the  deep  indigo  blue  to  the  sky 
blue,  but  no  one  known  to  the  world  has  yet  been 
able  to  reach  the  highest  sub-current  and  to  bring 
from  it  the  music  that  lies  there.  That  soul  is  yet 


Higher  Occult  or  Spiritual  Forces  and  their  Uses.  337 

to  come  and  will  be  the  gift  of  the  twentieth  cen- 
tury to  the  world.  But  each  and  everyone  can  draw 
inspiration  to  himself  that  will  enable  him  to  under- 
stand, to  interpret,  to  execute  and  to  compose  music 
according  to  his  own  development. 

The  sub-current  for  literature  is  a  light  blue — the 
blue  we  see  in  the  Autumn  sky.  Anyone  can  write 
if  he  will  be  persistent  enough  to  become  a  good 
grammarian,  master  the  technicalities  of  rhetoric 
and  learn  to  tap  the  universal  current  in  which  the 
gems  of  this  art  are  stored.  In  each  human  soul 
lies  latent  the  ability  to  learn  every  art  and  science 
which  is  known ;  and  by  aid  of  these  great  currents 
and  sub-currents  to  become  perfect  in  his  knowledge 
of  all. 

The  Occultist  uses  the  blue  current  also  for  re- 
storing harmony  and  health  to  persons  who  are  be- 
ginning to  have  a  tinge  of  blue  beyond  the  green. 
Persons  who  vibrate  between  the  blue  and  green  are 
passing  in  their  development  from  where  the  object- 
tive  mind  no  longer  has  entire  dominion  over  the 
subjective,  but  shares  with  it  the  honors  of  control- 
ling the  body  and  its  mundane  affairs. 

Yellow  is  the  highest  color  vibration  upon  this 
planet  and  is  therefore  the  greatest  force.  It  is 
Spiritual  and  Creative  Love.  It  is  Wisdom,  Intui- 
tion, Divine  Harmony  and  is  the  highest  aspect  of 
Deity  that  we  are  capable  of  understanding  at  this 
time.  It  embraces  all  the  spiritual  qualities  we  can 
conceive,  and  I  regret  to  say  that  man  does  not  pos- 
sess very  many  of  them  as  yet.  To  acquire  this 


238  The  History  and  Poiver  of  Mind. 

force  man  must  develop  to  the  point  where  the 
subjective  mind  controls  the  objective,  and  when  he 
can  attach  himself  to  the  yellow  Cosmic  current  he 
can  accomplish  anything  he  may  undertake  to  do 
upon  this  planet.  An  undeveloped  person  cannot 
use  the  yellow  current  of  force  because  it  is  a  vibra- 
tion so  much  higher  than  his  own  that  there  is  no 
sympathy  between  him  and  it;  and  it  can  be  used 
to  help  only  such  persons  as  are  in  sympathy  with  it. 
In  using  the  Cosmic  currents  for  healing,  the 
Occultist  takes  the  left  hand  of  the  patient  in  his 
right  hand,  and  after  drawing  into  himself  the  cur- 
rent he  desires  to  use  he  passes  it  out  through  his 
right  hand  into  the  left  side  of  his  patient.  The 
left  side,  being  the  receptive  side,  the  patient  re- 
ceives this  force  without  difficulty;  and  it  passes 
down  his  left  side  and  up  the  right  and  round  and 
over  and  through  his  body  until  every  nerve  and 
fiber  of  his  body  is  soothed  and  relaxed  by  this  won- 
derful divine  force.  A  knowledge  of  these  forces  and 
how  to  use  them  gives  one  almost  unlimited  power ; 
for,  where  the  human  will  alone  and  unaided  is  un- 
able to  accomplish  its  purpose,  it  can  by  putting  into 
operation  these  universal  forces  have  Omnipotence 
working  with  it,  making  an  assured  success  of  its 
every  undertaking. 


LECTURE  ELEVEN. 
THE  CAUSE  AND  CURE  OF  DISEASE. 

Disease  is  as  the  name  indicates,  dis-ease,  and 
means  an  absence  of  ease.  Pathologically  speak- 
ing, according  to  one  of  the  definitions  of  the  Cen- 
tury Dictionary,  disease  is  a  "deviation  from  the 
healthy  or  normal  condition  of  any  of  the  functions 
or  tissues  of  the  body,"  and  therefore  it  is  necessary 
to  ascertain  what  the  normal  condition  of  the  body 
is  before  we  may  know  when  it  is  in  a  diseased  or 
abnormal  condition,  and  to  know  this  we  must  learn 
how  the  body  is  builded. 

Starting  with  its  lowest  aspect  we  find  that  the 
physical  body  is  made  up  of  a  great  number  of  little 
individual  lives  which  the  modern  physicist  calls 
atoms.  These  atoms  group  and  form  what  is  called 
molecules.  A  number  of  these  molecules  grouped 
together  form  a  complex  individual  life  which  is 
called  a  cell  and  the  grouping  together  of  a  number 
of  cells  forms  an  organ,  tissue,  muscle,  etc.,  and  a 
combination  of  the  necessary  muscles,  tissues, 
organs,  bones  and  fluids,  forms  a  mass  or  body  which 
has  a  common  rate  of  vibration  and  a  shape. 

Did  you  ever  stop  to  think  why  your  physical 
body  holds  its  form  ?  Why  should  not  your  arm  fly 
off  into  space  in  one  direction  while  a  foot  goes  in 
another  direction  ?  It  is  because  there  is  a  dominant 

239 


24°  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

mass  vibration  which  holds  together  the  different 
portions  of  the  body  responding  to  it.  The  earth  is 
held  together  by  the  law  of  gravitation;  there  is  a 
mass  tone  which  holds  its  component  parts  together 
as  one,  and  so  long  as  that  vibratory  force  continues 
to  play  upon  this  planet  there  can  never  be  a  disin- 
tegration of  it.  In  the  same  way  each  person  has 
his  own  personal  law  of  gravitation  or  mass  vibra- 
tion which  holds  all  the  parts  of  his  body  together. 

This  magnetic  force,  personal  law  of  gravitation 
or  mass  vibration  of  the  body,  is  the  vibration  of  the 
objective  mind  which  ensouls  it.  Its  normal  color 
should  be  green,  but  the  development  of  the  man 
determines  the  color  at  any  time  in  his  evolution; 
and  in  the  earlier  stages  of  his  development,  when 
his  desires  and  passions  are  dominant,  his  vibra- 
tions drop  lower  than  the  green  and  he  becomes  a 
dirty  brown. 

The  objective  mind  gives  the  physical  body  its 
shape,  and  it  is  because  of  the  presence  of  the  mind 
in  the  body  that  the  particles,  which  come  from  all 
sources  to  make  up  the  magnetic  sphere,  group 
themselves  into  the  form  of  the  physical  man.  You 
have  placed  a  horse-shoe  magnet  over  a  quantity 
of  steel  filings  and  have  seen  them  rush  together 
and  crowd  themselves  around  the  magnet,  taking 
its  form.  The  atoms,  like  the  steel  filings,  are  drawn 
to  the  magnet  mind  and  though  they  come  from 
earth,  air,  food  and  water  they  are  held  together  in 
the  position  they  occupy  by  the  mass  vibration  of 
the  objective  mind. 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  241 

While  there  is  a  mass  vibration,  still  each  organ 
has  an  individual  modification  of  this  vibration, 
otherwise  it  could  not  be  an  organ  separate  and  dis- 
tinct from  the  rest  of  the  body;  and  while  each 
organ  responds  as  it  were  to  the  dominant  tone  it 
also  has  its  sub-tone.  In  the  liver,  for  example, 
there  is  the  orange  life  force  which  has  drawn  to- 
gether all  the  particles  which  compose  that  organ. 
The  blood  passing  through  the  liver  has  a  tendency 
to  modify  the  orange  vibrations  with  its  own,  which 
is  red.  The  dominant  note  of  the  objective  mind, 
which  is  green,  holds  together  this  mass  of  red  and 
orange  vibrations  because  it  is  higher  and  therefore 
stronger,  and  you  have  the  three  colors  blended  to- 
gether in  a  mass  of  mixed  vibrations  which  make 
brown.  The  color  of  the  liver  seen  subjectively 
looks  very  much  as  it  does  objectively. 

When  the  vibration  of  the  objective  mind  is  the 
controlling  or  dominant  vibration  of  all  the  organs 
of  the  physical  body  then  it  is  in  a  normal  or  healthy 
condition.  Disease  is  the  lowering,  below  the  nor- 
mal, of  the  vibrations  of  a  part  or  of  all  the  body — 
except  in  cases  of  disruption  or  misplacement  of 
bones  or  other  parts  of  the  body.  For  illustration 
we  will  take  the  liver  again,  which  has  its  own 
separate  organic,  complex  existence  by  reason  of  its 
construction.  Its  cells  are  held  together  by  the 
orange  organic  vibration,  yet  these  vibrations  are 
modified  and  controlled  by  the  higher  mass  vibra- 
tion of  the  objective  mind;  now  suppose  the  liver 
instead  of  responding  to  the  higher  mass  vibrations, 


242  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

gradually  begins  to  lose  them  and  takes  a  lower  rate 
of  vibration,  then  you  have  what  is  called  a  torpid 
liver. 

Diseases  manifest  in  one  of  two  general  ways. 
First,  where  the  vibration  of  an  organ  is  itself  low- 
ered and  it  manifests  disharmony  within  itself;  and 
second,  where  the  vibration  of  an  organ  is  lowered 
and  it  becomes  demagnetized  sufficiently  to  permit 
foreign  atoms  to  enter  and  set  up  an  independent  ac- 
tion. The  first  condition,  if  it  be  not  corrected,  will 
cause  disintegration  or  disruption  of  the  entire  or- 
gan ;  the  second  condition  results  in  great  relaxation 
with  large  interstices  between  the  atoms,  where  for- 
eign elements  enter  and  set  up  a  disharmonious  sep- 
arate organization,  as  for  example  in  tuberculosis, 
cancer  or  tumor. 

Occultism  teaches  that  all  disease  has  its  root  or 
origin  in  ignorance.  The  reason  persons  do  not 
have  long  lives  is  because  they  do  not  know  how  to 
live.  It  is  reported  that  Professor  Loeb,  Dr.  Mat- 
thews and  others  think  that  if  we  could  discover 
the  proper  electrical  conditions  we  could  prolong 
the  human  life  to  more  than  two  hundred  years.  It 
is  said  by  physicists  that  most  animals  live  about 
five  times  as  long  as  is  required  for  them  to  mature. 
Applying  this  rule  to  man  he  ought  to  live  to  be  at 
least  one  hundred  and  five  years  old.  That  he  does 
not  live  to  this  age  is  because  he  does  not  under- 
stand the  laws  of  life  and  the  real  nature  of  disease. 
He  knows  nothing  about  controlling  the  atoms 
which  compose  his  body  nor  how  to  use  the  Cosmic 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  243 

forces  with  which  he  is  constantly  surrounded  for 
the  purpose  of  revivifying  his  physical  body.  "The 
wages  of  sin  (ignorance)  is  death,"  and  disease  is 
the  result  of  mental  conditions. 

For  example,  take  a  common  cold.  In  ninety- 
nine  cases  out  of  one  hundred,  colds  are  contracted 
when  people  are  mentally  negative.  The  mind,  in- 
stead of  being  positive,  instead  of  dominating  its 
physical  particles  and  holding  them  contracted  into 
a  proper  shape,  becomes  relaxed  and  negative  and 
loses  its  force.  As  a  consequence,  the  body  re- 
sponds to  this  relaxed  condition,  the  molecules  be- 
come abnormally  separated,  and  foreign  elements 
enter,  and  set  up  an  independent  activity  of  their 
own.  The  cause  was  mental  relaxation,  or  nega- 
tiveness. 

Why  does  a  piece  of  glass  receive  the  impression 
from  the  point  of  a  diamond  when  the  diamond 
will  not  receive  an  impression  from  the  glass?  Be- 
cause the  diamond  is  of  a  quick,  positive,  high  rate 
of  vibration,  while  the  glass  is  negative  and  of  a 
much  slower  rate  than  the  diamond.  The  glass 
cannot  enter  the  interstices  of  the  diamond  be- 
cause of  its  intense  vibration.  Thus  it  is  with  the 
mind  that  is  positive  and  strong;  it  can  dominate 
and  control  its  body  so  well  that  foreign  destruct- 
ive elements  cannot  enter  into  it. 

Some  diseases  can  be  traced  back  to  the  mental 
condition  which  produced  them  and  some  cannot. 
Many  cases  of  heart  trouble  are  directly  traceable 
to  fear.  The  mind  working  upon  the  body,  causes 


244  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

an  irregular  flow  of  blood;  the  fear,  with  its  con- 
comitant heart  disturbance,  commences  a  vibration 
of  an  abnormal  rate,  and  soon  that  condition,  which, 
in  the  beginning  was  a  functional  trouble,  becomes 
organic  disease.  Many  fevers  are  due  to  fear.  The 
first  thing  you  should  do  for  a  patient  who  is  suf- 
fering with  fever  is  to  take  away  his  fear,  and  his 
temperature  will  drop  degrees  at  a  time.  The  cause 
of  congestion  of  different  organs  of  the  body  can 
often  be  traced  back  to  a  violent  paroxysm  of  an- 
ger. Professor  Elmer  Gates,  of  Washington,  D. 
C,  has  found  that  a  large  number  of  acids  and  poi- 
sons in  the  blood  are  created  by  the  direct  action 
of  the  mind. 

Sometimes  the  mental  cause  cannot  be  traced,  be- 
cause there  have  been  several  different  mental  con- 
ditions which  combined  to  produce  the  material 
result.  Then,  too,  a  disease  is  often  produced  men- 
tally, and  before  it  appears  physically  other  mental 
conditions  have  arisen  which  prevents  its  being 
traced  to  its  original  cause.  Occultism  goes  so  far 
as  to  declare  that  even  the  so-called  hereditary  dis- 
eases are  due  to  the  mental  condition  of  the  suf- 
ferer, because  it  is  the  mental  condition  or  quality 
of  the  mind  during  a  previous  incarnation,  which 
brought  him  into  that  particular  family,  and  com- 
pelled him  to  take  the  diseased  body  at  birth. 

Disease  may  be  divided  into  two  classes,  the 
imaginary  and  the  real.  Imaginary  disease  is  a  pic- 
ture held  firmly  by  the  objective  mind,  which  causes 
more  or  less  physical  correspondence.  This  kind 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  245 

of  disease  is  often  created  in  total  disregard  of  the 
laws  governing  anatomy  or  physiology;  and  is 
the  hardest  to  cure,  because  persons  possessed 
of  it  hold  to  it  so  persistently  that  an  entire  re- 
vision of  their  mode  of  thought  must  be  made  before 
it  can  be  cured.  It  is  not  at  all  infrequent  to  have  a 
patient  complain  of  kidney  disease,  locating  the 
pain  and  the  organs  several  inches  below  the  waist 
line.  The  spleen  is  often  supposed  to  be  on  the 
right  side  of  the  body,  and  phantom  tumors  appear 
and  disappear.  But  all  these  mental  pictures,  if 
held  long  enough,  create  matrices  or  vortices, 
and  draw  into  them  the  elements  that  will  bring 
finally  the  actual  disease  that  was  at  first  purely 
imaginary.  For  example:  Sometimes  indigestion 
and  gases  in  the  stomach  cause  a  distention  of  that 
organ,  it  presses  up  against  the  heart  region, 
causing  a  functional  disturbance  of  the  heart,  and 
the  patient  becomes  convinced  that  he  has  organic 
heart  disease.  This  picture  in  the  patient's  mind 
is  the  matrix,  and  his  fear  of  the  disease  draws  it 
to  him  in  course  of  time.  If  the  mind  holds  the 
picture  of  anything  long  enough,  whether  it  be 
disease  or  health,  poverty  or  prosperity,  that  pic- 
ture must  and  will  materialize.  You  who  have 
followed  Charcot's  experiments  need  no  further 
proof  of  the  action  of  the  mind  upon  the  body. 

The  second  class  or  real  disease,  produced  pri- 
marily by  mental  causes,  and  often  supplemented  by 
a  proximate  physical  cause,  must  be  cured  by  con- 
trolling the  imaging  faculty.  And  in  this  connec- 


246  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

tion  let  it  be  understood  that  the  words  "cure"  and 
"heal"  are  used  as  popularly  understood,  and  will 
be  used  interchangeably — not  in  any  specialized 
sense,  as  some  modern  metaphysicians  use  them. 
To  cure  real  disease  is  to  restore  to  a  normal  con- 
dition the  functions  or  tissues  of  the  body,  and 
to  do  this  the  vibrations  of  the  affected  part  must 
be  raised  to  their  normal  rate.  In  cases  of  mis- 
placement, dislocation,  or  broken  bones,  the  quick- 
est way  to  obtain  relief  is  to  send  for  a  competent 
physician  or  an  anatomist  and  have  an  adjustment 
made  of  the  injured  member  or  organ.  In  cases 
of  disruption  of  blood  vessels,  or  muscles,  a  sur- 
geon's aid  should  be  immediately  sought;  not  be- 
cause mind  is  unable  to  cure  any  or  all  of  these 
cases,  but  because  of  the  fact  that  at  the  present 
time,  even  among  educated  people,  mind  is  many 
times  impotent  through  misuse  or  non-use.  Men- 
tal treatments  should  follow  these  physical  treat- 
ments in  order  to  obviate  unnecessary  suffering 
and  to  obtain  rapid  recovery. 

In  cases  where  the  vibrations  of  a  part  of  the 
body  have  been  lowered,  or  where  foreign  parti- 
cles have  entered,  there  are  several  material  meth- 
ods of  restoring  health  or  harmony  to  the  affected 
parts.  One  of  these  is  stimulation  by  physical  ma- 
nipulation, as  in  the  practice  of  Osteopathy;  an- 
other is  stimulation  through  electrical  appliances. 
Neither  of  these  methods,  however,  reach  the 
mental  cause  for  the  disease,  and  even  though  the 
physical  disturbance  be  removed  through  either 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  247 

method,  it  can  be  only  a  question  of  time  before 
it  reappears.  The  electric  current  is  a  part  of  the 
Cosmic  blue  current,  and  by  intelligent  use  it  may 
be  made  to  raise  the  vibrations  of  an  affected  part 
and  restore  it  to  its  normal  condition;  unaided  by 
mind,  it  can  only  remove  the  effects,  and  never  the 
cause  of  the  disease.  The  time  is  not  far  distant 
when  the  two  great  therapeutical  agencies  for  heal- 
ing the  sick  will  be  electricity,  representing  the  ma- 
terial school,  and  mind,  representing  the  metaphysi- 
cal school. 

A  third  means  of  curing  disease  is  by  properly 
prepared  non-poisonous  vegetable  compounds.  The 
Occultist  does  not  believe  in  the  use  of  mineral 
drugs,  nor  does  he  believe  that  poisons  should  be 
administered  to  a  patient.  Most  minerals  and  poi- 
sons are  of  such  a  low  rate  of  vibration  that  when 
introduced  into  the  physical  body  they  serve  to 
finally  lower  its  vibrations  rather  than  to  raise 
them.  Though  they  stimulate  temporarily,  the  re- 
action leaves  the  patient  in  a  worse  condition.  Poi- 
sons sometimes  appear  to  effect  a  cure  because  upon 
their  administration  the  acute  form  of  the  disease 
disappears ;  but  even  a  close  study  of  effects  teaches 
us  that  the  disease  was  not  cured  ;  its  expression  was 
changed,  but  it  soon  appeared  in  another  form  and 
place,  and  a  new  name  had  to  be  invented  to  desig- 
nate it  from  the  old  one.  To  deny  that  drugs  have 
an  effect  upon  the  human  body,  as  do  some  of  the 
radical  metaphysicians  at  the  present  time,  is  to 


248  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

deny  and  ignore  the  observations  of  daily  life,  and 
also  the  law  of  physics,  which  asserts  that  two  or 
more  bodies  coming  into  juxtaposition  mutually 
affect  each  other;  and  also  excludes  consciousness 
from  a  part  of  the  Universe.  Yet  these  same  meta- 
physicians eat  food  to  sustain  their  physical  bodies, 
while  denying  that  matter  affects  matter. 

The  mineral  kingdom  supports  the  vegetable 
kingdom,  and  the  latter  supports  the  animal  king- 
dom; and  according  to  the  natural  order  of  things, 
it  is  unreasonable  to  pass  over  and  ignore  as  impo- 
tent the  very  kingdom  that  supplies  our  food,  and 
to  go  among  the  minerals  for  our  medicines.  The 
vegetables  used  for  remedies  must  be  properly  and 
scientifically  compounded,  however,  if  the  best  re- 
sults are  to  be  had  from  their  use;  but  the  same 
care  must  also  be  observed  with  the  preparation 
of  our  food.  In  Materia  Medica  there  is  never  an 
allowance  made  for  a  difference  in  the  vibrations 
of  persons  who  are  being  treated.  A  man  vibrat- 
ing green  would  receive  the  same  prescription  from 
a  physician  that  one  would  receive  who  was  vibrat- 
ing red  or  brown.  This  is  the  reason  modern  medi- 
cine is  what  it  is  called,  an  experimental  science. 
When  a  vegetable  remedy  has  been  suitably  com- 
pounded for  an  individual  according  to  his  vibra- 
tions, a  cure  will  be  effected  by  that  remedy.  When 
the  same  medicine,  if  it  were  given  to  another  per- 
son suffering  from  the  same  disease,  but  whose  vi- 
brations were  of  a  totally  different  rate  or  color, 
would  have  a  different  effect.  The  vibrations  of 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  249 

the  vegetable  remedies  must  supplement  the  low- 
ered vibrations  of  the  person  using  them,  if  good 
results  are  to  be  had. 

Let  it  be  understood,  however,  that  Occultism 
teaches  that  mind  is  the  supreme  power,  and,  when 
properly  developed  and  trained,  can  cure  all  dis- 
eases, and  that  in  the  course  of  time  it  will  be  the 
only  force  that  man  will  use  to  keep  the  human 
body  in  a  normal,  healthy  and  harmonious  condi- 
tion. But  until  that  Arcadian  time  shall  come,  it 
is  not  well  to  deny  that  the  Great  Consciousness 
has  also  provided  for  Its  undeveloped  children  ma- 
terial ways  and  means  for  their  relief  from  physi- 
cal ills. 

In  curing  disease  by  the  power  of  mind  there 
is  the  conscious  and  the  unconscious  use  of  the 
Cosmic  forces.  All  the  modern  metaphysical  schools 
differ  somewhat  among  themselves  in  regard  to 
the  process  by  which  cures  are  performed,  yet 
all  perform  some  remarkable  ones.  Some  schools 
use  strenuous  denials,  and,  consciously  or  uncon- 
sciously, hypnotize  their  patients,  and  while  the 
patients  are  in  this  condition  change  their  thought, 
and  in  this  manner  change  the  manifestation  of 
the  disease  they  are  suffering  from.  Other  schools, 
through  repeated  suggestion,  cause  the  patient  to 
accept  a  new  line  of  thought,  and  with  the  change 
of  thought  the  body  changes.  In  both  these  classes 
of  cases  it  is  the  direct  action  of  mind  upon  mind 
which  brings  about  the  change  in  the  condition  of 
the  patients. 


250  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Other  schools,  through  denials  and  affirmations, 
or  through  affirmations  and  demand,  petition  or 
prayer,  and  through  picturing  the  desired  result, 
unconsciously  put  into  operation  the  Cosmic  forces. 
The  Occult  school  uses  consciously  the  Cosmic 
forces  for  the  purpose  of  healing.  In  the  two  last- 
named  schools  there  is  not  only  the  action  of  mind 
upon  mind,  but  new  elements  are  drawn  into  the 
physical  body  of  the  patient,  whereby  the  old,  dis- 
eased atoms  are  cast  out  and  new  ones  are  left  in 
their  places. 

There  are  three  things  that  the  Occultist  attempts 
to  do  in  making  a  cure  through  mental  means.  First, 
he  destroys  the  mental  picture  of  disease  which  his 
patient  holds  as  a  matrix;  second,  he  raises  the  vi- 
brations of  that  portion  of  the  body  which  has  be- 
come lowered,  and  makes  it  vibrate  normally,  thus 
forcing  out  all  foreign  elements ;  and  third,  he  sup- 
plements the  elements  driven  out  with  new  ele- 
ments, which  are  introduced  into  the  system  by 
the  Cosmic  force  flowing  through  it. 

Here  are  a  few  rules  that  may  be  helpful  to  you 
in  demonstrating  over  disease:  First.  It  is  well 
to  avoid  seeing  the  manifestation  of  the  disease,  if 
possible. 

By  doing  this  you  will  not  have  the  picture  of 
disease  constantly  in  mind  and  will  be  able  to  see 
more  clearly  the  picture  of  perfect  health  you  must 
create  for  the  patient.  If  you  do  not  see  the  ob- 
jective symptoms  of  an  ugly  wound,  or  an  artificial 
growth,  it  is  easier  to  make  a  perfect  image  and 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  251 

to  present  that  picture  to  the  mind  of  the  patient. 
In  cases  where  there  are  only  subjective  symp- 
toms, never  let  your  sympathies  go  out  to  the  pa- 
tient, but  hold  yourself  positive  against  any  emo- 
tion of  fear  which  he  may  have.  The  moment  your 
own  emotions  become  joined  with  his,  your  power 
to  destroy  his  mental  pictures  of  disease  is  weak- 
ened ;  you  have  then  accepted  his  creations  and  are 
but  accentuating  the  pictures  in  his  mind. 

Second.  When  you  have  learned  from  the  patient 
what  his  creations  are,  you  are  able  to  destroy  them 
by  denying  their  permanency,  if  they  exist  tempo- 
rarily, or  by  denying  them  absolutely  if  they  are 
imaginary. 

After  making  your  denials,  follow  them  with 
affirmations  of  that  which  is  true;  create  a  perfect 
physical  condition  for  your  patient,  and  hold  that 
thought  picture  till  he  himself  accepts  it.  Should 
a  patient  come  to  you  claiming  heart  disease,  when 
the  physical  disturbance  was  nothing  but  indiges- 
tion, do  not  deny  his  claim  audibly  lest  he  be  of- 
fended. It  is  not  necessary  to  give  a  patient  a  diag- 
nosis of  his  actual  condition,  because  sometimes  this 
would  but  intensify  his  fears. 

In  actual  disease  deny  its  permanency  and  affirm 
health.  For  example,  in  case  of  a  cold,  deny  its  per- 
manency and  declare  positiveness  for  the  patient, 
and  as  his  vibrations  are  raised,  direct  the  Cosmic 
force  through  his  body.  As  his  relaxed  condition 
is  corrected  and  the  interstices  between  the  atoms 
grow  smaller,  the  foreign  elements  become  crowded 


252  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

out  or  expelled  from  the  system;  and  under  this 
treatment  every  part  of  the  body  will  respond  to 
the  positive  condition  of  your  mind.  Denials  de- 
stroy ;  affirmations  create.  The  Christian  Scientists, 
and  many  Mental  Scientists  use  denials  largely  and 
sometimes  exclusively,  while  the  New  Thought  Sci- 
entists use  affirmations  alone.  It  is  urged  by  this 
last-named  class  of  healers  that  the  denial  is  con- 
tained in  the  affirmation;  but  to  mentally  affirm  a 
healthy  condition  without  denying  or  destroying  the 
pictures  of  disease  held  by  the  patient,  is  like  at- 
tempting to  build  a  new  house  on  a  site  already 
occupied  by  another  building  without  first  clearing 
the  ground.  You  could  take  out  an  old  brick  and 
put  a  new  one  in  its  place  till  the  new  house  was 
built ;  but  it  would  require  a  much  longer  time  than 
it  would  to  tear  down  the  old  structure  first. 

Third.  In  ordinary  treatment,  take  the  left  hand 
of  your  patient  with  your  right  hand,  that  the  Cos- 
mic Force  may  enter  your  left  side  and  pass  out 
at  your  right,  or  positive  side,  into  the  left,  or  re- 
ceptive side,  of  the  patient. 

You  should  remain  in  a  positive  condition  of  mind 
while  treating  in  this  manner,  or  your  own  personal 
magnetism  or  life  force  will  be  drawn  from  you  with 
the  Cosmic  Force  into  the  patient. 

Fourth.  In  a  case  of  depleted  mental  condition 
of  a  patient,  in  epilepsy,  insanity,  and  in  spinal 
trouble,  place  your  right  hand  upon  the  top  of  the 
patient's  head  while  giving  the  treatment.  This 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  253 

position  throws  the  current  where  it  is  most  needed, 
and  the  results  will  be  more  nearly  immediate. 

Fifth.  In  cases  of  cancers,  tumors,  boils,  swell- 
ings, or  any  kind  of  separate  growth,  cover  the  af- 
fected part  with  a  white  silk  handkerchief,  and  then 
place  your  right  hand  over  it  while  giving  the  treat- 
ment. 

The  object  in  doing  this  is  twofold.  First,  by 
covering  the  growth  with  the  handkerchief,  you  do 
not  see  it  and  are  better  able  to  picture  perfection 
in  its  place ;  and  second,  by  placing  your  hand  upon 
the  affected  part  you  bring  the  current  of  force  di- 
rectly into  it,  and  this  conserves  force. 

Sixth.  Keep  your  left  hand  off  the  patient  when 
treating. 

Otherwise  you  form  a  complete  circuit  with  him, 
and  as  the  new  life  goes  into  him  through  his  left 
hand  or  side,  you  draw  his  old,  worn-out  or  demag- 
netized atoms  into  yourself,  thereby  lowering  your 
own  rate  of  vibration,  and  bringing  a  physical  con- 
dition upon  yourself  similar  to  that  which  you  are 
trying  to  relieve. 

Seventh.  In  separate  growths,  use  the  highest 
shade  of  the  particular  Cosmic  Force  or  color  you 
have  selected  to  use  for  your  patient. 

Suppose  you  desire  to  use  green ;  then  treat  with 
the  ultra  ray  of  green,  because  that  is  the  highest 
rate  of  vibration  of  that  color  and  will  bring  the 
quickest  results.  Herein  lies  the  great  success  of 
the  Occultist  over  the  majority  of  healers,  and 
over  those  who  use  mechanical  processes.  When 


254  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

the  X-ray — which  is  now  known  to  be  one  of  the 
higher  shades  of  green — is  thrown  upon  an  individual- 
ized growth,  it  immediately  commences  its  dis- 
ruptive process,  and  much  better  results  are  ob- 
tained than  with  the  knife.  Its  limitation  is  like 
that  of  surgery,  in  that  it  does  not  reach  the  blood ; 
consequently,  if  the  germs  are  through  the  blood 
of  the  patient,  there  will  be  a  return  of  the  disease. 
But  if  the  healer  places  his  hand  over  the  affected 
part  and  uses  the  ultra  shade  of  the  Cosmic  color 
selected,  and  directs  the  current  through  the  entire 
system,  the  germs  will  be  destroyed,  and  a  return 
of  the  disease  will  be  impossible. 

Eighth.  Concentrate  on  the  aura  of  the  patient 
to  get  his  predominate  color,  and  then  ask  of  the 
Universal  Consciousness  that  the  color  may  be  made 
known  to  you. 

This  should  be  done  in  case  you  are  not  clairvoy- 
ant, and  do  not  see  Cosmic  colors  at  will.  Through 
this  practice  you  will  learn  to  sense  the  color  or  vi- 
bration of  a  person  as  you  sense  his  character. 

Ninth.  Demand  of  Deity  that  you  may  be  used 
as  an  instrument  for  It  to  manifest  through. 

This  demand,  like  any  other,  must,  and  will  be, 
met,  because  whatever  is  held  in  mind  constantly 
must  sooner  or  later  materialize.  If  you  desire  to 
be  a  healer  of  the  sick,  and  to  relieve  suffering, 
that  thought  in  your  mind  makes  of  you  that  kind 
of  a  center,  and  if  you  are  honest  and  faithful  all 
the  healing  powers  in  the  Universe  will  flow 
through  you  in  order  that  your  demands  may  be 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  255 

fulfilled.  It  is  the  mental  condition  which  draws 
or  repels  Cosmic  Force,  and  the  better  life  you  live, 
the  purer  your  thoughts,  and  the  higher  your  as- 
pirations, the  more  perfectly  can  Cosmic  forces  be 
used  by  you  to  restore  health  to  others. 

Tenth.  Always  treat  yourself  for  positiveness 
before  treating  a  patient. 

According  to  your  own  positiveness  can  you  be 
a  channel  or  center  through  which  Cosmic  forces 
can  flow.  Declare  mentally  something  like  this: 
"Divine  Force  is  made  manifest  in  me.  I  am  posi- 
tive, positive,  positive.  I  have  the  power  to  de- 
stroy sickness  and  ignorance."  This  declaration 
will  raise  your  own  vibrations  and  make  you  a  bet- 
ter instrument.  If  you  are  not  positive,  your  own 
animal  magnetism  is  likely  to  pass  from  you  to 
your  patient,  and  you  will  be  left  in  a  depleted  con- 
dition. Another  reason  for  becoming  positive  be- 
fore commencing  to  treat  a  patient  is  that  you  may 
not  take  upon  yourself  the  pains  or  disease  from 
your  patient,  as  so  many  metaphysicians  do. 

Eleventh.  Always  use  the  color,  or  shade  of  the 
color,  next  higher  in  the  scale  of  vibration  than 
the  predominating  color  of  your  patient. 

Suppose  you  are  going  to  treat  a  person  who 
vibrates  in  the  higher  shade  of  green.  Then  use 
the  blue  Cosmic  Force,  which  he  must  respond  to, 
but  which  he  will  react  from.  But  by  using  a  color 
higher  than  his  normal  one,  you  raise  his  vibra- 
tions and  when  the  reaction  comes  he  will  not  go 


256  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

below  the  highest  shades  of  his  own  color;  and  the 
relief  he  receives  will  be  permanent. 

Twelfth.  Realize  that  these  Cosmic  forces  are 
manifesting  as  vibrations  or  color.  Do  not  think  of 
them  as  color  merely.  Let  their  force  aspect  be 
predominant  in  your  mind  and  when  treating  with 
them,  picture  them  as  sparkling  vibrations  flowing 
into  you,  and  through  you  into  your  patient. 

Thirteenth.  Use  suggestion  as  a  supplemental 
aid  to  the  treatment  by  color. 

Use  it  for  the  purpose  of  destroying  in  the  mind 
of  your  patient  the  picture  of  disease,  and  for  cre- 
ating a  new  picture  of  health.  For  example :  First 
get  the  full  name  of  your  patient,  and  then  call  him 
mentally  by  that  name  until  you  feel  you  have  his 
attention.  Remember,  everyone  must  receive  every 
thought  that  is  repeatedly  sent  to  him — whether  he 
accepts  it  or  not  is  another  matter.  If  your  patient 
has  a  pet  name,  one  that  he  hears  most  at  home, 
use  that  until  he  is  listening  to  what  you  have  to 
say.  We  will  suppose  he  is  called  Jim  Smith.  You 
should  say,  "Jim  Smith,  you  are  mind,  and,  being 
mind,  you  cannot  be  diseased."  Immediately  you 
have  made  a  distinction  in  the  patient's  mind  be- 
tween his  mind — himself — and  his  body;  and  now 
you  have  his  mind  working  with  you  to  establish 
the  physical  condition  you  desire.  Then  say :  "Your 
body  is  constantly  changing,  but  you  are  mind,  and 
can  control  your  body;  you  can  draw  new  atoms, 
new  life  into  yourself,  and  health  can  be  restored." 
Suggest  the  power  to  control  and  to  bring  health. 


The  Cause  and  Cure  of  Disease.  257 

With  every  treatment  say:  "You  have  no  fear  of 
disease  because  you  know  you  are  getting  well." 
It  is  best  to  repeat  each  of  these  suggestions  slowly 
several  times  in  order  that  the  patient  may  grasp 
them  fully,  and  when  you  have  removed  the  demag- 
netizing low  vibrations  of  fear,  the  higher  vibrations 
of  health  will  flow  into  the  patient.  Destroy  fear 
and  all  feverish  conditions  disappear.  Suppose  the 
patient  has  consumption  of  the  lungs.  Fear  that 
he  has  an  incurable  disease  is  the  first  thing  to  re- 
move from  his  mind ;  then  image  for  him  the  picture 
of  perfect  lungs  with  the  Cosmic  Force  flowing 
through  them  and  use  such  suggestions,  denials  and 
affirmations  as  your  intuition  directs. 

Fifteenth.  Use  as  few  words  as  possible  to  ex- 
press your  thoughts. 

The  more  clearly  and  concisely  your  ideas  are  ex- 
pressed the  more  easily  will  they  be  impressed  upon 
the  mind  of  the  patient.  Instead  of  saying:  "God 
is  love  and  you  are  a  manifestation  of  His  idea  and 
therefore  cannot  express  anything  but  love,"  and 
instead  of  giving  a  philosophical  explanation  of  the 
relationship  between  God  and  the  patient,  and  show- 
ing how  God  will  answer  his  prayers  for  help  and 
health,  say  something  short  and  decisive,  such  as 
"you  are  not  afraid  of  this  disorder;  you  cannot  be 
afraid,  because  it  is  nothing  to  fear.  You  are  get- 
ting well.  You  are  mind  and  can  control  your 
body." 

These  are  a  few  of  the  rules  and  suggestions 
which  may  be  used  in  successful  mind  healing. 


258  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

There  are  others,  but  I  am  now  trying  to  show  you 
those  which  exemplify  the  laws  which  underlie  the 
phenomena  of  healing.  There  is  a  law  which  lies 
behind  form  and  if  you  understand  and  practice 
these  suggestions  I  have  made,  you  can  gradually 
change  the  rates  of  vibration  of  your  body  and  also 
its  form  until  you  can  make  it  precisely  what  you 
desire.  Through  this  practice  will  come  the  power 
to  help  others,  for  with  every  effort  you  will  grow 
stronger. 

By  attending  a  course  of  twelve  lectures  on  har- 
mony you  will  not  become  a  great  musician,  but 
you  may  in  those  lectures  be  taught  how  to  study 
and  how  to  practice.  It  is  by  diligent  practice  that 
a  proficiency  in  anything  can  be  attained,  and  so  it  is 
with  Occultism.  It  is  the  regular  mental  practice, 
the  use  of  Cosmic  forces,  the  imaging,  the  control- 
ling, the  directing,  the  thinking  that  make  you 
strong.  Having  given  you  the  rules  it  remains  with 
you  whether  this  knowledge  shall  be  purely  intel- 
lectual or  whether  you  will  make  practical  use  of  it. 


LECTURE  TWELVE. 


THE  LAW  OF  OPULENCE. 

In  the  preceding  lectures  you  were  taught  how 
to  acquire  spiritual  perception  and  mental  qualities 
through  the  use  of  Cosmic  forces.  You  have  also 
been  taught  how,  by  the  power  of  Divine  Mind,  to 
use  your  mental  forces,  not  only  for  your  own 
benefit,  but  for  the  benefit  of  others ;  and  now,  hav- 
ing learned  something  about  the  spiritual  and  men- 
tal planes  of  being  we  shall  take  into  consideration 
the  third  and  last  plane.  This  is  where  man  ac- 
quires or  fails  to  acquire  an  abundance  of  wordly 
goods,  and  where  he  must  understand  something 
about  the  law  of  Opulence  if  he  is  to  succeed.  Since 
many  persons  believe  the  possession  of  material 
wealth  is  as  essential  to  happiness  as  is  the  posses- 
sion of  perfect  health,  and  since  there  are  no  acci- 
dents in  the  world  and  every  detail  of  our  lives  is 
governed  by  law,  it  seems  absolutely  necessary  that 
we  should  thoroughly  understand  the  law  governing 
Opulence,  so  that  we  may  control  our  finances  in- 
stead of  becoming  victims  of  circumstances. 

If  you  have  not  possessions  then  it  is  because  you 
have  not  used  the  law  of  Opulence  for  your  own 
benefit.  It  is  a  well  known  fact  in  Occultism  that 
everyone  has  now  just  what  he  deserves,  and  this 
is  as  true  relative  to  Opulence  as  it  is  to  spiritual 


26o  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

and  mental  qualities.  But  before  we  discuss  the 
law  of  Opulence  in  itself  let  us  consider  certain 
other  aspects  of  the  law  of  evolution  which  may 
have  a  bearing  on  what  I  shall  say  later. 

If  you  have  studied  the  creatures  in  the  animal 
kingdom  you  know  how  a  mother  bird  will  work 
to  feed  her  young  until  it  reaches  a  certain  age,  but 
when  the  time  has  come  for  each  little  bird  to  work 
for  his  individual  self,  she  crowds  them  all  out  of  the 
nest  and  throws  each  one  upon  his  own  responsi- 
bility. Other  animals  are  devoted  to  the  care  of 
their  young  until  they  reach  a  certain  age  and  then 
desert  them  or  quarrel  with  and  drive  them  away  to 
learn  independence  and  to  act  for  themselves.  A 
wise  man  gives  to  his  child  a  proper  education  and 
training  during  the  years  when  its  character  is 
forming;  but  when  it  reaches  its  majority  he  sends 
it  forth  to  assume  the  responsibility  it  must  assume 
if  it  is  to  become  individualized.  And  the  great 
Universal  Consciousness,  Father- — Mother,  for  the 
first  half  of  the  evolutionary  period  on  a  planet, 
stands  behind  man  as  the  evolutionary  impulse 
pushing  him  onward  in  his  career  until  he  develops 
to  the  point  where  he  becomes  self-reliant.  Then 
this  impulse  is  withdrawn  and  from  that  time  on 
man  must  develop  through  his  own  inherent  force, 
and  through  a  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  nature  and 
their  uses. 

According  to  the  Occultist's  estimate  the  first 
half  of  the  cycle  on  this  planet  was  reached  in  1898; 
at  that  time  the  childhood  of  the  race  ended.  Be- 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  261 

fore  that  the  evolutionary  law  provided  for  Its  chil- 
dren, but  since  that  date  the  Cosmic  Consciousness 
has  been  gradually  relaxing  Its  effort,  and  hence- 
forth each  individual  must  learn  to  rely  upon  his 
own  strength  and  knowledge  of  law  for  his  success 
in  life.  This  may  seem  cruel  at  first  thought,  but  it 
is  really  kind  and  just,  because  it  gives  each  man  an 
opportunity  to  develop  his  best  qualities. 

It  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that  we  who  repre- 
sent principles  somewhat  in  advance  of  the  race 
should  realize  that  all  things  are  governed  by  law 
and  that  not  one  of  the  least  of  these  is  the  law  of 
Opulence.  Deity  does  not  give  attributes  or  things 
to  us  because  we  are  good.  It  does  not  give  opu- 
lence as  a  reward  for  Spiritual  acquirement;  but  if 
we  want  Spiritual  qualities  we  must  use  certain 
laws  to  receive  spiritual  things,  and  if  we  want  ma- 
terial things  we  must  use  the  laws  which  govern 
the  distribution  of  them. 

In  the  first  part  of  the  period  which  ended  in  1898 
the  old  Adamic  curse  was  upon  humanity.  "In  the 
sweat  of  thy  face  shalt  thou  eat  bread."  But  as  the 
race  advanced  in  evolution  some  men  came  from  un- 
der that  curse  and  were  able  consciously  or  uncon- 
sciously to  use  the  laws  of  nature  for  their  indi- 
vidual benefit.  They  found  that  by  thinking  and 
planning  they  were  not  obliged  to  earn  bread  by 
hard  manual  labor,  but  could  assume  the  relation- 
ship of  employer  to  other  men  and  have  the  work 
done  by  those  who  had  not  the  faculty  for  planning 


262  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

and  managing.  In  this  manner  there  arose  between 
men  the  relationship  of  employer  and  employe. 
Please  do  not  understand  me  to  say  that  the  em- 
ployer, the  thinker,  ceased  working  when  he  laid 
down  his  tools  and  became  the  manager  of  his  own 
business,  because  I  do  not  wish  to  be  so  understood. 
Cessation  from  work  means  retrogression;  and  re- 
trogression soon  becomes  degeneration  and  stagna- 
tion. Stagnation  whether  it  be  spiritual,  mental  or 
material  causes  death.  The  great  Consciousness 
Itself  works  during  each  Cosmic  Day  and  each  and 
every  child  of  God  who  desires  to  progress  must 
also  work. 

A  great  mistake  most  people  make  is  in  limiting 
the  meaning  of  the  word  "work,"  to  purely  physical 
labor.  Work  does  not  necessarily  mean  physical 
effort.  Man  is  mind,  and  mental  strength  and 
growth  can  come  only  through  the  exercise  of  his 
mental  powers.  The  misapprehensions  of  the  mean- 
ing of  the  Scriptural  quotation,  and  of  the  laws  of 
life  and  the  law  of  opulence  are  due  to  the  miscon- 
ception of  the  meaning  of  the  word  "work."  Last 
year  when  these  lectures  were  first  delivered  several 
persons  said,  "It  is  very  wrong  to  teach  that  you 
can  draw  material  things  to  yourself  by  the  use  of 
mental  forces;  you  should  teach  that  people  must 
work  for  what  they  get." 

It  is  obvious  that  these  cautious  souls  have  not 
developed  beyond  the  physical  plane  and  are  unable 
to  appreciate  the  fact  that  there  may  be  mental  as 
well  as  physical  labor.  Then  there  are  other  persons 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  263 

who  do  not  desire  to  use  Spiritual  forces  to  draw  to 
themselves  material  things  and  therefore  protest 
against  teaching  this  knowledge.  It  is  quite  reason- 
able to  suppose  that  such  persons  find  it  difficult  to 
manipulate  spiritual  forces  and  because  they  do  not 
understand  how  to  use  them,  they  object  to  others 
using  them.  To  such  persons  I  have  nothing  to  of- 
fer except  good  wishes  for  their  progress  along  the 
lines  of  development  they  have  chosen. 

Man's  evolution  has  enlarged  the  meaning  of  the 
word  "work,"  and  we  now  say,  "In  the  sweat  of  thy 
face  or  through  mental  effort  shalt  thou  earn  bread." 
Employers,  capitalists,  and  thinkers  plan  day  after 
day  and  work  very  hard  mentally,  yet  many  of  them 
never  raise  a  hand  to  do  physical  labor,  but  leave 
that  part  of  the  work  to  be  done  by  those  persons 
who  still  believe  they  must  earn  bread  in  the  sweat 
of  their  faces. 

There  are  three  classes  of  workers ;  first,  the  phy- 
sical workers ;  second,  the  physico-mental  workers ; 
and  the  third,  or  purely  mental  workers,  and  each 
of  these  classes  mark  a  period  of  human  evolution. 
By  purely  physical  workers  I  mean  the  hewers  of 
wood  and  the  drawers  of  water — the  mass  of  hu- 
manity. The  physico-mental  workers  are  those  who, 
while  recognizing  that  the  laws  of  mind  have  a  won- 
derful power  to  aid  a  man  in  his  development  and 
resources,  use  their  minds  for  planning  and  enlarg- 
ing their  work  and  drawing  Opulence  to  them- 
selves and  yet  use  physical  means  also  for  the 
purpose  of  manifesting  it.  The  third  class  em- 


264  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

braces  all  who  are  purely  mental  workers,  those 
who  have  learned  to  use  their  minds  along  all  lines 
and  who  use  mental  forces  so  fully  and  so  completely 
that  they  receive  whatever  they  desire  without 
manual  labor  of  any  kind.  These  are  conscious 
users  of  what  is  commonly  called  the  Law  of 
Opulence  or  the  law  which  brings  opulence.  Some 
students  call  this  the  law  of  Demand  and  Supply.  It 
really  does  not  matter  what  it  is  called,  it  operates 
as  unfailingly  on  the  plane  of  mind  as  it  does  in  the 
realm  of  economics. 

Each  person  places  himself  in  one  of  these  three 
classes  of  workers,  according  to  his  evolutionary  de- 
velopment. In  the  first  mentioned  class  the  law 
of  opulence  never  manifests.  Those  who  only  work 
physically  and  individually  can  never  acquire 
opulence.  They  earn  a  living,  plus  a  little  more 
than  an  actual  living  and  that  is  all.  The  law  of 
opulence  commences  to  manifest  in  the  second 
class,  the  physico-mental  workers,  and  passes  by 
slow  gradation  up  through  it  to  the  third  class 
where  it  manifests  in  its  fullness.  Every  person  in 
the  course  of  his  evolutionary  career  must  pass 
through  each  of  these  three  classes,  and  most  per- 
sons who  have  reached  our  point  of  development  are 
in  the  second  class.  This  class  is  working  with  the 
laws  of  nature  consciously  while  having  a  center 
through  which  to  draw  opulence.  By  a  "center"  I 
mean  a  certain  definite  vocation  or  avocation 
through  which  money  comes.  For  example,  sup- 
pose you  have  a  small  business — a  news-stand  per- 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  265 

haps.  You  have  learned  that  there  is  such  a  thing 
as  the  law  of  mental  supply  and  demand  and  you 
desire  to  use  this  law  for  your  financial  betterment. 
The  small  business  is  your  center,  and  having  a 
center  you  wish  to  enlarge  it.  You  make  a  mental 
picture  of  a  larger  business  and  see  yourself  with 
a  cigar  and  news-stand  combined.  You  continue 
to  look  at  that  picture  day  after  day  and  mentally 
demand  that  it  shall  be  yours.  If  you  never  destroy 
your  picture,  in  the  course  of  time  your  demand 
will  be  met  and  the  ways  and  means  will  be  provided 
for  you  to  get  what  you  want.  But  you  should  not 
stop  with  the  news-stand  and  cigar  store  combined, 
because  it  is  never  well  to  be  content  with  a  little. 
You  should  immediately  go  about  making  another 
picture,  as  soon  as  your  demand  has  been  met,  and 
in  this  one  you  should  see  yourself  supplying  other 
news-stands;  you  should  become  a  dealer  and  dis- 
tributor. 

Or  perhaps  you  do  not  wish  to  have  a  news-stand. 
You  may  be  engaged  in  another  kind  of  business 
and  are  working  for  a  salary.  Perhaps  you  would 
like  an  advancement  in  your  salary  and  a  better 
position.  Then  you  should  make  a  mental  picture 
of  yourself  occupying  the  position  you  want  and 
drawing  the  salary  you  require,  and  by  using  this 
position  for  your  center  you  will  work  upward  and 
onward  to  any  height  you  desire. 

For  illustration  let  us  look  at  a  woman  who  at  the 
present  time  stands  before  the  public  as  a  teacher 
of  metaphysics.  I  refer  to  Mrs.  Mary  Baker  G.  Eddy. 


266  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

She  began  her  work  as  a  practicing  physician  and 
after  studying  under  Dr.  Quimby  learned  that  it 
was  possible  to  make  a  practical  application  of  the 
Berkeleyan  philosophy  for  the  purpose  of  healing 
the  sick.  She  started  with  a  very  insignificant  med- 
ical practice,  which  gradually  grew  to  large  propor- 
tions because  of  the  remarkable  cures  she  per- 
formed through  mind.  By  the  use  of  medicine  and 
the  knowledge  that  Dr.  Quimby  had  given  her,  she 
proceeded  to  enlarge  her  center,  to  draw  more  peo- 
ple to  her  from  different  j5arts  of  the  country,  whom 
she  healed  and  taught,  receiving  large  sums  of 
money  for  her  services.  Her  center  grew  until,  it 
is  said,  she  is  possessed  of  more  than  a  million 
dollars. 

If  we  do  not  like  our  occupation  there  is  no  reason 
why  we  should  continue  to  work  at  it  forever;  but 
we  should  hold  the  thought  that  we  shall  use  it  only 
for  the  present  until  we  can  draw  to  ourselves  a 
better  and  a  higher  one.  Faith  in  the  law  and  the 
power  of  mind  enables  us  to  demonstrate  over  ad- 
verse financial  conditions  and  make  them  what  we 
desire. 

A  master  of  this  art,  whom  I  knew,  was  once  a 
newsboy.  Born  of  poor  parents  in  one  of  the  poor- 
est quarters  of  Paris,  he  lived  like  all  other  children 
of  his  class  in  great  destitution.  His  father  and 
mother  were  rag-pickers  and  lived  in  a  cellar.  One 
day  when  he  had  reached  the  age  of  eighteen  or 
twenty  years  a  great  Soul  came  into  his  life,  and 
after  engaging  the  boy  to  do  some  work  for  him 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  267 

became  interested  in  his  welfare,  and  commenced 
to  teach  him  something  about  the  power  of  mind. 
He  also  gave  him  a  manuscript  and  told  him  to 
study  and  practice  the  teachings  he  would  find 
therein. 

The  boy  took  the  manuscript  home  and  spent  his 
last  penny  for  a  candle  to  give  him  light  while  he 
read  about  the  Law  of  Supply  and  Demand ;  and  as 
he  read  he  began  to  believe  that  he  could  use  this 
law  to  help  himself  out  of  his  wretched  condition. 
Looking  around  the  tiny  place  which  he  called  his 
bedroom,  with  its  bare  walls  and  stone  floor,  he 
said:  "I  shall  commence  now  to  create  opulence 
for  myself  and  the  first  thing  I  need  to  make  me 
comfortable  is  a  piece  of  carpet  three  feet  long,  that 
I  can  stand  on  while  dressing  when  I  get  out  of  bed 
on  cold  mornings."  He  made  the  mental  picture  of 
the  carpet  and  held  steadily  to  his  creation.  After 
awhile  a  piece  of  new  carpet  was  given  him  by  a 
woman  whom  he  had  served  and  from  the  moment 
his  first  demonstration  was  made,  his  faith  in  the 
law  never  wavered.  He  became  a  master  at  mak- 
ing demonstrations  and  when  I  first  met  him  was 
possessed  of  a  great  many  hundred  thousand  dollars. 

Faith  in  something  we  cannot  understand  is  hard 
to  acquire  and  rarely  amounts  to  anything  more 
than  a  hope;  but  faith  based  upon  immutable  law 
grows  to  be  knowledge.  The  small  demonstrations 
made  in  the  beginning  of  our  work  with  the  law  are 
often  the  most  important,  because  they  prove  to  us 


268  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

that  we  have  the  power  to  put  the  law  into  opera- 
tion. 

In  the  class  of  the  physico-mental  workers  we 
find  the  progressive  student  increasing  his  center 
and  also  attempting  to  make  demonstrations  inde- 
pendently of  it.  Such  persons  have  made  a  marked 
advance  in  their  evolutionary  progress.  For  ex- 
ample, let  us  take  the  attorney  who  knows  how  to 
use  the  law  of  demand.  He  says,  "I  want  a  good 
law  practice,"  and  pictures  clients  coming  in  large 
numbers  into  his  office.  After  a  time  the  clients 
come  as  he  has  pictured,  and  then  he  begins  to  make 
a  distinction  between  them.  He  says:  "I  want  to 
represent  only  those  whose  cases  I  can  win,"  and  in 
this  way  he  works  for  the  mutual  benefit  of  all  who 
are  interested.  Then  he  begins  to  create  things 
separate  and  distinct  from  his  law  practice.  He 
wishes  to  go  to  Congress,  perhaps,  and  makes  a 
picture  of  himself  representing  his  district  at  the 
Capitol,  and  after  holding  the  picture  for  a  while  and 
earnestly  making  his  demands  that  it  shall  come  to 
him,  an  opportunity  will  be  given  and  his  pictures 
will  materialize,  because  the  law  has  been  put  into 
operation  by  his  power  of  mind. 

In  the  third  class  are  those  individuals  who  are 
able  to  draw  to  themselves  whatever  they  desire 
irrespective  of  any  center.  Constant  practice  has 
made  these  persons  skilled  operators  of  the  law  and 
with  them  faith  has  grown  into  absolute  knowledge. 
When  a  person  has  reached  this  point  in  his  devel- 
opment he  may  go  out  of  business  and  go  wherever 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  269 

he  desires  because  he  can  draw  to  himself  anything 
he  wants  at  any  time  or  in  any  place  he  may  happen 
to  be.  Many  students  pass  through  the  second 
stage,  that  of  the  physico-mental  workers,  very 
slowly.  A  few  pass  rapidly  since  some  have  more 
faith  than  others  and  after  all  it  is  largely  a  ques- 
tion of  faith,  for  "Whatsoever  a  man  thinketh  in  his 
heart  so  is  he." 

Mrs.  Helen  Wilmans-Post,  the  leader  of  the  Men- 
tal Scientists,  started,  as  you  know,  penniless  in  the 
world.  She  went  to  San  Francisco  with  but  a  few 
dollars  in  her  purse.  When  she  arrived  there  she 
demanded  and  secured  her  first  position  on  a  news- 
paper, then  she  gradually  drew  to  herself  through 
that  center  money  enough  to  enable  her  to  live  more 
comfortably  than  previously.  After  awhile,  in  an- 
swer to  her  demands  she  got  a  better  position.  In 
the  beginning  she  used  the  law  of  demand  uncon- 
sciously— -by  following  her  own  intuitions.  Then 
she  began  to  gain  something  of  a  knowledge  of  the 
working  of  the  law  and  soon  her  brilliant  career 
began  as  a  conscious  worker  with  the  law.  From  a 
journalist  she  became  an  author,  wrote  several  books 
and  finally  added  healing  and  teaching  to  her  long 
list  of  accomplishments.  Through  it  all  she  con- 
tinued to  draw  more  and  more  opulence  to  herself 
until  she  is  now  in  possession  of  great  wealth  and 
has  built  a  city  in  the  State  of  Florida.  By  her 
own  example  she  has  shown  that  she  belongs  to 
the  second  class  of  workers  and  makes  the  state- 
ment in  her  book,  "The  Conquest  of  Poverty,"  that 


270  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

no  one  can  draw  wealth  to  himself  independently  of 
physical  effort. 

Dr.  Emily  Cady  is  a  member  of  the  third  class. 
She  has  performed  very  remarkable  cures  and  has 
helped  the  world  through  her  writings  as  much  as 
any  metaphysician  of  this  time.  Dr.  Cady  had  used 
the  law  in  healing  and  her  faith  was  great  enough 
to  believe  she  could  make  other  demonstrations  of 
a  more  material  nature.  She  passed  into  the  third 
class  when  she  showed  her  implicit  faith  in  the  law, 
by  demanding  and  receiving  a  large  sum  of  money, 
which  she  needed  to  reimburse  herself  for  the  time 
and  money  she  had  given  to  suffering  humanity. 
She  pictured  the  amount  that  she  wanted  and  then 
claimed  it  for  her  own  and  within  a  short  time  after 
she  made  her  creation,  a  stranger  brought  to  her 
what  she  had  demanded.  According  to  her  picture 
and  her  faith  was  it  given  unto  her. 

To  put  this  law  of  opulence  into  operation  it  is 
necessary  to  realize  three  things. 

First.  That  everything  you  want  exists  now  in 
Divine  Mind.  Do  you  want  jewels,  gold,  silver? 
They  are  all  in  the  market ;  besides,  there  are  in  the 
mines  as  yet  undiscovered  all  these  things  in  great 
abundance.  All  these  things  exist  and  you  can  put 
into  operation  the  law  which  will  bring  them  to  you. 
The  history  of  the  world  shows  that  every  mental 
demand  of  man  has  been  met.  Man  grew  tired  of 
walking  and  carrying  things  and  the  cumbersome  ox 
cart  was  evolved  to  supply  his  needs.  But  he  was 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  271 

not  satisfied  with  this  crude  vehicle  and  demanded 
something  better.  Then  came  the  horse  and  a 
lighter  wagon,  and  after  that  came  steam  cars, 
bicycles,  and  automobiles ;  and  still  man  is  not  satis- 
fied ;  he  wishes  to  fly  and  flying  machines  are  in  the 
process  of  evolution.  By  degrees,  from  the  boat 
made  by  burning  out  the  center  of  an  old  log,  has  the 
modern  steam  yacht  been  evolved,  and  from  the 
slow,  tedious  process  of  sending  verbal  messages 
by  footmen  from  place  to  place  has  been  evolved 
the  wireless  telegraph.  There  is  no  lack  of  anything 
in  the  world;  and  there  should  be  no  envy  or  jeal- 
ousy between  men,  because  there  is  enough  of  every- 
thing for  everyone  who  lives. 

Second.  Realize  that  all  things  belong  to  Deity 
and  that  you  can  only  have  a  temporary  use  of  them. 
We  should  not  be  so  vain-glorious  as  to  think  we 
own  anything.  We  came  into  the  world  destitute  of 
everything  and  go  out  of  it  with  nothing  except 
character — and  some  even  go  without  that.  While 
we  remain  here  we  may  borrow  of  Deity  something 
or  nothing  according  to  our  manner  of  thinking. 

Third.  We  should  realize  that  all  things  are  dis- 
tributed by  the  Universal  Consciousness  according 
to  law.  One  man  is  not  poverty-stricken  and  an- 
other man  a  millionaire  by  chance,  fatalism  or 
caprice;  but  everything  is  distributed  according  to 
the  law  of  mental  demand,  or  of  asking  and  receiv- 
ing. Those  of  you  who  are  Christians  know  what 
the  Nazarene  said  on  that  subject.  Everyone  who 
stops  to  think  knows  that  the  successful  man  of 


272  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

business  has  always  been,  is,  and  always  will  be,  the 
man  who  can  demand — i.  e.,  make  a  positive  picture 
of  what  he  desires.  If  you  want  anything,  create  it 
mentally,  demand  it  and  according  to  your  faith  be 
it  unto  you. 

There  are  certain  rules  whereby  you  may  hasten 
your  creations  whether  you  work  with  or  without  a 
center,  and  your  experiences  will  demonstrate  the 
accuracy  of  the  rules. 

Rule  First.  Meditate  and  ask  Deity  if  there  is 
any  reason  why  you  should  not  have  the  thing  you 
desire  to  create. 

This  removes  all  uncertainty  from  your  mind 
about  the  advisability  of  creating  it.  Uncertainty 
produces  a  negative  condition,  disturbs  your  aura 
and  therefore  delays  the  materialization  of  your  cre- 
ations. When  you  have  received  the  answer  from 
the  Universal  Consciousness  that  it  is  right  and 
proper  for  you  to  have  the  thing  that  you  desire, 
you  are  then  in  a  positive  condition  of  mind  and 
can  forcefully  put  the  law  into  operation. 

Rule  Second.  Having  decided  to  create  something 
make  your  mental  picture  of  it  and  demand  it  un- 
falteringly until  it  comes. 

A  person  after  having  received  a  favorable  answer 
from  Deity  often  commences  his  creations,  but  aban- 
dons them  after  a  time  because  his  objective  mind 
suggests  that  he  may  have  been  mistaken  about  his 
answer  from  Deity,  and  it  is  not  best  to  continue 
with  his  demands.  Do  not  listen  to  the  suggestions 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  273 

from  your  objective  mind,  but  once  having  decided 
upon  your  creations  go  on  with  them  to  the  end. 

Rule  Three.  A  positive  demand  accomplishes 
more  and  better  results  than  a  request  or  a  petition. 

The  mental  attitude  while  making  a  demand 
should  always  be  reverential  but  very  positive.  The 
Lord's  Prayer  is  an  excellent  example  of  the  proper 
attitude  of  mind  to  be  assumed  while  demanding 
and  we  will  analyze  that  prayer.  Jesus  said :  "After 
this  manner  therefore  pray  ye:" 

"Our  Father  which  art  in  Heaven,  hallowed  be 
Thy  name.  Thy  Kingdom  come.  Thy  will  be  done 
in  earth,  as  it  is  in  Heaven."  The  attitude  of  mind 
manifested  by  the  Nazarene  while  making  the  first 
part  of  this  prayer  was  reverential,  and  His  words 
expressed  His  desire  for  perfect  harmony  between 
Himself  and  the  Father.  Having  established  har- 
mony between  His  individual  mind  and  the  Univer- 
sal Mind  He  proceeded  to  make  His  demands  in  this 
manner : 

"Give  us  this  day  our  daily  bread :  And  forgive  us 
our  debts  as  we  forgive  our  debtors.  And  lead 
us  not  into  temptation,  but  deliver  us  from  evil." 
After  this  manner  therefore  pray  ye. 

There  is  not  one  negative  thought  in  this  prayer. 
There  is  a  positive  demand  for  every  thing  desired 
rather  than  a  petition.  We  can  almost  say  that  the 
demand  was  a  respectful  command  that  the  things 
desired  should  come,  and  you  will  find  that  those  of 
you  who  ask  of  the  Universal  in  this  manner  and 


274  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

with  this  mental  attitude  will  always  receive  what 
you  ask  for. 

Now  contrast  the  mental  attitude  that  the  Nazar- 
ene  Occultist  had  when  He  prayed,  with  the  mental 
attitude  of  His  so-called  followers  of  the  present  day. 
He  said :  "When  thou  prayest  thou  shalt  not  be  as 
the  hypocrites  are:  for  they  love  to  pray  standing 
(kneeling)  in  the  synagogues"  (churches  and  cathe- 
drals) *  *  *  "But  when  ye  pray,  use  not  vain 
repetitions  as  the  heathens  do;  for  they  think  that 
they  shall  be  heard  for  their  much  speaking"  (chant- 
ing, litanies  and  masses).  If  you  wish  to  witness 
the  contrast  between  the  Master's  and  the  modern 
forms  of  worship,  go  into  some  of  the  Churches  on 
or  near  Fifth  Avenue  and  listen  to  the  words  of  the 
modern  prayers.  On  Sunday  you  will  hear  Public 
Confessions  of  sins  something  like  this : 

"We  have  left  undone  those  things  which  we 
ought  to  have  done ;  and  we  have  done  those  things 
which  we  ought  not  to  have  done:  And  there  is  no 
health  in  us."  "Health"  is  defined  by  the  Century 
Dictionary  as  meaning  in  this  connection,  "natural 
vigor  of  the  faculties,  moral  or  intellectual  sound- 
ness." 

If  we  were  to  say  about  these  same  good  citizens 
what  they  publicly  admit  about  themselves — that 
they  are  morally  and  intellectually  depraved  and 
are  secretly  doing  things  they  ought  not  to  do — we 
should  very  likely  be  sued  for  slander.  But  we  do 
not  wish  to  say  or  to  believe  that  these  good  people 
are  guilty  of  what  they  unthinkingly  say  with  their 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  275 

lips  in  their  forms  of  worship.  The  illustration 
given  is  but  a  type  of  modern  prayers,  for  they 
are  all  more  or  less  self-depreciatory  if  not  self- 
condemnatory.  The  thoughts  behind  them  are  nega- 
tive and  the  prayers  are  repeated  as  a  matter  of  form 
more  than  of  faith.  Many  of  these  same  good  per- 
sons have  their  prayers  answered,  but  the  answered 
ones  were  not  the  formal  prayers  read  from  prayer 
books.  They  are  those  that  were  sent  forth  from 
the  heart  and  were  expressed  in  a  positive  form ; 
they  were  whispered  in  the  silence  of  the  night 
when  there  was  no  one  near  to  hear  but  God  to 
whom  they  were  addressed.  These  are  the  prayers 
that  are  efficacious,  for  prayer  to  be  efficacious  must 
be  a  mental  and  not  an  emotional  act. 

Rule  Four.    Demand  specifically  what  you  want. 

Every  word  of  this  rule  is  important.  First  you 
must  make  a  demand.  Then  that  demand  must  be 
specific.  Make  your  mental  picture  clear-cut.  The 
clearer  your  picture  the  sooner  will  it  materialize. 
Demand  specifically  what  you  want — not  what 
some  one  else  wants  you  to  have,  riot  what  you 
think  you  ought  to  have,  not  what  you  believe  it 
your  duty  to  want — but  what  you,  yourself,  wish  to 
have. 

The  converse  of  this  rule  is  equally  important. 
Never  demand  what  you  do  not  want.  If  you  want 
money  do  not  demand  work.  Almost  everyone 
makes  that  mistake  when  he  begins  to  make  de- 
mands, because  it  is  difficult  to  break  the  customs 
of  many  years.  Unpleasant  environment  is  the  re- 


276  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

suit  of  demands  we  have  made  in  the  past  for  things 
we  do  not  want  now.  Diseased  bodies  and  unhappy 
conditions  of  mind  are  but  the  realizations  of  de- 
mands made  in  ignorance. 

This  rule  is  very  likely  to  be  misunderstood  even 
by  some  metaphysicians.  A  local  teacher  of  meta- 
physics who  heard  this  rule  given  in  last  year's 
lectures  said  it  was  misleading ;  that  if  a  person  had 
a  drug  store,  for  instance,  and  wanted  money,  he 
should  demand  patrons  because  they  would  bring 
money.  To  an  Occultist  this  is  strange  logic.  The 
druggist  might  have  a  thousand  patrons  and  sell 
his  entire  stock.  If  all  his  customers  bought  his 
goods  on  credit  and  neglected  to  pay  for  them  after- 
wards, his  desire  for  money  would  not  be  fulfilled 
although  his  demand  for  patrons  had  been  fully  met. 
It  is  best  to  demand  the  specific  thing  you  want  and 
then  you  will  make  no  mistakes. 

A  member  of  last  year's  class  who  thought  she 
understood  this  rule,  said  to  me  several  weeks  after 
the  lecture  course  ended  that  she  had  created  a  trip 
to  Europe.  When  I  asked  her  to  describe  her  men- 
tal picture  she  said,  "Oh,  I  just  created  a  one  thou- 
sand dollar  bill  which  I  shall  use  for  my  trip."  She 
had  not  created  a  trip  to  Europe,  but  had  created 
the  money  to  pay  for  one.  This  was  no  surety  of 
her  getting  the  trip,  because  when  the  money  came 
an  infinite  number  of  things  might  occur  to  prevent 
her  going.  She  should  have  created  the  picture  of 
herself  on  board  ship  crossing  the  ocean  ;  and  should 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  277 

have  seen  herself  landing  safe  and  well  on  the  other 
side. 

Rule  Fifth.  Only  demand  when  your  desire  is 
strong. 

When  you  feel  the  need  of  a  thing  your  desire  for 
it  is  strongest.  Many  students  begin  enthusiastic- 
ally to  make  their  demands,  but  soon  grow  luke- 
warm. A  good  way  to  intensify  your  desires  is  to 
think  of  the  pleasure  the  possession  of  the  thing 
would  give  you,  and  when  the  desire  for  it  comes 
sweeping  over  you  then  make  your  demand  for  it. 
Do  not  demand  because  the  hour  set  apart  for  de- 
manding has  come,  or  because  you  regard  it  as  a 
duty  you  have  assumed.  Demands  made  under  such 
conditions  amount  to  nothing,  and  the  time  put  into 
work  of  that  kind  is  wasted. 

Rule  Sixth.  Mind  works  best  when  the  body  is 
still. 

If  you  are  drumming  with  your  fingers  or  swing- 
ing your  feet  while  making  demands,  a  part  of  your 
mental  force  goes  into  the  physical  motions  you  are 
making;  and  your  forces  being  divided  the  mental 
work  is  robbed  of  much  of  its  power.  You  should 
conserve  your  force.  At  intervals  during  the  day 
you  may  think  of  your  demands  and  you  can  hold 
them  sub-consciously  in  mind  much  of  the  time; 
and  while  this  kind  of  picture-making  does  not  ac- 
complish as  much  as  when  the  body  is  at  rest,  yet  it 
does  have  an  effect. 

Rule  Seventh.    Never  demand  when  excited. 

You  may  have  a  strong  desire  but  no  excitement. 


278  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

A  demand  made  during  intense  excitement  is  always 
met  forcefully.  This  is  an  important  rule,  the 
observance  of  which  may  save  you  much  incon- 
venience. We  are  quite  likely  to  become  impatient 
at  times  and  are  often  tempted  to  make  positive  and 
often  violent  demands.  It  is  a  dangerous  thing  to 
do,  as  I  shall  show  you  in  an  illustration. 

There  was  a  student  of  Occultism  in  this  city  who 
had  met  with  several  misfortunes.  Disasters  fol- 
lowed each  other  till  everything  he  had  on  the  mate- 
rial plane  was  swept  away.  But  he  was  possessed 
of  a  great  deal  of  force,  and  knowing  how  to  make 
demands  for  what  he  wanted  he  commenced  making 
new  creations.  He  demanded  ten  thousand  dollars, 
which  to  him  was  financial  opulence.  The  demand 
was  not  met  immediately,  and  the  young  man  be- 
came impatient  and  finally  angry.  And  when  he 
wakened  one  morning  to  find  himself  without  money 
enough  to  pay  for  his  breakfast,  he  walked  to  the 
park,  threw  himself  upon  the  ground  and  lay  there 
for  several  hours  with  his  teeth  set,  hands  clenched 
and  with  the  perspiration  standing  out  all  over  his 
body,  so  intense  was  his  excitement  while  making 
his  demand  for  the  money  he  had  pictured.  The 
next  day  he  boarded  a  freight  train  and,  after  the 
usual  delays  and  inconveniences  attending  upon 
transportation  of  that  kind,  the  student  of  Occultism 
managed  to  reach  a  Western  town.  But  he  had  no 
sooner  entered  the  place  than  a  cyclone  came  along 
and  swept  it  off  the  face  of  the  earth.  When  the 
young  man  of  the  violent  demands  came  to  con- 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  279 

sciousness  he  was  lying  on  the  ground  some  distance 
from  the  place  where  he  was  at  the  last  moment  of 
his  recollections.  His  body  was  a  mass  of  bruises, 
and  when  he  tried  to  rise  to  his  feet  he  found 
one  leg  broken.  Bodies  of  dead  animals  and  men 
lay  all  around  him,  and  wagon  loads  of  debris 
were  strewn  in  all  directions ;  but  jtist  within  reach 
of  his  arm  lay  a  plethoric  leather  wallet.  The  young 
man  reached  his  best  arm  out  and  got  the  wallet  and 
immediately  examined  its  contents.  There  were 
just  ten  one  thousand  dollar  bills  in  it  and  not  a  scrap 
of  paper  or  a  card  to  tell  to  whom  it  belonged.  He 
placed  his  prize  in  the  pocket  of  his  ragged  coat  and 
crept  on  his  hands  and  knees  for  some  distance  till 
someone  came  to  his  relief.  He  was  cared  for  and 
finally  got  well.  The  owner  of  the  money  could  not 
be  found,  and  the  young  man  kept  it  as  an  answer 
to  his  violent  demand,  which  so  nearly  cost  him  his 
life. 

Please  do  not  understand  me  to  say  that  the  young 
Occult  student's  violent  demand  created  the  cyclone, 
because  it  had  nothing  to  do  with  its  creation.  But 
the  student  was  drawn  into  the  cyclone,  and  suf- 
fered the  horrors  of  it,  because  of  his  own  tempestu- 
ous mental  condition  when  making  a  demand,  which 
had  to  be  met  after  the  manner  that  it  was  made. 

Rule  Eighth.  Always  be  deliberate  and  quiet  but 
positive  when  demanding. 

Never  demand  in  a  hurry.  Mental  perturbation 
engendered  by  hurry,  delays  the  materialization  of 
your  creation. 


280  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

Rule  Ninth.  Avoid  speculating  on  the  time  when 
or  the  way  in  which  your  demonstrations  will  be 
made. 

When  you  begin  speculating  about  the  ways  and 
means  by  which  your  demonstrations  will  come, 
immediately  your  force  becomes  scattered  or  divided 
and  a  repellent  expectancy  arises.  There  is  an  ex- 
pectancy that  draws  and  also  one  that  repels.  The 
quiet  expectancy,  such  as  is  used  in  meditation,  is 
helpful  in  drawing  to  you  whatever  you  have  de- 
manded. But  the  impatient  expectancy  of  the 
objective  mind  is  repellent,  because  it  causes  your 
aura  to  become  disturbed  and  then  nothing  you 
want  can  reach  you. 

For  example :  You  have  made  a  demand  and  have 
commenced  to  wonder  through  whom  that  demand 
will  be  met.  Your  objective  mind  suggests  Mr. 
Blank  as  the  most  probable  person,  and  if  you 
accept  the  suggestion  when  you  meet  Mr.  Blank  you 
are  not  mentally  poised  because  of  your  impatient 
expectancy.  Mr.  Blank  feels  your  mental  condition 
and  if  he  were  inclined  to  form  a  business  connec- 
tion with  you  he  would  hesitate  and  become  uncer- 
tain because  of  your  perturbed  condition ;  thus  the 
ways  and  means  that  you  expected  to  bring  your 
demonstration  would  not  be  used  because  of  your 
repellent  expectancy.  The  person  who  violates  rule 
nine  is  likely  to  make  very  bad  investments. 

Rule  Tenth.  Anger,  discontent,  envy  and  lack  of 
self-control  repel  and  delay  a  demonstration. 

If  you  make  a  mental  picture  of  a  thing  and  hold 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  281 

it  for  a  time  it  will  materialize,  but  it  will  be  delayed 
if  you  indulge  in  any  of  the  mental  attitudes  just 
mentioned ;  because  any  of  these  puts  your  aura  into 
a  perturbed  condition,  which  is  repellent.  Divine 
Mind  may  be  likened  to  the  ocean  which  is  bearing 
a  boat  ladened  with  your  creations  to  you  who  are 
standing  upon  the  shore.  If  you  are  perturbed  your 
mind  acts  upon  Divine  Mind  as  the  wind  off  shore 
acts  upon  the  ocean.  It  is  forever  driving  back  the 
craft  in  which  are  the  things  you  desire. 

This  rule  is  one  of  the  hardest  to  observe,  but  like 
anything  else  it  can  be  followed.  It  is  the  disregard 
of  this  rule  which  leads  investigators  and  beginners 
to  disbelieve  in  the  law  or  power  of  mind,  and  which 
makes  so  many  students  finally  abandon  in  despair 
their  efforts  to  use  the  forces  of  nature.  But  if  we 
do  not  use  nature's  forces  then  we  shall  be  used  by 
them. 

Rule  Eleventh.  The  earnestness  with  which  a 
demand  is  made,  the  frequency  with  which  it  is  made 
and  the  persistency  with  which  the  mental  image  is 
consciously  held  in  mind  hastens  the  demonstration. 

In  another  lecture  you  were  told  how  your  mental 
picture  becomes  a  matrix,  and  that  from  this  matrix 
goes  forth  a  vibratory  force  like  a  blue  magnetic  cord 
which  connects  with  the  thing  you  desire.  The 
material  thing  is  then  drawn  by  this  blue  magnetic 
cord  closer  and  closer  to  you  every  time  you  con- 
centrate your  thoughts  upon  your  creation  until  the 
thing  finally  reaches  you.  The  earnestness,  the  fre- 
quency and  the  persistency  of  your  demands  and 


282  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

concentration  draw  it  faster  and  faster.     An  Oc- 
cultist never  destroys  any  of  his  mental  pictures. 

Rule  Twelve.    The  realization  that  you  are  using 
an  immutable  law  hastens  your  demonstrations. 

Get  out  of  the  old  theological  belief  that  because 
you  are  good  God  is  going  to  give  you  a  reward. 
Get  out  of  the  thought  that  you  are  a  chosen  child 
of  God  and  that  He  is  looking  upon  you  with  special 
favor.  Get  into  the  thought  that  you  are  a  student 
of  Occultism  and  that  by  working  with  mental  law 
you  are  going  to  be  able  to  make  quick  demonstra- 
tions and  a  better  environment.  Realize  that  you  are 
using  an  immutable  law  and  that  what  you  demand 
comes  to  you  because  you  are  using  a  law  and  that 
nothing  can  prevent  its  coming,  that  God  Himself 
cannot  prevent  it  without  violating  His  own  na- 
ture— a  thing  inconceivable. 

Rule  Thirteen.  After  your  creation  is  made  and  you 
have  demanded  it,  the  declaration,  "God  has  met 
my  demand,"  hastens  the  material  manifestation  of 
the  demonstration. 

For  example,  suppose  you  have  made  a  picture, 
have  held  it,  have  demanded  that  it  should  material- 
ize and  you  have  followed  faithfully  all  the  fore- 
going rules.  But  after  awhile  your  objective  mind 
says:  "that  demonstration  will  never  come."  Then 
I  would  suggest  that  you  change  your  form  of  de- 
mand, and  instead  of  saying  "Give  me  this,"  say, 
"God  has  met  my  demand.  It  is  mine  now."  Claim 
it.  You  know  your  demand  has  been  met  on  the 
mental  plane,  and  since  it  is  law  that  you  are  using, 


The  Law  of  Opulence.  283 

it  is  yours  as  much  before  it  has  materialized  as  it 
will  be  afterwards.  This  declaration  gives  you  a 
positive  realization  of  possession  which  has  a  ten- 
dency to  bring  more  quickly  your  creations  and 
removes  anxiety  and  perturbation  from  your  mind. 

If  this  lecture  on  opulence  has  been  made  clear, 
you  will  understand  that  I  am  not  teaching  a  mental- 
get-rich-quick  affair,  nor  the  getting  of  something 
for  nothing;  but  that  you  must  work  mentally  in 
order  to  accomplish  whatever  you  desire.  The 
particular  advantage  of  this  system  of  mental  work 
over  physical  work  is  this:  you  can  select  your 
own  time  to  do  it,  and  arrange  your  own  compen- 
sation. The  results  are  absolutely  certain  if  the 
law  is  complied  with.  But  when  a  person  says  he 
has  complied  with  the  rules  given  here  and  has  not 
got  results  he  has  made  a  mistake  somewhere.  He . 
has  not  complied. 

Your  experiences  with  prosperous  business  men 
and  all  successful  persons  in  the  world  show  that 
unconsciously  they  work  along  these  lines.  I  say 
unconsciously  because  the  majority  of  them  as 
yet  only  unconsciously  put  the  law  into  operation. 
Observation  of  the  metaphysicians  of  the  present 
day  who  are  semi-consciously  using  the  law — and 
their  name  is  legion — will  show  that  even  with  their 
limited  knowledge  they  are  repeatedly  making  re- 
markable demonstrations.  A  large  per  cent  of  those 
who  listened  to  these  lectures  last  season  have  been 
enabled  to  demonstrate  health  for  themselves  and 
many  have  brought  health  to  others ;  some  have 


-'. 


284  The  History  and  Power  of  Mind. 

demonstrated  happiness,  others  have  enlarged  their 
business  and  many  have  drawn  to  themselves  money. 
All  have  increased  their  store  of  knowledge  and  a 
few  have  become  ennobled  in  character  and  have 
gained  spiritual  qualities.  This  shows  that  the  law 
has  worked  on  the  three  planes  of  being  with  this 
band  of  students  and  if  a  few  can  accomplish  many 
can. 

If  you  will  but  persist  in  your  faith  there  can  be 
no  limit  to  your  possibilities.  If  you  can  demon- 
strate a  piece  of  carpet  three  feet  long  you  can 
demonstrate  a  million  dollars.  If  you  can  cure  a 
headache  you  can  cure  in  the  course  of  time  any 
disease ;  if  you  can  demonstrate  a  seat  in  the  street 
car  you  can  demonstrate  a  seat  in  Congress,  in  time. 
If  you  can  be  happy  a  week  you  can  be  happy  for  a 
lifetime,  because  what  can  be  done  in  a  small  de- 
gree can,  with  persistency,  be  done  in  a  large 
degree. 

It  rests  with  you  whether  you  will  or  will  not  use 
this  law  consciously.  There  are  some  of  you  who 
will.  There  is  always  a  percentage  of  persons  who 
succeed  and  a  percentage  who  do  not.  Each  of 
you  can  do  with  your  knowledge  what  you  choose. 
This  much  is  true,  if  you  persist  for  two  years  to 
consciously  use  these  laws  in  your  daily  affairs  of 
life,  by  the  end  of  that  time  your  environment  will 
have  changed  sufficiently,  and  demonstrations 
enough  will  have  been  made,  to  prove  to  you  that 
you  are  dealing  with  Law. 


INDEX. 


Accidents,  none  in  the  World — 259. 
Acids,  Mind  in  Action  Creates — 244. 
Adamic  Curse — 261. 
Adepts— 19,  23,  26. 
"      Aid  Men— 27,  64. 
"      as  Teachers— 19,  23,  186. 

Custodians  of  Occult  Sciences — 20. 
Affinity,  Chemical,  a  Form  of  Consciousness — 34,  35,  89. 

"        Sex  desire  manifests  as  in  Minerals — 89. 
Affirmations  in  Disease — 250,  251,  252,  257. 
Ages  of  Earth,  21  to  26. 

"      "      "       Fifth,  Present  One — 21,  25  to  27. 

"      "      "       First— 21. 

"      "      "       Fourth— 23  to  25. 

"      "      "       Second— 21. 

"       Sun  Cycles  Determine — 104. 
"      "      "       Third— 21,  22. 
Aggrandizement,  Individual — 232. 
Altruism,  Cause  of — 234. 

Force  Dissipated  in — 235. 
Green  Force  Antidote  for — 234,  235. 
versus  Selfishness — 45,  46. 
America,  Ancient  Civilization — 25. 
Anesthetics,  Man  Is  Mind  Proved  by — 50. 

Mind  is  Not  Product  of  Brain  Proved  by — 59. 
Anger,  Caused  by  Fear— 85. 
"     Causes  Congestion — 244. 
"      Color  of— 142,  143,  230. 


ii  INDEX. 

Anger,  Control  of  Others  Necessitates  Elimination  of— 79. 
"     Demagnetizes  Atoms  of  Body— 229,  230. 
"     Effect  on  Self-Control— 79. 
41      Red  Color  of— 142,  143,  228,  230. 
"     Repels  Demonstrations— 280,  281. 
Animal  Kingdom.,    Consciousness  in — 35,  69,  70. 
"  "        Independence  in — 260. 

"  "        Re-embodiment  in— 107  to  109 

"  "        Souls  in— 174. 

"  "       Vegetable  Kingdom  Supports— 248. 

Animal  Propensities,  Color  of — 135. 
Animals,  Blue  Force  Cannot  be  Used  by— 235. 

"         Orange  Force  Used  in  Treatment  of — 231. 
Answers  to  Demands— 152  to  157. 

Rules  to  Test— 156,  157- 
Anthropomorphism — 33. 

Appolonius  of  Tyanna,  Cosmic  Forces  Used  by— 223. 
Art,  Blue  Force  Inspires— 235,  236. 
Asceticism,  Moral  Reaction  from  Sensuousness — 88. 

Spirituality  Not  Gained  by— 88,  89. 
Assyria — 26. 

Astrology,  Revival  of— 17. 
Atlantis,  History  of— 23,  24. 

"          Misuse  of  Suggestion  Destroyed — 204. 
"          Occultism  Openly  Taught  in— 23,  24. 
Atlas,  Altruist  Desires  to  Become  an— 234. 
Atoms,  Anger  Demagnetizes— 229,  230. 
"     Conscious  Side  of — 66. 
"     Dual  Nature  of— 41. 
Atonement — 92. 

Atrophy  of  Body  Not  Taught — 90. 
Aura,  Animal  Magnetism  Utilized  by  Blending— 194. 
"     Color  and  Size  of— 128  to  130,  132,  138. 
"      Conductor  for  Cosmic  Forces — 228,  229. 
"      Creating  a  Matrix  in  the— 160,  214. 
"      Defined— 128,  129. 
"      Development  Determines — 128  to  130. 


INDEX. 


Ill 


Aura,  Disturbed  by  Loss  of  Self- Control— 80. 

"      Uncertainty  Disturbs — 272. 
Aureola,  Denned — 128. 
Auric  Egg,  Denned— 128. 
Babylon — 26. 

Bad  Luck,  Result  of  Mental  Creation— 94. 
Baraduct,  Dr.,  Inventions  of— 131,  161,  162. 
Berkeleyan  Philosophy,  Mrs.  Eddy's  Use  of — 266. 
Beliefs,  Do  Not  Amount  to  Much — 21. 
Birth,  Man  Determines  His — 118. 
Black,  Abnormality  Indicated  by — 132. 
Blood,  Vibration  of,  is  Red — 241. 
Blue,  Color  of  Aura — 138,  139. 

One  of  the  Primary  Colors — 123,  124. 
"     Normal  Color  of  Subjective  Mind,  62,  133,  137  to  139. 
Blue  Cosmic  Force,  Animals  Cannot  Use — 235. 
"        Art  Inspired  by— 235,  236. 
"        Aspect  of  Divine  Mind — 224. 
"        Electric  Current  Part  of — 247. 
"        Harmony  Inspired  by — 235. 

Healing  by— 247,  255. 
"        Indigo  Inspires  Music — 236. 
"        Light  Blue  Inspires  Literature — 237. 
"        Literature  Inspired  by — 235,  237. 
Mental  Force— 158. 

"      Inspiration  Caused  by— 235,  236. 
"        Music  Inspired  by— 235,  236. 
Order       "          "  -235. 
Organization  Inspired  by — 235. 
Subjective  Mind  Alone  Can  Use — 235. 
Body,  Physical —  Atrophy  of,  Not  Taught — 90. 
Body  Is  Not  the  Man— 58. 
Burial  of  Dead— 55. 
Change  in  Conscious — 113,  119,  258. 
Changes  Constantly — 108,  109,  118. 
Christian  Fear  Dissolution  of— 55. 


IV  INDEX. 

Body,  Physical — Composition  of — 239,  241. 

"  <«  Cremation  of — 175. 

"  "  Determined  by  Soul — 118. 

'  <•  «  Drugs  Affect— 247,  248. 

"  "  Influence  on  Mind — 277. 

"  "  Man  Modifies— 1 18. 

"  "  Objective  Mind  Holds  Together— 239,  240. 

"  "  Should  Be  Kept  Long— 113,  119. 

* '  .  Soul  Chained  to— 175. 

"  "  Thought  Affects— 119. 

"  "  Why  It  Retains  Its  Form— 239  to  241. 

Boils,  Treatment  of — 253. 
Book  of  Life,  Photosphere  Is — 182. 
Brahma,  Days  and  Nights  of — 101,  102. 
Brahmins  Used  Cosmic  Forces — 223. 
Braid,  Dr.,  and  Braidism — 191. 
Broken  Bones  Should  Be  Set — 246. 
Brotherhood,  Silent — 92. 
Brown,  Color  of  Aura — 136. 
Brownies  Are  Elementals — 172. 
Buddhists  Used  Cosmic  Forces — 223. 
Bulwer's  Writings,  Mystecism  in — 169. 
Burdens  of  Others  Should  Not  Be  Assumed — 235. 
Cady,  Dr.  Emily,  Mental  Worker — 270. 
Cancer  Caused  by  Fear — 73,  74. 

"       Treatment  of — 253. 
Catholic  Church — Occultism  in  the — 28. 

Prayer  in — 145,  146. 
Causes,  Occultism  Teaches — 16,  17. 
Center,  Magnetic,  Depletion  of — 45. 

Duty  to  Become  a  Positive — 46. 
"         Preservation  of — 44,  45. 

"        Use  of  to  Draw  Opulence— 264  to  266,  268. 
Centers,  Evolution  Carried  on  Through — 63. 
Chains,  Planetary,  Evolution  on — 67. 
Chaldean  Occult  Record,  Genesis  Is— 71. 
Character— Effect  of  Thoughts  on— 119. 


INDEX.  V 

Character,  Known  by  Color — 62. 

"          Man  Makes  His  Own— 118,  119. 

Only  Thing  We  Take  Out  of  World— 271. 
Vibrations  Indicate  Man's — 62. 
Chemical  Affinity,  Consciousness  in— 34,  35,  89. 
Chemistry,  Once  an  Occult  Science — 12. 
Chicago,  Infants'  Court  in — 115. 
Children,  Orange  Force  Used  to  Heal— 231. 
Christian  Science,  Denials  Used  Mostly  by— 252. 
"  "        Healing  by  Based  on  Law — 223. 

"  "        Malicious  Animal  Magnetism  of,  Is  Objec- 

tive Mind — 76. 

"        Mistaken    in    Not    Recognizing    Affirma- 
tions— 252. 

"        Mistaken  in  Not  Recognizing  Drugs — 247. 
"     "  Matter— 40. 

"     "  "  Physical    Side 

of  Atom — 41. 
"        Patients    Sometimes    Have   Recurrence   of 

Disease — 212. 
"        Patients    Sometimes    Have    Recurrence   of 

Disease,  Cause  of — 212,  213. 
Christianity — Esotericism  in — 14. 

Occult  Bodies  in— 28. 
Prayer  in— 145,  146,  274,  275. 
Christians,  Dissolution  of  Body  Feared  by — 55. 
Clairaudience,  Self  Control  Necessary  in — 80. 
Clairvoyance— 60,  113,  183. 

Artificial— 183,  184. 

Magnetic  Connection  Visible  in — 113,  114. 

Unreliability  of— 183. 
Passive— 183,  184. 

"      Unreliability  of— 183. 
Self  Control  Necessary  in— 80. 
Students  Taught— 184. 
Subjective  Plane  Seen  in— 61. 
True— 184,  185. 
"    Pineal  Gland  Used  in— 184. 


INDEX. 


Coercion—Crime  to  Use—  162,  209,  212,  214. 
Deity  Does  Not  Use—  211,  212. 
Examples  of  Mental—  202  to  204. 
"          Hypnotism  and—  198  to  200. 

Mental—  202,  203. 

"  Students  Never  Helped  by—  186. 

"  Suggestion  and—  207  to  209. 

"  To  Do  Evil  Greatest  Crime—  214. 

Colds,  Cause  of—  243. 

Objective  Mind  Creates—  97. 
Color—  Ancient  Europeans'  Idea  of—  120. 
"        Necessary  in  Manifestation—  124,  125. 
Negative—  138,  139- 
Of  Objective  Mind,  62,  133,  137,240. 
"  Subjective      "     62,  133,  137- 
Positive—  138,   139- 
Primary—  123,  124,  132. 
"       Quality  of  Thought  Determines—  132,  133- 

Theories  of—  121,  122. 
"        Vibration  and—  121  to  125. 
Colored  Glass  Modifies  Light  Ray—  52. 
Concentration—  147»  l&2  to  l67- 
"  Aids,  in—  164  to  166. 

Blood  Drawn  to  Part  by—  52. 
Defined—  162,  164. 
"  Difficulty  of—  163. 

Law  of  Periodicity  in—  163,  164. 
"  Materialization  Hastened  by—  162. 

Most  Forceful  Mode  of  Mind—  147,  163. 
"  Not  a  Fiery  Ordeal—  165. 

Opulence  Created  by—  234. 
Power  of—  166,  222. 
"  Practice  of—  164  to  167. 

"  Practice  Required  in  —  12,  166. 

"  Quietness  Best  for—  164. 

"  Rules  for  —  164  to  166. 

Self-Control  Necessary  in—  80. 
"  Tool  of  Occultist—  147- 


INDEX.  Vll 

Congestion,  Anger  Causes — 244. 
Conscience,  Memory  of  Past  Events — 109. 
Consciousness — Centers  in — 87,   112. 

Creations  Controlled  by  Dominant — 74. 
Currents  in — 47. 
Divine,  See  Deity. 

"        Automatic  Action  of — 50. 
"        Awakening  of — 102. 

Centers      of,      Evolution      Takes      Place 

Through — 44,  63. 
"       Men  Are— 87,  112. 
"       Mice  Are-87. 
"       Should  Be   Preserved— 44, 

45,  150. 

Defined— 35,  36. 

Forces  Are  Aspects  of — 39  to  41,  223,  224. 
"        Man,  Assisted  by— 68,  260,  261. 
"        Manifestation  of— 34  to  41,  52,  101. 
Must  Rest— 101. 
Thoughts  Impress — 50. 
World  Managed  by— 91. 
Environment  Shows  Which  Controls— 74. 
Immortality  Means  Preservation  of— 150. 
In  Animal  Kingdom— 35,  69,  70,  107,  108. 
"  Chemical  Affinity— 34,  35. 
"  Gases— 35. 

"  Mineral  Kingdom— 34,  35,  69,  106. 
"  Vegetable  Kingdom— 35,  69,  106,  107. 
Objective,  Manifestation  of — 34,  52. 
Planes  of— 141,  142. 
Self,  Manifested  in  Man— 31. 
Subjective,  Manifestation  of— 43. 
Synonymous  with  Mind— 34. 
Control— Of  Fear— 85  to  88,  92  to  99,  141. 
'   Sensuousness — 88,  89,  92  to  99. 
'    Sex  Desire— 89,  90,  92  to  99. 
"   Vanity— 90  to  99. 


viii  INDEX. 

Cosmic  Force — See  Currents. 
Creation — Always  in  Pictures — 160. 

Bad  Luck  Result  of— 94. 

Dawn  of,  Described — 101,  102. 

Demand  Until   Realized — 272,  273. 

Destruction  of  Wrong — 98,  99. 

Dominant  Consciousness  Always  Controls — 74. 
"  Evil  Results  of— 94. 

Goodness  Does  Not  Affect— 166. 
"  Hastening  of— 272  to  283. 

Ignorance  in — 74,  276. 
"  Meditation  Before — 167,  272. 

Mental    Brings    Everything    But    Knowledge — 157, 

158. 
"        Mental,  Concreteness  Necessary  in — 159,  160. 

Denned— 157- 

"  "        Law  Practice  Built  Up  by — 159. 

"  "        Matrix  Formed  in — 160,  161,  281. 

"        Operation  of — 160,  161. 
"        Particles  Drawn  Together  by — 162. 
"  "        Photographs  of — 161,  162. 

"  "        Universe  Result  of  Divine — 160. 

"        Objective  Mind  and — 272. 
'*        Of  Consciousness  or  Ether — 47. 
"         "     Mind  Forms — 65. 
"          "   Money — 159  to  161,  163,  165. 
"          "    Opulence — 259  to  284. 
"         "   The  Universe— 101  to  105. 
"        On  Material  Plane— 158,  159. 
"        Precipitation  Is  Highest  Form  of — 162. 
"        Self-Control  Necessary  for— 80. 
*'        Thoughts  Continually  Result  in — 113,  157. 
Cremation,  Occultists  Advocate — 175. 

Souls  Freed  from  Body  by — 175. 
Crime,  Coercion  to  do  Evil  Greatest  Known — 214. 
"      Disembodied  Entities  Cause — 176. 
"      Hypnotism  Cause  of — 198  to  200. 


INDEX.  IX 

Currents.  Cosmic,  Black,  Abnormal— 132. 

Blue  (see  Blue  Cosmic  Force). 
Conscious  Use  of— 222,  223,  249. 
"         Defined— 219  to  226. 

"  "         Green  (see  Green  Cosmic  Force). 

Healing  by  (see  Healing). 
How  to  Connect  with— 227,  255. 
Jesus  Used— 223. 
Mental  Conditions  Attract  or  Repel— 255. 

"       Scientists  Use— 222,  223. 
Orange  (see  Orange  Cosmic  Force). 
Pass  from  Left  to  Right— 252. 
Reel  (see  Red  Cosmic  Force). 
Semi-Conscious  Use  of — 222. 
Surround  Us  Constantly— 242,  243. 
Unconscious  Use  of — 222,  249. 
Use  of— 222,  223,  238,  250  to  258. 
"         White,  Abnormal— 132. 

Yellow  (see  Yellow  Cosmic  Force). 
Thought — 220  to  223. 
"      How  Used— 222. 
"      Plagiarism  and— 221. 
"      Used  in  Disease — 223. 
Dawn  of  Creation — 101. 
Day,  Cosmic,  Alike,  More  or  Less — 102. 
"      Beginning  of — 102. 
"      Evolution  Carried  on  in — 15. 
"      Failure  in  One— 30. 

Laws  for  Each — 103,  104. 
"      Periods  in — 21,  25,  26. 
"      Supreme   Consciousness   Re-Embodies   Itself   for 

New — 104. 

"      Vast  Period  of  Time— 15. 
Death  of  Worlds— 105. 
Declarations     Against  Fear — 87,  88. 
Beneficial — 98,  99. 


X  INDEX. 

Deity,  See  Also  Consciousness  Divine. 
"     All  in  All— 15,  16. 
"     Anthropomorphic  Idea  of — 33,  151. 
"     Awakening  of — 101,  102,  103. 
"      Change  in  Idea  of— 31,  32,  151. 
"      Conceptions  of — 31  to  33,  151. 
"     Created  Only  Good— 173. 
"     Demand  from — 99,  150  to  152,  155,  162. 
"     Depend  Upon,  Instead  of  Persons  or  Things — 152. 
"    Does  not  Coerce— 211,  212. 
"     Everything  Belongs  to — 271. 
"  "  Exists  in— 15,  16,  270,  271. 

"     Force  Is  desire-    of — 39. 

"     Idealizes  What  It  Will  Accomplish  in  a  Cosmic  Day — 15. 
"     Instrument  of,  in  Healing — 254,  255. 
"     Just  Is — 117. 
"     Laws  Made  by— 103,  104. 
"     Manifestation  of — 15,  39  to  41,  101. 
"      Men  with  No  Conception  of — 31. 
"      Nature  Worshipped  as — 32. 
Nearness  of  Man  to — 151,  152. 
Physical  Ills  of  Undeveloped  Provided  for  by — 249. 
"     Re-Embodies  Itself — 103,  104. 
"     Solar,  Denned — 102. 

"       Radiates  Life  Force — 102. 
"       Tribal   Worship  of— 32. 
"       Universal,  Nature  of — 33. 
"       Universality  of  the  Idea  of— 31. 
Universe  Is  Manifestation  of — 101. 
"     Unfoldment  of — 15,  16. 
"     Wisdom  Should  Be  Demanded  of — 99. 

"     Works  During  Each  Cosmic  Day 262. 

Yellow  Force  Is  Highest  Aspect  of,  for  Us — 237. 
Demagnetization  (see  Vampirization). 
Demand,  and  Supply,  Law  of,  is  Law  of  Opulence— 264. 

Desire  Necessary— 277. 
"          Earnestness  Necessary — 281. 


INDEX.  XI 

Demand— Effect  of  Excitement  on— 277  to  279. 
For  Knowledge— 154. 

"   Wealth   Hastened— 222. 

"  From  Supreme  Power— 99,  150  to  152,  155,  162. 

"  How  Answered— 50,  155- 

Hurry  Delays— 279. 
"  Objective  Mind  Sometimes  Answers— 152,  157. 

Repelled  by  Speculation,  Anger,  etc.— 280,  281. 
"  Should  Be  Deliberate  and  Quiet— 27.9. 

"  "        "    Positive— 273,  279. 

"    Specific— 275- 
Success  Obtained  by— 271,  272. 
"          When  Answered— 155,  156. 
Denials — Hypnotism  Produced  by — 249. 

"          in  Treatment  of  Disease— 249,  250,  251,  252,  257. 
"          Mental  Scientists  Use— 223. 
Desire — Color  of  Sex — 230. 

Its  Function  in  Making  a  Demand — 277. 
"          Positive  Side  of  Objective  Mind— 83,  148. 
"          Power  to  Do  Anything,  One — 238. 

Will  Is  Greater  Than  Desire— 84. 
Despondency,  Caused  by  Fear — 85. 
Destiny,  Man's  Affected  by  Every  Thought — 119. 
Development,  Adepts  Aid — 64. 

Rest  Between  Lives  Determined  by — 112. 
Dewey,  George,  His  Self-Control — 79. 
Discontent  Repels  Demonstrations — 280,  281. 
Disease  (see  also  Healing). 

Cause  of— 73,    93,  242,  243,  244,  257. 
Classified — 244  to  246. 
Cure  of— 194,  237,  245  to  258. 
"     "    Defined— 246. 
Defined — 239,  241. 

Emotions  and  Their  Relations  to — 79,  93. 
Habit  in  Picturing — 96,  97. 
Hereditary,  Caused  by  Mental  Conditions — 244. 
How  It  Manifests — 242. 


xii  INDEX. 

Disease  Hypnotism  Does  Not  Cure — 212,  213. 
"       Ignorance  Is  Cause  of — 242. 
"       Imaginary,  Cause  of — 244,  245. 
Manifestation  of — 242. 

Mental  Dominion  Does  Not  Cure — 212,  213. 
Negativeness  Produces — 150. 
"       Real,  Cause  of — 245  to  247. 
Dissolution,  Evolution  Alternates  With — 100. 
Divine  Healers  Use  Law — 223. 

Mind  (see  Consciousness  Divine;    Deity). 
Doubt  Caused  by  Fear-^85. 
Drinking  Overcome  by  Suggestion — 97,  98. 
Drugs,  Mineral  and  Vegetable — 247. 

Physical  Body  Affected  by — 247,  248. 
Duty,  Mistaken  Sense  of,  Leads  to  Difficulties— 235. 
Dwellers  on  the  Threshold— 169  to  174. 
Earnestness  in  Demands — 281. 
Earth— Ages  of  (see  Ages  of  Earth). 
"    Fourth  Planet — 233. 
"    Keynote  of  Is  Fa. — 233. 
"     Why  It  Does  Not  Disintegrate— 240. 
Eddy,  Mrs.  Mary  Baker  G.— 265,  266. 
Education,  Higher,  Color  of— 235. 
Effects,  Science  Studies — 16. 
Egg,  Auric,  Defined — 128. 
Egypt— 25,  26. 

Occultism  in — 26. 
Egyptian  Bodies  Preserved  to  Use  Again— 55. 

Empire  Founded  by  Advanced  Souls — 25,  26. 
Electricity,  As  a  Cure  for  Disease — 246,  247. 
Is  a  Force — 148. 
Physicians'  Use  of— 197. 
Subdivision  of  Blue  Force — 247. 
Elementals — 171  to  176. 

Created  by  Thoughts  of  Men — 172,  173. 
Good  and  Bad — 172,  173. 
How  Created — 172. 


INDEX. 


Xlll 


Elcmentals,  Leave  Creators— 173,  174. 
"         Utilized  in  Magic— 174. 

"        "    Psychic  Phenomena — 174. 
Elimination— Of  Fear— 85  to  88,  92  to  99,  140,  141. 
"  "    Sensuousness— 88,  89,  92  to  99. 

"     Sex  Desire— 89,  90,  92  to  99- 
"  "    Vanity— 90  to  99. 

Elohim  (see  Planetary  Spirits). 

Elusinian  Mysteries,  Evolution  of  Souls  Taught  in — 27,  28. 
Embryology,  Difficulties  in — 16. 
Emotion,  Action  Upon  Regretted — 93. 

"         Ascendency  of,  in  Beginning— 133. 

Conquering  of,  Aids  in — 84,  93  to  99. 

"  "  "   Law  of  Periodicity  Helps— 94  to  96. 

"  "  "    Suggestions  Used  in— 97,  98. 

"   Thinking     With     Subjective     Mind 

Helps— 92. 

"   Will  Must  Be  Exercised  in— 92. 
Disease  Caused  by — 79,  93. 
Fear  An— 84  to  88  (see  Fear). 
Four  Basic— 84. 

Ignorance  Cause  of  Uncontrolled — 93. 
Intellect  Can  Control— 136. 

Mental  Condition  of  Objective  Mind — 81,  84,  92. 
Natural  Forces  on  Own  Plane — 84. 
Red  Color  of— 136. 
Self-Control   Necessary  in   Control   of — 70  to  83, 

92,  93- 

Sensuousness  An — 85,  88,  89  (see  Sensuousness). 
Sex  Desire  an — 85,  89,  90  (see  Sex  Desire). 
Subjective  Mind  Can  Control — 92,  93. 
Vanity  An — 85,  90  to  92  (see  Vanity). 
Entites  on  Subjective  Side  of  Life — 171,  175  to  177. 

"       Pose  as  Teachers— 185. 
Environment — Shows  Which  Consciousness  Controls — 74. 

Thoughts  Determine — 116  to  119. 
Envy  Repels  Demonstrations — 280,  281. 


XIV  INDEX. 

Epilepsy,  Mental  Treatment  of — 180,  252. 

"         Obession  Causes — 180. 
Equilibrium,  Law  of  (see  Justice,  Law  of). 
Esotericism,  Jesus  Taught— 13,  14. 
"  Teachings  of— 12,  14,  15. 

•'    for  Students— 13. 
Essence,  Divine — See  Deity. 
Essenes,  Cosmic  Forces  Used  by — 223. 
Eternity,  Length  of— 100. 
Ether— Birth  of  Minds  from— 65  to  67. 
"        Defined— 43,  44. 
"        Nature  of — 43  to  48. 

Everything,  Ability  to  do,  Can  Be  Gained — 12,  166. 
"          Belongs  to  Deity — 271. 
"          Distributed  by  Law— 271,  272. 
"          Enough  of  for  Everybody— 271. 

Exists  in  Deity — 16. 
"          Is  Unfoldment  of  Deity— 16. 
"          Law  Governs— 117,  118,  259,  261,  271. 
"          Must  Unfold — ii. 

Temporary  Use  of — 271. 
Evil,  Creation  of  Objective  Mind — 75,  76. 
"    Result  of  Ignorance— 74,  76,  94,  108. 
Evolution — As  Divine  Energy  or  Impulse — 15. 

Centers  of  Consciousness  Necessary  for — <44,  63. 
Dissolution  Alternates  With — 100. 
Occultism  Teaches — 15. 
Of  Soul— 28. 
"    Universe — 100  to  102. 
Process  of — 12,  15,  62  to  64,  114. 
Works  Through  Individuals — 63. 
Excitement,  Effect  of  on  Demands — 277  to  279. 
Exotericism,  Jesus  Taught — 13,  14. 

"  Masses  Are  Taught— 13. 

Eyesight  Failing,  How  to  Cure — 234. 
Fa,  Corresponds  to  Green  Force — 233. 
"   Keynote  of  Earth — 233. 


INDEX.  XV 

Failures  Caused  by  Fear— 73,  74,  85,  140,  141. 
Fairies  Are  Elementals — 172. 
Faith,  According  to,  Be  It  Unto  You— 272,  284. 
"      Assists  in  Conquering  Circumstances — 266. 
"      Based  Upon  Ignorance  Only  a  Hope — 267. 

"          "       Law,  Becomes  Knowledge — 267. 
"      Curers,  Healing  by,  Based  on  Law — 223. 
"      Salvation  Does  Not  Depend  Upon,  Alone — 67. 
Fear  (see  Emotion,  Conquering  of). 
"    Acquired  Before  Birth — 72. 

Acquirement  of  Objective  Mind — 72,  73. 
"    Analyzed — 85. 

Base  of  Most  Anger,  Jealousy,  Murder,  Failure,  Theft, 

Discouragement,  Despondency — 85. 
Basic  Emotion — 84,  85. 
Causes  Cancer— 73,  74. 

Failures— 73,  74,  85,  140,  141. 
"       Fevers— 244. 

Heart  Troubles — 243,  244. 
"    Color  of — 140,  230. 
"    Control  of— 85  to  88,  92  to  99. 
"    Creates  Diseases — 73,  257. 
"    Declarations  Against— 87,  88. 

Diseases  and — 257. 
"    Draws  That  Which  Is  Feared— 85. 

Elimination  of — 85  to  88,  92  to  99,  140,  141. 
"    Force  Saved  by  Fight  Directly  on— 85. 

Healing  Requires  Removal  of — 256,  257. 
"    Humanity  Shifts— 85. 

Ignorance  and — 94. 
"    Lives  Wretched  Though— 87. 
1    Objective  Mind  Cause  of — 72,  73,  93. 
"    Of  persons— 86. 
"      "    Public  Opinion— 86,  87. 
"      "   the  Unknown— 87. 
"    Suggestion  of  Punishment  Causes— 205. 


XVI  INDEX. 

Fevers— Caused  by  Fear— 244. 

"         Cure  of— 244. 

Flammarion,  Student  of  the  Occult— 15. 
Force  (see  Currents,  Cosmic). 

"      Consciousness  Ensouls — 103. 

"      Defined— 39,  40,  41,  223,  224. 
Desire  of  Deity  Is — 39. 

"      Divine  Essence  Manifesting  as  Motion  Is — 40,  41,  223, 
224. 

"       Expression  of  Divine  Mind — 36,  39,  41. 

"      Manifests  Under  Five  Aspects— 224. 

"      Misuse  of,  Brings  Destruction — 24,  84,  166,  167. 

"      Persistency  of — 100. 

"      Product  of  Mind — 40,  224. 

"      Thought  Identical  With— 40. 

"      Uses  Us  if  We  Do  Not  Use  It— 281. 
Form — Cause  of — 39. 
Defined— 41. 

"        In  Manifestation — 124,  125. 

"        Mental  Basis   for — 72. 

"        Mind  Has— 60,  62. 

"        Vibration  and — 125. 
Free  Will,  Justice  Limits,  114. 

"        "     Man  Has— 112,  114,  118,  119. 
Fright,  System  Deranged  by — 119. 
Gambling  Forbidden  to  Students — 187. 
Gases,  Consciousness  of — 35. 
Gates,  Prof.,  Experiments  of — 244. 
Genesis,  a  Chaldean  Occult  Record — 71. 
Glass,  Cause  of  Diamond  Cutting — 243. 
Goblins,  Are  Elcmentals — 172. 
God— See  Deity. 

Godhood,  Possibility  of  Reaching — 67,  108. 
Grant,  His  Self-Control— 79. 

Gravitation,  Earth  Held  Together  by  Law  of — 240. 
Greece — Colors  in  Ancient — 120. 

Materialism  in  Ancient — 27,  28. 
Occultism  in  Ancient — 27. 


INDEX.  XV11 

Green,  Fourth  Planet  Always— 233. 

Indicates  Individualization— 137,  232,  233. 
"      Intellectualization  Without  Intuition  Is— 232,  233. 
"      Normal  Color  of  Objective  Mind— 62,  133,  137,  233,  240, 

241. 

"      Positive  and  Negative — 139. 
"      Selfishness  Indicated  by— 232. 
Green  Cosmic  Force,  Acquisitiveness  Is  Autumn  Grass  Shade 

of— 232. 

"  "        Altruism  Cured  by— 234,  235. 

"          "  "        Eye  Troubles  Cured  by— 234. 

Growth  Disrupted  by— 253,  254. 
"        Healing  by— 234,  253  to  255. 

"          "  "        Individualization  is  Pastel  Green — 233. 

"  "        Nervousness  Cured  by— 234. 

Selfishness  is  Bottle  Green  Shade— 232. 
Used  in  Creating  Wealth,   Power,   Po- 
sition and  Material  Things — 233,  234. 
X-Ray,  Shade  of— 254. 
Habit — Elements  in  Forming — 94  to  97. 
Law  of  Periodicity — 94  to  97. 
Self-Control  and — 94  to  97. 

"        Suggestions  Aid  in  Overcoming — 97,  98,  211. 
Hades,  Penetrates  Physical  World — 174. 
"      Place  for  Departed  Spirits — 174. 
Harmony,  Blue  Force  Inspires — 235. 

Divine,  Color  of— 237. 
Hate,  Coerced  Love  Turns  to — 215. 

Souls  Bound  Together  by — 113,  114. 
Healers,  Magnetic — Depletion  of — 45,  194  to  196. 

Precautions  for — 195,  196. 
Healing  (see  Disease,  Cure  of) 

"       Animal  Magnetism,  How  Used  in — 194. 
"       Avoid  Sight  of  Disease  in — 250,  251. 
"       Based  on  Same  Law,  All — 223. 
Blue  Force  Used  in — 247,  255. 
Boils— 253. 


XV111  INDEX. 

Healing,  Cancers,  Tumors,  etc.— 252,  253. 
"       Concentration  to  Get  Aura  in— 254. 
"       Cosmic  Forces  Used  in— 195,  223,  250. 
"       Depletion  of  Users  of  Animal  Magnetism— 194. 
"       Destroy  Wrong  Creations — 251,  252. 

Electricity  Used  in— 246,  247. 
"       Emotions  Must  Be  Controlled  in— 79. 
Fear  Should  Be  Removed  in— 256,  257. 
"       Green  Force  Used  in— 234,  253  to  255. 
"       Growths — 253. 
"       Mental  Troubles— 252. 
Mind  Used  in— 247  to  258. 
New  Elements  Should  Be  Introduced  in— 250. 
"       Orange  Force  Used  for  Children  and  Animals,  231. 
«  "          "          "      in  Nerve  Troubles— 194. 

"   Tissue  Building— 194. 

"       Picture  of  Disease  Should  Be  Destroyed  in — 250. 
"       Positiveness  Necessary  in — 196,  252,  255. 
"       Realize,  Forces  in — 256. 

"       Red  Force  Used  to  Restore  Sex  Function  in — 230. 
"       Rules  for — 250  to  258. 
"       Suggestion  Used  in— 256,  257. 
"       Use  Few  Words  in— 257. 

"   Highest  Shade  in  Growths — 253. 
"          "    Next  Higher  Shade  or  Color— 255,  256. 
"          "    One  Hand  Only— 252,  253. 
"       Vegetable  Compounds  Used  in — 247  to  249. 
"       Vibrations  Should  Be  Raised  in — 250. 
Health — Cosmic  Currents  and — 223. 
Defined — 241. 

Emotions  Must  Be  Controlled  for — 79. 
Habit  in  Picturing — 96,  97. 
How  to  Obtain — 231,  237,  245  to  258. 
Heart,  Connects  Deity  With  Individual — 151. 
"      Troubles  Caused  by  Fear — 243  to  245. 
Heaven,  Man  Determines  His — 112. 
"       Several— 112. 


INDEX.  XIX 

Help,  Should  Be  Given— 118. 

Holman,  Referred  to— 37. 

Holmes,  Oliver  Wendell,  and  Plagiarism— 221. 

Honor,  Green  Force  Used  to  Create 233. 

Hook,  Robert— 121. 
Huxley — 20. 

"      Definition  of  Matter  by— 37- 
Huygens,  Christian — 121. 
Hypnotism— 58  to  60,  189  to  218. 

Coercion  While  Under— 198  to  200. 
Crime  Caused  Through— 198  to  200. 
"         Defined— 197,  198. 

Denials  Produce — 249. 
Disease  Not  Cured  by— 212,  213. 
Effect  of  Continuous — 213  to  215. 
Emphasizes  Objective  Mind — 211. 
First  Known  as  Braidism — 191. 
Harm  Done  by— 58. 
"         How  Broken — 202,  215. 

"    Produced— 197,  198. 
Little   Good   Done  by— 58. 
Love  Induced  by — 215. 
Malignant  Force— 215. 
Man  Is  Mind  Proved  by— 59. 
Mental  Dominion  a  Phase  of — 200  to  204. 
"         Mind  Controlled  in— 198  to  200. 

"      Is  Not  Product  of  Brain  Proven  by— 56  to  60. 
Never  Justified — 200. 
"         Obedience  in— 198,  199. 

Operator  Reaps  111  Effect  of— 214. 
"         Patrick  Case  Cited— 199. 

Persistenee  of  Mind  Proved  by — 59. 
Prevention  of— 215  to  218. 
Suggestions  and — 197  to  204. 
Will  Destroyed  by— 198,  213. 
"  "    Used  in  Breaking — 215. 

"      "    Producing— 197,  198. 


XX  INDEX. 

Ignorance — Cause  of  Disease — 242. 

"  Evil  Caused  by— 74,  94,  Jo8. 

In  Creations — 74,  276. 
"  Is   No   Protection — 50. 

Of  Laws  Is  No  Excuse — 74. 
"  Prevents  Self-Control— 93,  94. 

Uncontrolled  Emotions  Caused  by— 93- 
Vanity  and — 94. 
Imagination  Is  Creation — 157. 
Immortality,  Denned — 150. 

"  How  Acquired— 150. 

"  Hypnotism  Furnished  Scientific  Data  to  Prove — 59 

Imperishable  Isles — 21. 
Incarnations.  See  Re-Embodiment. 

"  Law  of  Justice  Causes  Certain — 116. 

"  Time  Between— 112,  113. 

Independence,  Animals  Teach — 260. 
India,  Colonists  of — 22,  26. 

"       Rich  in  Literature  and  Philosophy — 22. 
"      Temples  in — 120. 
Indigo  Force  Inspires  Music — 236. 
Individualism  Versus  Altruism  and  Selfishness — 45,  46. 
Individualization.  Deity  Teaches — 260,  261. 
"  Green  Color  of — 232,  233. 

Light  Green  Color  of — 137. 

Permits  More  of  God's  Plants  to  Manifest, 

1 06. 
"  Planet  of,  Is  Fourth— 233. 

Positive  Condition  Necessary  for — 150. 
Wise  Parent  Teaches— 260. 
Ingersoll,  Colonel,  Quoted — 31. 
Insanity,  Emotional,  Caused  by  Disembodied  Entity — 176. 

Red  Force  Causes — 229. 
"        Mediumship  Leads  to — 181. 
"        Mental  Treatment  of — 252,  253. 
"        Obsession  Cause  of  Most — 180. 
Inspiration,  Blue  Force  Causes — 235  to  237. 


INDEX.  XXI 

Intellect,  Negative  Side  of  Subjective  Mind— 83. 
Intellectualization,  Color  of— 232. 
Intelligence,  Gradation  of— 20. 
Intuition — Color  of — 237. 

Self-Control  Necessary  for— 80. 
Inventors  Use  Same  Thought  Currents— 221. 
Jealousy  Caused  by  Fear— 85. 
Jehovah,  Male  Female  Creative  Principle— 33. 
jesus_Altruism  Said  to  Have  Been  Taught  by— 45. 
"     Altruist  Desire  to  Sacrifice  Self  Like— 234,  235. 
"     Lord's  Prayer  Analysed— 273,  274. 
"     Taught  Estoterically  and  Exoterically— 13,  14- 
"     Teacher  of  "Love  Your  Enemies" — 142. 
Judaism— Jehovic,  Cabalistic  and  Talmudic— 14 

Ritualism  in — 145,  146. 

Justice,  Law  of,  Brings  Back  What  Is  Sent  Forth— 115. 
"          "      "    Causes  Certain  Incarnations— 116. 
"          "      "   Evolution  Modified  by— 114. 
"      "   Exists— 114,  116,  117. 
"      "    Free  Will  Limited  by— 114. 
"      "   Materializations  Governed  by — 161. 
"      "   Misuse  of  Mental  Force  Punished  by— 166,  167. 
"      "   Thoughts  Put  Into  Action— 114. 
"      Will  Prevail— 115  to  117. 
Keynote  of  Occultism,  Duality  of  Atom  Is — 41. 

"    Our  World  Is  Fa— 233. 

Knowledge,  Assimilated  on  Subjective  Planes — in. 
Higher  Taught  by  Occultism — 188. 
How  Gained — 18. 
Received  from  Demands — 154. 

Through  Meditation— 150  to  157. 
Land  of  the  Gods — 21. 

Latent  Ability  to  Know  Everything  in  Man — 237. 
Law,  Divine  Works  Automatically  and  Impartially — 214. 
Governs  Everything — 117,  118,  259,  261,  271. 
Ignorance  of,  No  Excuse — 74. 

Of  Demand  and  Supply  (see  Demand  and  Supply,  Law 
of). 


XX11  INDEX. 

Law  Of  Equilibrium  (see  Justice,  Law  of). 
"      "   Justice  (see  Justice,  Law  of). 
"      "    Opulence  (see  Opulence,  Law  of). 
"      "    Periodicity  (see  Periodicity,  Law  of). 
"      "    Re- Embodiment  (see  Re-Embodiment,  Law  of). 
"     Practice,  How  to  Build— 159. 
Laws,  Govern  Every  Detail — 117,  118,  259,  261,  271. 
"      Method  of  Manifestation  of  Deity — 103,  104. 
"      Natural,  Are  Plan  of  Deity — 103. 
"      of  Each  Cosmic  Day — 103,  104. 
"       "   Universe— 104. 
"      Same  for  Each  Side  of  Life— 103,  108. 
Lemuria,  Man  Existed  on  in  Third  Age — 21,  22. 

"        Sinking  of — 22. 
Lemurians — Fate  of — 22. 

-Reincarnation  of — 23. 

Life  Force  (see  Orange  Force;  Magnetism,  Animal). 
"        "      Body  Preserved  by— 135. 

"      Builds  Life— 127,  134. 
"        "      Orange  Colored— 134,  135,  231. 
"        "      Planetary  Spirits  Radiate — 102. 
"        "      Solar  Deities  Radiate — 102. 
"        "      Vegetation  Animated  by — 106,  107. 
Formed  by  Molecules — 239. 
Human,  Prolonged  Many  Years — 119,  242. 
Light  Blue  Force  Inspires  Literature — 237. 

"      Colored  Glass  Modifies  Ray  of — 52. 
Lights,  Zodiacal,  are  Cosmic  Currents — 225. 
Literary  Thought,  Color  of — 235,  237. 
Liver,  Cause  of  Torpid — 242. 

"     Vibration  of,  Is  Brown — 241. 
Loeb,  Prof.,  Conditions  for  Life  by — 242. 
Logos,  Subjective  Mind  Is  the — 68. 
Lord's  Prayer  Analyzed — 273,  274. 

Loudres,  Priests  of  the  Waters,  healing  by,  Based  On  Law- 
223. 


INDEX.  XX111 

Love.  A  Constructive  Force— 142,  157. 
"     Coerced  Turns  to  Hate— 215. 
'•'     Color  of,  Yellow— 142,  157,  237. 
"     Deflects  Lower  Vibrations— 143. 
"     Divine— 157,  158,  237. 
"     God  Is— 114. 

"     Greatest  Force  on  This  Planet— 142. 
"     Human  Creation  of— 158. 
"     Hypnotism  Produced,  Turns  to  Hate— 215. 
"     Justice  and,  Are  the  Same— 114. 
"     Right  to  Ask  for  Honest— 215. 
'      Souls  Bound  Together  by— 113,  114. 
"     Spiritual  and  Creative,  Yellow— 237. 
"     Your  Enemies,  Good  Reason  for— 142. 
Magi — Power  of — 26 
Magic,  Ceremonial,  Defined — 27. 
"      Laws  Used  in— 15. 
"      Practice  of— 15,  174- 
"      Red  Force  Used  for  Destruction  in— 230. 

"       "    Help  in— 230,  231. 

"      White  and  Black,  Distinction  Between — 204,  230,  231. 
Magnetic   Connections,    Concentration   Produces— 154,   161, 

281. 

"  "  Thought  Makes— 154,  160,  161,  281. 

Magnetism,  Animal,  (see  Orange  Force;  Life  Force). 
*'          Best  Condition  for— 193. 

Curative  Power  of — 194,  195. 

Depletion  of — 194,  195,  196. 

Malicious,  Christian  Science  Believes  is 

Personal  Devil — 76. 
Occult  Force— 29. 
Used  in  Mesmerism — 192. 
Utilized  by  Blending  Auras— 194. 
Man,  A  Centre  of  Consciousness — 87,  112. 
Adepts  Aid  Development  of— 27,  64. 
Assisted  by  Universal  Consciousness— 68,  260,  261. 
Cannot  Imagine  the  Non-Existent— 272. 


XXIV  INDEX. 

Man,  Color  of  Early,  a  Dirty  Brown — 240. 
"     Denizens  of  Next  Plane  Use— 176,  177. 
"     Destiny  of— 68. 

"     Destructive  Things  Created  by  Man — 173. 
"     Determines  His  Own  Birth— 118. 
"     Early  Conceptions  of — 53  to  58. 
"     Elementals  Created  by  Thoughts  of — 172. 
"     God  Easily  Reached  by — 151. 
"     Habitation  of,  Between  Embodiments — 109  to  112. 
"     Not  Bound  by  Time  or  Space — 17. 
"     Psychic,  Denned— 81. 
"     Realizes  He  Is  Mind— 17,  58,  59. 

"     Sensual,  Becomes  Earthbound  After  Excarnation — in. 
"     The  Magnetic  Field  Around — 126,  127. 
"     The  Real,  Defined— 72,  81. 
Mass,  Sung  in  Certain  Key — 175. 
Masters,  Atlantis  Helped  by — 23. 

"        Custodians  of  Occultism — 20. 

"        Defined— 19. 

"        Divine  Stage  Reached  by — 19. 

Grades  of — 19. 

"        Teachers  of  Occultism — 19,  23,  186. 
Mata,  the  Magician,  Quoted — 65,  66. 
Materia  Medica,  Difference  in  Vibrations  Not  Considered  in 

—248. 

Materialism,  Artistic  Form  of,  in  Greece — 27. 
Called  Discovered  Science — 13. 
Laws  Unknown  to — 15. 
Reached  Lowest  Point  in  I9th  Century — 29. 
Stamped  Belief  in  Subjective  Superstition — 13. 
Materialization  (see  Demand). 

Concentration  Hastens — 162. 
Delayed  by  Hurry — 279. 
Matrix,  Material  Thing  Drawn  to — 281. 

"        Mental  Creation  Becomes — 160,  161,  281. 


INDEX.  XXV 

Matter,  Consciousness  Ensouls — 103. 
"        Indistructibility  of— 100. 
44       Is  Persistent— 100. 
"       Particled— 37  to  39. 
"        Subject  to  Mind— 17,  41. 
44        Unparticled — 37  to  39. 

Matthews,  Dr.,  Necessary  Conditions  for  Life — 242. 
Maxwell,  J.  Clerk,  Referred  to— 37. 
Medicine,  an  Experimental  Science — 248. 
Meditation,  Analyzed— 149,  150. 

Answers  During — 156. 

Before  Creation — 167. 

Defined — 149. 

Demand  in,  Direct  to  Deity — 150,  151. 

In  Creation  of  Opulence — 272. 

Knowledge  Received  Through— 150  to  157. 

Method  of,  Proper— 153,  156,  157. 

"    Wrong— 149,  150,  152,  155. 
Necessary  for  Quick  Demonstrations — 149. 
Negative  Warnings  Against — 149,  150. 
Opulence  and — 272. 
Philosophical — 149  to  157. 
Rules  for — 149  to  157. 
Time  for— 154. 

Mediums,  Controls  of,  Are  of  Low  Order — 181. 
Force  of,  Wasted— 181. 
Frauds  Among — 181. 
Insanity  Is  Result  Among — 181. 
Instrument  for  Excarnated  Souls — 179,  180. 
Low  Order  of — 181. 

Magnetism  of,  Absorbed  by  Controls — 180. 
Moral  Character  Degenerate  in — 181. 
Obsession,  Result  of— 180. 
Passive,  Unreliable — 179,  183. 
Positive  Character,  Cannot  Be — 181,  182. 
Vampirized  by  Controls — 181. 


XXVi  INDEX. 

Mental,  Blue  Force  Is— 158. 

"        Connections  Between  Persons— 113,  114,  154- 
"        Creation  (see  Creation,  Mental). 
"        Depletion,  Treatment  of— 252. 
"        Dominion,  Coercion  by— 202,  203. 
"  "          Defined— 200  to  204,  212. 

"          Disease  Not  Cured  by— 212,  213. 
"  "          Examples  of— 202, 203. 

•<  "          Extensive  Use  of— 201  to  203. 

•«  "          Used  Without  Knowledge  of  Victim— 200. 

"       Force  Transmuted  from  Sex  Desire— 89. 

Form  Precedes  Physical— 72. 
"        Increase  of,  Force,  How  Gained— 158. 
"        Inspiration  Caused  by  Blue  Force— 235,  236. 
"        Pictures  Become  Physical  Things— 50,  172. 
"        Qualities,  Blue  is  Color  of  Higher— 235. 
"        Scientists,  Cosmic  Forces  Used  by— 222,  223. 

"          Denials  Used  by— 252. 

"  "          Depletion  of,  How  Restored— 195,  196. 

"  "          Healing  by,  Based  on  Law— 223. 

'•  "          Mistakes  of— 40. 

Workers  (see  Workers,  Mental). 
Mesmer — 'Cures  by — 189,  190. 

"          History  of— 189  to  192,  195  to  197- 
"          Student  of  Occultism— 189. 
Mesmerism,  Animal  Magnetism  Known  as — 192. 
"          Cosmic  Force— 192,  193. 
"          Nature  of— 190  to  193. 
Metaphysicians,  Differ  in  Process  of  Cures— 249. 

Effect  oif  Drugs  Denied  by  Some— 247,  248. 
Mice,  Small  Centres  of  Consciousness— 87. 
Mind— 52  to  77. 

"     Acids  in  Blood  Caused  by — 244. 
"     Animal,  Becomes  Objective  Minds— 70. 
"  "        Growth  of— 70. 

"     Body  Controlled  by  Positive— 243. 
"    Body's  Influence  on— 277. 


INDEX.  XXV11 

Mind.Brain  Does  Not  Produce— 58,  59. 
"    Color  of — 60,  61,  62. 

"     Divine  (see  Deity;   Consciousness,  Divine). 
"    Division  of— 59,  60. 
'    Drawing  Power  of — 85. 
1    During  Hypnosis — 198. 
"    Excarnated— 176,  177. 

Force  Is  Produce  of — 40,  224. 
Form  of — 60,  62. 

;    Higher  Form  of  Consciousness — 35. 
"     Impotent  Through  Non-Use — 246. 
"    In  Cure  of  Diseases — 249  to  258. 
"    Invisible  Part  of— 36. 
"     Man  Realizes  He  Is — 17,  58,  59. 
"        "    Must  Now  Use  His-68. 
"    Manifested— 36. 

Answers  Uncolored  by — 157. 
Matter  Subject  to — 17,  41. 
"     Objective,  Argument  With,  Useless— 98. 
Body  Held  Together  by— 240. 
Colds  Created  by— 97. 
Controls  of— 75   76,  81  to  84,  170. 
Dark  Side  of  Life  Appeals  to— 206. 
Demands  and— 152,   157. 
Detached— 170,  171,  176,  177. 

Sensitives  Controlled  by — 176. 
Victim  of — 176. 

Devil,  Personal,  of  Christian  Science— 76. 
Disease  and — 93. 
Disintegrate,  When  Abandoned  by  Subjective 

—179- 
Emotions  Are  Mental  Conditions  of— Si,  84, 

92. 

Evil  Is  Creation  of— 75,  76. 
Evolution  of— 68,  69,  70. 
Fear  an  Acquirement  of — 72,  73,  93. 
First  Consciousness  Reached  Is— 60. 


XXV111  INDEX. 

Mind, Objective.  Ignorance  of — 76. 
"  "        Mastery  of,  How  Obtained — 98,  99- 

"        Meditation  Influenced  by — 156,  157. 
"        Nature  of — 71,  72,  83. 

Negative  Side  of,  Is  Reason— 83. 
"  "        Origin  of— 68  to  70. 

"  "        Positive  Side  of,  Is  Desire— £3,  148. 

"        Re-incarnation  of — 170,  171. 
"  "        Self-Control  and— 92,  93. 

"        Separation  from  Subjective  Mind — 170,  171. 
"  "        Shapes  Physical  Body— 240. 

"  "        Sin  a  Creation  of— 75,  76. 

"  "        Subjective  Mind  Controlling— 81  to  84,  98. 

in,  170. 
"  "        Suggestions  by  and  to— 97  to  99,  206,  210,  211, 

272. 

Union  With  Subjective  Mind— 70  to  73,  170. 
"    Particled— 37  to  39. 
"    Persistence  of — 59. 
"    Poisons  in  Blood  Caused  by — 244. 
"     Power  of,  Unlimited — 204. 
"    Reached  by  Repeated  Thought— 204. 
"     Subjective,  Awakening  of — 83,  84. 

"  Blue  Force  Can  Be  Used  Only  by— 235. 

"  "          Classes  of— 67. 

Color  of— 62,  133,  137,  233,  240,  241. 
"  "  Creation  of— 64  to  66. 

Emotions  Conquered  by — 92. 
Evolution  of — 67. 
Functions  of— 68,  82,  83. 
"  Incarnation  of — 67,  72. 

Intuitive  Part  of  Man— 68. 

"  "  Negative  Side  of,  Is  Intellectual— 83. 

"  "  Objective  Mind  Controlled  by— 81  to  84,  in, 

170. 

Origin  of— 64  to  66. 
Positive  Side  of,  Is  Will— 83,  84,  148. 


INDEX.  XXIX 

Mind,  Subjective,  Remembers  Past— 109. 

Second  Consciousness  That  Is  Appealed  to 

-60. 
"  "  Self-Control  and— 92,  93. 

Separation  from   Objective   Mind — 170,   171, 

179- 

Strong  Enough  to  Do  Anything— 83. 
"  Suggestions  by— 97,  98,  210,  211. 

"  "  Union  with  Objective  Mind— 70  to  73,  170. 

"    Supreme  Over  Disease — 249. 
"    Synonymous  with  Consciousness — 34. 
"    Thought  Is  Product  of— 40. 
"    Universal— See  Deity. 

Unlimited  Power  of — 204. 
"    Unmanifested — 36. 
"    Visible  Part  of— 36. 

Minerals,  as  Drugs  Should  Not  Be  Used— 247,  248. 
Cohesion  Power  of,  Is  Consciousness — 34. 
Consciousness  in— 34,  35,  69,  106. 
Individualization  of — 69. 

Kingdom  Supports  Vegetable  Kingdom — 248. 
Low  Rate  of  Vibration  of — 247. 
Re-Embodiment  in — 106. 

Misuse  of  Force,  Brings  Destruction — 24,  166,  167. 
Molecules  from  Complex  Individual  Life — 239. 
Money  (see  Opulence). 

Creation  of — 159  to  161,  163,  165,  222. 
How  to  Materialize — 234,  259  to  284. 
Motion — 39,  40. 
Mount  Muru — 21. 
Music,  Blue  Force  Inspires— 235,  236. 

Color  of— 235  to  237. 
Napoleon,  His  Self  Control— 79. 
Nature,  Unaided  Fails— 63,  64. 

Worshipped  as  Deity — 32. 
Necromancy,  Spiritualism  Is,  Revamped — 178. 


XXX  INDEX. 

Negativeness,  Cause  of  Colds — 243. 

"  Death  Produced  by— 150. 

Defined— 148. 

Diseases  Produced  by— 150,  243. 
"  Evolution  Hindered  by— 150. 

"  Failure  Due  to — 46. 

"  Harm  Caused  by— 149,  150. 

"  Hypnotism  Permitted  by— 216. 

"  Immortality  Prevented  by — 150. 

'•  Meditation  Hindered  by — 150. 

"  Obsession  Results  from — 149. 

Neo-Platonists,  Cosmic  Force  Caused  by— 223. 
Nerves,  Treatment  for  Diseases  of — 194. 
Nervousness,  Green  Force  Used  for — 234. 
"  How  to  Cure— 234. 

"  Orange  Force  Used  in — 194. 

New  Thought  Scientist,  Healing  by,  Based  on  Law — 223. 
Newton,  Theory  of  Light— 121. 
Nice,  Council  of,  Immortality  Accounted  for  by — 55. 
Night,  Cosmic,  Condition  in — 101. 

"         Lasts  Eons  of  Years— 101. 
"     Of  Brahma,  Description  of— 101,  102. 
Nimbus,  Defined — 128. 
Nineteenth  Century  Materialistic — 17. 
Obsession,  Epilepsy  Caused  by — 180. 
Insanity  Caused  by — 180. 
Negativeness  Induces — 149. 

Occultism,  Atlanteans  Were  Openly  Taught — 23,  24. 
Causes  Taught  by — 16,  17. 
Cremation  Advocated  by — 175. 
Criminal  Use  of — 24. 
Definition  of — 12,  13. 
Deity  Is  All  Taught  by— 15. 
Everyone  Has   vvfhat  He  Deserves  Taught  by — 259, 

260. 

Evolution  Taught  by — 15. 
"         History  of— IT  to  31. 


INDEX.  XXXI 

Occultism— In  Catholic  Church— 28. 
"  Christian  Church— 28. 
"In  Middle  Ages— 12. 
"         Keynote  to— 41. 

Knowledge  of,  How  Gained— 18,  28,  29. 
Law  of  Being  Taught  by— 188. 
Laws  of  Divine  Unfoldment  Taught  by— 16. 
Meanings  of— 12,  13,  15. 
'•         Misuse  of,  Brings  Quick  Destruction— 24. 

Original  Research  One  Way  of  Studying— 18. 
Perfect  Sciences — 20. 

"         Priesthood  Contained  Knowledge  of— 28. 
"         Results  Gotten  Quicker  Through— 234. 
"         Science  of  Cause  and  Effect — 17. 
"  "        "    Divine  Unfoldment— 15,  16. 

"         Secret  Societies  Depositories  of— 28,  29. 
Self-control  Necessary  in — 80. 
Survivors  Will  All  Be  Students  of— 50. 
"         Taught  in  Greece— 27. 

Teachers  of— 18,  19,  23,  186. 
Teaches  No  Sacrifice  of  Self — 44,  45. 
Verification  of— n,  12,  21. 
World  Now   Ready  For — 29. 
Opulence,  Creation  of — 259  to  284. 

"  "        "    Anger  Repels  in— ^280,  281. 

"    Centers  Used  in— 264  to  266,  268. 

"    Concentration  Required  in— 234. 

"    Creation  Required  in-^232,  233. 

"    Declare  "God  Has  Met  My  Demand" 

in— 282,  283. 

"  Deliberativeness  in — 279. 
"  Demand  in — 272  to  275. 

"       Until  It  Comes— 272. 
'    Demands  Should  Be  Specific — 275,  276. 
"    Demonstrations  Prove— 267,  268. 
"  "         "     Desire  Strongly  in— 277. 


XXXll  INDEX. 

Opulence,  Creation  of.  Discontent  Repels— 280,  281. 
'•  "         "    Earnestness  Required  in — 281. 

"  "         "    Envy  Repels— 280,  281. 

"  "        ."     Everything  Belongs  to  Divine  Mind— 

271. 
"     Everything  Distributed  by  Law— 271, 

272. 
"  "        "  Everything   Exists   in   Divine   Mind— 

270,  271. 
"  "         "     Excitement  Affects— 277  to  279. 

"     Faith  in— 266,  267. 
"  "         "    Frequency  of   Demand   Required   in— 

281. 

"  "         "    Green  Force  Used  in— 233,  234. 

"  "         "     Illustrations  of — 265  to  270. 

"    Law  of— 233,  234,  259  to  284. 
*  "         "    Loss  of  Self-Control  Repels— 280,  281. 

"    Master  of— 266,  267. 
"  "         "    Meditation  Before— 272. 

"  "         "     Positiveness    Necessary    in— 272,    273, 

275- 

"  "         "     Quietness  in— 277. 

"  "         "    Realize    You    Are    Using    Immutable 

Law  in — 282. 
"  "         "     Specific    Demands    required    in— 275, 

276. 

"     Speculation  Scatters  Force  in— 280. 
"        Mental  Workers  Draw— 264,  268,  269. 
"        Physical  Mental  Workers  Draw— 263,  268,  269. 
*'        Physical  Workers  Never  Gain — 264. 
Orange  Force  (see  Life  Force).     "Magnetism,  Animal." 
"       Animal  Magnetism  Is — 192,  193. 

Animals  Treated  With— 231. 
"       Children  Treated  With— 231. 
"       Cosmic  Force — 224. 
"  "       Depletion  Caused  by  Using — 194. 

"          "       Nerve  Troubles  Helped  by— 194. 


INDEX.  xxxiii 

Orange  Force,  Plants  Stimulated  by— 231. 
"          "       Tissue  Builder— 194. 
"          "       Universal  Life  Principle— 134,  135,  193,  231. 

"       Utilised  by  Blending  Auras — 194. 
Order,  Blue  Force  Inspires— 235. 

"       of  Universal  Harmony — 190. 
Organization,  Blue  Force  Inspires — 235. 
Organs,  have  Individual  Vibrations — 241. 
Osteopathy,  as  a  Cure  for  Disease — 246. 

Depletion  in  Practice  of — 195,  196. 
Pain,  Escape,    from — 80,  82. 

"     Evidence  That  Objective   Mind   Has   Not   Been   Con- 
quered— 82. 

Palmistry,  Revival  of — 17. 
Particled  Matter — 37  to  39. 
Patrick,  Hypnotic  Influence  of — 199. 
Paul,  Mysticism  of — 14. 
Peace,  Self-Control  Necessary  for — 80. 
Periodicity,  Law  of,  Concentration  Aided  by — 163,  164. 
"      "    Defined-94,  95- 
"      "    Habits  Broken  by  Use  of— 96. 

"      Formed  "      "     "  —94  to  96. 
"      "    Universe  Governed  by — 103,  104. 
Periods  of  Evolution — 21. 
"      Fifth— 25  to  29. 

First  and  Second — 21. 
"      Fourth— 23  to  25. 
"      Third— 21,  22. 

Phenomena,  Vibration  Causes  of  Physical — 42. 
Photosphere,  Is  Book  of  Life — 182. 
Physical  Form,  Preceded  by  Mental  Creation— 72. 
"       Life,  Orange  Force  Causes— 134,  135. 
*       Phenomena,  Vibration  Cause,   of — 42. 
Resurrection  of,  Taught — 55. 
Universe  Defined — 40. 
Vanity  Must  Be  Conquered — 90. 
"       Workers  (see  Workers,  Physical). 


I 


XXXIV  INDEX. 

Physicists  Mistaken  in  Believing  Matter  Is  All — 40. 

"  "         "    Not   Recognizing  Conscious   Side  of 

Atom — 41. 

Physico   Mental  Workers  (see  Workers,  Physico  Mental). 
Pictures,  Mental,  Finally  Materialize — 50,  96,  97. 

First  Mental  Things— 50. 
"        Materialization  of — 96,  97. 
"  "        Matrix  Formed  by — 160. 

Photographs  Made  of— 160  to  162. 
Pineal  Gland,  Center  to  Function  on  Subjective — 184. 
Plane  (see  Subjective  Planes). 
Planet,  Ages  of  (see  Ages  of  Earth). 
First— 67. 

For  Subjective  Minds — 67. 
Fourth— 67,  68,  82. 

"      Always  Green — 233. 
"       Incarnation  Upon  Another — in. 
Planetary  Chain,  Consists  of  Seven  Planets — 233. 
Evolution  Takes  Place  on— 67. 
Spirits,  Great  Beings— 66. 
"  "       Life  Force  Radiated  by— 102. 

"  "       Planets  Created  by— 104,  105,  160. 

Subjective  Minds  Created  by— 65,  66. 
Poise,  Students  Required  to  Gain — 178. 
Poison.  Disease  Only  Changed  by — 247. 
"       Low  Rate  of  Vibration — 247. 
"       Mind  Causes  Creation  of — 244. 
Position,  Green  Force  Used  to  Create — 233. 
Positiveness,  Defined — 148. 

Demands  Should  Have — 273,  274,  279. 
Evolution  Requires — 46,  150,  180. 
Health  Restored  by— 180,  196. 
Hypnotism  Prevented  by— 215,  216. 
Immortality  Depends  Upon— 150. 
"  Mediumship  Prevented  by — 181,  182. 


INDEX.  XXXV 

Positiveness,  Necessity  of,  for  Opulence — 272,  273,  275. 

"      "    Progress— 46,  150,  180,  196. 
"  "  "    in  Prayer— 275. 

Required  in  Healing— 196,  252,  255. 
Vampirization  Prevented  by — 130. 
Power,  Misuse  of  Brings  Destruction — 24,  166,  167. 
5rayer,  Different  Forms  of— 145  to  147,  151,  273  to  275. 
'        Lord's,  Analyzed— 273,  274. 
"        Negative  as  a  Rule — 275. 

"        Positiveness  Required  in,  to  Be  Efficacious — 275. 
"        Rational — 147. 
"        Should    be    Directed    to    Universal    Consciousness — 

150  to  152. 
Precipitation,  Denned — 162. 

Highest  Form  of  Creation — 162. 
Preservation  of  Self,  First  Duty  to  God — 44. 
Priests,  Occult  Knowledge  Possessed  by — 28,  175. 

"        Students  of  Adepts — 27. 
Probation  of  Seven  Years  for  Students — 186. 
Procreation,  Red  Color  of — 233. 
Protestantism,  Prayer  in — 145  to  147. 
Psychismi  Animal  Minds  Contacted,  in — 174. 
"         Avoid  Study  of— 168. 

Dwellers  on  Threshold  Met  in,  169  to  175. 
Elementals  in — 171,  172. 
Used  in— 174. 

Humanity  Approaching— 168,  170. 
Ignorant  Influenced  by — 178. 
Imposition  of  Spirit  Controls  in — 180,  181. 
Nothing  Offered  Students  Now  by— 188. 
Objective  Minds  Contacted  in — 170,  171. 
Sensitives  Study — 177,  178. 

Used  in— 177,  178. 
Students  Protected  by  Cosmic  Force  in  Studying— 

178. 

Students   Required   to   Develop   Before   Studying— 
178. 


XXXVI  INDEX. 

Psychism, Subdivision  of  Occultism — 168. 

Threshold  in,  Souls  Must  Pass  Over— 175. 
Psychometry,  Denned — 128. 
Public  Opinion,  Fear  of— 86,  87. 
Purgatory,  Location  of — 174,  175. 

'"  Souls  Freed  from,  by  Masses— 175. 

Quimby,  Dr.,  Mrs.   Eddy   Studied  Under— 266. 
Reason,  Actions  Should  Be  Governed  by — 78. 
"       Emotions  Overcome,  in  Beginning— 133. 
"       Negative  Side  of  Objective  Mind — 83. 
Red,  Cclor  of  Anger— 142,  143,  230. 
"        "       "    Animal  Propensities— 135,  136. 
<:        "       "   Emotional  Nature— 135,  136. 
"        <v       "   Fear— 140,  230. 
"        <c       "    Procreation — 233. 
"    Cosmic  Force,  Black  Magicians  Use,  for  Destruction — 

230. 

"        Body  Disrupted  by — 230. 
"        Crimson  Indicates  Sex  Desire — 230. 
"        Darker  Shade  Indicates  Fear — 230. 
"        Emotional  Insanity  Caused  by — 229. 
"  "        Emotions    Result    from— 135,    136,   288. 

"          "  "        Lowest  Force  in  Man— 135. 

"          "  "        Natural   Force  in  Animals— 228. 

"  "        Scarlet  Indicates  Anger— 230. 

"  "        Sex  Functions  Restored  by— 230. 

'*  "        White     Magicians     Use,     for     Punish- 

ment— 230,  231. 

Wine  Color  Indicates  Sense   Gratifica- 
tion— 230. 
Re-embodiment,  A.  Cosmic  Law — 104. 

Condition  of  Man  Between  Incarnations — 105 

to  112. 

Consciousness  Subject  to — 108. 
"  Deity   Re-embodies    Itself— 103. 


INDEX.  XXXV11 

Re-embodiment,  Fact  in  Nature — 105,  106. 

In  Animal  Kingdom — 107  to  109. 
"  Mineral        "        — 106. 
"  Vegetable     "       — 106,  107. 
Law  of— 101  to  119. 
Man   Determines   Time   and   Condition  of — 

112,  117. 

Manifests   Everywhere— 105.. 
Not  Disproven  by  Inability  to  Remember 

—109. 

Of  Objective  Mind— 170,  171. 
"    Subjective  Mind— 67,  72. 
Time  Required  for — 112  to  114. 
Upon  Other  Planets— in. 

Reform,  Carried  on  Through  Individuals — 63. 
Re-incarnation  (see  Re-embodiment;    Incarnation). 
Religions,  Esoteric  for  Students — 13,  14. 

Exoteric  for  the  Masses — 13,  14. 
Remembrance  of    Past    Lives,    Condition    Necessary    for— 

109. 

Reptiles  Produced  by  Poisonous  Thoughts — 173. 
Rest,  Subjectve  Planes  Place  of — in,  112. 
Resurrection,  Physical,  Taught — 55. 
Ritualism,  Defined — 145. 

In  Brahminism — 145. 
"    Buddhism — 14^. 
'    Christianity — 145,   146. 
"   Judaism — 145. 
Roscicrucians,  Cosmic  Force  Used  by — 223. 

Occult  Body— 28. 

Sacrifice,  Occultism  Teaches  No,  of  Self — 44-45. 
Saint   Germain,  an  Occultist — 190. 
Salvation  Not  by  Faith  Alone — 67. 
Saviours  of  Men,  Recognition  of — 92. 
Science,  Chemistry  Once  an  Occult — 12. 
"        Esoteric  for  Students — 13. 
"        Exoteric  for  the  Masses — 14. 


XXXV111  INDEX. 

Science,  Treats  of  Effects. 

Unknown   Now   Being   Investigated  by — 15. 
Scriptures,  Actions  Controlled  by — 78. 
Secret  Societies,  Occult  Knowledge  in — 28. 
Seers  Function  on  Subjective  Planes — 61. 
Self,  Occultism  Teaches  No  Sacrifice  of — 44,  45. 

Preservation,  First  Duty  to  God — 44. 
Self-control,  Aids  in — 92  to  99. 

1  Clairaudience   requires — 80. 

Clairvoyance  "      — 80. 

Concentration         "      — 80. 
Creation  "      —80. 

"          Emotions  and— 79  to  83,  92,  93. 
''  "          Greatness    Cannot    Be    Obtained   Without— 

78,  79. 

Habit  Utilized  in— 94  to  97. 
Health  Requires— 79. 
Ignorance  Prevents — 93,  94. 
Intuition    Cannot    Be    Awakened   Without — 

80. 

Means   Control  of  Objective  Mind  by  Sub- 
jective— 81. 

Occultism  Requires— 80. 
"  "          Pain  May  Be  Eliminated  by— 80. 

Peace  Cannot  Be  Attained  Without— 80. 
Practice  of,  Is  Hard— 78. 
Rules  for — 92  to  99. 
Students  Must  Have— 80. 

"  "          Subjective  Mind  Used  in— 92,  93- 

"  "          Success  Unattained  Without— 79. 

"  "          Suggestion  Used  in— 97,  98. 

"  Will  Necessary  in — 92,  93. 

Selfishness,  Green  Is  Color  of— 232,  233. 

"  Versus  Altruism  and  Individualism— 45,  46. 

Sensation,  Manifestation  of  Objective  Mind — 81. 
"  Reason  Displaced  by,  at  First— 133. 

"          Vibration  Causes— 42. 


INDEX.  XXXIX 

Sense,  Gratification,  Red  is  Color  of — 230. 
Sensitives,  Demizens  of  Next  Plane  Use — 177. 
Influences  on— 176  to  178. 
Moods  Produced  in — 176. 
Psychism  Investigated  by — 178. 
Psychometrizing    Done    by — 128. 
Will  of  Weak— 177. 
Sensuousness,  Analysed — 88. 

Asceticism  Is  Moral  Reaction  from — 88,  89. 

Basic  Emotion— 85,  88. 

Earthbound  on  Subjective  Plane  Caused  by 

in. 

Elimination   of — 88,  89   (see   Emotion,   Con- 
quering of). 

Over  Indulgence  in,  Is  Perversion — 88,  89. 
Regulation  of,  Occultism  Teaches — 89. 
"   Wisest   Course-88,  89. 
Sex  Desire,  Anaylsed — 89. 

Basic  Emotions — 85,  89. 

Bodies,      LJnmarred      by      Passion,      Created 

Through— 89. 

Chemical  Affinity  in  Minerals  Is — 89. 
Control  of,  Should  Be  Gained— 89. 
Crimson  Color  of — 230. 

Elimination    of — 89,    90    (see    Emotions,    Con- 
quering of). 

Force  of  Life  and  Love— 89. 
Mental  Force  Made  from— 89. 
Regulations  of,  Wisest  Course— 89,  90. 
Function  Restored  by  Red  Force — 230. 
Silence,  Going  Into,  Process  of  Meditation — 147,  152. 
Silver  Cord  Binds  Soul  to  Body— 175. 
Sin,  a  Creation  of  Objective  Mind — 75,  76. 
"     Original— 75,  76. 
"     Result  of  Ignorance— 108,  243. 
Smoking,  Overcome  by  Suggestion — 97,  98. 


Xl  INDEX. 

Society  for  Psychical  Research,  Evidence  Collected  by — 60. 

Mind    Has    Form   Agreed 

by— 60. 
Psychism    Studied    by— 57, 

178. 
Spiritualistic      Phenomena 

Verified    by— 182. 

Solar  Deities  (see  Deities,  Solar). 
Soul  (see  Mind). 
"      Bound  to  Body — 175. 
"      Color  of,  Determined  by  Character — 133. 
"      Courageous,  Make  Mistakes — 18. 
"      Early  Conceptions  of — 53  to  58. 
"     Evolution  of — 28,  108. 
"      Godhood  Possibility  of — 108. 
"      Hate  Binds,  Together— 113,  114. 
"      Latent   Ability  to   Know   Everything   Possessed  by — 

108,  237. 

"     Love  Binds,  Together — 114. 
"      of  Animals — 69,  174. 
"      "  Bulb— 107. 

Sound,  Vibrations  Cause  of — 41,  42. 
Speculation,  Avoid — in  Demands — 280,  281. 
Spencer,  Herbert,  Discussion  of  Force  and  Matter — 100,  105. 
Spinal  Troubles,  Treatment  of — 252. 
Spirit  Controls,  Crime  Traceable  to — 177. 

Friends   Impersonated   by — 179. 
"  '*'  Low  Order— 181. 

Spirits,  Planetary  (see  Planetary  Spirits). 
Spiritualism,  Aspects  of— 178,  179,  182,  183. 

"  Eternal  Progression  Taught  in — 57. 

"  Evidence  Collected  by — 60. 

Necromancy  Revamped  Is — 178. 
Passivity  Required  in — 179. 
"  Practice  of— 178,  179,  182. 

"  Vampirization  in— 179  to  181. 


INDEX. 


xli 


Spirituality,  Tendency  Towards  Now — 29. 

Yellow  Color  of— 138,  237. 
Students,  Clairvoyance   Taught— 184. 

Coercion  Never  Used  on — 186. 
Experience   of   Seventy-two — 187. 
Faults  of— 187. 
Great  Ones  Help  All— 186. 
Mental  Development  Required  of — 178. 
People  Finally  Become — 18. 
Poise  Required  of— 178. 

Prepared  to  Look  Down  on  Psychic  Plane— 175. 
Protected  by  Cosmic  Forces — 178. 
Self  Control  Must  Be  Gained  by— 80. 
Seven  Years'  Probation  of— 186. 
Teachers  Demanded  by  Most— 185. 
"  "         Made  from— 19,  186. 

Unattached,  Without  a  Master— 185. 
Study,  Amount  of,  different  in  Each  Life — 18. 
Subjective  Planes,   Ancients  Experimented  Upon — 12,   13. 
"        Clairvoyants  Function  on — 61. 
"        Denizens    of — 176,    177. 
"        Elementals  formed  on — 171  to  176. 

Entities  on — 149,  171,  175  to  177,  185. 
"        First  Defined — 174. 

Forces  Strong  Upon— 18. 
"        Knowledge  Assimilated  on — in. 

Life  Manifests  as  Orange  Force  Upon— 

134- 

"        Man  Contacts  as  He  Develops — 175. 
"        Man    Rests   on    Between   Incarnation — 

no  to  112. 

Number  of— 109  to  in,  174,  175. 
"        Seers   Function  on — 61. 
"        Zones  on— 1 10,   in,   174,   175. 
Substance,  Atom  Has,  Side — 41. 

Divine  Essence  Manifesting  as  Matter — 40. 


xlii  INDEX. 

Success — Attributed  to  Outside  Causes — 222,  223. 
Dependent  Upon  Self-Control — 79. 
Laws  Governing — 222,  223. 
Suggestion,  Acceptions  of,  Dependent  Upon  Recipient — 204, 

205,  208,  216. 

Aid  in  Life  Received  from — 207. 
Atlanteans  Destroyed  Through  Misuse  of — 204. 
Audible  Denned — 205. 

"        Examples  of — 205,  206. 
"  Auto,  Denned— 206,  211. 

"     Should  Be  Made  by  Subjective  to  Objec- 
"  tive — 211. 

Beneficial,  Examples  of— 98. 
"  Coercion  by,  Not  Right— 207  to  209. 

Constructive,  Examples  of — 205  to  207. 
"  "  Should  Be  Used— 205  to  207. 

Destruction  Follows  Misuse  of — 204. 
"  Destructive  Examples  of — 205,  206. 

"  Double,  to  Objective  and  Subjective — 210,  211. 

"  Drinking  Overcome  by— 97,  98,  208,  209. 

Emotions  Conquered  by — 97,  98. 
Evil  Use  of— 208. 
"  Examine  All,  Carefully — 216,  217. 

Grows  With  Use— 208. 
"  Healing  by— 256,  257. 

"  Hetro,  Defined — 206. 

"      Examples  of — 207,  208. 
"  Hypnotism  Produced  by — 197  to  200. 

"  Kinds  of— 205,  206. 

Mental  Dominion  by — 200  to  204. 
"  Moral  Stimulus— 208. 

"  Objective  Mind  Overcome  by— 97,  98,  210,  211. 

"  "  "       Readily   Accepts    Destructive — 

206. 

"  Obstructions  Removed  by — 207,  208. 

"  Parents  Misuse,  on  Children— 205. 


INDEX.  xliii 

Suggestion,  Power  of,  Unlimited — 204. 
Rejection  of— 205,  208. 
Right,  May  Be  Made— 207. 

to  Use— 207. 

"        Use  of— 204,  207  to  211. 
Rules  for  Proper  Use— 209  to  211. 
Silent,  Denned— 205  to  208. 

"       Stronger  Than  Audible— 206. 
Smoking  Overcome  by — 97,  98. 
Subjective  Mind  Using— 97,  98,  210,  211. 
Teachers  Constantly  Make,  to  Children— 205. 
Wrong,  Example  of— 205. 
Sun,  Centre  of  Life — 63. 
"    Fears  Dispelled  by — 49. 
"    Orbit  of— 104. 
"    Treatment  from — 49. 

Vibration  Strongest  from — 49. 
Surplus,  Only  Should  Be  Given  Away — 235. 
Sympathy  Should  be  Controlled  in  Healing — 196. 
Teachers,  Classes  of — 19,  186. 

Demanded  by  Most — 185. 
Never  Try  to  Control  Anyone — 185,  186. 
of  Occult  Law — 18,  20.  185. 
Subjective  Entities  Pose  as — 185. 
World— 142. 

Theft  Caused  by  Fear— 85. 
Telepathy,  Based  on  Law— 17,  204. 

Defined— 130,  131. 

Thought,  Aura  Determined  by  Intensity  of — 132. 
Badness  Not  a  Quality  of— 147,  148. 
Careless,  Brings  No  Result— 153. 
Cause  of  Vibration — 62,  n.i,  130,  131,  148. 
Character  Made  by — 113,  119. 
Color  of,  Determined  by  Quality — 132,  133. 
Concreteness  Necessary  in — 153. 
Consciously  Directed,  Brings  Results — 48. 


INDEX. 

Thought,  Creations  Constantly  Result  from — 113,  157. 

Creative  Always  in  Pictures — 153,  160. 

Currents  of — 220  to  223. 

Defined — 147,  148. 

Destiny  of  Man  Affected  by  Every — 119. 

Divine  Consciousness  Impressed  by — 50,  273,  274. 

Elementals  Created  by — 172. 

Environment  Determined  by — 113,  116  to  119. 

Examine  All,  Carefully — 217. 

Family  Determined  by — 117. 

Force  Is,  or  Result  of — 40,  41,  128,  223,  224. 

Goodness  Not  a  Quality  of — 147,  148. 

Kind  of  Depends  Upon  Its  Use — 147,  148. 

Law  of  Equilibrium  Put  in  Action  by — 114. 

Licentious,  Becomes  Vermin — 173. 

Mind  Produces — 40,  147. 
"         Negative,  Low  Rate  of  Vibration— 14?. 

Persons  Connected  by — 113,  114,  154. 

Photographs   of— 161,   162. 
"         Physical  Body  Affected  by — 109,  119,  258. 

Poisonous,  Produce  Reptiles — 173. 
"         Positive,  High  Rate  of  Vibration— 148. 

Power  of— 17,  113,  114,  131. 

Sent  in  Any  Direction — 17. 

Stinging,   Produces  Wasps,   Mosquitos,  etc. — 173. 

Things  Are — 5cx 

Vibration,  Chief  Characteristic  of— 148. 
"        Will  Determines  Direction  of — 148,  149. 
"  "  Intensity  of— 148. 

"  "  Nature  of— 148. 

Tobacco,  Students  Forbidden — 187. 
Treatment,  How  to  Give — 48. 

"  Received  from  Sun— 49. 

Trinity  of  Consciousness,  Force  and  Substance — 41. 
Truth  Always  Demonstrable— II,  12. 
Tumor,  Treatment  of— 253. 


INDEX. 

Universal  Consciousness  (see  Deity;   Consciousness  Divine), 
Universe,  Deity  Manifests  as — 101. 

"          Evolution  and  Dissolution  Alternate  in— 100. 
Physical,  Basis  of— 39. 

Creation  of — 101  to  105. 
"          Definition  of— 40. 
"          Manifestation  of— 39,  100. 
Unknown,  Fear  of  the — 87. 
Unparticled  Matter— 37  to  39. 
Unseen,  Fear  of  the — 87. 
Vampirization,  by  Invalids — 129,  130. 
Defined — 129. 
Of  Spiritualists— 179,  180. 
Of  Young  by  Old— 130. 
Prevention  of — 130. 
Vanity  Analyzed — 90,  91. 
"      Basic  Emotion— 85,  90. 

"      Causes  Practice  of  Artificial  Clairvoyance— 184. 
"      Conquering   of,    Necessary — 90   (see   Emotion   Con- 
quering). 
"      Control  of— 90  to  99. 

Evolution  Greatly  Retarded  by — 91. 
Ignorance  Shown  by — 94. 
"      Mental  Aspect  of — 90. 

"      Hard  to  Recognize— 90. 
Physical  Aspect  of — 90. 
Spiritual  Aspect  of — 91,  92. 

Martyrdom  Crushes  Out — 91. 
Must  Pass  Away — 92. 
Reformers  Actuated  by — 91. 
Subtleness  of,  Makes  Hard  to  Conquer — 90. 
"      Unrecognized  by  Its  Possessor — 90,  91. 
Vegetable  Compounds  in  Cure  of  Diseases — 247  to  249. 

Kingdom,  Animal  Kingdom  Supported  by — 248. 
Consciousness  in — 35,  69,  106,  107. 
Individualization  in — 69. 


INDEX. 

Vegetable  Kingdom,   Mineral  Kingdom  Supports — 248. 
Re-embodiment  in — 106,  107. 
Souls  in — 107. 

Vermin,  Licentious  Thoughts  Cause — 173. 
Vibration,  All  Is — 42. 

Cannot  Lie — 61. 

Cause  of  Physical  Phenomena — 42. 

"       "  Sensation — 42. 
Character  Cause  of  Man's — 62. 
Disease  Results  from  Law — 242. 
Disk  to  Register— 131. 
"          High  and  Low— 129. 
"          Instruments  Made  to  Measure— 131,  132. 
of  Color — 42. 

"   Diamond  and  Glass  Compared — 243. 
"   Man— 62. 
"    Sound — 41. 
"   Thought  Forces— 66. 
"    Water  Raised— 35. 
Power  Results  from  High — 46. 
Produces  Form  and  Color — 121  to  125. 
Sun— 49. 

Sympathetic — 219. 

"         Thought  Causes— 62,  in,  130,  131,  148. 
Visible  Part  of  Mind— 36. 
Von  Reichenbach,  Karl — 126. 
Wachmeister,  Countess — 203,  204. 
Wasps,  Produced  by  Biting  Thoughts— 173. 
Wealth  (see  Opulence). 
White,  Abnormality  Indicated  by— 132. 
Will— Awakening  of,  Our  Great  Object— 83. 
"     Clairvoyance  by  Effort  of— 184,  185. 
"      Cultivation  of— 149. 
"    Desire  Is  Weaker  Than— 84. 
"     Determines  Direction  of  Thought — 148,  i-do. 
"  "  Intensity    "          "       —148. 

Nature      "          "       —148. 


INDEX.  xlvii 

Will — Domination  of — 209. 
"     Exercise  of — 92. 
Force  of  the — 149. 
Free,  Justice  Limits — 114. 

Man  Has — 112,  114,  119. 
"      Hypnotism  and— 197  to  199,  215. 

Broken  by — 215. 

Positive  Side  of  Subjective  Mind — 83,  84,  148. 
Self-control  and — 92,  93. 
Wilmans,  Mrs.  Helen — 269,  270. 
Wines,  Students  Forbidden— 187. 
Wisdom,  Color  of— 237. 

"       Demand  Highest,  of  Deity — 99. 
"        How  Acquired — 50. 
Wood,  Henry — 212. 
Work,  Defined— 262. 

"       Deity  Does,  in  Each  Cosmic  Day,  262. 
Everyone  Must,  Who  Progresses — 262. 
"      Mental,  Included  by — 262,  263,  283. 
Workers,  Classes  of,  Defined — 263,  264. 

Mental,  Conscious  Users  of  the  Law — 264  to  268. 
"      Mind  Used  by— 264. 

Opulence  Gained  by — 264. 
"      Physical  Lower  Than— 263,  268. 
"      Success  Obtained  by — 262  to  270. 
Physical,  Defined— 263. 

Mental  Are  Higher  Than— 263,  268. 
Opulence  Never  Manifests  in — 264. 
Physico-Mental,  Mind  Used  by— 263. 

Opulence  Gained  by — 264. 
Students  Among — 268,  269. 
Worlds,  Creation  of — 103  to  105. 

"        Death  of— 105. 
X-Ray,  Shade  of  Green  Force — 224. 


xlviii  INDEX. 

Yellow  Cosmic  Force, Difficult  to  See— 132,  133. 
"  "  "      Divine  Harmony— 237. 

"      Highest  Force  on  Earth— 237. 
"  "  "      Intuition  Is— 237. 

"      Love  is— 157,  158. 

"  "  "      Love,  Spiritual  and  Creative— 237. 

"  "      Spirituality    gained    from— 138,    237. 

"      Sun  Gives  Forth— 49. 
"      User  of,  Can  Do  Anything— 238. 
"  "  "      Wisdom  Is— 237. 

Yoga,  Mental  and  Physical — 144. 
Youth  Restored  Consciously— 119. 
Zanoni,  Seeker  After  Knowledge— 169. 
Zodiacal  Lights,  Cosmic  Forces— 225. 
Zones  on  Subjective  Side  of  Life— no,  in,  174,  175- 


From  Incarnation  to  Re-incarnation 

By  RICHARD  INGALESE  and  ISABELLA  INGALESE 

Is  an  advanced  course  of  lectures  on  Occult  Philosophy  and  the 
Science  of  Mind.  These  teachings  describe  both  the  construction 
of  the  Universe  and  the  method  of  man's  physical,  mental  and 
spiritual  evolution.  The  nature  of  each  lecture  is  partially  indi- 
cated by  its  title  and  by  the  sub-heads  it  contains.  The  table  of 
contents  is  as  follows : 


1.  THE  RELATION  OF  SEX.— The  Positive  and  Negative  aspects  of 

the  Universal  Principle— Attraction  and  Repulsion  in  Lower  Forms 
of  Life -Sex  in  Organized  Life— The  Law  of  Sex  Relation— The 
Result  of  the  Abuses  of  the  Law. 

2.  MARRIAGE.— Prostitution— Celibacy— Chastity    Sacramental  Un- 

ion and  its  esoteric  basis — Contractual  Union  — Rights  and  Obliga- 
tions of  each  party  to  the  Union— Result  of  Marital  Relations  upon 
Individuals  and  upon  Races. 

3.  PARENTHOOD.- Attraction  of  Incarnating  Ego  to  Parents— Con- 

ception—Building  the  Body — Heredity — The  Incarnation  of  the 
Ego  -Real  and  Mistaken  Duties  of  Parents— "Race  Suicide"  versus 
Parental  Slavery. 

4.  PHYSICAL  AND  PSYCHIC  DEVELOPMENT.— "A  Sound  Mind  in 

a  Sound  Body"  -Exercise— Breathing  and  Yoga— Imprudent  Psy- 
chic Development — The  Inner  Senses— Mistaken  Ideas  Concerning 
Spirituality. 

5  MENTAL  AND  SPIRITUAL  DEVELOPMENT.— The  Nature  of 
Mind— Will  and  Desire— Development  of  the  Objective  Mind— Of 
the  Subjective  Mind— Misconceptions  and  Limitations  of  "Spiritual 
Growth5'— Ethics— Morality— Conscience— How  to  Develop  Clair- 
voyance or  Seership. 

6.  FOCUSING  FORCES.— Generation  of  Power-Its  Use  and  Misuse- 

Aids  to  Mental  Creation— Exercises  in  Concentration. 

7.  MENTAL  REPULSION.-Vibration -Friends  and  Enemies-Har- 

mony and  Disharmony —Pessimism — Causes  of  Failure  in  Demon- 
strating-Retrogression -Destruction. 

8.  MENTAL  ATTRACTION.— Vibration-The  Subjective  Mind-Op- 

timism—Progression — The  Law  of  Success — Evolution 

9.  DEATH.— Transition— Physical    Immortality— Process   of  Death- 

Cremation— "Second  Death"— Mourning  for  the  Dead. 
10.    AFTER  DEATH.— Purgatory-Hell-Heavens   or   Homes   of    the 
Soul— Post  Mortem  Occupations  and  Recreations. 

Cloth,  326  pp.  including  an  index,  price  $2.00  post  paid. 


THE  OCCULT  BOOK  CONCERN 

Publishers 
9-15  Murray  Street,  New  York 


LINKED    LIVES 

A   Tale  of  Yesterday  and  To-day 
By  ISABELLA   INGALESE 


THIS  is  a  story  of  the  Law  of  Justice.    It  is  a  graphic  pre- 
sentation of  the  truth  expressed  by  Saint  Paul  when  he 
wrote:  "Be  not  deceived;  God  is  not  mocked;    for  what- 
soever a  man  soweth,  that  shall  he  also  reap." 

The  necessity  of  a  book  of  this  kind  is  shown  by  the  disbe- 
lief of  many  persons  in  the  Law  of  Compensation,  which  is 
partially  reflected  in  the  following  conflicting  press  reviews  of 
the  work. 


"Linked  Lives"  is  a  really  fasci- 
nating story ;  it  is  written  in  ex- 
cellent modern  style  and  deals 
with  powerful  issues  in  a  powerful 
way. — Boston  Ideas. 


The  note  the  author  strikes  is 
that  of  the  evolution  of  the  indi- 
vidual soul.  The  story  is  well 
told.—  New  York  Ethical  Record. 

From  its  pages  we  may  learn 
how  much  happier  our  develop- 
ment would  progress  if  we  had 
faith  in  the  inner  guidance. 

— Boston  Occult  Review. 


The  story  is  filled  with  dramatic 
incidents.  Its  characters  are  true 
to  \\te.-Christian  Herald. 


This  is  a  story  of  modern  life  as 
it  is  not,  with  a  touch  of  the  ghost- 
ly super  added.  *  *  It  seems  rather 
unfair  and  unnecessary. 

— New  York  Times. 


This  is  a  story  constructed  for  the 
sole  purpose  of  elaborating  a 
theory.  —Saint  Paul  Pioneer  Press. 


The  narrative  is  founded  entirely 
on  the  doctrines  expressed  by 
those  who  profess  faith  in  Occult 
Sciences.—  Chicago  Tribune. 


An  impossible  story. 

— Los  Angeles  Herald. 


Cloth  in  Green  and  Gold,  235  pp.  Price,  $1.50  post  paid 


THE  OCCULT  BOOK  CONCERN 

Publishers 
9-15  Murray  Street,  New  York 


MATA  THE   MAGICIAN 

By  ISABELLA  INGALESE 

Is  not  an  ordinary  or  conventional  novel.     It  is  written  for  the 

purpose  of  bringing  lovers  of  fiction  into  an  entirely 

new  line  of  thought. 

'T^HIS  is  an  era  of  spiritual  and  intellectual  progress  and  tremendous 

J.      development  of  the  human  mind.     All  thinking  men  and  women 

are  beginning  earnestly  to  desire  a  wider  knowledge  of  the  powers 

and  possibilities  latent  within  them,  and  this  book  is  calculated  to  throw 

much  light  on  the  problem  of  individual  growth. 

The  story  explains  the  operation  of  the  vibratory  law  underlying  all 
phenomena,  and  while  it  instructs  it  also  entertains  its  readers  with 
many  strange  and  ludicrous  characters  and  situations. 

The  author,  Isabella  Ingalese,  has  had  exceptional  opportunities  to 
study  Occultism,  having  been  a  pupil  of  both  Eastern  and  Western 
teachers  of  the  mystic  sciences.  In  this  story  she  describes  phenomena 
that  she  has  witnessed,  and  then  explains  them  so  lucidly  and  scientifi- 
cally as  to  rob  them  of  the  characterization  "occult"  or  ''supernatural." 
She  gives  the  key  with  which  to  unlock  many  of  the  ancient  mysteries 
and  points  out  the  path  to  greater  wisdom. 

The  pure  and  lofty  character  of  the  heroine — though  ideal — is  so 
natural  as  to  stimulate  emulation  and  raise  womanhood  to  a  higher  plane. 

The  story  is  written  in  plain,  choice  English.  It  is  devoid  of  all  met- 
aphysical, occult,  and  Oriental  terms  and  abstractions,  and  is  of  absorb- 
ing interest  throughout.  "MATA  THE  MAGICIAN"  marks  a  new  era  in 
romantic  literature. 

Following  is  a  list  of  the  chapters  : 
1.    A  New  Patient.  16.    The  Theater. 

8.    Magician  or  Lunatic  ?  17.    The  Woman's  Dress  Reform. 

3.  A  Contract  of  Marriage.  18.    Passing  Away. 

4.  Dust  to  Dust.  19.    Little  Mata. 

5.  A  Lying  Cannibal.  30.    Clairvoyance. 

6.  Mrs.  Smythe.  21.    The  Music  Teacher. 

7.  Sealed  Instructions.  22.    The  Thirtieth  of  November. 

8.  At  Death's  Door.  23.    The  Governess. 

9.  The  Magic  Fluid.  24.    The  Plague. 

10.  My  Mother.  25.    Occult  Philosophy. 

11.  The  Hon.  John  Brunt,  Attorney-  26.    On  the  Defensive. 

at-Layr.  27.    Angel  or  Demon  ? 

12.  The  Smythes' Last  Appeal.          28.    "The  Devil." 

18.    The  Mysterious  Stranger.  29.    The  Railway  Accident. 

14.  Mata.  30.    Conchision. 

15.  Our  "At  Home" 

Cloth,  12mo,  Daintily  Produced,  $1.50  post  paid 

THE  OCCULT  BOOK  CONCERN 

Publishers 
9-15  Murray  Street,  New  York 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


MAY  28  1948 


2QJan'50J  R 
UMar'SOBG 


OEC    21953LU 
4      30ct'55GB 


JAN  1 6'  1957 
6»Sar'57LS 


'  ,;-  * 

2Dec'57JZ 
REC'D  L,D 


JAN  1  5  '.-  :: 


I 


LD21-100m-9'47(A5702sl6)476 


REC'D 

J^3.    1962 

RECEIVED  BY 

APR  251981 

CIRCULATION  DE«>T. 


YC  31964 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


